advertisement
![Yamaha QL5/QL1 V5.8 Reference Manual [English] | Manualzz](http://s1.manualzz.com/store/data/068898099_1-adb409b89ef4df5f0c71fe51a144cf0e-360x466.png "Yamaha QL5/QL1 V5.8 Reference Manual [English] | Manualzz")
V5.8 Reference Manual
How to Use This Reference Manual
The QL5/QL1 V5.8 Reference Manual (this document) allows you to search for terms and take advantage of links in the text.
Searching for terms
To search for a term, use the search function of the software you’re using to view this document.
If you’re using Adobe Reader, enter the term in the search box and press the <Enter> key of your computer keyboard to search for occurrences of that term.
Displaying the next/previous view
If you’re using Adobe Reader, you can jump to the previous/next view in your viewing history. This is a convenient way to jump back to the previous page after you’ve used a link to jump to a different page.
Using the Function Tree
A function tree for the QL series is provided on page 4 and
following. You can use this function tree to find the page that explains an on-screen display or function.
EN
Contents
Function Tree ............................................................................ 4
SELECTED CHANNEL section ...................................................... 6
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section ....................................................... 6
Channel Strip section.............................................................. 12
Input and output patching..................................................... 16
Input channels ........................................................................ 25
Specifying the channel name, icon, and channel color........................................... 26
Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus ................... 34
Added pan function (Monaural input channels only) ............................................. 36
Sending a signal from an input channel to a MIX/MATRIX bus .............................. 38
OUTPUT channels .................................................................... 50
Specifying the channel name, icon, and channel color........................................... 51
Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus ............................. 52
Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to
Correcting delay between channels (Output Delay) ............................................... 56
EQ and Dynamics .................................................................... 59
2
Contents
Channel Job ............................................................................. 67
Scene memory ......................................................................... 85
Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall
Playing back an audio file that links to a scene recall.............................................
100
102
Monitor and Cue functions ...................................................
103
104
110
Talkback and Oscillator.........................................................
118
118
120
Meters....................................................................................
123
123
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack.......
129
129
130
133
140
143
149
151
Using the graphic EQ, parametric EQ, effect, and Premium Rack libraries .............
162
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps ....................................
163
163
166
Third-party equipment’s HA control function.......................................................
170
172
175
180
Remotely controlling an external head amp.........................................................
182
184
MIDI.......................................................................................
185
185
185
Using program changes to recall scenes and library items....................................
188
Using control changes to control parameters .......................................................
190
Using parameter changes to control parameters ..................................................
192
Recorder................................................................................
193
193
Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder .......................................
193
195
197
198
Recording or playing back using a computer DAW ..............................................
199
Using the QL console with Nuendo Live ..............................................................
202
AFC IMAGE Control ...............................................................
206
206
NETWORK window (AFC IMAGE page) ................................................................
206
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen .......................................................................
207
AFC IMAGE CONTROL zoom up screen (1ch)......................................................
207
AFC IMAGE CONTROL zoom up screen (CH 1-32, CH 33-64)..............................
208
208
Setup .....................................................................................
209
209
212
219
221
Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED keys ........................................
222
227
Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED knobs ....................................
228
229
231
3
Contents
Saving and loading setup data to and from a USB flash drive................................
232
239
239
241
Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses ....................................................
245
Switching the entire phantom power supply on/off..............................................
246
246
247
247
249
251
252
263
Help function.........................................................................
268
268
268
Using USER DEFINED keys to recall Help directly...................................................
269
Other functions .....................................................................
270
270
Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen (Calibration function) ..............
270
271
Fine-tuning the input and output gain (Calibration function) ...............................
271
273
Adjusting the brightness of the channel name display ..........................................
273
Adjusting the contrast of the channel name display ..............................................
274
274
Update procedure for NAME SUB CPU firmware...................................................
274
275
Warning/Error Messages ......................................................
276
Index......................................................................................
279
V5.8 Reference Manual
Function Tree
Page numbers in parentheses ( ) are the page numbers of the
Owner’s Manual (booklet).
Main
SELECTED CHANNEL
OVERVIEW
FUNCTION ACCESS AREA
(17)
MIX SEND/MATRIX SEND
TO STEREO/MONO
8ch
CH1–32
CH33–64/ST IN
OUTPUT
SURROUND
CHANNEL PARAMETER
PATCH/NAME
GAIN/PATCH
1ch
8ch
CH1–32
CH33–64/ST IN
OUTPUT
INPUT DELAY
8ch
CH1–32
CH33–64/ST IN
DELAY SCALE
INSERT/DIRECT OUT
1ch
8ch
HPF/EQ
1ch
8ch
CH1–32
CH33–64/ST IN
OUTPUT
DYNAMICS
1ch
8ch
KEY IN SOURCE SELECT
CH1–32
CH33–64/ST IN
OUTPUT
Indication only
LIBRARY
CHANNEL LIBRARY
EQ LIBRARY
DYNAMICS LIBRARY
GEQ/PEQ LIBRARY
EFFECT LIBRARY
Portico5033/Portico5043/Portico5045/U76/
Opt-2A/EQ-1A/DynamicEQ/Buss Comp 369/
MBC4 LIBRARY
DANTE INPUT PATCH LIBRARY
RACK
VIRTUAL RACK
RACK MOUNTER
GEQ EDIT
GEQ LINK
EFFECT RACK
EFFECT EDIT
EFFECT TYPE
PREMIUM RACK
PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER
PREMIUM RACK EDIT
AUTOMIXER
PARAMETRIC EQ
I/O DEVICE
DANTE PATCH
DANTE SETUP
DANTE INPUT PATCH
4
DANTE OUTPUT PATCH
I/O
REMOTE HA EDIT
DANTE OUTPUT PATCH
AMP
DANTE OUTPUT PATCH
WIRELESS
EXTERNAL HA
EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT
EXTERNAL HA EDIT
INTERNAL HA
MONITOR
MONITOR
CUE
MONITOR
OSCILLATOR
TALKBACK
METER
INPUT METER
OUTPUT METER
RTA METER
SETUP
USER SETUP
PREFERENCE
USER DEFINED KEYS SETUP
USER DEFINED KEY SETUP (List)
USER DEFINED KNOBS SETUP
USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP (List)
CUSTOM FADER BANK/MAIN FADER
FADER ASSIGN SELECT
USER LEVEL/CREATE USER KEY
CREATE KEY
SAVE KEY
LOGIN
V5.8 Reference Manual
Function Tree
Function Tree
SETUP
SAVE/LOAD
WORD CLOCK/SLOT
CASCADE IN/OUT PATCH
OUTPUT PORT
MIDI/GPI
MIDI SETUP
PROGRAM CHANGE
CONTROL CHANGE
GPI
FADER START
BUS SETUP
SURROUND SETUP
CONSOLE LOCK
DATE/TIME
NETWORK
DANTE SETUP
SCENE
SCENE LIST
GLOBAL PASTE
FADE TIME
SONG SELECT
FOCUS RECALL
PREVIEW
RECORDER
USB
NUENDO LIVE
CH JOB
CH LINK MODE
DCA GROUP ASSIGN
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
RECALL SAFE MODE
CH COPY MODE
CH MOVE MODE
CH DEFAULT MODE
PATCH
PORT SELECT
CH SELECT
Others
CONFIRMATION
SOFT KEYBOARD
LOGIN
Startup Menu
MODE SELECT
INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES
INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES
TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION
INPUT PORT TRIM
OUTPUT PORT TRIM
SLOT OUTPUT TRIM
FADER CALIBRATION
LED COLOR CALIBRATION
NOTE
,
,
(23)
• The explanations in this reference manual will use the QL5.
• In the case of the QL1, some screens will not show channels and faders that do not exist on those models.
5
V5.8 Reference Manual
SELECTED CHANNEL section
The SELECTED CHANNEL section located at the right of the display corresponds to a channel module of a conventional analog mixer, and allows you to use the knobs on the panel to set all the major parameters of the currently-selected channel.
Operations in this section will affect the channel that was most recently selected by its [SEL] key. If you have assigned an ST IN channel or STEREO channel to a single channel strip, either the L or the R channel will be selected, and the major parameters for L and R channels will be linked.
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
Follow the steps below to perform operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
STEP
1.
Press the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section to select the bank that includes the channel you want to operate.
2.
Use a [SEL] key in the top panel channel strip section or the Main section, to select the channel to control.
3.
If the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is not displayed, press one of the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
4.
Use the knobs and the buttons in the screen to edit the parameters of the selected channel.
NOTE
• The number and name of the currently-selected channel is shown in the channel select field located in the Function Access Area of the touch screen.
• If an ST IN channel or STEREO channel has been assigned to a single channel strip, you can switch between L and R by repeatedly pressing the same
[SEL] key.
Channel number
Channel name
• You can also switch channels by pressing the channel select field located in the Function Access
Area. Press the left side of the field to select the preceding channel. Press the right side of the field to select the next channel.
• If you have turned on the option “POPUP APPEARS WHEN KNOB(S) PRESSED” on the
PREFERENCE tab (accessed by pressing the SETUP button, then the USER SETUP button), pressing a knob repeatedly will open or close the screen (1ch).
• Even if a different screen is selected, the channel selected with the
[SEL] key can be set using the knobs of the SELECTED CHANNEL section. In this case, a window indicating the value of that parameter will appear on screen when you operate a knob.
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
SEND field
In this field, you can view the send level and pre/post from the channel to each MIX/MATRIX bus. You can also switch the on/off status of the send signals. The view and the function of the knobs and buttons in the SEND field vary depending on whether a pair of bus channels
(odd-numbered and even-numbered) are comprised of two mono channels or a stereo channel.
1
Tabs
Enable you to select a group of 16 output bus channels to be displayed in the SEND field.
• MIX tab .................................. displays MIX buses 1–16.
• MATRIX tab ........................... displays MATRIX buses 1–8.
SELECTED CHANNEL section
1
6
V5.8 Reference Manual
If the destination bus channels are two mono channels:
2
3
1
1 SEND knob
Adjusts the send level to the corresponding bus.
2 PRE indicator
Indicates the send point of the corresponding bus. If the PRE button on the MIX SEND
8ch screen is turned ON, this PRE indicator will be turned on.
3
ON button
Switches the send signal to the corresponding bus on or off.
If the destination bus is a stereo channel:
1
2
3
1
SEND/PAN knob
The right-hand knob adjusts the level of the signal sent to a pair of bus channels (evennumbered and odd-numbered). The left-hand knob adjusts the pan and balance of the same signal.
2
PRE indicator
Indicates the send point of the corresponding bus. If the PRE button on the MIX SEND
8ch screen is turned ON, this PRE indicator will be turned on.
3 ON button
Switches the send signal to the two buses on or off.
NOTE
• If the indices of a SEND/PAN knob are white, the send point is assigned as PRE; if the indices are black, it is assigned as POST.
• If the send point is PRE, you can specify the PRE point as either VARI [PRE EQ] or VARI [PRE
FADER] in the BUS SETUP popup that appears when you press the SETUP button BUS
SETUP button.
• If the type of the destination bus is set to FIXED, controllers
1
–
2
mentioned above will not be displayed. The send level will be fixed at nominal level, and the send point will be fixed at POST
FADER. For details, see “
Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses ” on page 245
.
• Press the SEND knob or PAN knob on screen to open the SEND 8ch window.
SELECTED CHANNEL section
When using CUE B
Indicates that channels 7 and 8 on the MATRIX bus are combined with CUE B.
NOTE
For details about how to use CUE B, see the
CUE screen (When configuring CUE B)
.
GAIN/PATCH field
This field enables you to make HA (head amp) analog or digital gain settings. You can also view the operational status of the head amp.
1 GAIN knob
Sets the analog gain/digital gain of the head amp.
Press the knob to open the GAIN/PATCH 1ch window.
2 GC indicator
Indicates the fixed gain value output to the audio network if the Gain Compensation function is turned on.
2
1
5 6
3
7 8
4
3 OVER indicator
Warns you when the signal is clipping.
4
Ø (Phase) indicator
Indicates the status of the phase setting.
5 +48V indicator
Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on or off status for the head amp.
6
HPF ON indicator
Indicates the HPF on/off status of the external head amp.
7 AG-DG LINK indicator
Indicates a link between the analog gain and digital gain of the head amp.
8
Digital/Analog gain value
If analog gain is assigned to the GAIN knob, the digital gain value is shown here. If digital gain is assigned to the GAIN knob, the analog gain value is shown here.
NOTE
• For an input channel that is patched to an input that has no head amp,
1
,
2
,
5
,
6
, and
7 will not be shown. For an output channel,
1
–
7
will not be shown.
• If GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is set to DIGITAL GAIN in the USER SETUP PREFERENCE screen, the digital gain knob will appear for
1
, and
2
,
5
,
6
, and
7
will not be shown. For details, refer to “
” on
7
V5.8 Reference Manual
If patched to a wireless mic (SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen)
1 RX.GAIN knob/TX.GAIN knob/TX.ATT knob
Sets the gain for the transmitter or receiver. Press the knob to open the GAIN/PATCH 1ch window.
The knob name will change depending on the connected device.
NOTE
When remote control connection is disabled for the connected device, a gray circle is displayed here instead of a knob, and the gain cannot be adjusted.
3
1 2
4 5 6
2
OL indicator
Lights if the audio signal level of the receiver reaches the overload point.
3 RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter
Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal.
An active antenna indicator is shown on the right side. It indicates which antenna is enabled.
NOTE
• The display will change depending on the device.
• For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength of the RF signal, refer to the manual from each developer.
4 Battery indicator
Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power.
NOTE
For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and maximum operation time, refer to the manual from Shure.
5 MUTE indicator
Indicates the mute status (on/off) of the audio signal for the receiver.
6 Frequency
Indicates the frequency that is currently set for the RF signal.
PAN/BALANCE field
This field enables you to switch the on/off status of the signal sent from the selected channel to the STEREO/MONO bus, and adjust the pan and balance.
The view and the function of the controllers in this field vary depending on the type of the selected channel.
SELECTED CHANNEL section
When an input channel or MIX channel is selected:
1 TO STEREO PAN knob
Sets the pan position of a signal routed to the
STEREO bus.
Press the knob to open the STEREO/MONO 8ch window. If the ST IN channel is selected, you can specify whether to view the PAN knob or the
BALANCE knob in this window. For a MIX channel, the PAN knob will appear if the signal is mono, and the BALANCE knob will appear if the signal is stereo.
1 2
NOTE
• For mono input channels, the pan level is nominal at center and +3dB when panned either left or right. These levels do not change even if channel link is used.
• For ST IN channels, if the PAN knob is selected, the pan level is nominal when panned either left or right and -3dB at center. If the BALANCE knob is selected the balance level is nominal at center and +3dB when panned either left or right. These levels do not change even if channel link is used.
2 ST/MONO button
Switches the on/off status of a signal sent from the channel to the STEREO/MONO bus.
If an INPUT/MIX channel is set to LCR mode, the
LCR button appears in location 2 . The LCR button is an overall on/off switch for the signals sent from the channel to the STEREO/MONO bus.
2
When a MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel is selected:
1 BALANCE knob
If the signal on the selected channel is stereo, the
BALANCE knob will appear, enabling you to adjust the volume balance for the left and right channels.
If the channel signal is monaural, the BALANCE knob is not shown and cannot be used.
Press the knob to open the TO STEREO 8ch window.
1
When using Surround mode (MIX1-MIX6)
3 DOWN MIX
This field enables you to view the downmix coefficient and L/R button settings.
Press this field to open the TO STEREO/MONO window.
3
8
V5.8 Reference Manual
INPUT DELAY field
This field enables you to view the delay settings. 1
1 ON indicator
Indicates the on/off status of the delay.
2
2
Delay time
The delay value is displayed by milliseconds (ms) and also by currently-selected scale. If the scale uses units of ms, the value in the bottom row will not be displayed. Only the ms value appears in the middle row.
Press this field to open the INPUT DELAY 8ch window.
HPF field (input channels only)
This field enables you to set the HPF. If an output channel is selected, a gray circle will appear in location 1 , and 2 will not be displayed.
1
1 HPF knob
Sets the HPF cutoff frequency.
2
ON button
Switches the HPF on or off.
2
EQ parameter field
This field displays the 4-band EQ parameter settings. Press each knob to open the HPF/EQ 1ch window.
1
Q knob
Specifies the Q for each band.
If the HIGH band filter type is set to LPF or H. SHELF (highshelving), or the LOW band filter type is set to L. SHELF
(low-shelving), the Q knob will not be displayed. Only the filter type name will be displayed.
NOTE
• Fully rotating the HIGH band Q knob on the panel counterclockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to LPF. Fully rotating the Q knob clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to high-shelving.
• Fully rotating the LOW band Q knob on the panel clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to lowshelving.
1 2 3
• If an output channel has been selected, fully rotating the LOW band Q knob on the panel counter-clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to HPF.
• You can also switch the filter type in the HPF/EQ 1ch window.
2 FREQUENCY knob
Sets the center frequency (or cutoff frequency) for each band.
SELECTED CHANNEL section
3 GAIN knob
Sets the amount of cut/boost for each band.
NOTE
• If the HIGH band filter type is set to LPF, you can switch LPF on or off using the HIGH band GAIN knob on the panel.
• If the LOW band filter type is set to HPF, you can switch HPF on or off using the LOW band GAIN knob on the panel.
NOTE
When the BYPASS button is on, the knobs turn gray.
EQ graph field
This field graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ. Press this field to open the HPF/EQ 1ch window, in which you can set the attenuator, HPF, and EQ.
DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 field
This field enables you to set the Dynamics 1/2 parameters.
1 2
3
4
1
OVER indicator
Warns you when the signal is clipping.
2 Level meter
Displays the output signal level (green) and the amount of gain reduction (orange) when the Dynamics is on. The current threshold setting is shown as a white vertical line.
3
Threshold
Specifies the threshold.
9
V5.8 Reference Manual
4 Parameters
Indicate the values of parameters that vary depending on the currently-selected dynamics type.
Press this field to open the DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 1ch window, in which you can make detailed parameter settings.
INSERT field
This field enables you to make insert settings.
1 Popup button
Press this button to open the INSERT/DIRECT OUT 1ch window.
2 ON button
Switches the insert on or off.
3 4
1
2
3
RACK EDIT button
Appears if an effect or Premium Rack is inserted. Press this button to display the edit screen for the inserted rack.
4 IN indicator
Appears if a port has been assigned to the insert-in patch. It lights when the signal is sent to the insert-in.
DIRECT OUT field
This field enables you to make Direct Out settings.
1 Popup button
Press this button to open the INSERT/DIRECT OUT 1ch window. The Direct Out level value will appear below the button.
2 ON button
Switches the Direct Out on or off.
1 2
RECALL SAFE field
This field enables you to make Recall Safe settings.
1 Popup button
Press this button to open the RECALL SAFE window.
2
ON button
Switches the Recall Safe status on or off.
1
3
2
3 PARTIAL indicator
This will light if recall safe applies only to some of the parameters, not to all channel settings.
SELECTED CHANNEL section
FADER field
This field enables you to make settings for the channel on/off status and the level.
1 Fader
Displays the current level.
Use the faders on the top panel to set the levels.
2 Level indicator
Displays the current level setting by numerical value. If the signal is clipping at any point in the channel, the
Σ
CLIP indicator will light.
3 ON button
Switches the channel on or off. The button is linked with the corresponding [ON] key on the top panel.
4 CUE SETTINGS button
Use this button to open the CUE SETTINGS screen.
1
4
When two channels are used for CUE, and CUE
OPERATION MODE is set to CH
DCA/MUTE field
This field enables you to select the DCA or mute group to which the channel is assigned.
1
Tabs
Select a DCA or mute group. Press the selected tab once again to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window.
When the DCA group tab is selected:
2 DCA group select buttons
Select the DCA group to which the channel is assigned.
3 Mute group indicators
Indicate the mute group to which the channel is assigned.
2
3
10
V5.8 Reference Manual
When the mute group tab is selected:
4 Mute group select buttons
Select the mute group to which the channel is assigned.
NOTE
If the dimmer level is set to the mute group, this button lights orange.
5 MUTE SAFE button
Temporarily removes the channel from the mute group.
6
DCA group indicators
Indicate the DCA group to which the channel is assigned.
6
5
4
SELECTED CHANNEL section
11
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Strip section
The Channel Strip section located below the touch screen lets you recall and control input channels, output channels, or DCA groups. If you press the Bank Select key in the Fader Bank section, you can control them using the faders, [ON] keys, and [CUE] keys for the channels or DCA groups corresponding to that key.
Operations in the Channel Strip section
STEP
1.
Use the Bank Select keys to select the channels or DCA groups that you want to control.
2.
Use the faders and [ON] keys in the Channel Strip section to adjust the level of the selected channels and switch them on or off.
3.
Use the fields on the OVERVIEW screen and the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the parameters for the channels.
Bank Select keys
Channel Strip section
OVERVIEW screen
NOTE
The OVERVIEW screen appears when you press a
USER DEFINED key to which
OVERVIEW is assigned.
Channel Strip section
CHANNEL NAME field
This field appears at the top and bottom of the screen and displays the channel number, name, and icon for the currently-selected eight channels. The name of the currently-selected channel is highlighted.
: Selected channel
: Unselected channel
GAIN/PATCH field
This field enables you to make HA (head amp) analog or digital gain settings. You can also view the operational status of the head amp.
The view and the function of the controllers in this field vary depending on the type of the selected channel.
If the head amp is patched:
1
2
3
4
1 GAIN knob
Sets the analog gain of the head amp.
• Press this field to assign the GAIN knob to the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob, which enables you to adjust the gain. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator appears, showing the level of the signal output to the audio network.
• If the GAIN knob has been assigned to the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob, press the knob to open the GAIN/PATCH 8ch window.
2 OVER indicator
Lights when a signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level.
This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected.
3
+48V indicator
Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on or off status for the head amp. This indicator is not displayed unless the head amp is patched to the channel.
4 Ø (Phase) indicator (input channels only)
Indicates the input phase setting for the head amp.
NOTE
• If the slot is not connected to the head amp, the patch and the type of the MY card will be displayed.
• Press the SETUP button, then the USER SETUP button, select the PREFERENCE tab, and then set the GAIN KNOB FUNCTION to DIGITAL GAIN. You will be able to adjust the digital gain value by using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
12
V5.8 Reference Manual
• If GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is set to DIGITAL GAIN, the DIGITAL GAIN knob will appear instead of knob
1
, and indicator
3
will not be displayed.
• You can also operate the digital gain by assigning INPUT GAIN DIGITAL GAIN to a USER
DEFINED knob, or by assigning an ALTERNATE function to a USER DEFINED key and then adjusting the USER DEFINED knob or the GAIN knob for the selected channel while
ALTERNATE is on.
If patched to a wireless mic (OVERVIEW screen)
1 2
3 4 5
1 RX.GAIN knob/TX.GAIN knob/TX.ATT knob
Sets the gain for the transmitter or receiver.
• Press this field to assign the GAIN knob to the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob, which enables you to adjust the gain. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator appears, showing the level of the signal output to the audio network.
• If the GAIN knob has been assigned to the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob, press the knob to open the GAIN/PATCH 8ch window.
• The name of knob will change depending on the connected device.
NOTE
When remote control connection is disabled for the connected device, a gray circle is displayed here instead of a knob, and the gain cannot be adjusted.
2 RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter
Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal.
An active antenna indicator is shown on the right side. It indicates which antenna is enabled.
NOTE
• The display will change depending on the device.
• For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength of the RF signal, refer to the manual from each developer.
3
Battery indicator
Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power.
NOTE
For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and maximum operation time, refer to the manual from each developer.
4
OL indicator
Lights if the audio signal level of the receiver reaches the overload point.
NOTE
If the audio signal for the receiver is muted,
5
is displayed.
5 MUTE indicator
Displayed only if the audio signal for the receiver is muted.
NOTE
If the audio signal for the receiver is not muted,
4
is displayed.
If the slot is patched:
The slot name will appear.
If the rack is connected:
The patch and module name will appear.
If the output is connected:
Only the patch will appear.
1
Channel Strip section
INPUT DELAY field (input channels only)
This field displays the delay status for the input channel. Press this field to open the INPUT
DELAY 8ch window.
1
DELAY ON/OFF indicator
Indicates the on/off status of the delay.
INSERT/DIRECT OUT field
This field displays the Insert/Direct out status. Press this field to open the INSERT 8ch window.
1
2
1 INSERT ON/OFF indicator
Indicates the insert on/off status.
2
DIRECT OUT ON/OFF indicator (input channels only)
Indicates the Direct Out on/off status.
13
V5.8 Reference Manual
EQ field
This field graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ. Press this field to open the HPF/EQ 1ch window, in which you can set the HPF and EQ.
NOTE
If DCA or monitor has been selected, this field will be blank.
DYNAMICS 1/2 field
This field displays the threshold value and meter for Dynamics
1/2. Press this field to open the DYNAMICS 1/2 1ch window.
NOTE
If DCA or monitor has been selected, this field will be blank.
SEND field
This field displays the send level, send on/off status, and pre/post settings for 16 buses.
To select the 16 destination buses, use the [MIX/MATRIX] key in the
Fader Bank section.
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the send level for each bus.
Touch the knob of the bus you want to operate; it will be assigned to the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob. If it is assigned to the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob, touching that knob once again will display the SEND 8ch popup screen.
This field varies depending on the type of the destination bus.
If the destination bus is VARI (mono):
The knob color and scale color indicate the send on/off and pre/post status. If the send is off, the knob color turns gray. With the post setting, the knob scale color turns gray.
Channel Strip section
If the destination bus is VARI (stereo):
If a pair of buses (odd-numbered and even-numbered) are in stereo, the left-hand knob will function as the PAN knob, and the right-hand knob will function as the SEND knob.
If the destination bus is set to FIXED:
The SEND ON/OFF button for each bus is shown instead of the knob.
14
TO STEREO/MONO field
This field displays the on/off status and pan/balance setting of the signal sent to the STEREO/
MONO bus.
This field varies depending on the type of the selected channel.
When an input channel or MIX channel is selected:
1
2
1 TO STEREO PAN knob
Sets the pan position of a signal routed to the STEREO bus.
Press the knob to open the STEREO/MONO 8ch window. If the ST IN channel is selected, you can specify whether to view the PAN knob or the BALANCE knob in this window.
For a MIX channel, the PAN knob will appear if the signal is mono, and the BALANCE knob will appear if the signal is stereo.
2 ST/MONO indicator
Indicates the status of a signal sent to the STEREO/MONO bus.
If an input or MIX channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator will be displayed.
2
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Strip section
When a MATRIX channel (monaural) or MONO channel is selected:
The
Σ
CLIP indicator will light if the signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
For a stereo MATRIX channel or STEREO channel, the BALANCE knob appears, indicating the balance of the left/right channels.
DCA group field
A DCA group (1–16) to which the channel is assigned is displayed on the first or second row in this field.
Press this field to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window.
Mute group field
A mute group (1–8) to which the channel is assigned is displayed on the third row in this field.
If the channel has been temporarily removed from the mute group, S (Safe) will appear on the third row. If a dimmer level has been specified for a mute group, the color of the characters will change from red to orange.
Press this field to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window.
15
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input and output patching
This chapter explains how to edit the input patching and output patching, how to connect inserts, and how to use direct outputs.
When the QL series is in the initial state, the following input ports (jacks/ports) are patched to each input channel.
For QL5
CH1–32
CH33–48
CH49–64
ST IN1L-4R
Input channels
For QL1
Input port (jack/port)
INPUT1–32
DANTE1–16
DANTE17–32
FX5L(A)–FX8R(B)
CH1–16
CH17–32
ST IN1L-4R
Input channels Input port (jack/port)
INPUT1–16
DANTE1–16
FX5L(A)–FX8R(B)
When the QL is in the initial state, the output ports (jacks/ports) are patched to the following output channels.
Output port (jack/port)
OMNI OUT1–14
*1
OMNI OUT15–16
*3
DANTE1–16
DANTE17–24
DANTE25–26
DANTE27
DANTE28–29
DANTE30
DANTE31–32
SLOT1(1)–(16)
SLOT2(1)–(8)
SLOT2(9)–(10)
SLOT2(11)
SLOT2(12)–(13)
SLOT2(14)
MIX1–14
*2
STEREO L/R
MIX1–16
MATRIX1–8
STEREO L/R
MONO
MONITOR L/R
MONITOR C
CUE L/R
MIX1–16
MATRIX1–8
STEREO L/R
MONO
MONITOR L/R
MONITOR C
Output channels
16
Input and output patching
Output port (jack/port)
SLOT2(15)–(16) CUE L/R
FX5L(A), FX6L(A), FX7L(A), FX8L(A) MIX13–16
STEREO L/R DIGITAL OUT L/R
RECORDER INPUT L/R
*1. QL1: OMNI OUT1–6
*2. QL1: MIX1–6
*3. QL1: OMNI OUT7–8
STEREO L/R
Output channels
Input patching
QL series consoles and I/O devices feature two types of patching: Dante audio network patching and QL console internal patching.
For Dante audio network patching, you will use the DANTE INPUT PATCH window. In this window, you can patch the QL console and I/O device inputs. Sixty-four (64) channels for the
QL5 and thirty-two (32) channels for the QL1 can be input from a DANTE audio network.
Choose channels from Dante audio network signals and select the I/O devices that you want to control from the QL series console.
Then, route the input signals (that were patched in the DANTE INPUT PATCH window) to channels on the QL series console. To do this, choose input ports from DANTE 1–64 (for QL5) or DANTE1–32 (for QL1) in the GAIN/PATCH window.
Output patching
Use the OUTPUT PORT window to patch QL console’s output channels and Dante audio network. In this window, assign output channel signals to DANTE 1–64 ports (for QL5) or
DANTE 1–32 ports (for QL1).
Next, patch the output signals from DANTE 1–64 (for QL5) or DANTE 1–32 (for QL1)
(assigned in the OUTPUT PORT window) to I/O device outputs. Use the OUTPUT PATCH window of the I/O DEVICE to make these assignments.
QL console internal patching and Dante audio network patching
The following diagram shows the signal flow through the QL series console, I/O devices, and
Dante audio network.
I/O Device
ID #3
Dante-MY16-AUD
Dante Network
SW
I/O device
ID #1
I/O device
ID #2
Dante patching
ANALOG INPUT
32: QL5
16: QL1
MY
16
MY
16
QL series console
INPUT PATCH
“Dante” (ports)
64: QL5
32: QL1
QL series internal patching
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input and output patching
Changing the input patch settings
STEP
1.
Press the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section and the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select the input channel you want to operate.
2.
Press the channel number/channel name field on the OVERVIEW screen.
3.
Select the type of port in the category select list on the PATCH/NAME screen, and use the port select buttons to select the input port.
PATCH/NAME screen
2 3
1
5
7
4
OVERVIEW screen PATCH/NAME screen
NOTE
• You can also select an input port from the GAIN/PATCH window.
• The OVERVIEW screen appears when you press a USER DEFINED key to which OVERVIEW is assigned.
17
6
1 PATCH button
Indicates the currently-selected input port. If you press this button when selecting an icon or changing the channel name, you will return to the input port select screen.
2 Channel icon button
Indicates the icon that is selected for the corresponding channel. When you press this button, a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or sample name.
3
Channel name input box
Indicates the name that is assigned to the corresponding channel. When you press this field, a keyboard window allowing you to change the channel name will appear.
4
Category select list
Selects the category of input port. The categories correspond to the following input ports. The displayed categories vary depending on the channel type.
• DANTE1–32 .......... DANTE1–DANTE32
• DANTE33–64 ........ DANTE33–DANTE64 (QL5 only)
• INPUT/PB OUT ..... INPUT1–32
*1
, PB OUT(L), PB OUT(R)
• SLOT1 ................... SLOT1(1)–SLOT1(16)
• SLOT2 ................... SLOT2(1)–SLOT2(16)
• EFFECT RACK ..... FX1L(A)–FX8R(B)
• PREMIUM RACK .. PR1L(A)–PR2R(B)
*1. QL1: INPUT1–16
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input and output patching
5 Port select buttons
Select the input port that is assigned to the currently-selected channel.
6 Tabs
Enable you to switch between items.
7 Close button
Closes the screen.
Changing the output patch settings
To change the patching, you can either select the output port that will be the output destination of each output channel, or you can select the output channel that will be the output source for each output port.
Selecting the output port for each output channel
STEP
1.
Press the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section and the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select an output channel.
2.
Press the channel number/channel name field on the OVERVIEW screen.
3.
Select the type of port in the category select list on the PATCH/NAME screen, and use the port select buttons to select the output port.
OVERVIEW screen PATCH/NAME screen
NOTE
With QL V1.07 and later, when you change from input channels to output channels using the Bank
Select keys, the SEND field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen changes from the MIX tab to the MATRIX tab. Then, if you switch back to input channels, the MIX tab will appear.
PATCH/NAME screen
3 4 5
2
7
6
9
1
18
8
1 PATCH button
Indicates the port that is patched to the output channel. If you press this button when another tab is active, a window will appear, enabling you to select the network and port.
2
Channel select button
Selects the channel to set.
NOTE
Switching channels on this screen will not affect the channel selection on the console.
3 Channel icon button
Indicates the icon and color that are currently selected for the corresponding channel.
When you press this button, a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or sample name.
4 Channel number display box
Indicates the channel number. This item cannot be changed.
5 Channel name input box
Indicates the name that is assigned to the corresponding channel. When you press this field, a keyboard window allowing you to assign a name will appear.
6 Category select list
Select the type of port.
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input and output patching
7 Port select buttons
From the category, these buttons let you select the port to patch. To cancel the selection, press the button once again.
8 Tabs
Enable you to switch between items.
9
Close button
Closes the screen.
Selecting the output channel for each output port
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
Press the OUTPUT PORT button in the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of the SETUP screen.
3.
In the tabs below the OUTPUT PORT screen, select the output port you want to control.
4.
Press the channel select button of the port you want to operate.
5.
Use the category select list and the channel select buttons to select the send-source channel.
CH SELECT screen
1
SETUP screen OUTPUT PORT screen
NOTE
If PATCH CONFIRMATION in the PREFERENCE tab on the USER SETUP screen is ON, a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to change the patch settings. If STEAL
PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON, a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to change a location that is already patched elsewhere.
2
3
1 Category select list
Select the category of the channel. The categories correspond to the following channels.
They vary depending on the output port type.
• MIX/MATRIX ................................ MIX1–MIX16, MATRIX1–MATRIX8
• ST/MONO/MONI/CUE ................. STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO(C), MONI L,
MONI R, MONI C, CUE L, CUE R, SMON L, SMON
R, SMON C, SMON LFE, SMON Ls, SMON Rs,
MMTX L, MMTX R, MMTX C, MMTX LFE, MMTX
Ls, MMTX Rs
• DIRECT OUT 1–32 ...................... CH1–CH32 Direct Outs
• DIRECT OUT 33–64 .................... CH33–CH64 Direct Outs
• INSERT 1 OUT 1–32 ................... CH1–CH32 Insert 1 Outs
• INSERT 1 OUT 33–64 ................. CH33–CH64 Insert 1 Outs
• INSERT 1 OUT MIX/MATRIX ...... MIX1–MIX16, MATRIX1–MATRIX8 Insert 1 Outs
• INSERT 1 OUT ST/MONO ........... STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO (C) Insert 1 Outs
• INSERT 2 OUT 1–32 ................... CH1–CH32 Insert 2 Outs
• INSERT 2 OUT 33–64 ................. CH33–CH64 Insert 2 Outs
• INSERT 2 OUT MIX/MATRIX ...... MIX1–MIX16, MATRIX1–MATRIX8 Insert 2 Outs
• INSERT 2 OUT ST/MONO ........... STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO (C) Insert 2 Outs
• CASCADE MIX/MATRIX .............. MIX1–MIX16, MATRIX1–MATRIX8
• CASCADE ST/MONO/CUE ......... STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO (C), CUE L,
CUE R
NOTE
In the case of QL1, channels that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
19
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input and output patching
2 Channel select button
Select the channel to be assigned to the output port from the current category.
3 CLOSE button
Closes the screen.
Inserting an external device into a channel
You can insert an effect processor or other external device into the signal path of an INPUT,
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel. When doing so, the type of input/output port used for the insertion and the location of the insertion in/out can be specified individually for each channel.
STEP
1.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section and the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select the channel where you want to insert the external device.
2.
Press the popup button in the INSERT field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
3.
Press the INSERT OUT or INSERT IN button.
4.
Select an output port or an input port.
5.
Press the INSERT ON button.
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen INSERT/DIRECT OUT window (1ch)
NOTE
If you install a digital I/O card in a slot and digitally connect an external device, you must
synchronize the word clock of the QL console and the external device ( page 239
).
INSERT/DIRECT OUT window (1ch)
3 6 7 6 7
9
8
9
1 2 4 5
INSERT field
This field enables you to make insert settings. Press one of three fields to choose PRE HPF
(immediately before the HPF), PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ) or PRE FADER
(immediately before the fader), or POST ON (immediately after the [ON] key) as the insert position.
1 INSERT OUT button
Displays the currently-selected output port for insert 1 and insert 2. Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, and select an output port.
2
INSERT IN button
Displays the currently-selected input port for insert 1 and insert 2. Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an input port.
3
INSERT ON/OFF button
Switches the insert on or off.
4 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only)
Specifies whether the insert point/direct out point settings will be applied to all input channels.
5
APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button (output channels only)
Specifies whether the insert point setting will be applied to all output channels.
NOTE
Insert 1 and insert 2 are serial connections with fixed sequential numbers.
20
V5.8 Reference Manual
INSERT IN HA field
This field will appear if you have selected an input port (that features a head amp) as the insert-in.
6 +48V button
Switches head amp phantom power (+48V) (currently-selected for insert 1 and insert 2) on or off.
7 A.GAIN knob
Indicates the currently-selected head amp analog gain setting for insert 1 and insert 2.
You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the gain.
NOTE
• If you have selected the INPUT jack on the QL console as the input port for insert-in, make the HA settings in the
INSERT IN HA field.
• Even if the INSERT ON/OFF button is OFF, the signal selected for insert-out will continue to be sent.
8
HA meter
Displays the level of the currently-selected head amp input signal for insert 1 and insert
2.
9 Close button
Closes the screen.
INSERT screen (8ch)
1
2
3
4
3
4
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel to set. The channel icon, color, and number appear.
Input and output patching
2 INSERT ON/OFF button
Switches the insert on or off. The currently-specified insert point setting appears above the button.
3 INSERT OUT button
Displays the currently-selected port for insert 1 and insert 2. Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output port.
4 INSERT IN button
Displays the currently-selected port for insert 1 and insert 2. Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an input port. You can also view the insert-in level by checking the indicator located to the right of this button.
PORT SELECT window
Displayed when you press either the INSERT OUT or INSERT IN button in the one-channel or the eight-channel INSERT/DIRECT OUT window. Set the input/output port used for insertion.
1
2
21
3
1 Category select list
Selects the category of port. The categories correspond to the following ports. The displayed categories vary depending on the channel type.
• DANTE1–32 ........................... DANTE1–DANTE32
• DANTE33–64 ......................... DANTE33–DANTE64 (QL5 only)
• INPUT .................................... INPUT1–32 (QL5), INPUT1–16 (QL1) (input channels only)
• OUTPUT/DIGITAL ................. OMNI OUT1–16, DIGITAL OUT L/R (output channels only)
• SLOT1 .................................... SLOT1(1)–SLOT1(16)
• SLOT2 .................................... SLOT2(1)–SLOT2(16)
V5.8 Reference Manual
• GEQ RACK ............................ GEQ1L(A)–GEQ8R(B)
• EFFECT RACK ...................... FX1L(A)–FX8R(B)
• PREMIUM RACK ................... PR1L(A)–PR8R(B)
2
Port select buttons
Assign the port that will be used as insert-out/insert-in for the currently-selected channel.
NOTE
If a rack in which a GEQ, PEQ or Premium Rack is mounted is specified as the insert-out or insert-in, the other patch point will automatically be assigned to the same rack. Also, insert mode will automatically be switched on. Additionally, if you defeat the insert-out or insert-in of a rack in which a GEQ, PEQ or Premium Rack is mounted, the other patch point will automatically be defeated and at the same time insert mode will automatically be switched off.
3 CLOSE button
Closes the screen.
Input and output patching
Directly outputting an INPUT channel
The signal of an INPUT channel can be output directly from an OUTPUT jack on the I/O device, from the desired OMNI OUT jack, or from the output channel of a desired slot.
STEP
1.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section and the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select the INPUT channel that you want to output directly.
2.
Press the popup button in the DIRECT OUT field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
3.
Press the DIRECT OUT PATCH button in the INSERT/DIRECT OUT window.
4.
Select an output port.
5.
Press the DIRECT OUT ON button.
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen INSERT/DIRECT OUT window (1ch)
NOTE
If you install a digital I/O card in a slot and digitally connect an external device, you must
synchronize the word clock of the QL console and the external device ( page 239
).
22
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input and output patching
INSERT/DIRECT OUT window (1ch)
6
DIRECT OUT screen (8ch)
4
1
1
4
2 3 5
1 DIRECT OUT field
Enables you to make settings for direct output. Press one of four fields to choose PRE HPF
(immediately before the HPF), PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ) or PRE FADER
(immediately before the fader), or POST ON (immediately after the [ON] key) as the direct output position.
2
DIRECT OUT PATCH button
Displays the currently-selected Direct Out output port. Press this button to open the
PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output port.
3 DIRECT OUT ON button
Switches the Direct Out on or off.
4
DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob
Indicates the output level of the Direct Out. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the level.
5
APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only)
Specifies whether the insert point/Direct Out point settings will be applied to all input channels.
6 Close button
Closes the screen.
2
3
1 DIRECT OUT ON button
Switches the Direct Out on or off. The currently-selected Direct Out point is indicated above the button.
2
DIRECT OUT PATCH button
Displays the currently-selected Direct Out output port. Press this button to open the
PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output port.
3
DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob
Indicates the output level of the Direct Out. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the level.
4 Close button
Closes the screen.
23
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input and output patching
PORT SELECT window
Displayed when you press the DIRECT OUT PATCH button in the one-channel or the eightchannel INSERT/DIRECT OUT window. Set the output port used for direct output.
2
1
3
1 Category select list
Selects the category of output port. The categories correspond to the following output ports. The displayed categories vary depending on the channel type.
• OUTPUT/DIGITAL/REC .........OMNI OUT1–OMNI OUT16 (QL5), OMNI OUT1–OMNI
OUT8 (QL1), DIGITAL OUT L/R, RECORDER IN(L/R)
• SLOT1 ....................................SLOT1(1)–SLOT1(16)
• SLOT2 ....................................SLOT2(1)–SLOT2(16)
• DANTE1–32 ...........................DANTE1–DANTE32
• DANTE33–64 .........................DANTE33–DANTE64 (QL5 only)
2 Output port select buttons
Assign the output port used for direct output of the currently-selected INPUT channel.
3
CLOSE button
Closes the window.
24
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
This chapter explains various operations for input channels.
Signal flow for input channels
The input channels comprise the section that processes signals received from the I/O devices, rear panel input jacks, or slots 1–2, and sends them to the STEREO bus, MONO bus,
MIX buses, or MATRIX buses. There are two types of input channels, as follows.
INPUT channel (monaural)
These channels are used to process monaural signals. When the QL series console is in the default state, the signal from the analog input connector is assigned.
ST IN channel (stereo)
These channels are used to process stereo signals. When the QL series console is in the default state, the input signals from EFFECT RACKS 5–8 are assigned to ST IN 1 – 4. There are no assignments for ST IN 5 – 8.
MIX
1 2 1516
ST
M
O
N
O
L R (C)
MATRIX
(USE 7-8
AS CUE B)
1 2 7 8
CUE(A)
L R
80
{48}
1,3...79{47}
ST IN ONLY
R
2,4...80{48}
CH 1-64{32},ST IN 1L-8R
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
CH INSERT 1, 2 OUT
POST DG
INSERT POINT
PRE DG
METER
METER PRE EQ
METER
Digital
GAIN
OSCILLATOR
PRE DG
METER
OSCILLATOR
POST DG
METER
Digital
GAIN
EQ OUT
METER
PRE HPF / PRE EQ / PRE FADER/POST ON
DYNA1OUT
METER
GR METER
DYNA2OUT
METER
GR METER
HPF
PRE HPF
INSERT
ATT
PRE EQ
4BAND
EQ
POST EQ
GATE
DUCK
EXPAND
COMP
COMPAND
DE-ESSER
COMP
KEY IN CUE
Key in
Self PRE EQ
Key in Filter
Self POST EQ
MIX13-16 OUT
CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32,33-40,41-48, 49-56, 57-64,
ST IN 1L-8R]POST EQ(QL5)
CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32,ST IN 1L-8R]POST EQ(QL1)
To MIX
FIXED
To MIX
PRE FADER
METER
INSERT
PRE FADER
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
POST ON
DELAY
Max
1000ms
POST PAN L
POST PAN R
LEVEL/
DCA1-16
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON LEVEL
POST ON
METER
INSERT
POST ON
POST ON
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
ON
ON
ON
ON
PAN
LCR
DIRECT OUT 1-64{32}
LR MONO
CSR
PAN LINK
POST PAN L
TO MONO TO ST
TO LCR
SURROUND PAN
To OUTPUT PATCH
PAN MODE
MIX1,3...15
MIX2,4...16
ST L
MONO(C)
ST R
MIX1-6
To MIX
VARI
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
LEVEL
LEVEL
POST ON
To MIX
VARI
STEREO
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
ON ON LEVEL
PAN LFE
To MATRIX
VARI
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
LEVEL
LEVEL
MATRIX1,3...7
MATRIX2,4...8
To MATRIX
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
ON ON LEVEL
PAN
CUE(A) L (PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN L
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN R
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN L
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN R
ON
ON
ON
ON
CUE(A) R
CUE B L
CUE B R
TRIM
• INPUT PATCH
Assigns input signals to the input channels.
• Ø (phase)
Switches the phase of the input signal.
• DIGITAL GAIN
Attenuates/boosts the level of the input signal.
25
Input channels
• HPF (High Pass Filter)
Cuts the region below the specified frequency.
• 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer)
A parametric EQ with four bands: HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, and LOW.
• DYNAMICS 1
This is a dynamics processor that can be used for gating, ducking, expander, or compressor.
• DYNAMICS 2
This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor, compander, or de-esser.
• INPUT DELAY
Corrects input signal delay. You can specify up to 1000ms.
• LEVEL/DCA 1–16
Adjusts the input level of the effect.
• ON (On/off)
Turns the input channel on or off. If this is off, the corresponding channel will be muted.
• PAN
Adjusts the panning of signals sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus.
For the ST IN channel (stereo), you can switch between PAN and BALANCE. The
BALANCE parameter adjusts the volume balance of the left/right signals sent from the
ST IN channel (stereo) to the STEREO bus. You can turn on PAN LINK in the BUS SETUP window so that the setting of the PAN parameter will also be applied to signals sent to two MIX or MATRIX buses that are set to stereo.
• LCR (Left/Center/Right)
Sends the input channel signal to the STEREO bus/MONO bus as a three-channel signal that consists of the L/R channels plus the center channel.
• MIX ON/OFF (MIX send on/off)
This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the input channel to MIX buses 1–16.
• MIX LEVEL 1–16 (MIX send levels 1–16)
Adjusts the send level of signals sent from the input channel to VARI type MIX buses 1–
16. As the position from which the signal is sent to the MIX bus, you can choose from the following: immediately before EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader.
• MATRIX ON/OFF (MATRIX send on/off)
This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the input channel to MATRIX buses 1–8.
• MATRIX LEVEL 1–8 (MATRIX send levels 1–8)
Adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to MATRIX buses 1–8.
As the position from which the signal is sent to the MATRIX bus, you can choose from the following: immediately before the EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader.
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
• INSERT (INPUT channels (monaural) only)
You can patch the desired output/input ports to insert an external device such as an effect processor. For the position of the insert-out/insert-in point, you can choose immediately before the EQ, immediately before the fader, or immediately after the [ON] key.
• DIRECT OUT (INPUT channels (monaural) only)
You can patch this to any output port to send out the input signal directly from the corresponding output port. For the position of the direct output, you can choose immediately before the HPF, immediately before the EQ, immediately before the fader, or immediately after the [ON] key.
• METER
Indicates the input channel level. You can switch the position at which the level is detected (
).
Specifying the channel name, icon, and channel color
On the QL series unit, you can specify the on-screen name and icon for each input channel.
This section explains how to specify the channel name, icon and channel color.
STEP
1.
Press the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section and the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select the input channel.
2.
Press the channel number/channel name field of the channel you want to specify on the OVERVIEW screen.
3.
Switch between items in the tabs on the PATCH/NAME screen, and specify a channel name, icon and channel color.
PATCH/NAME screen
When selecting the PATCH tab
2 3
1
OVERVIEW screen PATCH/NAME screen
5
4
1
PATCH button
Indicates the currently-patched port. If you press this button when another tab is active, a window will appear, enabling you to select the network and port.
2
Icon button
Indicates the icon and color that are currently selected for the corresponding channel.
When you press this button, a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or sample name.
3
Channel name input box
Indicates the currently-specified channel. When you press the inside of this box, the
SOFT KEYBOARD window will appear, enabling you to edit the channel name.
4 Tabs
Enable you to switch between items.
5
Close button
Closes the screen.
26
V5.8 Reference Manual
When selecting the ICON tab
1
2
3
1 Channel color select buttons
Select a channel color.
2
Icon select buttons
Select a channel icon.
3 Sample name setup buttons
Select a preset sample name. You can edit the name on the NAME tab later.
NOTE
• You can also add or edit characters in the channel name field after you have entered the sample name. If you want to quickly assign channel names that consist of a common name plus a consecutive number, such as “Vocal 1” or “Vocal 2,” enter a sample name first, and then add a number.
• The channel indicator will turn off for any channel for which black (OFF) was selected as a channel color.
When selecting the NAME tab
You can directly enter a channel name on the keyboard screen.
Input channels
27
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
Making HA (Head Amp) settings
You can make HA (Head Amp) related settings (phantom power on/off, gain, phase) for the input channel.
• To adjust only the HA analog gain, use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
Setting the gain
Head amp settings are made in the GAIN/PATCH window.
GAIN/PATCH window (1ch)
1 9 0
STEP
1.
Press the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section and the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select the channel.
2.
Press the GAIN knob in the GAIN/PATCH field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
3.
Press the 1ch or 8ch tab in the GAIN/PATCH window.
4.
Make settings for the head amp.
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen GAIN/PATCH window (1ch)
NOTE
• The PAD will be switched on or off internally when the HA gain is adjusted between +17 dB and
+18 dB.
• Keep in mind that noise may be generated when using phantom power if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of an external device connected to the INPUT jack.
• The GAIN knob, +48V button, and Ø button are valid only on channels for which the assigned input port is an INPUT jack on the I/O device, the INPUT jack on the QL unit, or a slot that is connected to an external head amp device (e.g., Yamaha AD8HR or SB168-ES).
28
2 3 4
1 Channel icon/Channel number/Channel name indicator
Indicates the channel icon, number, and name.
5 6 7 8
2 HA section
Appears if the head amp is patched to the input channel.
NOTE
• If a slot is patched to the channel, the type of the slot/MY card and the slot meter will be displayed.
• If a rack is patched, the type of rack and type of effect will be displayed.
• +48V button
Switches head amp phantom power (+48V) on or off.
• A.GAIN (analog gain) knob
Indicates the analog gain of the head amp. You can use the [TOUCH
AND TURN] knob to adjust the gain. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator will appear, showing the position of the analog gain when the function is turned on.
• HA meter
Displays the level of the HA input signal.
• GC (Gain Compensation) ON/OFF button
Turns the Gain Compensation (gain correction function) on or off. If the Gain
Compensation function is turned on, the level of the signal output from the I/O device to the audio network will be stabilized. For example, if the FOH console and the monitoring console are sharing an I/O device, or if you are performing digital recording via Dante connections, using this function will maintain the signal output at a constant level from the I/O device to the network even if the analog gain value on the I/O device is changed. If the Gain Compensation button is turned off, the compensation gain will be reset, while the analog gain will return to the level that was obtained before you turned on the button. Therefore, the signal level on the digital network will remain the same.
• Gain compensation meter
Indicates the level of the signal output to the audio network after gain compensation.
V5.8 Reference Manual
2 HA section (If patched to a wireless mic)
• Frequency
Indicates the frequency that is currently set for the RF signal.
• Signal quality meter
Displays the quality of the received RF signal. The vertical axis represents quality and the horizontal axis represents time, and the display of connection status is updated every second. If you move away from the transmitter, or the quality of the RF signal decreases due to the influence of disturbing radio waves, the bar indication becomes lower. It displays in purple for Shure devices, and in white for the other developer’s devices.
• RX.GAIN knob/TX.GAIN knob/TX.ATT knob
Sets the HA gain for the transmitter or receiver. The level meter located at the immediate right of the knob indicates the input level.
The knob name will change depending on the connected device.
• MUTE indicator
Indicates the mute status (on/off) of the audio signal for the receiver.
• RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter
Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal.
An active antenna indicator is shown on the right side. It indicates which antenna is enabled by lighting up.
NOTE
For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength of the RF signal, refer to the manual from each developer.
• Battery indicator
Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power.
NOTE
For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and maximum operation time, refer to the manual from each developer.
3 INPUT PORT button
Indicates the port that is assigned to the channel. Press this button to display the PORT
SELECT window, in which you can select a port to patch.
29
Input channels
4 Icon/Channel name button
Indicates the channel number, icon, and name. Press this button to access the PATCH/
NAME window, in which you can patch the input port and specify the channel name.
5 AG-DG LINK button
Turns the analog gain and digital gain link on or off. When the link is turned on, the digital gain is linked to adjustments made to the analog gain, even if Gain
Compensation is on.
6 Ø (Phase) button
Switches between normal and reverse phase settings of signals input.
7
D. GAIN (digital gain) knob
Indicates the digital gain value. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the digital gain. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, no changes will be made to the input level of the analog gain, and therefore the input gain is adjusted with the digital gain.
8 Digital gain meter
Indicates the level after the signal passes through the digital gain.
9 GC ALL ON button/GC ALL OFF button
Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously.
0 AG-DG ALL ON button/AG-DG ALL OFF button
Switch all analog gain and digital gain links on or off simultaneously.
V5.8 Reference Manual
GAIN/PATCH window (8ch)
8 9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
Channel select button
Indicates the channel icon, number, and name. When you press this button, the corresponding channel will become a target for operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section, and the corresponding [SEL] key will light.
Input channels
2 PATCH button
Press this button to display the PORT SELECT window to patch the input port to the input channel.
PORT SELECT window
TAKE FROM CHANNEL button
TAKE FROM PORT button
• TAKE FROM PORT button
The HA settings of the port will take priority. Even if you change the patching, the HA settings of the port will remain unchanged.
• TAKE FROM CHANNEL button
The HA settings of the channel will take priority. The HA settings of the port that had been previously patched will be copied to the newly-patched port.
If the channel’s HA settings are selected, the following HA settings will be copied from the channel to the port that is patched. If you patch the input channel from an input that does not have these settings (i.e., that does not have a HA), the default values will be specified.
HA setting
HA gain amount
HPF on/off
Phantom power on/off
Gain compensation on/off
–6dB
Off
Off
Off
Default value
NOTE
If you’re newly patching a previously-unpatched input channel, the default values will be specified if the HA INFO field’s TAKE FROM CHANNEL button is pressed.
30
V5.8 Reference Manual
3 HA section
Appears if the head amp is patched to the input channel.
NOTE
If the slot (for which the connection to the head amp is not recognized) is patched, the type of the
MY card will be displayed.
• +48V button
This button will appear for the input channel to which the head amp has been patched.
Press the button to switch phantom power (+48V) on or off.
• A.GAIN (analog gain) knob
Indicates the analog gain of the head amp. You can use the [TOUCH
AND TURN] knob to adjust the gain. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator will appear, showing the position of the analog gain when the function is turned on.
• Level meter
Indicates the input signal level.
• GC (Gain Compensation) button
Switches the Gain Compensation function on or off for that channel.
3 HA section (If patched to a wireless mic)
• Frequency
Indicates the frequency that is currently set for the RF signal.
• RX.GAIN knob/TX.GAIN knob/TX.ATT knob
Sets the HA gain for the transmitter or receiver. The level meter located at the immediate right of the knob indicates the input level. The knob name will change depending on the connected device.
NOTE
• When remote control connection is disabled for the connected device, a gray circle is displayed here instead of a knob, and the gain cannot be adjusted.
• For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength of the signal, refer to the manual from each developer.
Input channels
• MUTE indicator
Indicates the mute status (on/off) of the audio signal for the receiver.
• RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter
Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal.
An active antenna indicator is shown on the right side. It indicates which antenna is enabled by lighting up.
NOTE
• The display will change depending on the device.
• For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength of the RF signal, refer to the manual from each developer.
• Battery indicator
Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power.
NOTE
For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and maximum operation time, refer to the manual from each developer.
4
AG-DG LINK button
Turns the analog gain and digital gain link on or off. When the link is turned on, the digital gain is linked to adjustments made to the analog gain, even if Gain
Compensation is on.
NOTE
If it is patched to a wireless mic, the battery indicator is displayed here.
5 Ø (Phase) button
Switches between normal and reverse phase settings of signals input.
6 D. GAIN (digital gain) knob
Indicates the digital gain value. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the gain. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, digital gain will be used to adjust the level of the signal input to the input channels.
7 Digital gain meter
Indicates the level after the signal passes through the digital gain.
8 GC ALL ON button/GC ALL OFF button
Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously.
9 AG-DG ALL ON button/AG-DG ALL OFF button
Switch all analog gain and digital gain links on or off simultaneously.
31
V5.8 Reference Manual
GAIN/PATCH window
(1–32, 33–64/ST IN (QL5), ST IN (QL1))
This window displays the head amp settings of the corresponding input channels. Here you can also use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the selected head amp gain.
2 1 2 1
3
1 Parameter select buttons
Switch parameters to view in the window.
• ANALOG GAIN ...................... Analog gain
• DIGITAL GAIN ....................... Digital gain
• PATCH ................................... Patch selection
2 GC ALL ON/GC ALL OFF buttons
Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously.
3
Channel select button
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
Input channels
If you press the ANALOG GAIN parameter select button:
1
2
3
4
1
GAIN knob
Indicates the analog gain setting for each channel. Press the knob to select a channel, and then control the gain value using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. If the Gain
Compensation function is turned on, an indicator will appear, showing the position of the analog gain when the function is turned on.
2
OVER indicator
Lights when a signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level.
This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected.
3 +48V indicator
Indicates the +48V on/off status for each channel.
4 Ø (Phase) indicator
Indicates the phase setting for each channel.
NOTE
If the input channel is patched to a slot for which the connection to the head amp is not recognized, the knob
1
3
will not be displayed.
will be replaced with the slot/port number of the patch destination.
If the input channel is patched to a rack, the knob
1
will be replaced with the port ID of the rack.
If nothing is patched to the input channel, the knob
1
will be replaced with a dotted line
“----”.
If you press the DIGITAL GAIN parameter select button:
2
1
3
1 GAIN knob
Indicates the digital gain setting for each channel. Press the knob to select a channel, and then control the gain value using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
2 OVER indicator
Lights when a signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level.
This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected.
3
Ø (Phase) indicator
Indicates the phase setting for each channel.
32
V5.8 Reference Manual
If you press the PATCH parameter select button:
1
1 PATCH button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an input port to patch to the channel.
HA section (If patched to a wireless mic)
2
1 4
3
1 RX.GAIN knob/TX.GAIN knob/TX.ATT knob
Sets and displays and the gain for the transmitter or receiver. The knob name will change depending on the connected device.
2
RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter
Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal.
An active antenna indicator is shown on the right side. It indicates which antenna is enabled.
NOTE
• The display will change depending on the device.
• For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength of the signal, refer to the manual from each developer.
3 Battery indicator
Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power.
NOTE
For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and maximum operation time, refer to the manual from each developer.
4 OL indicator
Lights if the audio signal level of the receiver reaches the overload point.
NOTE
When the receiver is muted, is displayed on the MUTE indicator.
Compensation is on
Input channels
Relationship between analog and digital gain while Gain
If Gain Compensation is on, adjusting the analog gain by a specific amount will cause the
I/O device to output to the audio network a signal that is attenuated by the same amount.
Therefore, the signals on the audio network will maintain a constant corrected level in the digital domain.
For example, assume that the analog gain value has been set to +30 dB and Gain
Compensation is now turned on. Under this condition, if you raise the analog gain value to
+45 dB, the level of the signal sent to the audio network will stay at +30 dB (that is, attenuated by –15 dB).
If the FOH console and the monitoring console are sharing one I/O device, adjusting the analog gain on the FOH console will not affect the input level on the monitoring console. The signal in the audio network is maintained at a constant level, and therefore increasing the analog gain as much as possible will lower the relative noise floor and improve the S/N ratio.
The gain of each signal input to the QL series unit will be adjusted by the digital gain parameter of the QL series console.
However, please note that if the signal is distorted due to a high level of analog gain, you must first turn the Gain Compensation function off, set the gain to an appropriate input level, and then turn the function back on. If you try to lower the analog gain level while the Gain
Compensation function is on, the signal on the audio network will be amplified by the same amount due to the Gain Compensation function, and the signal will remain distorted.
NOTE
You can perform this operation rapidly if you’ve assigned Gain Compensation on/off as the SET
BY SEL function to one of the USER DEFINED keys.
33
V5.8 Reference Manual
Sending the signal from an input channel to the
STEREO/MONO bus
The STEREO bus and MONO bus are used to send signals to the main speakers. There are two ways to send signals to the STEREO bus or MONO bus: ST/MONO mode and LCR mode. You can select the mode individually for each channel. These two modes differ as follows.
ST/MONO mode
This mode sends signals from the input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus independently.
• Signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on or off individually.
• The panning of a signal sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus L/R is controlled by the TO ST PAN knob. (Signals sent to the MONO bus are not affected by this knob.)
• The left/right volume balance of a signal sent from an ST IN channel to the STEREO bus is controlled by this knob.
If PAN/BALANCE mode is set to PAN, you will be able to adjust the pan position of signals sent to the STEREO bus L/R individually (
).
LCR mode
This mode sends input channel signals to three buses (STEREO (L/R) and MONO (C)) simultaneously.
• Signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus will be switched on or off collectively.
• The CSR (Center Side Ratio) knob specifies the level ratio between signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus.
• The TO ST PAN knob/BALANCE knob specifies the level of signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus.
NOTE
If you want to monitor the signal of the STEREO bus or MONO bus through headphones or similar devices, press the MONITOR button in the Function Access Area to select “LCR” as the monitor source before you continue with the following procedure.
Input channels
STEP
1.
Set the phantom power, gain, and phase of the input channel from which you want to send the signal to the STEREO/MONO bus.
2.
Press the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section and the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select the input channel from which you want to send the signal to the
STEREO/MONO bus.
3.
In the PAN/BALANCE field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, and then press the knob once again.
4.
Use the MODE select button in the TO STEREO/MONO window to select either ST/
MONO mode or LCR mode for each channel.
5.
In the MAIN section on the top panel, turn on the [ON] key for the ST IN channel
(stereo)/INPUT channel (monaural), and then raise the fader to an appropriate level.
6.
In the INPUT section on the top panel, turn on the [ON] key for the input channel you want to control, and then raise the fader to an appropriate position.
The subsequent steps will differ depending on whether ST/MONO mode or LCR mode was selected for the channel in step 4.
Channels for which ST/MONO mode is selected
7.
In the TO STEREO/MONO window, use the STEREO/MONO button to individually turn on/off the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus.
8.
Use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning of a signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus.
Channels for which LCR mode is selected
7.
In the TO STEREO/MONO window, use the LCR button to turn signals sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus on or off collectively.
8.
Use the CSR knob to adjust the level difference between signals sent from that channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus.
9.
Use the TO ST PAN knob to specify the panning of signals sent from the input channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus.
34
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen TO STEREO/MONO window
V5.8 Reference Manual
4
5
6
1
2
3
TO STEREO/MONO window (8ch)
Here you can control the on/off and pan/balance settings of signals sent from input channels to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, in groups of eight channels.
7
ST/MONO mode LCR mode
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
2 Mode LEDs
The LED of the currently-selected mode will light.
3 MODE select button
For an INPUT channel (monaural), the mode can be switched between ST/MONO and
LCR. For a STEREO channel, the mode can be switched between PAN and BALANCE.
4
ST/MONO buttons
These buttons are on/off switches for signals that are sent from each channel to the
STEREO bus/MONO bus when the MONO button is set to ST/MONO mode.
5 Σ
clipping indicator
Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
Input channels
6 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
For an INPUT channel (monaural), this acts as a PAN knob that adjusts the left/right panning of signals sent to the STEREO bus. For a ST IN channel (stereo), this acts as a
PAN knob, and also as a BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume of the left and right signals sent to the STEREO bus. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
7 Tabs
Enable you to switch between windows.
8
9
8
LCR button
If the MODE button is set to LCR mode, this button is displayed instead of 4 . This button is an overall on/off button for signals sent from a channel to the STEREO bus and
MONO bus. If this button is off, no signals will be sent from the corresponding input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus.
9
CSR knob
Adjusts the relative level of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus, in the range of 0–100%. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob (
).
35
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
Added pan function (Monaural input channels only)
The pan setting for signals sent to the STEREO bus enables you to select PAN LAW settings.
You can select one of the following:
CENTER NOMINAL
LR NOMINAL
The pan level is nominal at center and +3dB when panned 100% either left or right.
The pan level is -3dB at center and nominal when panned 100% either left or right.
NOTE
The settings are also applied to the signals sent to the stereo MIX buses.
STEP
1.
Select a monaural input channel.
2.
In the STEREO/MONO field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust in the OVERVIEW window, and then press the knob once again. Or, in the PAN/
BALANCE field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust in the
SELECTED CHANNEL window, and then press the knob once again.
3.
Use the PAN LAW select button in the TO STEREO/MONO window to set the PAN
LAW for each channel.
1 PAN LAW select button
This toggle button is used to set the PAN LAW for the Input Channel.
For CENTER NOMINAL For LR NOMINAL
NOTE
PAN LAW settings are also enabled in LCR mode. They are also enabled in Surround mode.
You can also check the status of PAN LAW settings in the window shown below. For channels where the mark is on, PAN LAW is set to LR NOMINAL.
• TO STEREO/MONO window (CH1–32, CH33–64/ST IN (QL5), ST IN (QL1))
• OVERVIEW window (STEREO/MONO field)
• SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW window (PAN/BALANCE field)
1
36
V5.8 Reference Manual
TO STEREO/MONO window
(CH1–32, CH33–64/ST IN (QL5), ST IN (QL1))
Adjusts the status of a signal sent from the corresponding input channel to the STEREO/
MONO bus. You can also adjust the selected pan or balance setting.
23
4
Signal level when LCR mode is selected
Input channels
If LCR mode is selected, the signal level sent to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus will vary according to the settings of the CSR knob and the TO ST PAN knob.
When the CSR knob is set to 0% (INPUT channel (monaural))
The TO ST PAN knob operates as a conventional PAN knob, and no signal is sent to the
MONO (C) bus.
1
Channel select button
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
2 Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
3
TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
Adjusts the panning or balance.
To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the [TOUCH AND
TURN] knob.
If the signal reaches the overload point at any meter detection point in that channel, the Σ indicator to the right of the knob will light.
4 ST/MONO indicator
If a channel is set to ST/MONO mode, these indicators will individually indicate the on/ off status of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus.
If that channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator will be displayed in this location.
The LCR indicator indicates the on/off status of all signals sent from that channel to the
STEREO bus/MONO bus.
Signal sent to the STEREO (L) bus
Signal sent to the STEREO (R) bus
L C
TO ST PAN knob
R
When the CSR knob is set to 0% (ST IN channel (stereo))
The TO ST BALANCE knob operates as a conventional BALANCE knob, and no signal is sent to the MONO (C) bus.
Signal sent from the STEREO (L) channel to the STEREO (L) bus
L C
TO ST BALANCE knob
R
Signal sent from the STEREO (R) channel to the STEREO (R) bus
L C
TO ST BALANCE knob
R
37
V5.8 Reference Manual
When the CSR knob is set to 100%
Signal sent to the MONO (C) bus
Signal sent to the STEREO (L) bus
Signal sent to the STEREO (R) bus
L C
TO ST PAN knob
R
When the CSR knob is set to 100% (ST IN channel)
Signal sent from the ST IN (L) channel to the MONO (C) bus
Signal sent from the ST IN (L) channel to the STEREO (L) bus
L C
TO ST BALANCE knob
R
Signal sent from the ST IN (R) channel to the MONO (C) bus
Signal sent from the ST IN (R) channel to the STEREO (R) bus
L C
TO ST BALANCE knob
R
Input channels
Sending a signal from an input channel to a MIX/
MATRIX bus
The MIX buses are used mainly for the purpose of sending signals to foldback speakers on stage, or to external effect processors. The MATRIX buses are used to produce a mix that is independent of the STEREO bus or MIX buses, and is typically sent to a main recorder or to a backstage monitoring system.
You can send a signal from an input channel to a MIX/MATRIX bus in the following ways.
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
With this method, you use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the send levels to the MIX/
MATRIX buses. When using this method, signals sent from a specific input channel to all MIX/
MATRIX buses can be adjusted collectively.
Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode)
With this method, you switch the QL series unit to SENDS ON FADER mode, and use the faders on the top panel to adjust the level of signals sent to the MIX/MATRIX buses. When using this method, signals sent from all input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus can be adjusted simultaneously.
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
This section explains how to use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the send levels of signals sent from a specific input channel to all MIX/MATRIX buses.
STEP
1.
Press the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section and the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select the input channel from which you want to send the signal to the
MIX/MATRIX buses.
2.
Turn on the ON button in the SEND field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
3.
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the send levels to the MIX/MATRIX buses.
38
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
MIX buses can be either a FIXED type that features a fixed send level, or a VARI type that features a variable send level. The MATRIX buses are all VARI type. You can switch between
FIXED and VARI types for each two adjacent odd/even-numbered MIX buses. To do so, press the SETUP button and then the BUS SETUP button to open the BUS SETUP window.
If the MIX bus is a FIXED type
If the MIX/MATRIX bus is a stereo bus
A gray circle is displayed instead of the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob, and you cannot adjust the send level.
For a VARI type MIX bus or a MATRIX bus
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the send level.
4
5
6
7
8
9
You can link the main parameters of two adjacent odd/even-numbered MIX/MATRIX buses. If the send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus is assigned as stereo, the left knob of the two adjacent TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs will operate as the TO MIX/MATRIX
PAN knob. (If BALANCE mode is selected in the TO STEREO/MONO window, it will operate as a BALANCE knob).
NOTE
• For an INPUT channel (monaural), the right knob will adjust the common send level to the two
MIX/MATRIX buses, and the left knob will adjust the panning between the two MIX/MATRIX buses. Rotating the left TO MIX/MATRIX SEND PAN knob counter-clockwise will increase the amount of signal sent to the odd-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus, and rotating it clockwise will increase the amount sent to the even-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus.
• For a ST IN channel (stereo), if BALANCE mode has been selected in the TO STEREO/MONO window (8ch), the right knob adjusts the common send level for the two MIX/MATRIX buses, and the left knob adjusts the volume balance of the left and right signals sent to the two MIX/MATRIX buses. Rotating the left TO MIX/MATRIX SEND BAL knob counter-clockwise will increase the amount of signal sent from the L-channel to the odd-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus, and rotating it clockwise will increase the amount sent from the R-channel to the even-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus. If PAN mode has been selected in the TO STEREO/MONO window (8ch), the left knob will function as the PAN knob. The right knob will function as send level, just as in BALANCE mode.
MIX SEND/MATRIX SEND window
3 1 2 3 1 2
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 ALL PRE button
Sets the send point to PRE. (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all send-source channels — including the input and output channels — to the selected send destination.) At this time, the PRE/POST button will light.
39
V5.8 Reference Manual
2 ALL POST button
Sets the send point to POST. (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all send-source channels — including the input and output channels — to the selected send destination.) At this time, the PRE/POST button will turn off.
3 Send destination indicator
Indicates the currently-selected send destination.
4 Send destination select buttons
Select MIX/MATRIX buses as the send destination.
5 Channel select button
Selects the send-source channel that you wish to control. The current channel icon, number, and color appear on the button, and the channel name appears below the button.
6 PRE/POST button
Switches the send point of each send-source channel between PRE and POST. If the button is lit, the send point is set to PRE.
NOTE
• If the PRE/POST button is on, you can also select PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ) or PRE
FADER (immediately before the fader) for each MIX/MATRIX bus. This setting is made in the BUS
SETUP window (
• The PRE/POST button is not displayed for FIXED type MIX buses.
7 SEND ON/OFF button
Switches the send of each send-source channel on or off.
8
SEND PAN/BALANCE knob
Sets the panning or balance of signals sent to the stereo send destination. If the send destination is monaural or set to FIXED, this knob will not appear.
If the send source is monaural, this knob functions as a PAN knob.
If the send source is stereo, you can use PAN/BALANCE mode setting in the TO STEREO/MONO window to select whether PAN/BALANCE will function as a PAN or BALANCE knob. The knob for the mode selected here will appear.
Input channels
9 SEND LEVEL knob
Indicates the level of signals sent to the selected send destination. You can use the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob to control the level.
If the send destination is set to FIXED, only a gray circle will appear.
Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode)
You can use the faders on the top panel to adjust signals that are sent from all input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus.
STEP
1.
Assign an output port to each MIX/MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and connect your monitor system, external effects, or other device to the corresponding output port.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SENDS ON FADER button, or press the key that is currently lit in the SENDS ON FADER section.
3.
Use the MIX/MATRIX select buttons in the Function Access Area to switch between
MIX/MATRIX.
4.
Use the MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons in the Function Access Area, or the key in the SENDS ON FADER section to select the send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus.
5.
Use the faders in the Channel Strip section on the top panel to adjust the send level of signals routed from the input channels to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus.
SENDS ON FADER section
Function access area
NOTE
• Press the SENDS ON FADER button to switch to SENDS ON FADER mode.
The faders in the Channel Strip section and Main section will move to the send levels of the signals that are routed from each channel to the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus. The [ON] keys will also change to the SEND ON status.
• If you press the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus select button again, cue monitoring will be turned on for the related MIX/MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to monitor the signal that is being sent to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus.
40
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
• You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a USER DEFINED key. This lets you quickly switch to SENDS ON FADER mode for a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, and quickly switch back again.
SENDS ON FADER mode
1
Channel name display indication
In SENDS ON FADER mode, ON/OFF is indicated for the channel.
CHANNEL ON
3
CHANNEL OFF
On the PREFERENCE page in the USER SETUP pop-up window, the channel number is shown if NAME DISPLAY is set to “NAME ONLY”.
2
1 MIX/MATRIX select button
Use the MIX/MATRIX select button to switch between MIX/MATRIX for the bus displayed in the Function Access Area.
2 MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons
Select the buses that will be controlled by the faders.
3
Close button
Closes the SENDS ON FADER mode.
Channel number display
Correcting delay between channels (Input Delay)
This section explains how to correct delay between input channels by using the Input Delay function.
This function is useful when you want to correct the phase variance caused by microphone locations on the stage, to add depth to the sound by using phase variance, or to correct a delay (a time gap) that may exist between video and audio that are sent from a site for broadcast on TV.
STEP
1.
Press the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section and the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select the input channel.
2.
Press the INPUT DELAY field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
3.
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to set the delay.
4.
Press the DELAY ON button.
41
V5.8 Reference Manual
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen INPUT DELAY window
INPUT DELAY window (8ch)
You can set the on/off status and the value of the input channel delay.
1 6
2
3
4
5
1 DELAY SCALE button
Press the button to display the DELAY SCALE window, in which you can select the unit for the delay time.
There are five delay scales: meter (meter/sec), feet (feet/sec), sample (number of samples), ms (milliseconds), and frame (frames). If you select frame as the units, you can choose from six frame rates: 30, 30D, 29.97, 29.97D, 25, and 24. In this case, fr will appear as the units in the channel name display.
Input channels
2 Channel select button
The currently-selected input channel is indicated in blue. Press the button to select the channel.
3 Delay setting knob (input channels only)
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to set the delay value. You can view the current value immediately above the knob (always shown in unit of ms) and below the knob (shown using the currently-selected scale). If ms (millisecond) has been selected for the DELAY
SCALE, nothing will appear above the knob.
4 DELAY ON button
Switches the delay on or off.
5 Tabs
Enable you to switch between windows.
6 Close button
Closes the window.
INPUT DELAY (CH1–32, CH33–64/ST IN (QL5), ST IN (QL1))
1
2
3
42
1 DELAY SCALE button
Press the button to display the DELAY SCALE window, in which you can select the unit for the delay time.
V5.8 Reference Manual
2 Channel select button
Lights to indicate the currently-selected input channel. Press the button to select the channel.
3 Delay setting knob (input channels only)
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to set the value. You can view the current value immediately beside the knob (always shown in unit of ms) and below the knob (shown using the currently-selected scale).
NOTE
If ms (millisecond) has been selected for the DELAY SCALE, nothing will appear to the right of the knob.
Additional functions for stereo input channels
With V3, you can temporarily set the signals sent to a stereo input channel as mono. You can select from the following three settings.
L-MONO
Only the L channel is temporarily set as a mono signal.
STEREO L
STEREO R
ON PAN/BAL
STEREO IN Lch
Input channels
LR-MONO
Although the result is a monaural signal that is the summation of signals from both channels, the R channel of the stereo input channel is muted.
NOTE
• When you set LR-MONO, the PAN mode is selected at the same time. In addition, the PAN knob is set to the center position.
• When you set LR, L-MONO, or R-MONO, the BALANCE mode is selected at the same time. In addition, the BALANCE knob is set to the center position.
Setting procedure
If a stereo input channel is selected, the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen will appear as shown below.
ON PAN/BAL
STEREO IN Rch
R-MONO
Only the R channel is temporarily set as a mono signal.
ON PAN/BAL
STEREO IN Lch
STEREO L
STEREO R
1
ON PAN/BAL
STEREO IN Rch
43
V5.8 Reference Manual
1 LR-MONO SELECT field
Select one of the four buttons. The button you select lights up, and the others go off.
Normal STEREO setting
L-MONO
R-MONO
LR-MONO
If a stereo input channel is selected, the OVERVIEW screen will appear as shown below.
2
Surround output for input channels
Setting Surround mode
You can enable surround mixes by changing bus settings to Surround mode.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the SURROUND SETUP button ( page 210 ).
3.
Press the 5.1 SURROUND button.
4.
Assign channels to MIX 1 - 6 for surround output.
5.
Press the APPLY button.
6.
Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box.
Input channels
2 LR-MONO SELECT button
This a toggle button. The setting switches each time the button is pressed.
SETUP screen SURROUND SETUP screen
NOTE
When you switch from Stereo mode to Surround mode, the signals for MIX1/2, 3/4, and 5/6 change to MONO x2.
However, when you switch from Surround mode to Stereo mode, the signals for MIX1/2, 3/4, and
5/6 remain as MONO x2.
44
V5.8 Reference Manual
1
2
3
4
5
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen appears as shown below.
3 6 7
Input channels
6 Surround position
The color of the ball shown here changes depending on whether the surround position is a hard pan (panned fully left or right) or any other setting.
Hard pan: Red
Any other setting: Orange
7
Surround graph
This graph shows the surround positions. Press here to open the SURROUND PAN 1CH screen.
OVERVIEW screen
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the OVERVIEW screen appears as shown below.
1
2
3
1
L/R knob
This parameter is used to set the left/right surround position.
2 F/R knob
This parameter is used to set the front/rear surround position.
3
Assign buttons for each bus
If there is a bus from which you do not want to output an audio signal, turn that button off.
4
DIV knob
This determines how the Center signal is fed to the Left, Right, and Center channels.
When set to 0, the Center signal is fed only to the Left and Right channels. When set to
50, the Center signal is fed equally to the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to
100, it’s fed to only the Center channel (i.e., Real Center).
5
LFE knob
This sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel.
45
Adjusting L/R
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
SURROUND PAN 1CH screen
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the SURROUND PAN 1CH screen appears as shown below. This screen is displayed when you press the pan display area in the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen or the OVERVIEW screen.
3 8 9 >
1
2
3
1
2
Adjusting F/R
1
Surround graph
This graph shows the surround positions. Press here to open the SURROUND PAN 1CH screen.
2 L/R F/R switch button
Use this toggle button to switch between the screen for adjusting L/R and the screen for adjusting F/R.
You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
3 LFE knob
This sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel.
You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
3
4 5 6 7
1
Surround graph
This graph shows the surround positions.
2 Surround position
You can set the surround position by touching and dragging the ball in the graph.
3
Assign buttons for each bus
All of these buttons are turned on by default. If there is a bus from which you do not want to output an audio signal, turn that button off.
4
L/R knob
This parameter is used to set the left/right surround position.
You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
5 F/R knob
This parameter is used to set the front/rear surround position.
You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
46
V5.8 Reference Manual
6 DIV knob
This determines how the Center signal is fed to the Left, Right, and Center channels.
When set to 0, the Center signal is fed only to the Left and Right channels. When set to
50, the Center signal is fed equally to the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to
100, it’s fed to only the Center channel (i.e., Real Center).
You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
7 LFE knob
This sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel.
You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
8
DEFAULT button
Press this button to reset all parameters to the initial values.
9 COPY button
All parameter settings will be copied in buffer memory.
0 PASTE button
Press this button to paste the copied settings from buffer memory to the current settings. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
Input channels
SURROUND PAN screen (1-32, 33-64/ST IN(QL5), ST IN (QL1))
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the SURROUND PAN screen (1-32, 33-64/
ST IN(QL5), ST IN (QL1)) appears as shown below. This screen is displayed when you press the pan display area in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen or the OVERVIEW screen.
1
2
Adjusting L/R
47
V5.8 Reference Manual
1
2
1
2
Adjusting F/R
1 Surround graph
This graph shows the surround positions.
2 L/R F/R switch button
Use this toggle button to switch between the screen for adjusting L/R and the screen for adjusting F/R.
You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
1 L/R buttons
Use these buttons to set the output destination.
2
Coefficient Setting fader
Use this fader to set the downmix coefficient. There is a ∑ clip indicator.
Input channels
TO STEREO/MONO screen
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the TO STEREO/MONO 8CH screen for
MIX 1-8 appears as shown below. MIX 1-6 are for setting downmixes.
48
V5.8 Reference Manual
Input channels
The TO STEREO/MONO OUTPUT screen appears as shown below. Parameters cannot be set for MIX 1 - 6; this screen is only for displaying parameters.
Channel library operations
Channel libraries include “INPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY,” which enables you to store and recall various parameters (including the head amp settings) for input channels.
To recall a library, press the corresponding LIBRARY button in the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen. For details on using the library, refer to the “Using the libraries” section in the separate Owner’s Manual.
LIBRARY button
49
V5.8 Reference Manual
OUTPUT channels
This chapter explains output channels (MIX channels, MATRIX channels, STEREO channels,
MONO channels).
Signal flow for output channels
The output channel section takes the signals sent from the input channels to the various buses, processes them with EQ and dynamics, and sends them to output ports or other buses. The following types of output channels are provided.
MIX channels
These channels process signals sent from input channels to MIX buses, and output them to the corresponding output port, MATRIX bus, STEREO bus, or MONO (C) bus.
MIX
1 2 1516
ST
L R
M
O
N
O
(C)
MATRIX
(USE 7-8
AS CUE B)
1 2 7 8
CUE (A)
L R
MIX 1-16
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH MIX
INSERT 1, 2 OUT 1-16
MIX
INSERT 1, 2 IN 1-16
INSERT POINT
TRIM
CUE (A) ON
CUE B ON
POST ON INSERT 1, 2 OUT
PRE FADER INSERT 1, 2 OUT
PRE EQ INSERT 1, 2 OUT
PRE EQ
METER
INSERT
ATT
PRE EQ
PRE EQ
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
4BAND
EQ
EQ OUT
METER
DYNA OUT
METER
GR METER
POST EQ
PRE FADER
METER
LEVEL
COMP
COMPAND
INSERT
EXPAND
PRE FADER
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
Key in
Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX13-16 OUT/
MIX(1-8,9-16) POST EQ
PRE FADER
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL
BAL
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL
MATRIX1,3...7
MATRIX2,4...8
LEVEL
LEVEL
ON
ON
PRE FADER / POST ON
To MATRIX
VARI
ON
INSERT
POST ON
METER
MIX OUT1-16
POST ON
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
POST ON
(13-16)To KEY IN
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
To MONITOR SELECT
LEVEL
PAN/BAL
ON
PRE FADER / POST ON
To MATRIX
PAN MODE TO ST TO MONO
ST L
MONO(C)
ST R
TO LCR LCR
POST ON
CSR
OUTPUT channels
STEREO channel/MONO (C) channel
Each of these channels processes the signal sent from the input channels to the STEREO bus or MONO (C) bus, and send it to the corresponding output port or MATRIX bus. If input channels are in LCR mode, the STEREO (L/R) channels and the MONO (C) channel can be used together as a set of three output channels.
MIX
1 2 1516
ST
L R
M
O
N
O
MATRIX
(USE 7-8
AS CUE B) CUE (A)
(C) 1 2 7 8 L R
STEREO L,R,MONO(C)
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH STEREO
INSERT POINT
INSERT 1, 2 OUT L,R,MONO(C)
STEREO
INSERT 1, 2 IN L,R,MONO(C) PRE EQ
METER
INSERT
ATT
PRE EQ
PRE EQ
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
4BAND
EQ
EQ OUT
METER
POST EQ
DYNA OUT
METER
PRE FADER
METER
GR METER LEVEL
COMP
COMPAND
EXPAND
INSERT
PRE FADER
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
Key in
Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX13-16 OUT/
ST(L,R,MONO(C)) POST EQ
PRE FADER
CUE (A) ON
POST ON INSERT 1, 2 OUT
PRE FADER INSERT 1, 2 OUT
PRE EQ INSERT 1, 2 OUT
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL
TRIM
CUE B ON
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL
BAL
MATRIX1,3...7
MATRIX2,4...8
LEVEL
LEVEL
ON
ON
LEVEL
PAN/BAL
ON
PRE FADER / POST ON
To MATRIX
VARI
PRE FADER / POST ON
To MATRIX
VARI
STEREO
ON
POST ON
METER
INSERT
STEREO OUT
L,R,MONO(C)
POST ON
POST ON
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
To OUTPUT PATCH
To MONITOR SELECT
MATRIX channel
These channels process the signals sent from input channels, MIX channels, and STEREO/
MONO channels to MATRIX buses, and send them to the corresponding output ports.
MIX
1 2 1516
ST
L R
M
O
N
O
MATRIX
(USE 7-8
AS CUE B) CUE (A)
(C) 1 2 7 8 L R
MATRIX 1-8
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
MATRIX
INSERT 1, 2 OUT 1-8
MATRIX
INSERT 1, 2 IN 1-8
INSERT POINT
CUE(A) ON
POST ON INSERT 1, 2 OUT
PRE FADER INSERT 1, 2 OUT
PRE EQ INSERT 1, 2 OUT
PRE EQ
METER
INSERT
ATT
PRE EQ
PRE EQ
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
4BAND
EQ
EQ OUT
POST EQ
DYNA OUT
METER METER
GR METER
PRE FADER
METER
LEVEL
COMP
COMPAND
INSERT
EXPAND
Key in
PRE FADER
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
MATRIX1-8 POST EQ
PRE FADER
Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX13-16 OUT/
BAL
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL
POST ON
METER
ON
INSERT
MATRIX OUT 1-8
To OUTPUT PATCH
To MONITOR SELECT
POST ON
INSERT 1, 2 OUT
POST ON
TRIM
CUE B ON
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL
This section does not exist in MATRIX 7-8.
• 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer)
A parametric EQ with four bands: HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, and LOW.
• DYNAMICS 1
This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor, expander, or compander.
• LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the channel.
50
V5.8 Reference Manual
• ON (On/off)
Turns the output channel on or off. If this is off, the corresponding channel will be muted.
• MATRIX ON/OFF (MATRIX send on/off)
This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the MIX channels, STEREO (L/R) channel, or MONO (C) channel to each MATRIX bus.
• MATRIX (MATRIX send level)
Adjusts the send level of signals sent from the MIX channels, STEREO (L/R) channel, or
MONO (C) channel to each MATRIX bus 1–8. For the position from which the signal will be sent to the MATRIX bus, you can choose either immediately before the fader, or immediately after the [ON] key.
If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo, you can use the PAN knob to adjust the panning between the two MATRIX buses. If the send-source is a stereo MIX channel or the STEREO channel, use the BALANCE knob to adjust the volume balance of the left and right channels sent to the two MATRIX buses.
• INSERT
You can patch the desired output/input ports to insert an external device such as an effect processor. You can switch the insert-out and insert-in locations.
• METER
Indicates the level of the output channel.
You can switch the position at which the level is detected.
• KEY IN (MIX channels 13–16 only)
You can send the output signals of MIX channels 13–16 to dynamics processors and use them as key-in signals to control the dynamics.
• RACK IN PATCH
Patches the output signal of an output channel to an input of the rack.
• OUTPUT PATCH
Assigns an output port to an output channel.
• MONITOR SELECT
Selects the output signal of an output channel as a monitor source.
OUTPUT channels
Specifying the channel name, icon, and channel color
STEP
1.
Press the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section and the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select an output channel.
2.
In the OVERVIEW screen, press the channel number/channel name field of the channel for which you want to specify the channel name, icon, and channel color.
3.
Follow the steps for the input channels (
OVERVIEW screen PATCH/NAME screen
51
V5.8 Reference Manual
OUTPUT channels
Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/
MONO bus
There are two ways to send signals to the STEREO bus or MONO bus: ST/MONO mode and
LCR mode. You can select the mode individually for each channel. Features of each mode are the same as for input channels.
STEP
1.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section and the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select the MIX channel from which you want to send the signal to the
STEREO/MONO bus.
2.
In the PAN/BALANCE field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, and then press the knob once again.
3.
Use the MODE select button in the TO STEREO/MONO window to select either ST/
MONO mode or LCR mode for each channel.
4.
In the MAIN section on the top panel, turn on the [ON] key for the STEREO channel/
MONO channel, and then raise the fader to an appropriate level.
5.
Turn on the [ON] keys for those channels, and use the fader in the Channel Strip section to raise the main level of the MIX channel to an appropriate position.
The subsequent steps will differ depending on whether ST/MONO mode or LCR mode was selected for the channel in step 3.
Channels for which ST/MONO mode is selected
6.
In the TO STEREO/MONO window, use the ST/MONO button to turn a signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus on or off.
7.
Use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning of the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus.
Channels for which LCR mode is selected
6.
Turn on the LCR button in the TO STEREO/MONO window.
7.
Press the CSR knob to select it, and use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the level difference between signals sent from that channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus.
8.
Press the TO ST PAN knob to select it, and use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the panning of signals sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, and the level balance of signals sent to the MONO (C) bus and
STEREO (L/R) bus.
4
5
6
1
2
3
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen TO STEREO/MONO window
NOTE
Refer to “
Signal level when LCR mode is selected ” on page 37
for details on how the signal level sent from an LCR mode MIX channel to each bus will change according to the operation of the
TO ST PAN knob.
TO STEREO/MONO window (8ch)
You can control the on/off and pan/balance settings of the signal sent from MIX channels to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, in groups of eight channels.
8
9
7
ST/MONO mode LCR mode
1
Channel select button
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
2 Mode LEDs
The LED of the currently-selected mode will light.
52
V5.8 Reference Manual
3 MODE select button
Press this button repeatedly to toggle between ST/MONO and LCR.
4 ST/MONO buttons
These buttons are individual on/off switches for signals that are sent from each channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus when the MONO button is set to ST/MONO mode.
5 Σ
clipping indicator
Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
6 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
If the type of the MIX channel signal is MONO, this knob will function as a PAN knob that adjusts the left and right pan position of the signal sent to the STEREO bus. If the type of MIX channel signal is STEREO, this knob will function as a BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume level balance of left and right signals sent to the STEREO bus. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
7 Tabs
Enable you to switch between windows.
8 LCR button
This button is an overall on/off button for signals sent from a channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus. If this button is off, no signals will be sent from the corresponding input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus.
9 CSR knob
Adjusts the relative level of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus, in the range of 0–100%. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
OUTPUT channels
TO STEREO/MONO window
(CH1–32, CH33–64/ST IN (QL5), ST IN (QL1), OUTPUT)
This window shows the status of signals sent from the corresponding channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus. You can also adjust the selected pan or balance setting.
23
4
1
Channel select button
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
2 Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
3
TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
Adjusts the panning or balance.
To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the [TOUCH AND
TURN] knob.
If the signal level reaches the overload point at any meter detection point in that channel, the Σ clipping indicator to the right of the knob will light.
4 ST/MONO indicator
If a channel is set to ST/MONO mode, these indicators will individually indicate the on/ off status of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus.
If that channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator will be displayed in this location.
The LCR indicator indicates the on/off status of all signals sent from that channel to the
STEREO bus/MONO bus.
53
V5.8 Reference Manual
Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/
MONO channels to MATRIX buses
You can send a signal from a MIX or STEREO/MONO channel to MATRIX buses 1–8 in the following two ways.
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
With this method, you use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the send levels to the
MATRIX buses. This method allows you to simultaneously control the signals sent from a specific MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO (C) channel to all MATRIX buses.
Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode)
With this method, you switch the QL series unit to SENDS ON FADER mode, and use the faders on the top panel to adjust the level of signals sent to the MATRIX buses. When using this method, signals sent from MIX and STEREO/MONO channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus can be adjusted simultaneously.
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the send level of signals sent from the desired
MIX, STEREO (L/R) or MONO (C) channel to all MATRIX buses.
STEP
1.
Assign an output port to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and connect an external device.
2.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section and the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select the channels that will send signals to the MATRIX buses.
3.
In the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, turn on the TO MATRIX SEND ON/OFF button for the send-destination MATRIX bus.
4.
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses.
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
4
5
6
7
8
9
OUTPUT channels
NOTE
• You can also use the [SEL] key in the MAIN section to directly select the STEREO/MONO channels.
• If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select keys in the Fader Bank section to access the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel, and then press the appropriate [CUE] key in the Channel Strip section.
MATRIX SEND screen
3 1 2
1
ALL PRE button
Sets the send point to PRE. (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all send-source channels — including the input and output channels — to the selected send destination.)
2
ALL POST button
Sets the send point to POST. (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all send-source channels — including the input and output channels — to the selected send destination.)
3
Send destination indicator
Indicates the currently-selected send destination.
4 Send destination select buttons
Select MIX/MATRIX buses as the send destination.
5
Channel select button
Selects the send-source channel that you wish to control. The current channel icon, number, and color appear on the button, and the channel name appears below the button.
54
V5.8 Reference Manual
6 PRE/POST button
Switches the send point of each send-source channel between PRE and POST. If the button is lit, the send point is set to PRE.
7 SEND ON/OFF button
Switches the send of each send-source channel on or off.
8
SEND PAN/BALANCE knob
Sets the panning or balance of signals sent to the stereo send destination. If the send destination is monaural or set to FIXED, this knob will not appear.
If the send source is monaural, this knob functions as a PAN knob.
If the send destination is stereo, this is fixed to BALANCE.
9 SEND LEVEL knob
Indicates the level of signals sent to the selected send destination. You can use the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob to control the level.
OUTPUT channels
Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode)
You can use the faders on the top panel to adjust signals that are sent from the MIX and
STEREO/MONO channels to a specific MATRIX bus.
STEP
1.
Assign an output port to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and connect your monitor system etc. to the corresponding output port.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SENDS ON FADER button, or press the key that is currently lit in the SENDS ON FADER section.
3.
Use the MIX/MATRIX select buttons to switch between MIX/MATRIX.
4.
Use the MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons in the Function Access Area, or the key in the SENDS ON FADER section to select the send-destination MATRIX bus.
5.
Use the faders on the top panel to adjust the send level from the MIX and STEREO/
MONO channels to the selected MATRIX bus.
55
Function
Access Area
NOTE
• Press the SENDS ON FADER button to switch to SENDS ON FADER mode.
The faders in the Channel Strip section and Main section will move to the send levels of the signals that are routed from each channel to the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus. The [ON] keys will also change to the SEND ON status.
• If you press the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus select button again, cue monitoring will be turned on for the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to monitor the signal that is being sent to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus.
• You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a USER DEFINED key. This lets you quickly switch to SENDS ON FADER mode for a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, and quickly switch back again.
V5.8 Reference Manual
OUTPUT channels
Correcting delay between channels (Output Delay)
This Output Delay function is useful when you want to correct the timing of output signals sent to speakers that are located at a distance from each other.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
Press the OUTPUT PORT button in the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of the
SETUP screen.
3.
Specifies the delay time, and turns on the DELAY button.
OUTPUT PORT screen
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
SETUP screen OUTPUT PORT screen
2
9
56
0
1
Slot number/Card type
If an output channel of slot 1–2 is selected for operations, this area indicates the slot number and the type of I/O card installed in that slot.
2
DELAY SCALE button
Press this button to open the DELAY SCALE window, in which you can select the unit for the delay time.
3 Output Port
This is the type and number of the output port to which the channel is assigned.
4
Channel select button
Enables you to select the channel that you want to assign to the output port. The name of the currently-selected channel is displayed.
5
Delay time knob
Sets the delay time of the output port. Press the knob to select it, and then operate the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob. The millisecond delay time value is indicated above the knob, and the delay time value in the units selected in the DELAY SCALE window is indicated below the knob.
NOTE
If you have selected ms (millisecond) as the scale, the delay time value will not appear above the knob.
V5.8 Reference Manual
6 DELAY button
Switches the output port delay on or off.
7 Ø (Phase) button
Switches the phase of the signal assigned to the output port between normal phase
(black) and reverse phase (yellow).
8
GAIN knob
Adjusts the output gain of the output port. To adjust this value, press the knob on screen to select it, and then operate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. Rotate the knob to set the value in 1.0 dB steps. Rotate the knob while pressing and holding it down to set the value in 0.1 dB steps. The current value appears immediately below the knob.
9 Level meter
Indicates the level of the signal assigned to the output port.
0 Tabs
Switch the output ports controlled in groups of up to eight ports. Tabs are categorized into three groups: DANTE, SLOT, and PATCH VIEW. To display tabs in the desired group, press the group name button located at the right or left end of the bottom row.
OUTPUTS
PHONES OUT LR
SURROUND MONITOR 1-6
MONITOR MATRIX OUT 1-6
2
DA
PHONES LEVEL
Tip
Ring
Sleeve
[PHONES]
[SLOT],[OMNI],[DANTE]
[SLOT],[OMNI],[DANTE]
DANTE IN 1-64{32}
INPUT 1-32{16}
SLOT IN 1-2, 1-16
OUT [DIRECT 1-64{32}, MIX1-16, STEREO L,R,MONO(C) ,
MATRIX 1-6, 7-8,(CUE B L,R)]
OUT [MONITOR L,R,MONO(C) ,CUE (A) L,R]
INSERT 1, 2 OUT [CH1-64{32}, MIX1-16, STEREO L,R,MONO(C) ,
MATRIX 1-6, 7-8,(CUE B L,R)]
CASCADE OUT [MIX1-16, STEREO L,R,MONO(C) ,
MATRIX 1-6, 7-8,(CUE B L,R), CUE (A) L,R]
STEREO OUT L
STEREO OUT MONO(C)
STEREO OUT R
STEREO L+C
STEREO R+C
OUTPUT
PATCH
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
METER
GAIN
6 4 { 3 2 }
DANTE
OUTPUT
[DANTE]
(1-64{32})
OUTPUT
PATCH
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
METER
OUTPUT
PATCH
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
METER
METER
GAIN TRIM
1 6 { 8 }
DA +
-
3
2
1
[OMNI OUT]
(1-16{8})
GAIN TRIM
1 6
1 6
SLOT1
SLOT2
[SLOT]
OUTPUT
PATCH
OUTPUT
PATCH
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
METER
METER
GAIN TRIM
DIT
2
AES/EBU
RECORDER CUE
ENCODER
GAIN USB
[DIGITAL OUT]
[2TR RECORDER]
OUTPUT channels
Using the PORT TO PORT function
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
Press the OUTPUT PORT button in the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of the
SETUP screen.
3.
Press the channel select button in the OUTPUT PORT screen.
4.
In the CH SELECT screen, select the output port.
HA AD
INPUT
HA AD
INPUT
SLOT
SLOT DA
OUTPUT
Dante
DA
OUTPUT
SLOT
SLOT
Dante
Use the PORT TO PORT function to output from an input jack on the rear panel to a Dante connector without sending the signal through the mixer. This allows you to use the I/O jacks on QL series consoles as I/O jacks for an audio network.
57
V5.8 Reference Manual
OUTPUT channels
CH SELECT screen
1 2
3
1
Category select list
Select the category of the channel. The categories and channels for the PORT TO PORT function are shown below.
• INPUT IN ................................ INPUT1–32
*1
• SLOT1 IN ............................... SLOT1(1)–SLOT1(16)
• SLOT2 IN ............................... SLOT2(1)–SLOT2(16)
*1. QL1: INPUT1–16
2 Channel select button
Select the channel to be assigned to the output port from the current category.
3
CLOSE button
Closes the screen.
Channel library operations
Channel libraries include “OUTPUT CHANNEL
LIBRARY,” which enables you to store and recall various parameters for output channels.
To recall the library, while an output channel is selected, press the LIBRARY button on the SELECTED
CHANNEL VIEW screen.
For details on using the library, refer to the “Using the libraries” section in the separate Owner’s Manual.
LIBRARY button
58
V5.8 Reference Manual
EQ and Dynamics
Each input channel and output channel on a QL series console provides a four-band EQ and dynamics.
EQ can be used on all input channels and all output channels. An attenuator is provided immediately before the EQ, allowing you to attenuate the level of the input signal so that the
GAIN setting for EQ will not cause the signal to clip. Input channels also provide a high-pass filter that is independent of the EQ.
Input channels provide two dynamics processors: Dynamics 1 can be used as a gate, ducking device, compressor, or expander, while Dynamics 2 can be used as a compressor, hard compander, soft compander, or de-esser. Output channels provide one dynamics processor, which can be used as a compressor, expander, hard compander, or soft compander.
Using EQ
This section explains the four-band EQ that is provided on input channels and output channels.
STEP
1.
Use the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys to select the channel that you want to control.
2.
Press the EQ graph field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
3.
Press the 1ch tab in the HPF/EQ window.
4.
Press the EQ ON button, and adjust the EQ parameters.
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
HPF/EQ window
1
2
3
<
EQ and Dynamics
NOTE
• The EQ field in the OVERVIEW screen shows the response of the EQ. In this OVERVIEW screen, you can edit the parameter by using the EQ knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
• EQ settings can be saved and recalled at any time using the dedicated library. You can also take advantage of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situations.
• You can also access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, and use the knobs in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ and high-pass filter (
).
• Even when the HPF/EQ window is displayed, you can use the knobs in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section to control the EQ.
HPF/EQ window (1ch)
This lets you edit all EQ parameters of the currently-selected channel. This is convenient if you want to make detailed EQ settings for a specific channel.
4 7 8 9 A B C D E
G
F
H
I
J
5
L
K
N
M
O
P
6
1
Channel icon/Channel number/Channel name
This area indicates the icon, number and name of the currently-selected channel.
2 LOW SHELVING ON/OFF button
Turn on this button to select the shelving-type filter for the LOW band.
3
HPF ON/OFF button (Output channels only)
Turn on this button to switch the LOW band to a high pass filter.
NOTE
Output channels do not feature a high-pass filter that is independent of the EQ. However, you can turn on the high-pass filter button on the window to use the LOW band EQ as a high-pass filter.
59
V5.8 Reference Manual
4 EQ type select button
Switches the EQ type to PRECISE, AGGRESSIVE, SMOOTH, or LEGACY.
The following EQ types can be selected.
PRECISE
AGGRESSIVE
SMOOTH
LEGACY
This EQ type features “precision” and “controllability.” It can be used to precisely adjust the desired points, to flexibly respond to a variety of music production needs. The Low/High shelving filters have “Q” parameters that allow knee adjustments.
This EQ type features “effective musical” characteristics. It allows you to create an aggressive tone, making it a very powerful tool for artistic expression.
This EQ type focuses on a “smooth sound quality.” It allows you to create natural sounds without significant modifications to the atmosphere of the original sound.
This is the standard EQ type found in classic Yamaha digital mixers, such as the PM1D and the PM5D. On the left side of the EQ graph, you can switch between TYPE I (an algorithm used in previous Yamaha digital mixers) and
TYPE II (an algorithm that reduces interference between bands).
When the EQ type is set to PRECISE, you can press in and turn the Q knob for the HIGH band to switch between PEQ, shelving type, and low-pass filter.
In addition, you can press in and turn the Q knob for the LOW band to switch between
PEQ and high-pass filter.
NOTE
• This operation is possible only with the EQ Q knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the console’s top panel.
• This operation is not possible with the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
HIGH band
• When set to PEQ (Q=0.10), press in and turn the Q knob to the right to switch to shelving type.
• When set to PEQ (Q=16.0), press in and turn the Q knob to the left to switch to lowpass filter.
• When set to shelving type (Q=10.0), press in and turn the Q knob to the left to switch to PEQ.
• When set to low-pass filter, press in and turn the Q knob to the right to switch to PEQ.
LOW band
• When set to PEQ (Q=0.10), press in and turn the Q knob to the right to switch to shelving type.
• When set to shelving type (Q=10.0), press in and turn the Q knob to the left to switch to PEQ.
60
EQ and Dynamics
5 ATT knob
Indicates the attenuation value before the signal enters the EQ. You can use the [TOUCH
AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
6 Tabs
Use these tabs to select a channel that you want to view on the screen.
7
EQ graph
Displays the parameter values for the EQ and filter.
8 RTA button
If you turn this button ON, a graph indicating the frequency analysis for the input signal after EQ processing is overlaid on the bottom of the EQ frequency graph.
9 HOLD button
Press this button to hold the graph that displays RTA.
0 OFFSET gain knob
If a frequency is at a low level, its analysis results might not appear clearly in a graph.
The addition of offset gain allows better visibility in graphs for such results. You can adjust this gain from 0dB to +30dB.
A LIBRARY button
Press this button to open the EQ Library window.
B DEFAULT button
Press this button to reset all EQ/filter parameters to the initial values.
C COPY button
All EQ parameter settings will be copied in buffer memory.
D PASTE button
Press this button to paste the setting in buffer memory to the current EQ. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
E
COMPARE button
Press this button to swap between the current EQ settings and the data stored in buffer memory. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
NOTE
For details on how to use the
A
-
E
buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate
Owner’s Manual.
F EQ FLAT button
Press this button to reset the GAIN parameters of all EQ band to 0 dB.
G HIGH SHELVING ON/OFF button
Turn on this button to select the shelving-type filter for the HIGH band.
H LPF ON/OFF button
Turn on this button to select the low pass filter for the HIGH band.
V5.8 Reference Manual
I EQ ON/OFF button
Switches the EQ on or off.
J EQ IN/OUT level meters
Indicates the peak level of signals before and after the EQ. For a stereo channel, these meters indicate the level of both the L and R channels.
K
EQ parameter setting knobs
Indicates the Q, FREQUENCY, GAIN parameters, and BYPASS button for the LOW, LOW
MID, HIGH MID, and HIGH bands. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
NOTE
• If the shelving type has been selected for the LOW band, or if HPF is selected for an output channel, the LOW band Q parameter will not appear.
• If shelving type has been selected for the HIGH band, or if LPF is selected, the HIGH band Q parameter will not appear.
• When the BYPASS button is on, the Q, FREQUENCY, and GAIN knobs for that band turn gray.
L HPF ON/OFF button (input channels only)
Switches the HPF on or off.
NOTE
Input channels provide a high-pass filter that is independent of the four-band EQ. Turn on the
HPF ON/OFF button, and use the HPF FREQUENCY knob to adjust the cutoff frequency.
M HPF FREQUENCY knob (input channels only)
Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
N HPF type select button (input channels only)
Switches the HPF attenuation per octave between -12 dB/oct and -6 dB/oct.
O
HA HPF ON indicator
Indicates the HPF on/off status of the external head amp.
P FREQUENCY
Indicates the HPF cutoff frequency of the external head amp.
1
2
3
4
5
EQ and Dynamics
HPF/EQ window (8ch)
This window displays the input channel or output channel EQ settings in groups of 8 channels simultaneously. Use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ settings.
1
Channel select button
Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon and number appear on the button, and the channel name appears immediately below the button.
2 EQ graph
Displays the parameter values for the EQ and filter. The currently-selected EQ type appears below the graph.
3 EQ ON/OFF button
Switches the EQ on or off. The OVER indicator (located to the right above the button) lights if the post-EQ signal is clipping.
4 HPF FREQUENCY knob (input channels only)
Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF. You can use the knobs in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section to adjust this.
5
HPF ON/OFF button (input channels only)
Switches the HPF on or off.
61
V5.8 Reference Manual
HPF/EQ window (CH1–32, CH33–64/ST IN (QL5), ST IN (QL1),
OUTPUT)
This window displays the corresponding input channels (or output channels) simultaneously.
This window is only for display, and does not allow the parameters to be edited. It is useful when you need to quickly check multiple EQ settings, or when you want to copy and paste EQ settings between distant channels.
1
2
EQ and Dynamics
Simultaneously setting EQ type
You can set the EQ type simultaneously for all channels or all racks in the HPF/EQ window or the PEQ EDIT window. You can select channels by category.
STEP
1.
Press the EQ type select button in the window.
2.
Press the GLOBAL SETUP button on the top right side of the popup window.
3.
Select an EQ type and channel category in the GLOBAL EQ TYPE window.
4.
Press the APPLY button.
5.
When the CONFIRMATION dialog box opens, press the OK button.
1
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel that you want to control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. The current channel icon, number, and color appear on the button.
2
EQ graph
This field graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ and filters.
1
GLOBAL SETUP button
Press this button to open the GLOBAL EQ TYPE popup window, where you can set the
EQ type and channel category.
62
V5.8 Reference Manual
2
3
EQ and Dynamics
Using dynamics
Input channels feature two dynamics processors; output channels feature one dynamics processor.
STEP
1.
Use the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys to select the channel for which you want to control the dynamics.
2.
Press the THRESHOLD knob in the DYNAMICS1/DYNAMICS2 field in the SELECTED
CHANNEL VIEW screen.
3.
Press the 1 ch tab in the DYNAMICS1/2 window.
4.
Press the DYNAMICS ON button, and adjust the dynamics parameters.
2 EQ type buttons
Set the EQ type to PRECISE, AGGRESSIVE, SMOOTH, or LEGACY.
3
GLOBAL DESTINATIONS buttons
Set for each category the channels that you set for the selected EQ type. Multiple selections are possible.
If you select 8BandPEQ, the selected EQ type will be set as the default setting.
SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen DYNAMICS1/2 window
NOTE
• The DYNAMICS 1/2 field on the OVERVIEW screen displays the dynamics on/off status and the amount of gain reduction.
• Dynamics settings can be saved and recalled at any time using the dedicated library. You can also take advantage of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situations.
• You can also access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, and use the knobs in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the dynamics settings on page 9
.
• Even when the DYNAMICS 1/2 window is displayed, you can use the knobs in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section to control the dynamics.
63
V5.8 Reference Manual
DYNAMICS1/2 window (1ch)
All dynamics parameters can be viewed and edited by channel. This is convenient when you want to make detailed dynamics settings for a specific channel.
8 1 2 3 4 5
6
0
7
C
A
B
9
D
1 LIBRARY button
Press this button to open the DYNAMICS Library window.
2
DEFAULT button
Press this button to reset all dynamics parameters to the initial values.
3 COPY button
All dynamics parameter settings will be copied in buffer memory.
4
PASTE button
Press this button to apply the settings in buffer memory to the current dynamics. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
5 COMPARE button
Press this button to swap between the current dynamics settings and the data stored in buffer memory. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
NOTE
For details on how to use buttons
1
–
5
, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s
Manual.
6
Channel icon/Channel number/Channel name
This area indicates the icon, number, and name of the currently-selected channel.
EQ and Dynamics
7 Dynamics type buttons
Enables you to select the dynamics type. You can choose from the following dynamics types.
• Dynamics 1 for an input channel
GATE, DUCKING, COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER
• Dynamics 2 for an input channel
COMPRESSOR, COMPANDER-H, COMPANDER-S, DE-ESSER
• Dynamics 1 for an output channel
COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER, COMPANDER-H, COMPANDER-S
8 Dynamics graph
Displays the input/output response of the dynamics processors.
9
Dynamics parameter setting knobs
Indicates the dynamics parameter values. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the values. The type of parameters will vary depending on the currently-selected dynamics type.
• GATE or DUCKING:
• COMPRESSOR or EXPANDER:
• COMPANDER-H or COMPANDER-S:
• DE-ESSER:
64
0 Dynamics IN/OUT level meters, GR meter
These meters indicate the peak level of the signals before and after the dynamics processing, and the amount of gain reduction. For a stereo channel, these meters indicate the level of both the L and R channels.
V5.8 Reference Manual
A KEY IN SOURCE select button
Press this button to display the KEY IN SOURCE SELECT window, in which you can select a key-in signal that will trigger the dynamics.
1
2
3
4
5
EQ and Dynamics
DYNAMICS1/2 window (8ch)
This window displays the input channel or output channel dynamics settings in groups of 8 channels simultaneously. This window is convenient if you want to adjust the threshold or certain other parameters while watching the adjacent channels to the left and the right.
• SELF PRE EQ ....................... The pre-EQ signal of the same channel.
• SELF POST EQ ..................... The post-EQ signal of the same channel.
• MIX OUT 13–16 ..................... Output signals of MIX channels 13–16
• CH1–64 POST EQ (QL5), CH1–32 POST EQ (QL1), ST IN1L–8R POST EQ,
MIX1–16 POST EQ, MTRX1–8 POST EQ, ST L/R, MONO POST EQ
........................ The post-EQ signal of the corresponding channel
*1
*1. The selectable signals are limited to the corresponding eight-channel group.
NOTE
In the case of QL1, channels that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
B
KEY IN FILTER parameter area (Displayed only for Dynamics 1 for an input channel)
Enables you to make various settings for a filter that lets the key-in signal pass.
• Filter select buttons ............. Select the type of filter from HPF, BPF, or LPF. To disable the filter, press the button that is turned on.
• Q knob ................................... Indicates the filter Q. You can use the [TOUCH AND
TURN] knob to adjust the value.
• FREQUENCY knob ............... Indicates the filter cutoff frequency. You can use the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the value.
C
KEY IN CUE button (Displayed only for Dynamics 1 for an input channel)
Enables you to cue-monitor the signal that has been selected as the KEY IN SOURCE signal. Cue will be canceled if you have selected a dynamics type that does not feature this button, or if you move to a different screen.
NOTE
The cue monitoring does not support CUE B.
D
Tabs
Use these tabs to select a channel that you want to view on the screen.
65
1
Channel select button
Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon and number appear on the button, and the channel name appears immediately below the button.
2 DYNAMICS OUTPUT meters, GR meter
Indicate the output levels of signals after dynamics processing, and the amount of gain reduction. If GATE is selected as the dynamics type, a three-step indicator appears, indicating the open/close status of the gate.
Type = Any type other than GATE
Type = GATE
If GATE is selected as the dynamics type, the indicator status means the following:
Gate status
On/Off status
Open/Close status
Amount of gain reduction
Red
On
Close
30 dB or more
Yellow
On
Open less than 30 dB
Green
On
Open
0 dB
Off (dark)
Off
—
—
V5.8 Reference Manual
3 Dynamics graph
Indicates the dynamics parameter values. The currently-selected dynamics type appears below the graph. Press the graph to access the DYNAMICS 1ch window for that channel.
4 THRESHOLD knob
Indicates the threshold value for the dynamics. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the value.
5 DYNAMICS ON/OFF button
Switches dynamics on or off.
DYNAMICS 1/2 window (CH1–32, CH33–64/ST IN (QL5),
ST IN (QL1), OUTPUT)
This window enables you to make settings of the global dynamics parameters for the corresponding channel.
1
2
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon, number, threshold, and color appear on the button.
EQ and Dynamics
2 Dynamics parameter area
This area displays the dynamics type and various meters. Press the area to access the
DYNAMICS 1ch window of that channel.
If DUCKING, EXPANDER, COMPANDER (-H/-S), or DE-ESSER has been selected as the dynamics type, the type appears near the top of this area.
The lower part of this area displays meters that indicate the levels of signals after dynamics processing, the GR meter, and the threshold (a numeric value). If the dynamics processor is any type other than GATE, the threshold setting is indicated as a vertical line.
Using the EQ or Dynamics libraries
You can use dedicated libraries to store and recall EQ and dynamics settings. For details on using the EQ and dynamics libraries, refer to the “Using the libraries” section in the separate
Owner’s Manual.
EQ library
There is an “INPUT EQ LIBRARY” that lets you store/recall EQ settings for input channels, and an “OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY” that lets you store and recall EQ settings for output channels.
To recall settings from a library, press the LIBRARY tool button in the/HPF/EQ window.
LIBRARY button
NOTE
You can recall 199 different settings from both the input EQ library and output EQ library. Forty
(40) of the input library items are read-only presets, and three (3) of the output library items are read-only presets.
Dynamics library
Use the “Dynamics Library” to store and recall dynamics settings. All of the dynamics processors on QL series units use this dynamics library. (However, the available types will differ between an input channel’s Dynamics 1 and Dynamics 2, and an output channel’s
Dynamics 1. You cannot recall a type that cannot be selected.)
To recall an item from the dynamics library, press the LIBRARY tool button in the DYNAMICS
1/2 window.
NOTE
You can recall 199 different settings from the library. Forty-one (41) of these are read-only presets.
66
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Job
Channel Job
This chapter explains the DCA Group and Mute Group functions that enable you to control the level or muting of multiple channels together, the Channel Link function that links the parameters of multiple channels, and the operations that enable you to copy or move parameters between channels.
DCA group
QL series consoles feature sixteen DCA groups that enable you to control the level of multiple channels simultaneously.
DCA groups enable you to assign input and output channels to sixteen groups, so that the
DCA faders can be used to control the level of all channels in each group. A single DCA fader will control the level of all input channels belonging to the same DCA group while maintaining the level difference between the channels. This provides a convenient way in which drum mics, for example, can be grouped.
Assigning channels to a DCA group
There are two ways to assign a channel to a DCA group.
• You can select a specific DCA group and then specify the channels to be assigned to the group.
• You can select a specific channel and then specify the DCA group to which it should be assigned.
NOTE
• DCA group settings are saved as part of the scene.
• With QL V3.0 and later, you can now assign the Stereo/Mono bus main, Mix bus main, and Matrix bus main channels to a DCA group on channels other than input channels. DCA groups were formerly used exclusively for input channels. However, with this new feature, you can use the
DCA groups for output main channels, which enables for more flexible simultaneous controls.
Selecting channels to belong to a specific DCA group
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2.
Press the DCA GROUP button.
3.
Use the DCA GROUP select button to select the DCA group to which you want to assign channels.
4.
Use the [SEL] keys of the input channels to select the input channel s that you want to assign to the group (multiple selections are allowed).
Function
Access Area
CH JOB menu
NOTE
• You can assign a single channel to more than one DCA group. In this case, the value will be the sum of the levels of all assigned DCA group faders.
• The DCA/MUTE GROUP field of the OVERVIEW screen indicates the DCA group(s) to which each channel is assigned. Numbers that are lit yellow in the upper and middle row of this field indicate the DCA groups to which that channel belongs.
67
V5.8 Reference Manual
DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window
Here you can specify the channels that will be assigned to each DCA group.
2
3
4
5
1
8 6 7
1
CLEAR ALL button
Clears all channels that are assigned to the currently-selected DCA group.
2 DCA GROUP ASSIGN/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN buttons
Toggle between the DCA GROUP ASSIGN window and MUTE GROUP ASSIGN window.
3
DCA group assign field
This area displays the channels assigned to the currently-selected DCA group.
While this window is displayed, press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to assign to the DCA group. The channel will be assigned to the DCA group, and the on-screen fader for that channel will turn yellow. Press the same [SEL] key once again if you want to remove the channel from the group.
NOTE
In the case of the QL1, faders that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
4
NAME EDIT button
Edits the group name of the currently-selected DCA group.
When you press this button the keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter or edit the text.
5
DCA group select button
Selects the DCA group that you want to assign.
Channel Job
6 POST ONLY button
Specifies the object of muting in the DCA group as POST only.
7 PRE & POST button
Specifies the object of muting in the DCA group as PRE and POST.
The PRE & POST indicator is shown below a DCA group that has this setting.
NOTE
• You can set the object of muting in the DCA group individually for each DCA group.
• If you mute any of the DCA groups on a channel assigned to multiple DCA groups, the signal route for that channel (including sends to the corresponding bus) will be muted.
8 CLOSE button
Closes the window.
Selecting the DCA groups to which a specific channel will belong
STEP
1.
Press the [SEL] key of the input channels and output channels that you want to operate.
2.
Use the DCA group select buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to select the DCA group(s) to which the currently-selected channel will be assigned (multiple selections are allowed).
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen DCA/MUTE field
68
V5.8 Reference Manual
Controlling DCA groups
Use the DCA faders to control DCA groups.
STEP
1.
Assign input and output channels to DCA groups.
2.
Using the faders in the Channel Strip section or Main section on the top panel, adjust the relative balance between the input and output channels that belong to the DCA group you want to use.
3.
Use the Bank Select keys to select the [ST IN/DCA] key.
4.
Use the Channel Strip section to operate the DCA group.
Using DCA groups
Use the strip section to operate the DCA group.
• Level adjustment: Faders .... The level of the channels assigned to that DCA group can be adjusted while preserving the level differences of each channel. The input faders will not operate at this time.
• On/Mute switch: [ON] key
......................................... When you press an [ON] key in the strip section to make the key indicator go dark, the channels assigned to that DCA group will be muted (the same state as when the faders are lowered to the –∞ dB position).
• Cue monitor: [CUE] key ....... When you press the strip section [CUE] key to make it light, the [CUE] keys of the channels assigned to that
DCA group will blink, and cue monitoring will be enabled. For more information about cue, refer to
“ Using the Cue function ” on page 110
.
Using the temporary unmute function
If one of the DCA group buttons on a channel is OFF (muted), press the [ON] key for that channel to temporarily unmute the channel. However, in Preview mode, any operation during mute with pressing of the [ON] key is disabled.
Example 1: CH 1 is OFF. Assigned to DCA GROUP 1.
Operation Example 1
1.
Press the ON key for DCA 1. The indicator lamp goes off.
The indicator lamp for the ON key for CH 1 remains off. DCA 1 is muted.
2.
Press the ON key for CH 1.
CH 1 is temporarily unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key comes on.
3.
Press the ON key for DCA 1. The indicator lamp comes on.
DCA 1 is unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key for CH 1 comes on.
Example 2: CH 1 is ON. Assigned to MUTE GROUP 1 and DCA GROUP 1.
Operation Example 2
1.
Set MUTE GROUP CONTROL 1 to ON (MUTE).
CH1 is muted, and the ON key flashes.
2.
Press the ON key for CH1.
CH1 is temporarily unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key comes on.
3.
Press the ON key for DCA1. The indicator lamp goes off.
CH1 is muted, and the ON key flashes.
4.
Press the ON key for CH1.
CH1 is temporarily unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key comes on.
5.
Press the ON key for CH1 again.
CH1 is muted again, and the ON key flashes.
6.
Set DCA1 to ON, and MUTE GROUP CONTROL 1 to OFF.
CH1 is unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key comes on.
Channel Job
Mute group
QL series consoles feature eight mute groups.
Mute groups enable you to use USER DEFINED keys [1]–[12] to mute or unmute multiple channels in a single operation. You can use this to cut out multiple channels simultaneously.
Mute groups 1–8 can be used with both input channels and output channels. Both types of channels can exist in the same group.
Assigning channels to mute groups
As with the DCA group, there are the following two ways to assign channels to mute groups.
• You can select a specific mute group first and then specify the channels to be assigned to the group.
• You can select a specific channel and then specify the mute group to which it should be assigned.
69
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Job
Selecting the channels that will belong to a specific mute group
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2.
Press the MUTE GROUP button in the CH JOB menu.
3.
Use the mute group control buttons in the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window to select the mute group to which you want to assign channels.
4.
Press the [SEL] key for the input channels/output channels that you want to operate
(multiple selections are allowed).
2
3
4
5
7
8
DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window
Here you can select the channels that will be assigned to each mute group.
1
6
Function
Access Area
CH JOB menu
NOTE
• You may assign a single channel to more than one mute group.
• The DCA/MUTE GROUP field of the OVERVIEW screen indicates the mute group(s) to which each channel is assigned. Numbers that are lit red in the lower line of this field indicate the mute groups to which that channel belongs.
• If the dimmer level is set to any level other than -∞ dB, these numbers will light orange.
For a channel for which the Mute Safe function ( page 72 ) has been turned on, an “S” indicator
will light up green at the right end of the bottom row.
9
1 CLEAR ALL button
Clears all channels that are assigned to the currently-selected mute group.
2
DCA GROUP ASSIGN/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN buttons
Toggle between the DCA GROUP ASSIGN window and MUTE GROUP ASSIGN window.
3 Mute group assign field
This area displays the channels assigned to the currently-selected mute group.
While this window is displayed, press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to assign to the mute group. The channel will be assigned to the mute group, and the on-screen fader for that channel will turn red. Press the same [SEL] key once again if you want to remove the channel from the group.
If the MUTE SAFE button is on, this field displays the channels that enabled for mute safe
(that is, excluded from the mute groups). The operation procedure to apply or cancel mute safe to the channels is the same as that for assigning or removing channels to or from a mute group. The on-screen faders of the assigned channels will turn green.
4
NAME EDIT button
Edits the group name of the currently-selected mute group.
When you press this button the keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter or edit the text.
70
V5.8 Reference Manual
5 Mute group select button
Selects the mute group that you want to assign.
6 MUTE SAFE button
Use this button if you want to exclude a specific channel from all mute groups, regardless of its assignment settings. The mute group assign field displays the channels that are excluded from the mute groups. For more information on mute safe, refer to
“ Using the Mute Safe function ” on page 72 .
7 MUTE GROUP CONTROL button
Switches the mute for the corresponding mute group on or off.
8
DIMMER LEVEL knob
Sets the dimmer level for the corresponding mute group when the dimmer function is enabled.
NOTE
• In the case of the QL1, faders that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
• If the dimmer level is set to any level other than –∞ dB, and the corresponding MUTE GROUP
CONTROL button is turned on, this button will light orange.
9
CLOSE button
Closes the window.
Selecting the mute groups to which a specific channel will belong
STEP
1.
Press the [SEL] key of the input channels / output channels that you want to operate.
2.
Use the mute group select buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to select the mute group(s) to which the currently-selected channel will be assigned.
(Multiple selections are allowed.)
Channel Job
Using mute groups
To control mute groups, you can use the MUTE GROUP CONTROL buttons in the MUTE
GROUP ASSIGN window. In addition, it may prove convenient if you assign the Mute On/Off function for a mute group 1–8 to a USER DEFINED key.
Assigning mute groups to USER DEFINED keys
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
Press the USER SETUP button in the upper left of the SETUP screen.
3.
Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab in the USER SETUP window.
4.
Press the button for the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign the Mute
On/Off function.
5.
Choose “MUTE GROUP CONTROL” in the FUNCTION column, and choose “MUTE
GROUP x” (where “x” is the mute group number) in the PARAMETER 1 column.
6.
When you press the OK button, the Mute On/Off function will be assigned to the USER
DEFINED key that you selected in step 4.
SETUP screen USER SETUP window
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen DCA/MUTE field
71
USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window
V5.8 Reference Manual
NOTE
The USER SETUP window enables you to limit available functionality by user, and also to make system-wide settings. This window includes several pages, which you can switch between using the tabs located at the bottom of the window.
Turning mute groups on/off with USER DEFINED keys
To mute a mute group, press the USER DEFINED key to which you have assigned the Mute
On/Off function.
The LED of the USER DEFINED key will light, and all channels that belong to the selected mute group will be muted. At this time, the [ON] keys of the muted channels will blink. You can turn on multiple USER DEFINED keys to mute multiple mute groups.
To defeat muting for a mute group, press the USER DEFINED key that you lit.
NOTE
Even if a channel is assigned to a mute group, it will not be affected by operations of the USER
DEFINED key if the [ON] key for that channel is already turned off to begin with.
Using the Mute Safe function
Specific channels that belong to a mute group can be temporarily excluded from mute group operations (Mute Safe). Channels that are set to Mute Safe will not be affected when you mute a mute group to which that channel belongs.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2.
Press the MUTE GROUP button in the CH JOB menu.
3.
Press the MUTE SAFE button in the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window.
4.
Press a [SEL] key for the channel(s) you want to exclude from mute groups (multiple selections are allowed).
Channel Job
NOTE
The [SEL] key of the channel set for Mute Safe will light, and the on-screen fader for that channel will be highlighted in green. You can cancel the Mute Safe status by pressing a lit [SEL] key once again to make it go dark.
Temporarily disabling the Mute function
Mute can be temporarily disabled by turning on the [ON] key; and resumed by turning it off, when you mute one of the mute groups to which that channel belongs. However, this mute control by turning on/off the [ON] key is disabled in the PREVIEW mode.
Using the Recall Safe function
“Recall Safe” is a function that excludes only specific parameters/channels (DCA groups) from
Recall operations. Unlike the Focus Recall function (
), which you can apply to individual scenes, the Recall Safe settings are globally applied to all scenes.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2.
Press the RECALL SAFE button in the CH JOB menu.
3.
Press the [SEL] key for the channel or DCA group that will be affected by Recall Safe operations.
4.
Select the target for Recall Safe operations in the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field in the RECALL SAFE MODE window.
5.
To enable Recall Safe for the selected channel, turn on the SAFE button on. (If you selected a DCA group, turn on either the LEVEL/ON button or the ALL button.)
6.
To enable Recall Safe for global parameters, turn on the buttons of the GLOBAL
RECALL SAFE field.
7.
When you have finished making settings, press the CLOSE button to close the window. Then perform a Recall operation.
CH JOB menu
DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
MODE window
72
Function
Access Area
CH JOB menu
V5.8 Reference Manual
NOTE
• Simply selecting a parameter in step 4 does not enable Recall Safe. To turn Recall Safe on or off, you must also perform the operation described in step 5.
• Bus settings are not subject to Recall Safe. They will always be reproduced in the recalled scene.
This means that if Recall Safe is enabled for one of several channels included in a link group or one of two channels set to stereo, the parameter settings of that channel may differ from those of the other channel(s). In such cases, the applicable parameter will be automatically re-linked the next time it is operated.
You can globally apply Recall Safe to channel links by using the global parameter.
• You can use the Recall Safe function along with the Focus Recall function (
or parameters that are excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be recalled.
• If you hold down the [SEL] key while performing a recall operation, all parameters of that channel will be treated as Recall Safe regardless of the state of the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT selections.
RECALL SAFE MODE window
2 1 4
3
5
6
9
A 7 0 8
1
CLEAR ALL button/SET ALL button
The CLEAR ALL button turns off (disables) the Recall Safe function (that is currently set for individual channels) and the Global Recall Safe function simultaneously. The SET ALL button turns on (enables) these functions simultaneously.
NOTE
The parameters that would be affected by the Recall Safe function will not change.
Channel Job
2 CH RECALL SAFE field
Indicates the channels currently specified to Recall Safe function.
All parameters are affected by Recall Safe on these channels.
Some parameters are affected by Recall Safe on these channels.
Recall Safe has been canceled on these channels.
3
SET BY SEL button
Enables you to use the [SEL] keys on the panel to select channels that will be affected by the Recall Safe function. Turn this button on, and then press the [SEL] key for the channel to which you want to apply Recall Safe. Recall Safe will turn on. Press the same
[SEL] key once again to de-select the channel.
4 GLOBAL RECALL SAFE display field
Indicates the state of Recall Safe settings that are not made in units of channels, and the
Recall Safe settings for racks. Press this field to open the GLOBAL RECALL SAFE window.
These buttons correspond to the following parameters.
HA/PATCH
INPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
CASCADE IN
CASCADE OUT
INPUT NAME
OUTPUT NAME
HA
All input patches
All output patches
CASCADE IN PATCH and CASCADE IN ATT settings
CASCADE OUT PATCH settings
All input channel names
All output channel names
All I/O devices, and HA-related parameters for external head amps
RACK
CUSTOM FADER
BANK
GEQ RACK
EFFECT RACK
PREMIUM RACK
Custom fader bank settings
Apply Recall Safe to GEQ racks 1 - 8, Effect racks 1 - 8,
Premium racks 1- 8 individually.
BUS SETUP
MIX
MATRIX
Sets Recall Safe for MIX 1-16 in the BUS SETUP window.
This setting is applied to a channel pair (one oddnumbered channel and one even-numbered channel).
Sets Recall Safe for MATRIX 1-8 in the BUS SETUP window. This setting is applied to a channel pair (one oddnumbered channel and one even-numbered channel).
SURROUND
SETUP
Surround mode settings.
73
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Job
OTHERs
CH LINK
MUTE GROUP
NAME
FADER BANK
SELECT
All channel link group settings
All Mute group names
FADER BANK selection status, MAIN FADER assign status
NOTE
If a dual-type GEQ rack or Premium rack has been selected, you can apply Recall Safe to rack
A and B individually. For other racks, the setting for racks A and B will be linked.
5 Channel select button
Selects the channel for which you want to set the Recall Safe function.
NOTE
Switching channels using this button will not affect the channel selection on the top panel.
6 Selected channel display
This area indicates the icon, number, color, and name of the currently-selected channel.
7
APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only)
Turn on this button to apply the Recall Safe parameter selection for one input channel to all other input channels.
Turn this on if you want to apply Recall Safe to the same parameters for all input channels.
8 APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button (shown only for output channels)
Turn on this button to apply Recall Safe parameter selection for one output channel to all other output channels.
Turn this on if you want to apply Recall Safe to the same parameters for all output channels.
9 SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field (excluding DCA groups)
Selects Recall Safe parameters for the selected channel.
The button indication varies depending on the channel type.
• Input channel
NOTE
ST IN channels do not feature INSERT, INSERT PATCH, and DIRECT OUT button.
• MIX channel
• MATRIX channel
• STEREO channel
• MONO channel
If Recall Safe is turned on for global parameters, the safe parameter select buttons of the selected channel will light green, as follows.
74
In this illustration, the items that are lit green indicate that the INPUT PATCH, INSERT
PATCH, and DIRECT OUT parameters have been set to Safe by the INPUT PATCH Global parameter settings.
In the same way, turning on the Global parameters INPUT NAME, OUTPUT PATCH, and
OUTPUT NAME will cause the corresponding safe parameters of each channel to light green. On-screen buttons and corresponding parameters apply to the following channels:
Button name Corresponding parameter
Input channel
MIX channel
MATRIX channel
STEREO/
MONO channel
WITH MIX SEND
WITH MATRIX
SEND
ALL
*1
HA
HPF
EQ
Send level to the MIX bus
Send level to MATRIX bus
All parameters
HA-related settings
HPF settings
EQ settings
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
V5.8 Reference Manual
Button name
DYNA 1
DYNA 2
MIX SEND
MATRIX SEND
FADER
CH ON
TO ST
MONO
INPUT PATCH
DIGITAL GAIN
INSERT
*2
INSERT PATCH
*2
DIRECT OUT
MIX ON
MATRIX ON
DELAY
NAME
OUTPUT PATCH
Corresponding parameter
Dynamics 1 settings
Dynamics 2 settings
Send level to MIX bus
Send level to MATRIX bus
Fader settings
[ON] key settings
On/off setting for STEREO bus assignment, PAN, etc.
On/off setting for MONO bus assignment
Input patch settings
Digital gain settings
Insert on/off
Insert patch settings
Direct Out settings
MIX Send On/Off
MATRIX Send On/Off
Delay settings
Channel name
Output patch settings
Input channel
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*3
O
*3
O
*3
MIX channel
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
MATRIX channel
O
O
O
O
O
STEREO/
MONO channel
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
BAL BALANCE parameter settings
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
(STEREO only)
DCA ASSIGN *4
Settings registered in DCA group
O O O O
MUTE ASSIGN
Settings registered in MUTE group
O O O O
*1.
The default setting is ALL on.
*2. Insert 1 and Insert 2 are set together.
*3. ST IN channels do not feature these buttons.
*4. When this button is turned on, the settings registered for the DCA group are targeted for RECALL SAFE.
Settings for DCA 1-16 are made simultaneously. Also, settings are linked according to the channel link for the current scene when the settings are made.
9 SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field (DCA)
Channel Job
For each DCA group, selects the parameters for which Recall Safe is enabled. If the ALL button is on, all DCA main parameters will be subject to Recall Safe. If LEVEL/ON is on,
Recall Safe will apply to the DCA main level and on/off status. If NAME is on, Recall Safe will apply to the DCA group name. Although you can turn on both the LEVEL/ON button and the NAME button, they will then both be switched off if you turn on the ALL button.
0 SAFE button (excluding DCA groups)
When this button is turned on, Recall Safe will be enabled for the selected channel.
NOTE
Even if a parameter is selected with the Safe Parameter Select button, Recall Safe will not be enabled if this button is off.
A CLOSE button
Closes the window.
75
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Link function
Channel Link is a function that links the operation of parameters such as fader and EQ between input and output channels. Two or more channels that are linked are called a “link group”. There is no limit on the number of link groups you can create, or on the number and combinations of channels that can be included in these link groups. You can select the types of parameters to be linked for each link group. However, input channels and output channels cannot coexist on the same link group.
The parameters to be linked can be selected from the following choices.
For an input channel:
• Head amp settings
• Digital gain settings
• HPF settings
• EQ settings
• Dynamics 1 settings
• Dynamics 2 settings
• Insert on and insert point settings
• Direct Out on, Direct Out level, and Direct Out point settings
• Send levels and PRE/POST settings of signals sent to MIX buses
• On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses
• Send levels and PRE/POST settings of signals sent to MATRIX buses
• On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses
• Fader operations
• [ON] key operations
• TO STEREO/MONO setting
• DELAY setting
• DCA GROUP ASSIGN setting
• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN settings
For an output channel:
• EQ settings
• Dynamics settings
• Insert on and insert point settings
• Send levels and PRE/POST settings of signals sent to MATRIX buses *1
• On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses *1
• Fader operations
• [ON] key operations
• TO STEREO/MONO setting *1
• DCA GROUP ASSIGN setting
• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN settings
*1 MATRIX channel not applicable
Channel Job
Linking the desired input channels
This section explains how to link specific parameters of input channels.
NOTE
Channel link settings are saved as part of the scene.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2.
Press the CH LINK button in the CH JOB menu.
3.
To link channels, hold down the [SEL] key for the link-source input channel and press the [SEL] key for the link-destination channel.
4.
Use the buttons of the LINK PARAMETER field in the CH LINK MODE window to select the parameter(s) that will be linked (multiple selections are allowed).
5.
If you turned on the MIX ON, MIX SEND, MATRIX ON, or MATRIX SEND buttons in step 4, use the buttons of the SEND PARAMETER field to specify the bus(es) for which you want operations to be linked (multiple selections are allowed).
Function
Access Area
CH JOB menu
NOTE
• You can also access the CH LINK MODE window by simultaneously pressing and then releasing the [SEL] keys of two or more channels that will be linked.
• When you press the [SEL] key for a channel (that belongs to a link group) to make it light, the
[SEL] keys of all channels that belong to the same link group will blink.
• If you link an input channel to a ST IN channel, parameters that do not exist for a ST IN channel will be ignored.
76
V5.8 Reference Manual
CH LINK MODE window (input channels)
You can view the channels that are linked and specify the parameters that will be linked.
5
1
2
3
4
1 Input channel display field
When you create a link group, the corresponding input channels will be highlighted. If there are two or more link groups, each group is shown in a different color. Press this field to open the CH LINK SET window. You can also link input channels in this window.
NOTE
• Left and right of the ST IN channel are always linked.
• In the case of the QL1, faders that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
2
Link indicator
If an input channel belonging to a link group is selected, the associated link group is shown. The LINK PARAMETER field and SEND PARAMETER field show the link settings.
While you hold down the [SEL] key of an input channel that does not belong to any link group, the link indicator shows the link group that will be created next. The LINK
PARAMETER field and SEND PARAMETER field show the settings of the link group that had been previously displayed.
Channel Job
3 LINK PARAMETER field
Use the buttons in this field to select the parameters that you want to link. You can do this independently for each link group.
The table below lists the parameters you can select in the LINK PARAMETER field.
HA
HPF
DIGITAL GAIN
EQ
DYNAMICS 1, 2
INSERT
DIRECT OUT
MIX SEND
MIX ON
MATRIX SEND
MATRIX ON
FADER
DCA
CH ON
MUTE
TO STEREO
DELAY
Head amp settings
However, for wireless devices, the GAIN parameter for the receiver side is not included.
HPF settings
Digital gain settings
EQ settings
Dynamics 1 and 2 settings
Insert settings
Direct Out settings
Send levels of signals sent to MIX buses
On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses
Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses
On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses
Fader operations
DCA group assignment
Channel on/off
Mute group assignment
On/off status of signals sent to STEREO/MONO buses
Channel delay settings
NOTE
• If you link Dynamics 1 or 2 for two or more input channels, the parameter values will be linked, but the key-in sources are not linked and can instead be set for each channel. The behavior of
* Units of 8ch means Ch1–8, Ch9–16, Ch17–24, Ch25–32, Ch33–40, Ch41–48, Ch49–56,
Ch57–64, ST IN 1L–ST IN 4R, and ST IN 5L–ST IN 8R.
• If you turn on the EQ button or DYNAMICS 1/2 buttons, library recall operations will also be linked.
• The HA analog gain setting and the fader operation will be linked and will maintain the same relative level difference between the channels.
• In the insert settings, the parameters for Insert 1 and Insert 2 are selected together.
77
V5.8 Reference Manual
4 SEND PARAMETER field
If you have turned on the MIX ON, MIX SEND, MATRIX ON, or MATRIX send buttons in the LINK PARAMETER field, use the buttons in this field to specify the send-destination bus(es).
MIX1–16
MTRX 1–8
MIX buses 1–16
MATRIX buses 1–8
NOTE
If nothing is selected in the SEND PARAMETER field, send on/off and send level will not be linked.
5 INPUT/OUTPUT button
Use this button to switch between the Input Channels screen and the Output Channels screen.
Channel link operations
• Linking three or more channels
Hold down the link-source [SEL] key and successively press the [SEL] key of each channel you want to add to the link group.
• Adding a new channel to an existing link group
Hold down any [SEL] key within the group and press the [SEL] key that you want to add to the group.
NOTE
If the link-destination channel is already assigned to another link group, its assignment to the previous group will be canceled, and it will be added to the newly assigned group.
• Removing a channel from a link group
Hold down any [SEL] key in the same link group, and press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to remove.
• Changing the level balance between channels that belong to the same link group
While pressing and holding down the [SEL] key for the desired linked channel, adjust the parameter value. You can also remove all linked channels from the same link group temporarily. This can be helpful if you want to edit parameters that are linked to each other while maintaining the same relative level differences. For example, this may be the case for parameters such as the HA analog gain and fader. While you are holding down the [SEL] key, the HA analog gain and fader values will not be linked. (However, you cannot temporarily cancel this link during the “fading” phase of a recalled scene.)
CH LINK MODE window (output channels)
4
5
Channel Job
You can view the output channels that are linked and specify the parameters that will be linked.
1
2
3
1
Output channel display field
When you create a link group, the corresponding output channels will be highlighted.
If there are two or more link groups, each group is shown in a different color. Press this field to open the CH LINK SET window. You can also link output channels in this window.
NOTE
In the case of the QL1, faders that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
2 Link indicator
If an output channel belonging to a link group is selected, the associated link group is shown. The LINK PARAMETER field and SEND PARAMETER field show the link settings.
While you hold down the [SEL] key of an output channel that does not belong to any link group, the link indicator shows the link group that will be created next. The LINK
PARAMETER field and SEND PARAMETER field show the settings of the link group that had been previously displayed.
78
V5.8 Reference Manual
3 LINK PARAMETER field
Use the buttons in this field to select the parameters that you want to be linked. You can do this independently for each link group.
The table below lists the parameters you can select in the LINK PARAMETER field.
EQ
DYNAMICS
INSERT
MATRIX SEND
MATRIX ON
FADER
CH ON
TO STEREO
DCA
MUTE
EQ settings
Dynamics settings
Insert settings
Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses *1
On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses *1
Fader operations
Channel on/off
On/off status of signals sent to STEREO/MONO buses *1
DCA group assignment
Mute group assignment
*1 MATRIX channel not applicable
NOTE
• If you link Dynamics for two or more output channels, the parameter values will be linked, but the key-in sources are not linked and can instead be set for each channel. The behavior of key-in
signals is linked in units of 8ch*. For details about dynamics, see “ EQ and Dynamics ” ( page 59 ).
* Units of 8ch means MIX1–MIX8, MIX9–MIX16, and MATRIX1–MATRIX8.
• If you turn on the EQ button or DYNAMICS button, library recall operations will also be linked.
• In the insert settings, the parameters for Insert 1 and Insert 2 are selected together.
4 SEND PARAMETER field
If you have turned on the MATRIX ON or MATRIX send buttons in the LINK PARAMETER field, use the buttons in this field to specify the send-destination bus(es).
MTRX 1-8 MATRIX buses 1-8
NOTE
If nothing is selected in the SEND PARAMETER field, send on/off and send level will not be linked.
5
INPUT/OUTPUT button
Use this button to switch between the Input Channels screen and the Output Channels screen.
Channel Job
Channel link operations
• Linking three or more channels
Hold down the link-source [SEL] key and successively press the [SEL] key of each output channel you want to add to the link group.
• Adding a new channel to an existing link group
Hold down any [SEL] key within the group and press the [SEL] key that you want to add to the group.
NOTE
If the link-destination output channel is already assigned to another link group, its assignment to the previous group will be canceled, and it will be added to the newly assigned group.
• Removing a channel from a link group
Hold down any [SEL] key in the same link group, and press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to remove.
• Changing the level balance between channels that belong to the same link group
While pressing and holding down the [SEL] key for the desired linked channel, adjust the parameter value. You can also remove all linked channels from the same link group temporarily. This can be helpful if you want to edit parameters that are linked to each other while maintaining the same relative level differences. While you are holding down the [SEL] key, the fader values will not be linked. (However, you cannot temporarily cancel this link during the “fading” phase of a recalled scene.)
79
V5.8 Reference Manual
CH LINK SET window
Displayed when you press the channel display field in the CH LINK MODE window. You can also link channels in this window.
1
2 3 5 4
1 Channel select button
Select a channel that you want to link. The selected input channel will be indicated in blue, the selected output channel will be indicated in orange, and the alphabetical character that indicates the link group will appear for linked channels.
Channel Job
5 CLOSE button
Closes the window.
NOTE
If you use QL5 settings data on the QL1, buttons will be shown crossed-out if they are assigned to a channel that does not exist on that model.
Copying, moving, or initializing a channel
You can copy or move mix parameters between channels, or restore the parameters of a specific channel to their default settings.
Copying the parameters of a channel
You can copy the mix parameter settings of a channel to another channel. When you execute the copy operation, the settings will overwrite the parameters of the copy-destination.
You can copy between the following combinations of channels.
• Between input channels
• Between the STEREO L/R channel and MONO channel
• Between MIX channels
• Between MATRIX channels
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2.
Press the COPY button in the CH JOB menu.
3.
Press a [SEL] key to select the copy-source channel.
4.
Press the [SEL] key for the copy-destination channel (multiple selections are allowed).
5.
If you have selected a MIX/MATRIX channel as the copy-source, use the buttons in the COPY TARGET field to select the parameters you want to copy.
6.
Press the COPY button to execute the copy.
When selecting a channel
2 LINK buttons
Link the channel selected in 1 .
3
UNLINK button
Cancels the link selected in 1 .
4 UNSELECT ALL
De-selects all selected channels.
When linking channels
80
V5.8 Reference Manual
Function
Access Area
CH JOB menu
CH COPY MODE window
This window enables you to copy channel settings.
1 4 2 3
Channel Job
1 SOURCE CH field
Displays the copy-source channel. While this window is displayed, press a [SEL] key on the top panel to select a channel. The selected channel will be highlighted in this field.
If you want to re-select the copy-source channel, press this field.
Before selection After selection
If the copy source is a MIX/MATRIX channel, buttons will appear so you will be able to select parameters to copy.
If these buttons are turned on, the following parameters will be copied:
• MODULE PARAMETERS button
Selected channel module parameters
• WITH MIX SEND/WITH MATRIX SEND button
SEND parameters of signals sent to the selected channel
81
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Job
2 DESTINATION CHs field
Displays the copy-destination channel. When you specify the copy source, you can then select a copy-destination channel (multiple selections are allowed) by pressing its
[SEL] key on the panel, and this field will be highlighted.
If you want to defeat all of the selected copy-destination channels, press the DESTINATION CHs field.
NOTE
In the case of the QL1, faders that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
3
COPY button
Executes the copy operation. After selecting the copy-source channel and copydestination channel(s), press this button to execute the copy operation.
4 CLOSE button
Press this button to close the window and return to the previous screen.
Moving the parameters of a channel
The settings of a specific input channel can be moved to a different input channel. When you execute a Move operation, the numbering of the channels between the move-source and move-destination will move forward or backward by one.
Move
1 2 3 4 5
Function
Access Area
CH JOB menu
CH MOVE MODE window
1
1 5 2 3
Move by one.
4
You can move settings between the following combinations of channels.
• Between input channels
• Between ST IN channels
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2.
Press the MOVE button in the CH JOB menu.
3.
Press a [SEL] key to select the move-source channel.
4.
Press the [SEL] key for the move-destination channel.
5.
To execute the move, press the MOVE button.
2
3
4
1 SOURCE CH field
Displays the move-source channel. While this window is displayed, press a [SEL] key on the top panel to select an input channel. The selected channel will be highlighted in this field. If you want to re-select the move-source channel, press this field.
2 DESTINATION CH field
Displays the move-destination channel. When you specify the move-source, you can then select the move-destination input channel by pressing its [SEL] key on the panel.
When the move-destination channel is selected, this field will be highlighted. If you want to defeat the selected move-destination channel, press the DESTINATION CH field.
82
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Job
NOTE
In the case of the QL1, faders that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
3 MOVE button
Executes a move operation. After selecting the move-source channel and move-destination channel, the channel settings move from the move-source to the move-destination. The settings of all channels between the move-source and move-destination will shift toward the move-source by one channel.
4
CLOSE button
Press this button to close the window and return to the previous screen.
Initializing the parameters of a channel
You can restore the parameters of a channel to an initialized state. This operation can be performed on any channel(s).
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2.
Press the DEFAULT button in the CH JOB menu.
3.
Press the [SEL] key of the channel(s) to be initialized to make it light (multiple selections are allowed).
4.
Press the DEFAULT button to execute the Initialization.
Function
Access Area
CH JOB menu
NOTE
After initialization, the TARGET CHs field will be empty (nothing is selected).
CH DEFAULT MODE window
Enables you to initialize parameters.
1
83
2
3
1 TARGET CHs field
Indicates the channel selected for initialization. While this window is displayed, press a
[SEL] key on the top panel to select an input channel (multiple selection is allowed). The field will indicate the selected channel(s). Press the same [SEL] key once again to de-select the channel.
NOTE
• If you press this field while a channel is selected, all selected channels will be de-selected.
• In the case of the QL1, faders that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
2
DEFAULT button
After selecting the channel, press this button to execute the initialization operation.
V5.8 Reference Manual
Channel Job
3 CLOSE button
Press this button to close the window and return to the previous screen.
About Mix Minus
The Mix Minus function removes a specific channel signal from the signals sent to the MIX/
MATRIX buses. You can use this function to quickly send monitoring signals to a performer or announcer simply by removing his or her audio signal.
NOTE
This Mix Minus function is a shortcut for settings, rather than an operation to switch between modes. Therefore, even after using this function, you can still edit any parameter on the window without restrictions.
STEP
1.
Hold the [SEL] key while pressing the MIX/MATRIX bus key in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section.
2.
The MIX MINUS popup window will open.
3.
If you wish to remove an additional input channel, press the corresponding [SEL] key.
4.
If necessary, in the DESTINATION field, select a bus.
You cannot select a FIXED bus.
5.
Press the OK button to set the parameters as follows:
• The send level of the signals sent from the selected input channels is lowered to-∞dB.
• The send level of the signals sent from all other input channels is set to nominal
(0.0dB).
• Send to the destination bus is turned on, and the send point is switched to POST.
• For the stereo input channels, the send level of the signal sent from both channels is set to -∞ dB.
NOTE
You can also access the MIX MINUS popup window by pressing the CH JOB button in the
Function Access Area, then pressing the MIX MINUS button.
84
V5.8 Reference Manual
Scene memory
On QL series consoles, you can assign a name to a set of mix parameter and input/output port patch settings, and store the mix settings in memory (and later recall them from memory) as a “scene.”
Each scene is assigned a number in the range of 000–300. Scene 000 is a read-only scene used to initialize the mix parameters. Scenes 001–300 are writable scenes.
Each scene contains the position of the top panel faders and [ON] key status, as well as the following parameters.
• Input/output port patching
• Channel name and color
• Bus settings
• Head amp settings
• Digital gain settings
• EQ settings
• Dynamics 1 and 2 settings
• Input delay settings
• Rack (GEQ/Effect/Premium Rack) settings
• Pan/balance settings
• Insert/Direct Out settings
• On/off status and send level of signals sent to MIX buses
• On/off status and send level of signals sent to MATRIX buses
• Settings for signals sent to the STEREO/MONO bus
• DCA group settings
• Mute group settings
• Channel link settings
• Panel assignment status (PANEL SNAPSHOT)
• CUSTOM FADER BANK settings
The number of the currently-selected scene appears in the SCENE field of the Function
Access Area.
Scene memory
SCENE field
1 2 2
4
3
You can press the SCENE field to access the SCENE LIST window, in which you can view and edit additional settings for the scene.
1 Scene number
Indicates the number of the currently-selected scene. When you select a new scene number, the number will blink. This blinking indicates that the displayed scene number is different than the currently-loaded scene number.
2 R symbol (READ ONLY)/Protect symbol
Read-only scenes are indicated by an R symbol (READ ONLY) displayed here.
Write-protected scenes are indicated by a Protect symbol.
3
Scene title
Indicates the title of the currently-selected scene.
4 E symbol (EDIT symbol)
This symbol appears when you edit the mix parameters for the currently-loaded scene.
This symbol indicates that you must execute the Store operation if you want to keep the changes you made.
NOTE
You cannot store data to a scene number for which the Protect symbol or R symbol is displayed.
85
V5.8 Reference Manual
Scene memory
Storing and recalling scenes
To store or recall the current mix settings as a scene memory, use the SCENE LIST window.
Storing a scene
Using the SCENE LIST window
STEP
1.
Use the controllers on the top panel or the buttons on the touch screen to set the mix parameters as desired.
2.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
3.
Turn the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the store-destination scene number.
4.
Press the STORE button in the SCENE LIST window.
5.
Assign a title or comment to the scene as desired.
6.
Press the STORE button located in the lower part of the SCENE STORE window.
7.
Press the OK button in the STORE CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Store operation.
NOTE
• You can select multiple scene numbers as the store-destination. To do so, press the MULTI
SELECT button to turn it on, and then rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. Alternatively, rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob while pressing and holding it down.
• If you selected multiple scenes as the store-destination, the same contents will be stored in all selected scene numbers. This is convenient if you want to create several variations based on the same mix settings.
SCENE STORE window
1 2
1
SCENE TITLE field
Press this field to select it, and then enter a title for the scene (maximum 16 characters).
2 COMMENT field
Press this field to select it, and then enter a comment for the scene. You can use this as a memorandum for each scene (maximum 32 characters).
NOTE
For details on entering text, refer to “Assigning a name” in the separate Owner’s Manual.
86
V5.8 Reference Manual
SCENE LIST window
2
5
4
3
6
Here you can perform various scene-related operations. This window will appear when you press the SCENE field.
E 1
7
8
9@ A B C D
1 Scene list
This area lists various data about the scenes stored in memory.
2
NO./TITLE buttons
Press these buttons to sort the listed scenes by number or title. Press the same button repeatedly to toggle between ascending order and descending order.
3 Scene number
Indicates the scene number.
4 Scene title
Indicates the scene title. Press this button to display the SCENE TITLE EDIT window, in which you can edit the title.
5
R symbol (READ ONLY)/Protect symbol
An “R” symbol is displayed for read-only scenes, and a protect (lock) icon is displayed for write-protected scenes.
Scene memory
To enable/disable the scene protect setting, press the R symbol or protect symbol of the selected scene. Pressing the protect (lock) symbol or the R (read-only) symbol repeatedly will switch between displaying and hiding the corresponding symbol.
• Protect (lock) symbol
You will be unable to overwrite the scene.
• R (READ ONLY) symbol
Not only will the scene be protected, it will also not be overwritten by any file loaded from a USB flash drive. You can only apply the protect setting to scenes with consecutive scene numbers starting with scene #001.
• No symbol
No scene will be protected.
NOTE
The R symbol for scene number 000 cannot be disabled.
6 Current scene
The currently-selected scene (that is, the current scene) is highlighted in blue in the list.
If you press another scene number in the list, the list will scroll and that scene will become the current scene.
7 SCENE SELECT knob
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select a scene. You can view the currently-selected scene number immediately below the SCENE SELECT knob. You can select consecutive multiple scenes by rotating the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob while pressing and holding it down.
8 MULTI SELECT button
You can select consecutive multiple scenes by turning on this button and rotating the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
9 LAST SCENE button
Selects the scene that was recalled most recently.
0 SCENE STORE button
This button stores the current mix settings. Press this button to display the SCENE
STORE window, which will enable you to assign a name to a scene and store it.
A STORE UNDO button
Undoes the Store operation. This button is valid only immediately after you perform an
Overwrite-store operation.
NOTE
• The STORE UNDO button is available only immediately after overwrite-storing.
• You can also assign the function of the STORE UNDO button to a USER DEFINED key
).
B RECALL SCENE button
Recalls the currently-selected scene.
87
V5.8 Reference Manual
C RECALL UNDO button
Undoes the Recall operation. This button is valid only immediately after you perform a
Recall operation.
D Page switching tabs
Switch the views for the right side of the SCENE LIST window.
E
PREVIEW button
Press this to select PREVIEW mode, which allows you to view and edit the scene settings in the display and the panel without affecting the signal processing of the current scene.
Recalling a scene
STEP
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2.
Rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the scene number to recall.
3.
Press the RECALL button in the SCENE LIST window.
SCENE LIST window
Scene memory
1 RECALL SCENE button
Recalls the currently-selected scene.
2 RECALL UNDO button
Undoes the Recall operation. This button is valid only immediately after you perform a
Recall operation.
NOTE
• You can also assign the function of the RECALL UNDO button to a USER DEFINED key
).
• You can also use MIDI messages (Program Changes) to recall scenes ( page 188 ).
1 2
88
V5.8 Reference Manual
Using USER DEFINED keys to recall
You can use the USER DEFINED keys to recall a selected scene with a single keystroke, or to step through the scenes. To do this, you must first assign a scene recall operation to a
USER DEFINED key. The following recall operations can be assigned to a USER DEFINED key.
• RECALL
Immediately recalls the currently-loaded scene.
• INC RECALL
Immediately recalls the scene of the number that follows the currently-loaded scene.
• DEC RECALL
Immediately recalls the scene of the number that precedes the currently-loaded scene.
NOTE
If no scene is stored in the number that precedes or follows the currently-loaded scene, the closest scene number in which a scene is stored will be recalled.
• DIRECT RECALL
Directly recalls the scene number that you assigned to the USER DEFINED key. When you press a USER DEFINED key to which this function is assigned, the assigned scene will be recalled immediately.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
Press the USER SETUP button in the upper left of the SETUP screen.
3.
Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab in the USER SETUP window.
4.
Press the button for the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign a function.
5.
In the FUNCTION column, select “SCENE.”
6.
Selects the function you want to assign.
• To assign INC RECALL or DEC RECALL
Choose “INC RECALL” or “DEC RECALL” in the PARAMETER 1 column.
• To assign DIRECT RECALL
Choose “DIRECT RECALL” in the PARAMETER 1 column, and choose “SCENE #xxx” (xxx is the scene number) in the PARAMETER 2 column.
7.
When you have finished making settings, press the OK button to close the window.
8.
Press the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign a recall function.
SETUP screen
USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window
USER SETUP window
Scene memory
89
V5.8 Reference Manual
Editing scene memories
This section explains how to sort the scenes stored in scene memory, edit their titles, and copy and paste them.
Sorting scene memories
STEP
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2.
Press the COMMENT tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
3.
Rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob on the top panel to select a scene.
4.
Edit the scene.
SCENE LIST window
1 2 1 1
3
6
5
4
7
8
Scene memory
1 Sort button
The list will be sorted as follows, according to the column heading you press.
• NO.
Sorts the list in order of scene number.
• TITLE
Sorts the list in numerical/alphabetical order of title.
• COMMENT
Sorts the list in numerical/alphabetical order of comments.
• TIME STAMP
Sorts the list in order of date of creation.
NOTE
By pressing the same location again, you can change the sorting order (ascending or descending).
2 Write-protect
Indicates the Write Protect on/off status. Press this button to write-protect the scene. A lock icon will appear. Press it again to cancel write protection.
3 TITLE field
Press this field to open the SCENE TITLE EDIT window, in which you can enter the title for the scene. You can edit titles in this window.
4 COMMENT field
Press this field to open the SCENE COMMENT EDIT window, in which you can enter comments for the scene. You can edit comments in this window.
5
STATUS field
Indicators in this field indicate the setting status of the FOCUS, FADE TIME, PLAYBACK
(playback link), and GPI (General Purpose Interface) functions. (The Playback Link function plays a desired song in a specified time duration after a scene is recalled.)
6
TIME STAMP field
Indicates the date and time the scene was stored.
For details on the TIME STAMP display format, refer to “
Setting the date and time of the internal clock ” on page 247 .
7
CURRENT SETTING field
Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. Changes made here are immediately reflected on the QL series console.
8 Tabs
Enable you to switch between items. You can use tabs to switch the view of the right half of the window between five different fields (COMMENT/FOCUS/FADE TIME/GPI
OUT/PLAYBACK LINK).
90
V5.8 Reference Manual
Scene memory editing
The scenes stored in scene memory can be copied and pasted to other scene numbers, or cleared (erased). You can edit scene memories using the buttons located in the upper part of the SCENE LIST window.
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 COPY button
Press this button to copy the scene to buffer memory.
2 PASTE button
Press this button to overwrite the selected scene with the scene in buffer memory.
3 CLEAR button
Press this button to erase the selected scene.
4 CUT button
Press this button to delete the selected scene and copy it to buffer memory. The numbers of the subsequent scenes will be decremented by one.
5
INSERT button
Press this button to insert the scene copied to buffer memory into the selected scene number. The numbers of the subsequent scenes will be incremented by one.
6 UNDO button
Cancels the most recent scene memory paste, clear, cut, or insert operation and restores the previous state.
Scene memory
Copying and pasting a scene
You can copy a scene into buffer memory, and then paste it to a different scene number.
NOTE
The Global Paste function enables you to copy any channel or any parameter settings for the current scene, then paste the data into any single or multiple scenes in memory (
).
STEP
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2.
Rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the copy-source scene number, and then press the COPY button in the SCENE LIST window.
3.
Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the copy.
4.
Rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the paste-destination scene number, and then press the PASTE button.
5.
Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the paste operation.
NOTE
• Be aware that if you copy or cut another scene before you paste, the newly copied or cut scene will overwrite the scene in the buffer memory.
• You cannot select multiple scenes as the copy-source.
• You can select multiple paste-destination scenes. To do so, press the MULTI SELECT button to turn it on, and then rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. In this case, the same content will be pasted to all selected scenes.
• A copied scene can also be inserted ( page 92 ).
• If nothing has been copied to the buffer memory, the PASTE button will be unavailable.
Clearing a scene
STEP
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2.
Rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the scene number to clear, and then press the CLEAR button in the SCENE LIST window.
3.
Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Clear operation.
NOTE
• You may select multiple scenes to be cleared. To do so, press the MULTI SELECT button to turn it on, and then rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
• Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be cleared.
91
V5.8 Reference Manual
Cutting a scene
This section explains how to cut a scene.
When you cut a scene, the numbers of the subsequent scenes will be decremented accordingly. You can paste or insert a cut scene at the desired location. To cut a scene, sort the scene list in order of scene number.
STEP
1.
Press the SCENE field in the SCENE LIST window of the Function Access Area.
2.
Rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the scene number to cut, and then press the CUT button in the SCENE LIST window.
3.
Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Cut operation.
4.
If desired, you can paste ( page 91 ) or insert the cut scene (that was copied to the
buffer memory).
NOTE
• Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be cut.
• Be aware that if you copy or cut another scene before you paste or insert, the newly copied or cut scene will overwrite the scene in the buffer memory.
Inserting a scene
You can insert a scene copied to buffer memory at a desired scene number location. To insert a scene, sort the scene list in order of scene number.
STEP
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2.
Copy (
page 91 ) or cut the scene you want to insert.
3.
Rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the insert-source scene number, and then press the INSERT button in the SCENE LIST window.
4.
Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Insert operation.
NOTE
• If you select multiple scenes as the insert-destination, the same scene will be inserted the selected number of times.
• If nothing has been copied to the buffer memory, the INSERT button is not available.
• The INSERT button will be unavailable if there is already a scene stored at scene number 300, or if the Insert operation would cause an already-stored scene to exceed number 300.
• When you insert a scene, scenes that were stored in subsequent numbers following that location will be updated and increase by the number of scenes that were inserted.
Scene memory
Using the Global Paste function
“Global Paste” is a function that lets you copy and paste settings for the desired channel or parameter from the current scene to scene data in memory (multiple selections are allowed).
This can be convenient if you want to apply changes (that you made to the current scene) to multiple scenes that have already been stored.
NOTE
The Global Paste function will be available for a user if the SCENE LIST STORE/SORT parameter is turned on in his or her user level settings.
STEP
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2.
Press the GLOBAL PASTE button in the SCENE LIST window.
3.
Use the tabs in the GLOBAL PASTE window to select the item you want to copy.
4.
Press the [SEL] key on the top panel to select the copy-source channel, and then press the button in the window to select a parameter.
5.
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the range of paste-destination scenes.
6.
Press the PASTE button to execute the paste operation.
SCENE LIST window GLOBAL PASTE window
NOTE
• A progress bar will be displayed as the data is being pasted.
• During the paste operation, the STOP button will appear. Press the STOP button if you want to abort the operation. In that case, part of the data will be pasted and you will be unable to undo the operation.
• You cannot select different parameters from different channels.
92
V5.8 Reference Manual
GLOBAL PASTE window
1
2
3
4
1
SET BY SEL button
Turn on this button to add a channel by using the corresponding [SEL] key.
2 CLEAR ALL button/SET ALL button
The CLEAR ALL button clears all of the selected channels. The SET ALL button selects all channels simultaneously.
NOTE
In the case of the QL1, faders that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
3 SEND PARAMETER field
Press this field to open the SEND PARAMETER screen. In the SEND PARATMER screen, set whether to enable global paste for bus selection and send level.
93
Scene memory
4 Tabs
Enable you to switch between items.
• INPUT tab
Select an input channel in the upper left area, and select its parameter in the lower left area.
You can select the following parameters.
ALL
INPUT PATCH
NAME
HA
DELAY
HPF
DIGITAL GAIN
EQ
DYNA1
DYNA2
MIX SEND
MATRIX SEND
FADER
CH ON
INSERT
*1
INSERT PATCH
*1
DIRECT OUT
MIX ON
MATRIX ON
TO ST
MONO
DCA ASSIGN
*2
MUTE ASSIGN
*2
All input channel parameters
Input patch settings
Channel name, icon, and channel color
Settings for the head amp assigned to the corresponding input channel, and phase
Input delay settings
HPF settings
Digital gain settings for the corresponding input channel
EQ settings
Dynamics 1 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE and KEY IN FILTER)
Dynamics 2 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE)
Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MIX bus
Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MATRIX bus
Fader level
On/off status of [ON] keys
Insert on/off status and insert point
Insert in/out patch settings, head amp settings for insert-in
Direct Out on/off, Direct Out level, Direct Out point and patch settings
Send on/off to a MIX bus
Send on/off to a MATRIX bus
TO ST on/off, pan/balance settings
TO MONO on/off
Settings registered in DCA group
Settings registered in MUTE group
*1. The parameters for Insert 1 and Insert 2 are selected together.
*2. Settings are linked according to the channel link for the current scene when the settings are made.
• OUTPUT tab
Select an output channel in the upper left area, and select its parameter in the lower left area.
You can select the following parameters.
ALL All output channel parameters
OUTPUT PATCH Output patch settings
NAME Channel name, icon, and channel color
V5.8 Reference Manual
EQ
DYNA 1
INSERT
*1
INSERT PATCH
*1
FADER
CH ON
TO ST/BAL
MONO
MATRIX SEND
MATRIX ON
WITH SEND
FROM SOURCE
CHs
DCA ASSIGN
*2
MUTE ASSIGN
*2
EQ settings
Dynamics 1 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE)
Insert on/off status and insert point
Insert in/out patch settings, head amp settings for insert-in
Fader level
On/off status of [ON] keys
TO ST on/off, pan/balance settings
TO MONO on/off status (MIX 1–16 only)
Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MATRIX bus
Send on/off to a MATRIX bus
SEND parameters of the send-source signal that will be sent to a channel
Settings registered in DCA group
Settings registered in MUTE group
*1. The parameters for Insert 1 and Insert 2 are selected together.
*2. Settings are linked according to the channel link for the current scene when the settings are made.
• BUS SETUP tab
You can select the following parameters.
MIX1/2 - 15/16
MATRIX1/2 - 7/8
Sets Recall Safe for MIX 1-16 in the BUS SETUP window. This setting is applied to a channel pair (one odd-numbered channel and one evennumbered channel).
Sets Recall Safe for MATRIX 1-8 in the BUS SETUP window. This setting is applied to a channel pair (one odd-numbered channel and one evennumbered channel).
SURROUND
SETUP
Surround mode settings.
• RACK tab
Enables you to choose from GEQ RACK, EFFECT RACK, or PREMIUM RACK. You can individually select an GEQ for a Flex15GEQ or an effect used in dual mode.
• PATCH/OTHERs tab
You can select the following parameters.
INPUT PATCH All input channel patches, insert in/out patches, Direct Out patches
OUTPUT PATCH All output channel patches, insert in/out patches
INPUT NAME Channel names, icons, and colors for all input channels
OUTPUT NAME Channel names, icons, and colors for all output channels
HA
Analog gain, phantom power on/off status, Gain Compensation, phase settings
Channel link settings CH LINK
MUTE GROUP
NAME
Setting a MUTE group name
94
Scene memory
CUSTOM FADER
BANK
*1
CASCADE IN
CASCADE OUT
Custom fader bank settings
CASCADE IN PATCH and CASCADE IN ATT settings
CASCADE OUT PATCH settings
*1. While in PREVIEW mode, changes that are made in QL Editor are not applied immediately. They are applied after PREVIEW mode is exited.
• DCA tab
You can select ALL, LEVEL/ON, or NAME. If ALL is selected, all channel parameters will be copied. If LEVEL/ON is selected, the main level and DCA channel on/off status will be copied. If NAME is selected, the DCA group name will be copied. You can select the copy-source channels individually for each DCA group 1-16.
For DCA, although you can turn on both the LEVEL/ON button and the NAME button, they will then both be switched off if you turn on the ALL button.
V5.8 Reference Manual
Scene memory
Using the Focus Recall function
“Focus Recall” is a function that lets you specify the scene parameters that will be recalled
(loaded) when you recall a scene. You can specify these settings for each scene. This function is useful if you want to recall only the input channel settings of a specific scene.
NOTE
In contrast to Focus, the QL series console also features a “Recall Safe” function that enables you to exclude specific channels and parameters from recall operations. However, while the
Focus Recall function is specified individually for each scene, the Recall Safe settings are applied to all scenes.
STEP
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2.
Press the FOCUS tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
3.
In the SCENE LIST window, press the SET button for the scene you want to set.
4.
5.
Recall a scene for which you have made Focus Recall settings.
SCENE LIST window
1 2
SCENE field SCENE LIST window
NOTE
• The FOCUS field enables you to make settings for the Focus function. The buttons in this field correspond to the scene list shown on the left side of the SCENE LIST window.
• Scenes for which Focus settings are made are indicated by a “FOCUS” indication in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST window.
• You can use the Focus function in conjunction with the Recall Safe function. Channels or parameters that are excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be recalled.
• For FOCUS RECALL, the NAME parameter is included in the DCA indicator.
3
4
1
FOCUS button
Enables or disables the Focus function for each scene.
2 SET popup button
Press this button to access the FOCUS RECALL popup window, which allows you to select the parameters that will be subject to recall.
3 FOCUS PARAMETER indicators
These indicators show the focus recall settings that are specified for each scene.
4 CURRENT SETTING field
Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation.
95
V5.8 Reference Manual
FOCUS RECALL window
Sets the parameters that will be recalled.
2
3
5
6
8
4
1
7
9
0
1 CLEAR ALL button/SET ALL button
Turns off (or on) all focus channel selections and global focus parameter settings.
2
Focus channel display field
Indicates the target channel for a Recall operation. The view of this field is the same as that in the RECALL SAFE window.
All parameters are affected by Recall on these channels.
Some parameters are affected by Recall on these channels.
Recall has been canceled on these channels.
Scene memory
3 SET BY SEL button
Turn on this button to add a channel by using the corresponding [SEL] key. To add channels as the target, turn on this button, and then press the corresponding [SEL] keys for the channels you want to add.
Press the same [SEL] key once again to de-select the channel.
NOTE
In the case of QL1, channels that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
4 FOCUS PARAMETER display field
Indicates the parameters and racks that will be affected by Recall operations for any scene. Procedures and contents are the same as those in the RECALL SAFE MODE window (
5 Channel select button
Selects the channel for which you want to set the Focus Recall function.
NOTE
Switching channels using this button will not affect the channel selection on the top panel.
6
Selected channel display
This area indicates the icon, number, color, and name of the currently-selected channel.
7 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only)
Turn on this button to apply the Focus Recall parameter selection for one input channel to all other input channels.
This can be convenient if you want to apply Focus Recall to the same parameters for all input channels.
8 Recall parameter select button
Selects Focus Recall parameters for the selected channel.
Enables you to select parameters for each channel that will be affected by Recall operations. You can use the same procedure as that in the RECALL SAFE MODE window
).
NOTE
• If the DCA ASSIGN button is turned on, the parameters assigned to the DCA groups (1-16) for that channel are targeted for FOCUS RECALL. Settings for DCA 1-16 are made simultaneously.
• DCA ASSIGN button settings are linked according to the channel link for the scene.
9 FOCUS button
Switches the Focus Recall function on or off.
0 CLOSE button
Closes the window.
96
V5.8 Reference Manual
Scene memory
Using the Fade function
“Fade” is a function that smoothly changes the faders of specified channels and DCA groups to their new values over a specified duration when you recall a scene. The settings of the Fade function are made independently for each scene.
STEP
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2.
Press the FADE TIME tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
3.
In the SCENE LIST window, press the SET button for the scene you want to set.
4.
Press the [SEL] keys for the channels or DCA groups to select the channels or DCA groups to which the Fade effect will be applied (multiple selections are allowed).
5.
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the fade time.
6.
Press the OK button to close the FADE TIME window.
7.
Press the FADE button in the SCENE LIST window to enable the Fade function.
8.
Recall a scene for which the Fade function is turned on.
The faders will begin to move immediately after Recall occurs, and will reach the values of the recalled scene over the course of the specified fade time.
SCENE LIST window (FADE TIME field)
1
2
3
4
5
SCENE field SCENE LIST window
(FADE TIME field)
NOTE
• Scenes for which the Fade settings are made are marked by a “FADE” indicator in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST window (COMMENT tab).
• The Fade function settings can be applied individually even if faders are linked by Channel Link.
• You can stop a fade effect by holding down a [SEL] key while you stop the corresponding moving fader.
• If you recall the same scene while faders are moving, the faders of all channels or DCA groups will move immediately to their target positions.
1
FADE button
Enables or disables the Fade function for each scene.
2 INDIVIDUAL button
Switches between GLOBAL mode and INDIVIDUAL mode of the Fade function. Set to on to set the fade time and offset time for each channel. When it is on, PAN can be individually set on the input channel.
3 SET button
Press this button to open the FADE TIME window, in which you can select a channel for which you want to use the Fade function, and specify the fade time (the duration of time over which the fader will reach its new value).
4 FADE TIME display
This area indicates the fade time specified for each scene.
If the INDIVIDUAL mode is set to on, this will not be displayed.
5 CURRENT SETTING field
Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. Changes you make here are immediately applied to the QL console.
97
V5.8 Reference Manual
FADE TIME window (GLOBAL mode)
You can select the channels to which Fade will be applied, and adjust the fade time. To display this window, press the SET button in the FADE TIME field in the SCENE LIST window.
1 3 4
Scene memory
FADE TIME window (INDIVIDUAL mode)
The INDIVIDUAL mode allows you to control fading and fade time of each channel individually. When the INDIVIDUAL button is set to on, press the SET button in the FADE
TIME field of the SCENE LIST window to open the FADE TIME window.
1 2 3
2
1 Channel display field
The channels or DCA groups to which Fade is applied are highlighted. To select the channels or DCA groups to which Fade is applied, press the [SEL] keys for the channels or DCA groups. Press the same [SEL] key once again to de-select the channel.
2 FADE TIME knob
Sets the fade time. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the values.
The range is 0.0 sec – 60.0 sec.
NOTE
The fade time is used for all channels and DCA groups selected in the channel display field.
3
SET ALL button
Press this button to apply the Fade effect to all faders of that scene.
4 CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to cancel the Fade function for all faders of that scene.
NOTE
In the case of the QL1, faders that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
4
1 Display switch buttons
Switches the display of the FADE TIME window.
TIME
98
• FADE TIME knob ................... Sets the fade time. You can adjust the value by using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
The range is 0.0 sec to 60.0 sec.
V5.8 Reference Manual
START OFFSET
• START OFFSET knob ............ Sets the offset time from recalling the Scene to starting the fading. You can adjust the value by using the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
The range is 0.0 sec to 60.0 sec.
ON
Scene memory
Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall (GPI OUT)
A control signal can be output to an external device connected to the GPI connector of the QL series console when you recall a specific scene. Proceed as follows.
NOTE
For more information on GPI OUT settings, refer to “ Using GPI OUT ” on page 264
.
STEP
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2.
Press the GPI OUT tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
3.
For each scene, specify the control signal that you want to output to each GPI OUT port.
4.
Recall the scene for which you want to output GPI OUT signals.
• FAD button.............................. Enables or disables the Fade function for each fader.
• PAN button ............................. Appears for input channels. Enables or disables the
Fade function for PAN.
2 DEFAULT button
Press this button to restore the default parameter setting.
3
COPY button/PASTE button
Copies/pastes the Fade functions parameters for a channel.
4 Tabs
Use these tabs to select a channel that you want to view on the screen.
SCENE LIST window
(GPI OUT field)
99
V5.8 Reference Manual
SCENE LIST window (GPI OUT field)
1
2
1 GPI OUT CONTROL buttons
These specify the control signal will be output from each GPI OUT.
Pressing a button repeatedly will switch between the following functions.
• ---- (OFF) .................. Nothing will be output.
• TRIGGER ................. A trigger will be output when the scene is recalled.
• TALLY ...................... A tally will be output when the scene is recalled.
2
CURRENT SETTING field
Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation.
Scene memory
Playing back an audio file that links to a scene recall
You can also specify an audio file that you want to play back from a USB flash drive when a specific scene is recalled. This can be convenient if you want an effect sound or BGM to be played automatically in a specific scene.
NOTE
• Save audio files for playback in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder. If you save them in the root directory or in other folders, you will be unable to specify them for playback. When an audio file is played, the path in the TITLE LIST screen will indicate \YPE\SONGS\.
• You cannot play audio files during recording or in recording standby mode.
• A specified audio file will be played back only once, regardless of the playback mode settings.
• Audio file names must be eight characters plus three extension characters. If you change the file name after specifying the file for playback, or if you delete or copy the file repeatedly, the specified file may become unrecognizable in rare cases.
STEP
1.
Connect a USB flash drive that contains the audio files to the USB connector.
2.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
3.
Press the PLAYBACK LINK tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
4.
Press the song select button for a scene to which you want to link the audio file.
5.
Press the SONG SELECT window or use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select a file that you want to link to a scene.
6.
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to set the offset (the time duration until the start of audio file playback).
7.
Press the OK button.
8.
Press the PLAY button to turn on the link to the audio file.
9.
Recall a scene to which an audio file has been linked.
100
SCENE LIST window
(PLAYBACK LINK field)
V5.8 Reference Manual
NOTE
• After a scene has been recalled and until the offset time has elapsed, a countdown will appear in the Function Access Area.
• If another song is playing during a scene recall, the song playback will stop when the scene is recalled, regardless of the offset time setting.
SCENE LIST window (PLAYBACK LINK field)
1
1
4
5
6
Scene memory
SONG SELECT window
You can select an audio file you want to link with the scene, and set the offset time. This window will appear when you press the song select button.
2 3
7
3
2
8
4
1 PLAY button
Sets the Playback Link function’s on/off status for each scene.
2
Song select button
Press this button to open the SONG SELECT window, in which you can select a song and set the offset time (time duration from scene recall until the start of playback). Also, the title of the selected song will appear on the button.
3
Offset time display
Indicates the time duration from scene recall until the start of playback of the specified audio file. Set the offset time in the SONG SELECT window.
4 CURRENT SETTING field
Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation.
1
Change directory button
Press this button to move to the next higher folder level.
NOTE
You cannot move to levels higher than \YPE\SONGS\.
2 PATH indicator
This area indicates the current directory path.
3 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME switch buttons
Switch between the song title list and the file name list.
4 SONG TITLE list button
5
ARTIST list button
Press these buttons to sort the audio file list (at the current directory level) by song title and artist name respectively.
6 Song list
Displays the title, artist name, and audio file time duration of the audio files in the
\YPE\SONGS\ folder. You can select an audio file by pressing the audio file name.
101
V5.8 Reference Manual
7 OFFSET knob
You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to set the time duration from scene recall until the start of audio file playback. The offset value can be adjusted in the range of 0.0
– 99.0 in 0.5 sec steps.
8 Scroll knob
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to scroll the list.
Using Preview mode
Preview mode lets you view or edit the settings of a scene stored in memory without affecting the signal processing of the current scene. When you recall a scene in this mode, the settings of the newly recalled scene will appear on the panel of the QL series console, but the signal processing of the current scene will remain as it was prior to the recall. Even if you modify the settings and save them as a new scene or by overwriting, the signal processing of the current scene will remain as it was prior to the recall. During an actual performance, it can be convenient to use this to check the content of the scene you intend to recall next, or to make minor changes to a scene and then store it.
STEP
1.
Press the PREVIEW button in the SCENE LIST window.
2.
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to operate the SCENE SELECT knobs in the SCENE
LIST window, and select the scene number that you want to recall.
3.
Press the RECALL SCENE button in the SCENE LIST window. To execute the Recall operation, press the OK button.
4.
If desired, use the panel controls to edit the settings.
5.
If you want to store the changes you made in step 4, select the scene number in which you want to store the scene, and press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key in the SCENE LIST window.
6.
When you have finished viewing or editing the settings of the scene, press the
PREVIEW button in the SCENE LIST window.
NOTE
• PREVIEW mode applies to all parameters included in scene memory, all parameters included in the INPUT PATCH and OUTPUT PATCH functions, and HA parameters.
• RECALL SAFE and FOCUS RECALL are enabled in PREVIEW mode.
Functions in Preview mode
The current scene will be modified by the following software and external operations.
• QL Editor
• StageMix
• MIDI Rx
• GPI IN
Scene memory
Similarly, edits for the current scene will be conveyed to the following software and external devices.
• QL Editor
• StageMix
• MIDI Tx
• GPI OUT
The meters will indicate the state of signal processing for the current scene.
Playback Link will operate for recalling the current scene.
If cascade-connected, both leader and follower units will operate independently. Link will not occur while in Preview mode.
The following functions will not operate in Preview mode.
• Synchronization with QL Editor
• Switching users
• Changing the User Level
• Load/Save functions
• Cue changes
• USER DEFINED KEYS operations
• USER DEFINED KNOBS operations
• Monitor (MONITOR, CUE, OSCILLATOR, TALKBACK) changes or display
• Changing or viewing Nuendo Live settings
• Changing or viewing the recorder
• Changing DANTE SETUP or DANTE PATCH settings
• FADE TIME
• EFFECT FREEZE playback or recording
• MIDI clock and tap tempo for effects
• Internal metering for Premium Effects (GR for DynamicEQ and Portico 5043; VU for Opt-
2A, U76 and Buss Comp 369)
In addition, you cannot enter Preview mode while performing the following operations.
• While pasting scene or EQ settings
• While executing Global Paste
• While synchronizing with QL Editor
• While saving/loading a file
NOTE
The scene titles shown in StageMix will be changed to the titles used when using the store operation on a QL series console operated in PREVIEW mode.
102
V5.8 Reference Manual
Monitor and Cue functions
The Monitor function lets you monitor various outputs through your nearfield monitors or headphones. Below the front panel of the QL series console is a PHONES out jack for monitoring, which enables you to monitor the monitoring source signal at any time. By assigning the MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels to the desired output jacks, you can also monitor the same signal through external speakers.
You can select the following signals as the monitor source.
• STEREO channel output signal
• MONO channel output signal
• STEREO+MONO channel output signal
• INPUT 25-26, 27-28, 29-30, 31-32 (9-10, 11-12, 13-14, 15-16 for the QL1) channel input signal (for monitoring a two channel pair)
• RECORDER PLAYBACK output signal
• A combination of up to eight MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel output signals, RECORDER PLAYBACK output signals, and INPUT 25-26, 27-28, 29-30, 31-
32 (9-10, 11-12, 13-14, 15-16 for the QL1) input signals
The Cue function enables you to check an individual channel or DCA group by temporarily monitoring it via MONITOR OUT or PHONES. When you press the [CUE] key on the top panel, the cue signal of the corresponding channel or DCA group is sent as the monitor output
from the selected output port. There is also the Solo function. (Refer to page 114 .)
NOTE
Be aware that if you turn CUE INTERRUPTION off in the MONITOR popup window, the cue signal will no longer be sent to the connected monitor speakers. However, the cue signal will always be sent to the PHONES Out jack.
103
Monitor and Cue functions
The following diagram shows the cue/monitor signal flow.
CUE(A) / STEREO MONITOR
INPUT 25/26{9/10}
INPUT 27/28{11/12}
INPUT 29/30{13/14}
INPUT 31/32{15/16}
PLAYBACK OUT
STEREO OUT L,R
STEREO OUT MONO(C)
STEREO OUT L,C,R
INPUT 25/26{9/10}
INPUT 27/28{11/12}
INPUT 29/30{13/14}
INPUT 31/32{15/16}
PLAYBACK OUT
STEREO OUT L,R
STEREO OUT MONO(C)
MIX OUT1-16
MAXTRIX OUT
1-6, 7-8(CUE B L,R)
DEFINE
MIX
(MAX:8ch)
CUE(A) L BUS
CUE(A) R BUS
CUE(A) TRIM
(INPUT/OUTPUT/DCA)
CUE(A) L
MONO
CUE(A) R
METER
METER
CUE(A) OUT ON
CUE(A) ON
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
MONITOR DELAY AUTO BYPASS
CUE(A) OUT L
CUE(A) OUT R
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
CUE(A) LOGIC
CUE(A) OUT
LEVEL
PHONES
LEVEL LINK DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
PHONES L
PHONES R
To PHONES OUT
To PHONES OUT
MONO
MONITOR L
MONITOR R
MONITOR MONO(C)
METER
METER
METER
CUE(A) INTERRUPTION
ON
TALKBACK ON
MONITOR DIMM ON
MONITOR
LEVEL
MONITOR
FADER
ON
+MONO(C)
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
MONITOR OUT L
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
MONITOR OUT R
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
MONITOR OUT MONO(C)
An output port delay becomes invalid by assigning a monitor out to the output port.
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
CUE(A) / SURROUND MONITOR
STEREO OUT L/R
MONO
PLAYBACK OUT
MIX OUT1-16
MAXTRIX OUT
1-6, 7-8(CUE B L,R)
EXT IN ST-1
EXT IN ST-2
EXT IN ST-3
EXT IN ST-4
CUE(A) L BUS
CUE(A) R BUS
2ch
Monitor
Select
2
CUE(A) TRIM
(INPUT/OUTPUT/DCA)
CUE(A) L
CUE(A) R
MIX OUT1-6
EXT IN 5.1-1
EXT IN 5.1-2
EXT IN 5.1-3
2ch selected
METER CUE(A) L
METER CUE(A) R
Surround
Monitor
Select
6
6
6
6
2
6
5.1 Solo
Down Mix 5.1 -> Stereo, Mono
EXT IN ** are assignable from DANTE, SLOT, INPUT
CUE(A) OUT ON
CUE(A) ON
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
MONITOR DELAY AUTO BYPASS
CUE(A) OUT L
CUE(A) OUT R
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
CUE(A) LOGIC
CUE(A) OUT
LEVEL
PHONES
LEVEL LINK
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
PHONES L
PHONES R
To PHONES OUT
To PHONES OUT
MONITOR
LEVEL
METER
ON
CUE(A) INTERRUPTION
SPEAKER MUTE
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms) L
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
An output port delay becomes invalid by assigning a monitor out to the output port.
R
C
Ls
To OUTPUT PATCH
SURROUND MONITOR
To DANTE,OMNI OUT,SLOT
Rs
LFE
MONITOR
LEVEL
MONITOR
FADER
To OUTPUT PATCH
MONITOR MATRIX OUT
To SLOT
• MONITOR SELECT
Selects the monitor source.
• METER
Detects and indicates the level of the monitor signal or cue signal.
• DIMMER
Attenuates the monitor/cue signal by a fixed amount.
• MONITOR LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels. If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, this setting will also affect the level at the PHONES Out jack.
V5.8 Reference Manual
• MONITOR FADER
Use the STEREO MAIN fader or MONO MAIN fader to adjust the output level of the
MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels. MONITOR FADER is positioned in series with
MONITOR LEVEL. If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, this setting will also affect the level at the PHONES Out jack.
• ON (On/off)
Switches the Monitor function on or off.
• DELAY (Monitor delay)
Delays monitor signals. The Delay function is disabled if cue signals are being output.
• PHONES LEVEL (Headphone level)
Adjusts the dedicated output level of the PHONES Out jack.
• PHONES LEVEL LINK (Headphone Level Link function)
If this function is turned on, the MONITOR LEVEL knob will adjust the level of signals sent to the PHONES Out jack.
• CUE INTERRUPTION (Cue Interruption function)
If this function is turned on, pressing the [CUE] key on the top panel will cause the cue signal of the corresponding channel or DCA group to be sent as the monitor output from the selected output port. With the factory default settings, this function is turned on.
Turn it off if you do not want to output cue signals to the monitoring speakers.
Monitor and Cue functions
Using the Monitor function
This section explains how to select the desired monitor source, and monitor it from the
PHONES Out jack or external monitor speakers.
STEP
1.
Connect your monitor system to the OMNI OUT jacks or 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack on the rear panel. To monitor through headphones, connect your headphones to the
PHONES Out jack below the front panel.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button.
3.
Press the MONITOR display button or the meter field in the MONITOR screen.
4.
Use the source select buttons in MONITOR screen to select the monitor source.
5.
Press one of the MONITOR OUT PATCH buttons (L/R/C) in the meter field to specify the port that will be the output destination for monitor signals L, R, and C (multiple selections are allowed).
6.
Turn the OUTPUT button on to enable monitoring.
7.
To adjust the monitor level, set the MONITOR LEVEL control located in the Function
Access Area by using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
8.
Make settings for Dimmer, Delay, and Monaural as desired.
MONITOR screen
NOTE
Monitor on/off operations, selection of the monitor source, and dimmer on/off operations can also
be assigned to USER DEFINED keys ( page 221
).
104
V5.8 Reference Manual
MONITOR screen
In the MONITOR screen, the MONITOR field lets you check the current monitor settings, and turn monitoring on or off.
2 3 4 5
1
6
7
8
1
MONITOR display button
When you press this button, the MONITOR window will appear, in which you can make detailed monitor settings.
2
SOURCE SELECT field
Selects the monitor source. If DEFINE has been selected in this field, access the
MONITOR window to specify the source channel.
3 DIMMER field
Enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function, which temporarily attenuates monitor signals.
• DIMMER LEVEL knob
Adjusts the amount by which the monitor signals will be attenuated when the dimmer is on.
• DIMMER ON button
Turn on this button to enable the dimmer and attenuate the monitor signal.
Monitor and Cue functions
4 MONITOR FADER field
Enables you to set and view the monitor fader that adjusts the monitor level.
• MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob
Adjusts the monitor fader level.
• FADER ASSIGN display
This area displays the type of faders that are currently assigned to the monitor fader.
Indicator assignments are as follows.
• ---.......................................... No assignment
• MAIN A .................................. Main A only
• MAIN A+ ................................ Main A, Main B, Custom fader bank
• MAIN B .................................. Main B only
• MAIN B+ ................................ Main B, Custom fader bank
• CUSTOM ................................ A single fader in the Custom fader bank
• CUSTOMs .............................. Multiple faders in the Custom fader bank
5 Meter field
Indicates the output level of Monitor Out channels L, R, and C. Press this field to open the MONITOR window.
6
MONITOR OUTPUT button
Switches the Monitor Output on or off.
7 PHONES LEVEL LINK button
If this is on, the MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob or MONITOR FADER will adjust the level of signals sent to the PHONES Out jack.
8 MONO MONITOR button
Turn on this button to switch monitor signals to mono.
105
V5.8 Reference Manual
MONITOR window
You can make detailed settings for monitoring. This screen appears when you press the
MONITOR display button or the meter field in the MONITOR screen.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0
A
8 9
1 SOURCE SELECT field
Select one of the following as the signal source that will be output to the MONITOR bus.
STEREO L/R
MONO (C)
LCR
INPUT 25-26–31-32
*1
PB OUT
DEFINE
LINK
STEREO L/R channel signals
MONO channel signal
STEREO L/R + MONO channel signals
INPUT jacks 25–32
*2
signals (per two channels)
Recorder’s PLAYBACK OUT signals
The signal(s) selected in the ASSIGN field
Links the monitor source with the MIX/MATRIX bus selected in SENDS ON FADER mode.
*1. QL1: 9-10–15-16
*2. QL1: 9–16
Monitor and Cue functions
2 DIMMER field
Enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function, which temporarily attenuates monitor signals.
• DIMMER LEVEL knob
Adjusts the amount by which the monitor signals will be attenuated when the dimmer is on.
• DIMMER ON button
Switches the Dimmer function on or off. The monitor signal will be attenuated if this button is on.
3
TALKBACK DIMMER field
Enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function, which temporarily attenuates monitor signals when TALKBACK is on.
• TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL knob
Adjusts the amount by which the monitor level will be attenuated when talkback is on.
• TALKBACK ON indicator
Indicates the on/off status of the dimmer function for talkback.
4 PHONES LEVEL LINK button
Enables you to link the signal level at the PHONES Out jack to the monitor signal level.
If this button is on, the MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob and monitor fader will adjust the level of the signal sent to the PHONES OUT jack.
5 CUE INTERRUPTION button
Press this button to interrupt the monitor signal by the cue signal. If this button is on and the cue is enabled, the cue signal will be sent to the monitor output. With the factory default settings, this function is turned on. If you do not wish to send the cue signal to the monitor output, switch this button off.
6
MONO MONITOR button
Turn on this button to switch the monitor output signal to mono.
7 MONITOR OUTPUT button
Switches the monitor output on or off.
106
V5.8 Reference Manual
Monitor and Cue functions
8 MONITOR FADER field
Enables you to set and view the monitor fader that adjusts the monitor level.
• MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob
Adjusts the monitor fader level. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the monitor level.
• FADER ASSIGN display
This area displays the type of faders that are currently assigned as MONITOR FADER.
Indicator assignments are as follows.
----
MAIN A
MAIN A+
MAIN B
MAIN B+
CUSTOM
CUSTOMs
No assignment
MAIN A fader only
MAIN A, as well as MAIN B fader and Custom fader bank
MAIN B fader only
MAIN B, as well as Custom fader bank
One of the Custom fader bank faders
Multiple Custom fader bank faders
9 MONITOR DELAY field
This field enables you to specify the monitor delay setting by which the monitor out signal is delayed.
• AUTO BYPASS button
Turn this on to automatically bypass monitor delay when the cue is on.
• MONITOR DELAY knob
Adjusts the delay time for the monitor signal. The delay time is shown above the knob in ms units, and below the knob in units of the currently-selected scale. However if the scale is set to ms, the delay time value is not shown above the knob.
If you press this knob, you can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the value.
• MONITOR DELAY ON button
If this button is on, the monitor signal will be delayed according to the setting of the
MONITOR DELAY knob.
0 Meter field
• Meters
Indicates the output level of the monitor L/R/C channels.
107
PORT SELECT window
DANTE1–64
*1
OMNI1–16
*2
Output channels 1–64 to audio network
*1
OMNI OUT jacks 1–16
*2
DIGI OUT L/R DIGITAL OUT jack on the QL unit
SLOT1-1–SLOT2-16 Output channels 1–16 of an I/O card installed in slots 1–2
*1. QL1: 1–32
*2. QL1: 1–8
NOTE
• You can specify output ports only for MONITOR OUT L and R, and monitor through two speakers.
• If you have not specified an output port for MONITOR OUT C, selecting the MONO (C) button or
LCR button as the monitor source will automatically cause the MONO channel signal to be distributed to MONITOR OUT L/R.
A
ASSIGN field
If you have selected DEFINE in the SOURCE SELECT field, you can use the ASSIGN field to specify multiple monitor sources. The following table shows the monitor sources that you can select in the ASSIGN field.
MIX 1–16
MTRX 1–8
STEREO
MONO (C)
PB OUT
INPUT 25-26–31-32 *1
*1. QL1: 9-10–15-16
*2. QL1: 9–16
MIX channels 1–16 output signals
MATRIX buses 1–8 output signals
STEREO L/R channel output signals
MONO channel output signal
Recorder’s PLAYBACK OUT signals
INPUT jacks 25–32
*2
signals (per two channels)
NOTE
You can select a maximum of eight monitor sources in the ASSIGN field. If you select eight monitor sources, no further selections will be possible. Turn off the buttons of unneeded sources.
V5.8 Reference Manual
MONITOR screen (Monitor field in Surround mode)
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the Monitor field in the MONITOR screen appears as shown below.
2 3 4 5
Monitor and Cue functions
SURROUND MONITOR window (Surround mode)
You can make detailed settings for surround monitoring. If Surround mode is set for the bus settings in BUS SETUP, this window appears when you press the MONITOR display button or meter field in the MONITOR screen.
2 3 4
1
5
1 SURROUND MONITOR display button
When you press this button, the SURROUND MONITOR window will appear, in which you can make detailed surround monitor settings.
2 SOURCE SELECT field
Selects the surround monitor source. If 2CH MONITOR has been selected in this field, use the SURROUND MONITOR window to specify the source channel.
3
Speaker Mute field
You can individually mute each speaker that is monitored.
4 DOWNMIX field
Select in which field to perform downmixes.
• STEREO button
Downmix in stereo mode.
• MONO button
Downmix in mono mode.
5
Meter field
Shows the meters for the surround signal being monitored. The layout of the meters is the same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP screen.
1
6
7
1
SOURCE SELECT field
Select one of the following as the surround source that will be output to the MONITOR bus.
MIX1-6
EXT5.1-1-3
2CH MONITOR
Surround signals in the current mix
Surround signals set in MONITOR SOURCE SETUP (3 channels)
Stereo signals set in MONITOR SOURCE SETUP
2 MONITOR SOURCE SETUP button
Use this button to open the MONITOR SOURCE SETUP screen. Set the sources and names for EXT 5.1 - 1-3 (EXTERNAL SURROUND) and EXT ST - 1-4 (EXTERNAL STEREO).
108
V5.8 Reference Manual
3 DOWNMIX field
Select in which field to perform downmixes.
• STEREO button
Downmix in stereo mode.
• MONO button
Downmix in mono mode.
4 DOWNMIX SETUP button
Use this button to open the DOWNMIX SETUP screen. Set the parameters for downmixes.
5
Meter field
Shows the meters for the surround signal being monitored. The layout of the meters is the same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP screen.
6 Speaker Mute field
You can individually mute each speaker that is monitored.
7 SOLO button
Turns on the solo function for the monitor speakers. When turned on, all speaker buttons in the speaker mute field are turned on. At this time, if you press one of the speaker buttons, only that button remains on; the other buttons go off. If you press a different speaker button, the other buttons go off.
NOTE
If you switch to Surround mode, the patch for monitor output can be set in the OUTPUT PORT
screen rather than this screen. (Refer to page 56 .)
Monitor and Cue functions
MONITOR SOURCE SETUP screen
Press the MONITOR SOURCE SETUP button in the SURROUND MONITOR screen to open this screen.
1 2
1
1 NAME field
Press this button to open the PATCH/NAME screen (with the NAME tab selected). Enter the source name in the Keyboard screen.
2 PATCH field
Press this button to open the PATCH/NAME screen (with the PATCH tab selected). Select the port to patch.
109
V5.8 Reference Manual
DOWNMIX SETUP screen
Press the DOWNMIX SETUP button in the SURROUND MONITOR screen to open this screen. The layout of the channels is the same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP screen.
3
Monitor and Cue functions
Using the Cue function
About CUE groups
Cue signals on the QL series console can be categorized into the following four groups.
1
INPUT CUE group
The cue signals of input channels make up this group. To enable cue for this group, press the [CUE] key for any input channel to turn cue on.
1
2
Input channel [CUE] key
2 DCA CUE group
The cue signals of DCA groups make up this group. To enable cue for this group, press the [CUE] key of one of the DCA groups to turn cue on.
DCA group [CUE] key
1
Output channel field
Selects the output channel. You can use the L and R buttons to switch each between on/ off.
2 Downmix parameter field
Sets the downmix parameters for each channel and the main channel monitors.
3 APPLY TO MIX1-6 TO STEREO button
Press this button to apply the downmix parameters for the set monitors to the downmix parameters for the main channel (MIX1-6 to STEREO).
3
OUTPUT CUE group
The cue signals of output channels make up this group. To enable cue for this group, press the [CUE] key of one of the output channels.
Output channel [CUE] key
MIX/MATRIX channel [CUE] key
110
V5.8 Reference Manual
4 Other CUE group
These cue signals are operated via buttons displayed on the touch screen. This group is enabled if you turn on the CUE button in the EFFECT window or the PREMIUM window, or if you turn on the KEY IN CUE button in the DYNAMICS 1 window. This group will automatically be disabled when you exit the corresponding window.
On-screen CUE button
NOTE
You cannot turn on cue monitoring between different groups simultaneously. Normally, the group to which the most recently-pressed [CUE] key (or on-screen CUE/KEY IN CUE button) belongs will take priority, and the [CUE] keys for the previously-selected group will be defeated.
However, if you have switched the cue signal group in a specific order when the CUE MODE setting is MIX CUE, the state of the [CUE] keys for the previously-selected group will be restored when the current cue signal is defeated.
The right illustration shows the priority order of the [CUE] keys. After you have switched groups from lower to upper levels, if you then defeat cue for the upper group, the previous [CUE] key status of the group immediately below will be restored.
For example, if you switch groups in the order of OUTPUT CUE group
DCA CUE group INPUT CUE group
Other CUE group, you can then successively defeat the [CUE] keys
(CUE/KEY IN CUE buttons) to successively restore the [CUE] key status of the previously-selected group.
Other CUE group
INPUT CUE group
DCA CUE group
OUTPUT CUE group
Monitor and Cue functions
Operating the Cue function
This section explains how to use the [CUE] key for a channel or DCA group to monitor cue signals.
NOTE
Be aware that if you turn CUE INTERRUPTION off in the MONITOR popup window, the cue signal will not be sent to the connected monitor speakers. However, the front panel PHONES jack will always output the cue signal regardless of the Monitor on/off setting. See “
” on
for details about the Monitor function.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button.
2.
Press the CUE display button or the INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE field in the MONITOR screen.
3.
Use the CUE MODE button to select either the mode in which channels are mixed for auditioning, or the mode in which only the last-selected channel is auditioned.
4.
Use the buttons and knobs of the INPUT CUE/DCA CUE/OUTPUT CUE field to specify the output position and output level for each CUE group.
5.
Press one of the CUE OUT PATCH buttons (L/R) in the meter field to specify a port as the output destination for cue signals L and R (multiple selections are allowed).
6.
To enable cue out for the port you specified in step 5, press the CUE OUTPUT button to turn it on.
7.
Press the [CUE] key of the channel or DCA group to be monitored to turn it on.
8.
Adjust the cue signal level by using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to operate the
CUE LEVEL knobs in the CUE field.
9.
To defeat cue, press the currently-on [CUE] key once again. To clear all cue selections, press the CLEAR CUE button in the Meter field.
111
MONITOR screen
V5.8 Reference Manual
• If CUE is set to 2 channels, the CUE meter is displayed as shown below.
Monitor and Cue functions
NOTE
• The cue signal is sent to the monitor output and PHONES Out jacks regardless of whether the
CUE OUTPUT button is on or off. However, the cue signal will no longer be sent to monitor output if CUE INTERRUPTION is turned off. The cue signal is always sent to the PHONES Out jack, regardless of the CUE INTERRUPTION setting.
• When using the MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons in the SENDS ON FADER window, you can press the selected button once again to turn on cue for the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel
• If you want cue operations and channel select operations to be linked, open the USER SETUP window, choose the PREFERENCE tab, and then turn on [CUE] [SEL] LINK (
).
• You can also assign the function of the CLEAR CUE button to a USER DEFINED key
).
• If PHONES LEVEL LINK (
) in the MONITOR screen is ON, the cue signal level when monitoring through headphones can be adjusted using both the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the
PHONES LEVEL knob.
• To adjust the level to the output destination port for the cue signal, adjust the gain of the output port that is patched to it.
• If you turn on the [CUE] key, the cue output level is indicated. The upper part of the cue meter shows an abbreviation indicating the currently-on cue group or cue button. The abbreviations displayed for the cue meters have the following meaning.
IN
DCA
OUT
EFFECT
KEY IN
REC/PB
INPUT CUE group
DCA CUE group
OUTPUT CUE group
CUE button in the EFFECT and PREMIUM RACK windows
(Other CUE groups)
KEY IN CUE button in the DYNAMICS1 window
(Other CUE groups)
RECORDER INPUT CUE button or PLAYBACK OUT CUE button
(Other CUE groups)
Only CUE A Only CUE B CUE A&B
MONITOR screen
The CUE field on the MONITOR screen enables you to check the current cue settings, and turn cue on or off.
2 3 4
1
5
6
CUE meter
112
1 CUE display button
When you press this button, the CUE window will appear, in which you can make detailed cue settings.
V5.8 Reference Manual
2 CUE MODE buttons
Select the cue mode. You can select MIX CUE mode (all selected channels will be cued), or LAST CUE mode (only the channel selected most recently will be cued).
3 INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE section
Indicates the settings for input cue, DCA cue, and output cue. Press this field to open the CUE window.
4 CUE LEVEL knob
Indicates the output level of the cue out. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the level.
5
CUE OUTPUT button
Switches the cue output on or off.
6 CLEAR CUE button
Cancels all cue selections simultaneously. If MIX CUE mode has been selected, all of the selected channels will be cleared.
CUE window
You can make detailed settings for the cue. This window will appear when you press the
INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE field.
1 2 4 7 A B C
E
F
G
H
3 5 I 6 8
1 CUE MODE buttons
Select one of the following two cue modes:
• MIX CUE
All selected channels will be mixed and monitored.
• LAST CUE
Only most recently selected channel will be monitored.
D 9 >
Monitor and Cue functions
NOTE
All cue selections will be cleared if you switch between MIX CUE mode and LAST CUE mode in the CUE MODE section.
INPUT CUE field
This field enables you to make settings related to the input channel cue.
2
Cue point select button
Sets the cue point to PFL (immediately before fader), AFL (immediately after fader), or
POST PAN (immediately after PAN).
NOTE
Be aware that if you turn on the POST PAN button, you will be unable to monitor signals sent to the MONO bus from an input channel in LCR mode.
3 PFL TRIM knob
Indicates the monitor levels when PFL is selected. You can adjust the level using the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
DCA CUE field
This section enables you to make settings related to DCA cue.
4 Cue point select button
Sets the cue point for the DCA group to PRE PAN (immediately before PAN) or POST
PAN (immediately after PAN).
5 DCA TRIM knob
Indicates the monitor level of cue signals from a DCA group. You can adjust the level using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
6 UNITY button
Turn on this button to monitor signals at the same volume level that was obtained when the main level for each DCA group was set to 0 dB (unity gain).
OUTPUT CUE field
This section enables you to make settings related to output channel cue.
7 Cue point select button
Sets the cue point for the output channel to PFL (immediately before fader) or AFL
(immediately after fader).
8 PFL TRIM knob
Indicates the monitor levels when PFL is selected. You can adjust the level using the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
113
V5.8 Reference Manual
Meter field
9 ACTIVE CUE indicator
Lights to indicate the type of cue currently being monitored (input: blue, DCA: yellow, output: orange).
0
CLEAR CUE button
Cancels all cue selections simultaneously.
NOTE
If you press the CUE meter in the Function Access Area, all cue selections will be cleared.
A Meter section
This field indicates the output level of the cue L/R channels.
B CUE OUTPUT button
Switches the cue output on or off.
C CUE LEVEL knob
Indicates the output level of the cut out. You can adjust the values by using the [TOUCH
AND TURN] knobs.
D
CUE OUT PATCH button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output port to patch to the cue out L/R channels.
Monitor and Cue functions
FADER CUE RELEASE field
Move the fader of the channel that is cued to set the FADER CUE RELEASE function for releasing the cue.
E ON button
Switches the FADER CUE RELEASE function on or off.
F THRESHOLD knob
Sets the fader value for releasing the cue. If the fader value exceeds the value set with this knob, the cue is released.
SOLO field
Determines the Solo function parameters.
With the Solo function, only the signal of the input/output channel or DCA for which the [CUE] key is pressed is output from MIX, MATRIX, and STEREO on each bus. All other channels or
DCA are muted.
G SOLO SAFE popup button
When the SOLO SAFE popup button is pressed, the SOLO SAFE popup window (which specifies soloed channels that are not muted) appears.
DANTE1–64
*1
OMNI1–16
*2
Output channels 1–64 to audio network
OMNI OUT jacks 1–16
*2
*1
DIGI OUT L/R DIGITAL OUT jack on the QL unit
SLOT1-1–SLOT2-16 Output channels 1–16 of an I/O card installed in slots 1–2
*1. QL1: 1-32
*2. QL1: 1-8
Here you can specify the channels that will be excluded from Solo operations. (You can specify more than one.)
The channels that are selected here will not be muted when SOLO mode is enabled. This function is convenient if, for example, you want to protect certain channels from being set to SOLO mode accidentally, such as the main STEREO channels and MIX channels that send signals to an external recorder.
114
V5.8 Reference Manual
H SOLO ON button
Turns Solo operation on or off. A popup window will ask you to confirm Solo operation.
To execute Solo operation, press the OK button. The button will light up and SOLO mode will be enabled. To use the Solo function, make sure this button is on, and then turn on the [CUE] key of the desired channel or DCA. Only the corresponding channel or DCA will be output to the buses and output jacks; the remaining channels and DCA groups will be muted. The same signal will also be output from the CUE OUT jacks and the MONITOR OUT jacks.
When you press this button, the MONITOR button in the Function Access Area will flash as shown.
Monitor and Cue functions
CUE screen (When configuring CUE B)
When the USE MATRIX 7/8 AS CUE B button is pressed, a confirmation popup window appears. If you press the OK button, the screen expands so you can configure the CUE A/B settings.
CUE A field
NOTE
If you turn on the [CUE] key of an output channel, the signal will be sent only to the corresponding bus.
To defeat Solo, press the currently-on SOLO ON button once again.
NOTE
If you press [LAST CUE] to switch the CUE MODE from LAST to MIX (or vice versa), all previously-enabled Cue (Solo) signals will be defeated.
CUE B field
I USE MATRIX 7/8 AS CUE B button
When this button is pressed, channels 7 and 8 on the MATRIX bus are combined and used as a two-channel CUE.
CUE OPERATION
MODE field
CUE B field
1
2
3
1 USE MATRIX 7/8 AS CUE B button
When this button is pressed to turn it off, the CUE will be only a single channel.
CUE A field
Configures the settings for CUE A.
If the CH/REMOTE switch button ( 2 ) is set to “CH”, switching of the CUE MODE button will be linked with CUE A/B.
In Surround mode, a 5.1 SOLO button is added to the CUE MODE field.
115
V5.8 Reference Manual
3 CUE SETTINGS button
Use this button to open the CUE SETTINGS screen.
1 2
Monitor and Cue functions
CUE B field
Configures the settings for CUE B.
If the CH/REMOTE switch button (
2
) is set to “CH”, switching of the CUE MODE button will be linked with CUE A/B.
CUE OPERATION MODE field
2 CH/REMOTE switch buttons
This section explains how to use a two-channel CUE.
For example, when a single operator wants to use two separate CUEs, they can be set separately to an in-ear monitor signal and a floor monitor signal. If a single operator wants to use a two-channel CUE, select the “CH.” Select the desired CUE SETTINGS for each channel. You can select from A, B, or A+B. To use one CUE each for the console and QL Editor/StageMix, select the “ REMOTE.
” The console is fixed to CUE A, while the
CL Editor/StageMix is fixed to CUE B.
NOTE
When “REMOTE” is selected, the device where CUE is actually turned on and the corresponding targets are shown in the table below.
Device
Console
Cascaded console
MIDI
QL Editor
StageMix
GPI
Target
CUE A
CUE A
CUE B
CUE B
CUE B
CUE A
3
4
1
CUE A ALL button
Press this button to set all channels displayed in the screen to CUE A only. However, if the selected tab is INPUT, all input channels are set to CUE A only.
2 CUE B ALL button
Press this button to set all channels displayed in the screen to CUE B only. However, if the selected tab is INPUT, all input channels are set to CUE B only.
3 A/B switch button
Use this button to switch A and B on/off. However, both cannot be turned off at the same time.
4
Tab
Use these to select the desired edit operation.
NOTE
If the ALTERNATE function is assigned to a USER DEFINED key and the [CUE] key is pressed while ALTERNATE is on, the channel settings will toggle between A B A+B each time the key is pressed.
116
V5.8 Reference Manual
MONITOR screen (When using CUE B)
When CUE B is enabled by setting, the CUE field in the MONITOR screen appears as shown below.
Monitor and Cue functions
CUE screen (Surround mode)
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the CUE screen (where you can make detailed cue settings) appears as shown below.
1
In Surround mode, the CUE field appears as shown below.
MONITOR screen (CUE field in Surround mode)
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the CUE field in the MONITOR screen appears as shown below.
1
1
5.1. SOLO Button
5.1 SOLO is only for input channels. Outputs, PLAYBACK OUT, and EFFECT cannot be cued.
1 5.1. SOLO Button
Used to cue only the input channels to be used in the 5.1 channel mix. Outputs,
PLAYBACK OUT, and EFFECT cannot be cued.
117
V5.8 Reference Manual
Talkback and Oscillator
Talkback is a function that sends the signal of the selected INPUT jack to the desired bus. This is used mainly to convey instructions from the operator or sound engineer to the performers and staff.
QL series consoles also feature an oscillator that can output a sine wave or pink noise to the desired bus, so that you will be able to check external equipment or to test the acoustical response of the room or hall.
The diagram below shows the signal flow of the talkback and oscillator signals.
1 2
MIX
15 16
ST
L R
M
O
N
O
(C)
MATRIX
(USE 7-8
AS CUE B)
1 2 ...
7 8
CUE(A)
L R
CASCADE IN
SLOT1 1-16
SLOT2 1-16
DANTE IN 1-64{32}
INPUT 1-32{16}
CASCADE
IN
SELECT
DANTE
IN
METER
[DANTE] DANTE
INPUT
64{32}
+48V
[INPUT]
[1-32{16}]
INPUT 1
+48V ACTIVE
ON
2
3
+48V
-
+ AD
GAIN/TRIM
PRE GC
METER
Compensation
Gain
HA
METER
32{16}
TALKBACK
DANTE IN 1-64{32}
INPUT 1-32{16} INPUT
SELECT
OSCILLATOR
Sine Wave
Sine Wave 2CH
Pink Noise
Burst Noise
HPF LPF
ON
LEVEL
OSC
METER ON
To CH 1-64{32},ST IN 1L-8R
Talkback and Oscillator
Using Talkback
The Talkback function sends the signal (that is input at the input jacks) to the desired bus.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button.
2.
Press the TALKBACK display button or the ASSIGN field in the MONITOR screen.
3.
Connect a mic to the INPUT jack on the rear panel.
4.
Press a button in the ASSIGN field in the TALKBACK window to specify the bus(es) to which the talkback signal will be sent (multiple selections are allowed).
5.
To enable talkback, press the TALKBACK ON button to turn it on.
6.
Press the INPUT TO TALKBACK button to select an input. Use the [TOUCH AND
TURN] knob to adjust the volume.
MONITOR screen
NOTE
• The PAD will be switched on or off internally when the HA gain is adjusted between +17 dB and
+18 dB.
• Keep in mind that noise may be generated when using phantom power if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of an external device connected to the INPUT jack.
• You can also assign talkback on/off or an ASSIGN change to a USER DEFINED key. In this case, you can select either a Latch operation or an Unlatch operation (the function will be enabled only
while you continue holding down the key) ( page 221
).
• When talkback is on, you can use the talkback dimmer to lower the monitor levels other than the talkback signal (
).
118
V5.8 Reference Manual
MONITOR screen
In the MONITOR screen, the TALKBACK field enables you to check the current talkback settings, and turn talkback on or off.
Talkback and Oscillator
TALKBACK window
Press the TALKBACK popup display button or the ASSIGN field to open the TALKBACK popup window. In this popup window you can make detailed settings for talkback.
1 2
3
1 2 3 4
1 TALKBACK display buttons
When you press this button, the TALKBACK screen will appear, in which you can make detailed talkback settings.
2
INPUT TO TALKBACK field
• INPUT TO TALKBACK patch button
........................ Press the button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can patch a desired input port to talkback.
The selected port name will appear on the button.
• INPUT GAIN knob ................. Sets the input gain of the selected port.
• Input level meter ................... Indicates the level of signals after the input gain.
3 TALKBACK ASSIGN field
An indicator lights to indicate the currently-selected output destination of the talkback signal.
4 TALKBACK ON button
Switches talkback on or off.
119
1 INPUT TO TALKBACK field
This field allows a mic connected to a conventional input port to be used as a talkback input.
• INPUT TO TALKBACK patch button
Press the button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can patch a desired input port to talkback. The selected port name will appear on the button.
• +48V button
This is an on/off switch for the phantom power (+48V) supplied to the selected input port.
• ANALOG GAIN knob
Adjusts the analog gain setting for the selected input port. If you press this knob, you can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the gain.
• HA meter
Indicates the input level of a mic connected to the selected input port.
• GC ON button
Turns the Gain Compensation (gain correction function) on or off. The button will appear if the input jack of an I/O device is patched.
• Gain Compensation meter
Indicates the level after Gain Compensation. It will appear if the input jack of an I/O device is patched.
NOTE
These parameters and meters will not appear if no input port is selected.
V5.8 Reference Manual
2 TALKBACK ON button
Switches talkback on or off.
3 ASSIGN field
• Channel select buttons
Enable you to select a channel (bus) on which the talkback signal is sent.
• CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to clear all selections.
Using the Oscillator function
You can send a sine wave or pink noise from the internal oscillator to the desired bus.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button.
2.
Press the OSCILLATOR display button or the ASSIGN field in the MONITOR screen.
3.
Press a button in the OSCILLATOR MODE field in the OSCILLATOR window to select the type of signal you want to output.
4.
Use the knobs and buttons in the parameter field to adjust the oscillator parameters.
5.
Press a button in the ASSIGN field to specify the input channel(s) or bus(es) to which the oscillator signal will be sent (multiple selections are allowed).
6.
Press the OUTPUT button to enable the oscillator.
1
2
Talkback and Oscillator
MONITOR screen
In the MONITOR screen, the OSCILLATOR field lets you check the current oscillator settings, and turn the oscillator on or off.
MONITOR screen
3 4 5
1
OSCILLATOR display button
When you press this button, the OSCILLATOR screen will appear, in which you can make detailed oscillator settings.
2
OSCILLATOR LEVEL field
This adjusts the level of the oscillator. A meter beside the LEVEL knob indicates the output level of the oscillator. If OSCILLATOR MODE is set to SINE WAVE, the frequency of the oscillator is shown. If you press the LEVEL knob, you can use the [TOUCH AND
TURN] knob to adjust the oscillator level.
3
OSCILLATOR MODE field
Indicates the currently-selected oscillator mode. Pressing the MODE button repeatedly will switch modes.
4 OSCILLATOR ASSIGN field
An indicator lights to indicate the currently-selected oscillator output destination (input channels or buses). Use the tabs on the left to select channels or buses to display.
NOTE
In the case of QL1, channels that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
120
V5.8 Reference Manual
5 OSCILLATOR OUTPUT button
Turns the oscillator output on or off.
OSCILLATOR window
You can make detailed settings for the oscillator. This window appears when you press the
OSCILLATOR display button in the MONITOR screen.
1 2
5
3
4
Talkback and Oscillator
• FREQ knob ...........Indicates the frequency of the sine wave. You can use the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the value.
Mode = SINE WAVE 2CH
• LEVEL knob (ODD/L) ...... Indicates the output level of the sine wave on the ODD/L side. You can adjust the value by using the [TOUCH AND
TURN] knob.
• FREQ knob (ODD/L) ........ Indicates the frequency of the sine wave on the ODD/L side. You can adjust the value by using the [TOUCH AND
TURN] knob.
• LEVEL knob (EVEN/R) .... Indicates the output level of the sine wave on the EVEN/ R side. You can adjust the value by using the [TOUCH AND
TURN] knob.
• FREQ knob (EVEN/R) ...... Indicates the frequency of the sine wave on the EVEN/R side. You can adjust the value by using the [TOUCH AND
TURN] knob.
By default, ODD(L) is set to 1kHz and EVEN(R) is set to 400Hz. At this time, there are two meters (L and R).
Mode = PINK NOISE
1
OSCILLATOR MODE buttons
Select one of the following four operating modes when the oscillator is turned on:
SINE WAVE A sine wave will be output continuously.
SINE WAVE 2CH Two sine waves of different frequencies will be output separately.
PINK NOISE
BURST NOISE
Pink noise will be output continuously.
Pink noise will be output intermittently.
2 Parameter field
Enables you to set the oscillator parameters. The controllers and their functions in this field vary depending on the selected mode.
Mode = SINE WAVE
• LEVEL knob ..........Indicates the output level of the pink noise. You can use the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob to control the level.
• HPF knob ..............Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF that processes pink noise. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the value. Use the button below the knob to switch the HPF on or off.
• LPF knob ...............Indicates the cutoff frequency of the LPF that processes pink noise. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the value. Use the button below the knob to switch the LPF on or off.
• LEVEL knob ..........Indicates the output level of the sine wave. You can use the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob to control the level.
121
V5.8 Reference Manual
Talkback and Oscillator
Mode = BURST NOISE
• LEVEL knob, HPF knob, and LPF knob
....................Same as in PINK NOISE mode.
• WIDTH ...................Indicates the length of noise being output intermittently. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the value.
• INTERVAL ..............Indicates the length of silence between noise bursts. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the value.
Level
INTERVAL
Pink noise output
WIDTH
Time
Turn BURST NOISE button on.
3 ASSIGN section
Enables you to select a channel to which the oscillator signal will be sent. Press one of the three tabs below to select the type of channels displayed, and then press the button(s) for the desired channel(s) (multiple selections are allowed). The “ASSIGNED” indicator is lit green for a tab that contains a selection.
If the mode is set to SINE WAVE 2CH, the signal is output to either odd (ODD(L) side) or even (EVEN(R) side) of the selected channel. For example, the signal set to ODD(L) is output in MIX1, and the signal set to EVEN(R) is output in MIX2.
You can press the CLEAR ALL button to defeat all selections.
NOTE
In the case of QL1, channels that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
4 Meter section
Indicates the oscillator output level.
5
OSCILLATOR OUTPUT button
Turns the oscillator output on or off. If you turn this button on, the oscillator signal will be sent to the input channel or bus you selected in the ASSIGN section. When you press the button again, the oscillator will turn off.
122
V5.8 Reference Manual
Meters
This chapter explains the METER screen that shows the input and output level meters for all channels.
Operations in the METER screen
By accessing the METER screen, you can view the input and output levels of all channels on the screen, and switch the level meter’s metering points (the points in the signal route at which the level is detected). To access the METER screen, press the METER field of the Function
Access Area.
INPUT METER screen
This screen shows the meters and faders for all input channels.
INPUT/OUTPUT/RTA tab
Use these tabs to switch between the INPUT METER screen, OUTPUT METER screen, and
RTA screen.
NOTE
In the case of QL1, channels that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
OUTPUT METER screen
This screen shows the meters and faders for all output channels.
Meters
123
V5.8 Reference Manual
Fader level and meter display
This area displays the meter and fader for each channel.
1
2
3
4
5 When the [ON] key for channel 7 is ON, and the [ON] key for channel 8 is OFF
1 Channel number
Indicates the channel number.
2 Σ
clipping indicator
Lights to indicate that a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
3 OVER indicator
Lights if the signal is clipping at the input section or output section of the channel.
4
Meter
Indicates the input or output level of the channel.
5 Fader
The channel level is indicated by the fader position and by a numeric value (in dB) that appears immediately below the fader. If the channel’s [ON] key is OFF, the fader turns gray.
NOTE
Press any part of the meter area to assign the corresponding fader bank to the Channel Strip section.
Meters
METERING POINT field
Select one of the following as the metering point at which the level will be detected. The metering point for the level meter can be specified independently for input channels and output channels.
For INPUT METER
• PRE GC .................Immediately before GAIN
COMPENSATION
• PRE D. GAIN .........Immediately before DIGITAL GAIN
• POST D. GAIN .......Immediately after DIGITAL GAIN
• PRE FADER ...........Immediately before the fader (immediately before INPUT DELAY)
• POST ON ...............immediately after the [ON] key
For OUTPUT METER
• PRE EQ .................Immediately before the EQ
• PRE FADER ...........Immediately before the fader
• POST ON ...............immediately after the [ON] key
PEAK HOLD button
Turn on this button to hold the peak level indication on each meter. Turn off this button to clear the peak hold indication. PEAK HOLD button on/off operations will affect both input channels and output channels. When you turn this button off, the peak level indications that had been held will be cleared.
NOTE
You can also assign the PEAK HOLD button on/off function to a USER DEFINED key (
).
124
V5.8 Reference Manual
SHOW SEND LEVEL button
If you switch to SENDS ON FADER mode when this button is on, the color and position of the faders in the INPUT METER screen show the type of send destination bus, the send level to that bus, and ON/OFF status.
For INPUT METER
RTA METER screen
This is the real time analyzer screen. The results of a frequency analysis for the selected source are shown in the 1/6 octave band (61 band).
3 4 8
Meters
5
1
6
Fader color
The channel color is the same as the currently selected MIX/MATRIX bus (SEND MAIN).
The position of the fader is the level of the signal sent to the bus.
The fader turns gray if you switch the SEND button to OFF or switch the channel OFF.
For OUTPUT METER
Only the fader for the signal sent from the MIX bus to the MATRIX bus changes color.
2
9
1 Frequency Response graph
A graph of a frequency analysis is shown in the 1/6 octave band.
7
2
Source selection buttons
Use these buttons to specify the output channel whose frequency response you want to see.
3 OVER display
Data that exceeds 0dB is shown the same as the OVER indicator.
4 Cross-hair cursor display
The frequency and level at the point you touch on the graph are displayed.
125
V5.8 Reference Manual
5 CUE OVERRIDE button
If this button is switched on, the cue signal set in the CUE screen is sent to the real time analyzer, and an analysis is displayed.
• If CUE MODE is set to MIX CUE, the frequency analysis is performed on a signal that is a mix of all channels selected in the CUE screen.
• If CUE MODE is set to 5.1 SOLO, the signal is treated as LAST CUE. In other words, the frequency analysis is performed on the POST ON signal of the input channel.
• If CUE is set to 2 channels, buttons will be as shown below.
Meters
8 OFFSET gain knob
If a frequency is at a low level, its analysis results might not appear clearly in a graph.
The addition of offset gain allows better visibility in graphs for such results. You can adjust this gain from 0dB to +30dB.
NOTE
The value for this parameter is applied identically to the RTA METER window, HPF/EQ window,
GEQ window, and PEQ window.
9 PEAK HOLD button
Turn on this button to hold the peak level indication on graphs of frequency analysis.
Turn off this button to clear the peak hold indication.
NOTE
The settings for the PEAK HOLD button, RTA button, and OFFSET gain knob are stored even when the console is turned off.
6
BALLISTICS field
• BALLISTICS button
Setting this switch to ON allows you to add rate of decay to the graph.
• FAST/SLOW switch button
Use this button to set the rate of decay (FAST/SLOW).
7 HOLD button
Press this button to hold the graph that displays frequency response.
RTA
16
GEQ RACK 1-8 OUT
EFFECT RACK 1-8 OUT
16
64{32}
CH 1-64{32} POST EQ
ST IN 1L-8R POST EQ
MIX1-16 POST EQ
STEREO L,R,MONO(C) POST EQ
MATRIX 1-6,7-8 (CUE B L,R) POST EQ
MIX OUT 1-16
STEREO OUT L,R,MONO(C)
MATRIX OUT 1-6,7-8 (CUE B L,R)
CUE (A) OUT L,R
16
16
3
8
16
3
8
2
RTA
126
V5.8 Reference Manual
METER screen (Surround mode)
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the METER screen appears as shown below.
METER screen (when using 2-channel CUE)
Meters
1 2
1
MONITOR
Meters for MIX1-6. The layout for L R C LFE Ls and Rs is the same as the layout set in the
SURROUND SETUP screen.
2
SURROUND METER select button
Selects the meters displayed in the Function Access Area.
• MIX1-6
Source for MIX1-6.
• MONITOR
Source selected in SURROUND MONITOR. For 2CH MONITOR, the layout remains 5.1, but with meters only for L and R.
1
1 CUE
Meters for CUE A and CUE B.
127
V5.8 Reference Manual
Meters
Function Access Area screen
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the METER screen in the Function Access
Area appears as shown below.
The display specifications are as follows.
• The meter for the SURROUND signal is shown on the left side, and the meter for the
STEREO signal is shown on the right side. The layout for L R C LFE Ls and Rs is the same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP screen.
When cue is operating
• EFFECT CUE is shown on the right side, as usual.
• The 5.1 SOLO CUE display is updated on the left side. However, if CUE MODE is set to
5.1 SOLO, no cue other than 5.1 SOLO CUE is possible.
Touch the CUE (or 5.1 SOLO) display area to clear the cue, as usual.
• Touch the CUE (or 5.1 SOLO) display area to clear the cue, as usual.
128
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and
Premium Rack
This chapter explains how to use the built-in graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack.
About the virtual rack
QL series consoles enable you to use the built-in graphic EQ (subsequently abbreviated as
“GEQ” ), parametric EQ (subsequently abbreviated as “PEQ” ), and effects/processors to modify signals. You can use two types of GEQ: 31BandGEQ which enables you to freely adjust thirty-one bands (frequency regions), and Flex15GEQ which enables you to adjust any fifteen of thirty-one bands. The 8Band PEQ allows you to freely adjust 8 bands (frequency regions), and also features an HPF, an LPF, and 3 notch filters. You can also use 54 different effect types. The QL series consoles feature Premium Rack, which employs VCM technology.
This technology models analog circuitry on a component level to faithfully reproduce amazing analog sounds. The Premium Rack offers nine types of processors.
In order to use a GEQ, PEQ, effect, or Premium Rack, you must mount the GEQ, PEQ, effect, or Premium Rack in each virtual rack, and patch the input and output of that rack to the desired signal route. In other words, the operation is just as though you had installed a signal processor or effect device in an actual rack, and used patch cords to connect it. You can mount a GEQ, PEQ instance in each of the eight racks 1-8, an effect rack instance in each of the eight racks 1-8 and EFFECT, and a Premium Rack instance in each of the eight racks 1-8.
Up to two channels of input and output can be used for each rack. (However if the
“31BandGEQ” is mounted in a rack, there will be only one channel each for input and output.)
The figure below shows the signal flow for the virtual racks.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
INSERT 1,2 OUT
[CH 1-64{32},
MIX 1-16,
STEREO
L,R,MONO(C),
MATRIX 1-6,7-8
(CUE B L,R)
OUT
[MIX 1-16,
STEREO
L,R,MONO(C),
MATRIX 1-6,7-8
(CUE B L,R)
GEQ
RACK IN
PATCH
GEQ RACK1(GEQ1)
METER RACK IN
31BandGEQ
METER RACK OUT
METER
METER
RACK OUT A
RACK OUT B
METER RACK IN A
METER RACK IN B
Flex15GEQ
METER RACK IN A
METER RACK IN B
8BandPEQ
METER
METER
RACK OUT A
RACK OUT B
GEQ1 IN
A/B
GEQ2-8 IN
A/B
GEQ1-4 IN
A/B
GEQ1-8 IN
A/B
EFFECT
RACK IN
PATCH
GEQ RACK2-8(GEQ2-8) (same as GEQ RACK1)
8
Automixer 8ch RACK1-4 (GEQ1-4)
METER METER
Automixer8ch
8
1 6
Automixer 16ch RACK1-8 (GEQ1-8)
METER
Automixer16ch
METER
1 6
EFFECT RACK1(FX1)
METER RACK IN METER RACK OUT
31BandGEQ
METER
METER
RACK OUT A
RACK OUT B
METER
METER
RACK IN A
RACK IN B
Flex15GEQ
METER
METER
RACK IN L
RACK IN R
EFFECT
METER
METER
RACK IN A
RACK IN B
8BandPEQ
METER RACK OUT L
METER RACK OUT R
EFFECT CUE
METER
METER
RACK OUT A
RACK OUT B
FX1 IN
A(L)/B(R)
FX2-8 IN
A(L)/B(R)
PREMIUM
RACK IN
PATCH
PR1 IN
A(L)/B(R)
PR2-8 IN
A(L)/B(R)
EFFECT RACK2-8(FX2-8) (same as EFFECT RACK1)
PREMIUM RACK1(PR1)
METER
METER
RACK IN L
RACK IN R
PROCESSOR
METER
METER
RACK OUT L
RACK OUT R
EFFECT CUE
PREMIUM RACK2-8 (same as PREMIUM RACK1)
INSERT 1,2 IN
PATCH
To RTA
INPUT
1-32{16}
SLOT1 1-16
SLOT2 1-16
DANTE IN
1-64{32}
GEQ1-8
OUT
A/B
FX1-8 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
64{32}
MIX INSERT 1,2 IN 1-16
16
CH INSERT 1,2 IN 1-64{32}
STEREO INSERT 1,2 IN L,R,MONO(C)
3
MATRIX INSERT 1,2 IN 1-6,7-8(CUE B L,R)
8
PR1-8 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
To CH INSERT 1,2 IN
To MIX INSERT 1,2 IN
To STEREO INSERT 1,2 IN
To MATRIX INSERT 1,2 IN
NOTE
The QL console provides a rack for mounting an I/O rack (such as an R series), external head amps (Yamaha AD8HR, SB168-ES, etc.) as well as the virtual rack for GEQ, PEQ, effects and
Premium Rack. For details, refer to “ I/O devices and external head amps ” on page 163
.
129
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Virtual rack operations
This section explains how to mount a GEQ, PEQ , or effect in the virtual rack, and patch the input and output of the rack as an example.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button.
2.
In the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK window, press the GEQ or EFFECT tab.
3.
To mount a GEQ, PEQ , or effect in the rack, press the rack mount button for that rack.
4.
Use the buttons in the MODULE SELECT field in the RACK MOUNTER window to select the item you want to mount, and press the OK button.
5.
Press the INPUT PATCH button.
6.
In the CH SELECT window, select the input source and then press the OK button.
7.
Press the OUTPUT PATCH button.
8.
In the CH SELECT window, select the output destination and then press the OK button.
VIRTUAL RACK window
1 1
23 4 6 5 23 4 6 5
1 Rack tabs
Selects the type of rack you want to display on the screen. Choose from GEQ (GEQ rack),
EFFECT (effect rack), and PREMIUM (Premium Rack).
2 Rack mount button
Press this button to open the RACK MOUNTER window, in which you can select the type of the rack you want to mount.
Function
Access Area
VIRTUAL RACK window
NOTE
• In steps 6 and 8, you can make settings such that the confirmation dialog box will not appear
).
• The type of GEQ, PEQ, effect, or Premium Rack mounted in each rack, its parameter settings, and the input-source and output-destination patch settings are saved as part of the scene.
3 SAFE button
Switches Recall Safe on or off for the rack. If this button is turned on for a rack, the contents and parameters of that rack will not change when a scene is recalled. For more information on Recall Safe, refer to “
Using the Recall Safe function ” on page 72
.
The Recall Safe settings of each rack will not preserve the input/output patching to that rack. Recall Safe settings for patching must be made on the input-source or output-destination channel.
130
V5.8 Reference Manual
4 INPUT PATCH button
If the type is EFFECT, two buttons (L/R) will appear. If the type is Flex15GEQ or 8Band
PEQ, two buttons (A/B) will appear. If the type is 31BandGEQ, one button will appear.
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the path of the signal patched to the rack input.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
5 OUTPUT PATCH button
If the type is EFFECT, two buttons (L/R) will appear. If the type is Flex15GEQ or 8Band
PEQ, two buttons (A/B) will appear. If the type is 31BandGEQ, one button will appear.
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the path of the signal patched to the rack output.
The categories and channels that can be selected are shown below.
• MIX/MATRIX ...................................MIX1-16, MATRIX1-8
*1
• ST/MONO .......................................STEREO L/R, MONO
*1
• INSERT 1 OUT 1-32 .......................CH1-32
• INSERT 1 OUT 33-64 .....................CH33-64 (QL5 only)
• INSERT 1 OUT MIX/MATRIX ..........MIX1-16, MATRIX1-8
• INSERT 1 OUT ST/MONO ..............STEREO L/R, MONO
• INSERT 2 OUT 1-32 .......................CH1-32
• INSERT 2 OUT 33-64 .....................CH33-64 (QL5 only)
• INSERT 2 OUT MIX/MATRIX ..........MIX1-16, MATRIX1-8
• INSERT 2 OUT ST/MONO ..............STEREO L/R, MONO
*1. Not displayed for GEQ 1–8 RACK.
NOTE
• In the case of QL1, channels that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
• In the case of the GEQ or PEQ, patching it to either an insert-out or insert-in will automatically assign the other patch point to the same rack. Also, insert mode will automatically be switched on. Additionally, if you defeat the insert-out or insert-in of a GEQ or PEQ, the other patch point will automatically be defeated and at the same time insert mode will automatically be switched off.
• In the case of the EFFECT, the operation is the same as that of the GEQ, if you select
DYNAMICS & EQ as the EFFECT TYPE.
• In the case of the PREMIUM RACK, the operation is the same as that of the GEQ.
The categories and channels that can be selected are shown below.
• CH1-32 ............................................CH1-32
*1, *2
• CH33-64 ..........................................CH33-64
*1, *2
(QL5 only)
• ST IN ...............................................ST IN 1L–8R
*1, *2
• INSERT 1 IN 1-32 ...........................CH1-32
• INSERT 1 IN 33-64 .........................CH33-64 (QL5 only)
• INSERT 1 IN MIX/MATRIX .............MIX1-16, MATRIX1-8
• INSERT 1 IN ST/MONO ..................STEREO L/R, MONO
• INSERT 2 IN 1-32 ...........................CH1-32
• INSERT 2 IN 33-64 .........................CH33-64 (QL5 only)
• INSERT 2 IN MIX/MATRIX .............MIX1-16, MATRIX1-8
• INSERT 2 IN ST/MONO ..................STEREO L/R, MONO
*1. Not displayed for GEQ 1–8 RACK.
*2. Not displayed for PREMIUM 3–8 RACK. Displayed only for PREMIUM 1–2 RACK.
NOTE
• In the case of QL1, channels that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
• If you use QL5 settings data on the QL1, buttons will be shown crossed-out if they are assigned to a channel that does not exist on that model.
131
V5.8 Reference Manual
6 Rack container
Indicates the contents of the rack. This container varies depending on the rack type you selected in the RACK MOUNTER window.
• If nothing is mounted:
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
• If 16ch Automixer is mounted (GEQ rack 1-8):
Press this area to open the RACK MOUNTER window, in which you can select the GEQ or effect that will be mounted in the rack.
• If 31BandGEQ is mounted:
This area indicates the settings for each band, GEQ on/off status, and input/output level.
Press this area to open the GEQ EDIT window, in which you can modify the GEQ settings.
• If Flex15GEQ is mounted:
This area indicates the settings for each band, the GEQ on/off status, and the input and output levels for A and B respectively. Press this area to open the GEQ EDIT window, in which you can modify the GEQ settings for A and B.
• If 8BandPEQ is mounted:
• If 8ch Automixer is mounted (GEQ rack 1-4):
This area indicates the EQ frequency response, the PEQ on/off status, and the input and output levels for A and B respectively. Press this area to open the PEQ EDIT window, in which you can modify the PEQ settings for A and B.
• If an effect is mounted (EFFECT rack only):
This area indicates the effect type, number of inputs and outputs, bypass on/off status, and the input/output level. Press this area to open the EFFECT EDIT window, in which you can modify the effect settings.
132
Press this area to open the AUTOMIXER EDIT window, in which you can modify the automixer settings.
V5.8 Reference Manual
7
7 Link indicator
Indicates that an odd-numbered rack and even-numbered rack of the 31BandGEQ, A and B of the Flex15GEQ, or A and B of the 8BandPEQ are linked to each other.
RACK MOUNTER window
Mount a GEQ, PEQ, or effect in the rack. This window will appear if you press the rack mount button in the VIRTUAL RACK window.
1 2 1 2
3 4 5 3 4 5
1 Rack number
Indicates the number for the selected rack.
2 Virtual rack
This area indicates the GEQ or effect selected via the MODULE SELECT buttons.
3 MODULE SELECT field
Select the GEQ or effect that will be mounted in the rack. Each button has the following function.
• BLANK button ....................... Removes the GEQ or effect currently mounted in the rack; the rack will be empty.
• 31BandGEQ button .............. Mounts a 31BandGEQ in the rack.
• Flex15GEQ button ................ Mounts a Flex15GEQ in the rack.
• 8BandPEQ button ................. Mounts an 8BandPEQ in the rack.
• EFFECT button (EFFECT rack only) .............Mounts an effect in the rack.
• 16ch Automixer button (GEQ rack 1 only) ....Mounts a 16ch Automixer in the rack.
• 8ch Automixer button (GEQ rack 1 only) ......Mounts an 8ch Automixer in the rack.
NOTE
• Input/output patching will be defeated if you change the item mounted in a rack.
• The 16ch Automixer is mounted in racks 1–8. The 8ch Automixer is mounted in racks 1–4.
4
CANCEL button
Cancels the changes you made in the RACK MOUNTER window, and closes the window.
133
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
5 OK button
Applies the changes you made in the RACK MOUNTER window, and closes the window.
NOTE
Be aware that if you remove a GEQ, PEQ, or effect that was mounted in a rack and close the
RACK MOUNTER window, all edits to the parameter settings for that GEQ, PEQ, or effect will be discarded. If you have not yet closed the window, you can recover the parameter settings by mounting the same GEQ, PEQ, or effect once again.
Graphic EQ operations
The QL series console enables you to mount a GEQ in GEQ racks 1–8 and patch it to the insert-out/in of an input channel, a MIX/MATRIX channel, or STEREO/MONO channel. You can also mount it in EFFECT racks 1–8 (FX 1–8) and patch it to the insert-out/in of an input channel, MIX/MATRIX channel or STEREO/MONO channel. The gain of each band can be adjusted using the faders and [ON] keys in the Channel Strip section.
The following two types of GEQ are provided.
31BandGEQ
This is a monaural 31-band GEQ. Each band is 1/3 octave wide, the adjustable gain range is ±15 dB, and the gain of all thirty-one bands can be adjusted.
If a 31BandGEQ is mounted in a rack, one channel of input and output can be used for that rack.
INPUT
Rack
31BandGEQ
OUTPUT
Flex15GEQ
This is a monaural 15-band GEQ. Each band is 1/3 octave wide, and the adjustable gain range is ±15 dB.
The Flex15GEQ enables you to adjust the gain for
INPUT
Rack
Flex15GEQ (A)
OUTPUT any fifteen of the same bands as the thirty-one bands
Flex15GEQ (B) of the 31bandGEQ. (Once you have used up fifteen bands of adjustment, you will not be able to adjust the gain of another band until you reset a previously-adjusted band to the flat setting.)
A rack for which the Flex15GEQ is selected will have two Flex15GEQ units (shown as “A” and
“B” respectively) mounted in that rack, and will allow two channels of input and output.
V5.8 Reference Manual
Inserting a GEQ in a channel
This section explains how to insert a GEQ into the selected channel for use.
STEP
1.
Refer to steps 1–8 in “ Virtual rack operations ” on page 130 to mount a GEQ in a rack
and set its input source and output destination.
2.
In the GEQ field rack or the EFFECT field rack, press the rack container in which you mounted the GEQ.
3.
If you’re using a stereo source, press the RACK LINK button to link the two GEQ units.
4.
Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the GEQ on.
NOTE
• If you are using a stereo source, you can mount a Flex15GEQ, or mount two 31BandGEQ units in adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered racks. This will let you link the two GEQ units in a later step.
• You can view the input and output levels of the GEQ in the rack in the GEQ field.
• For details on GEQ operations, refer to the following section “ Using the 31BandGEQ
” on
.
GEQ EDIT window
NOTE
• The windows for the 31BandGEQ and the Flex15GEQ are nearly identical. However, the
Flex15GEQ individually displays two GEQ units (A and B) mounted in a single rack.
• Pressing a top panel [SEL] key while operating the GEQ will switch to the popup window of GEQ, effect, or premium rack that is inserted in that channel.
7 8 2 3 4 5 6
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
1 Rack select tabs
Switch among GEQ 1–8, or among EFFECT 1–8. For a rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted, the tabs will be split as xA and xB (x is the rack number).
2 INPUT button
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the input source of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT button in the
GEQ field.
3 OUTPUT button
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the output destination of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT button in the GEQ field.
4 RACK LINK button
Press this button to open the RACK LINK window, in which you can link adjacent GEQ units.
In the case of a 31bandGEQ, the GEQ units in adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered racks will be linked. In the case of a Flex15GEQ, the GEQ (A) and GEQ (B) within the same rack will be linked.
9
• GEQ x ➞ y button (“x” and “y” are the rack number, or the rack number and alphabetical character A or B)
The parameters of “x” will be copied to “y,” and then linked.
• GEQ y ➞ x button
The parameters of “y” will be copied to “x,” and then linked.
• RESET BOTH button
The parameters of both will be initialized, and then linked.
• CANCEL button
Cancels the link and closes the window.
NOTE
The RACK LINK button is shown only if linking is possible. When you link
GEQ units, a symbol will appear in the GEQ field to indicate the linked status.
1
134
V5.8 Reference Manual
5 FLAT button
Returns all bands of the currently-selected GEQ to 0 dB.
6 GEQ ON/OFF button
Switches the currently-selected GEQ on or off.
7 RTA button
Turn this button on to overlay a frequency response graph on the EQ.
8 HOLD button
Press this button to hold the peak of the graph that displays RTA.
9 OFFSET gain knob
If a frequency is at a low level, its analysis results might not appear clearly in a graph.
The addition of offset gain allows better visibility in graphs for such results. You can adjust this gain from 0dB to +30dB.
NOTE
The value for this parameter is applied identically to the RTA METER window, HPF/EQ window,
GEQ window, and PEQ window.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Using the 31BandGEQ
You will use the Channel Strip section’s faders 1–8 and [ON] keys to control the 31BandGEQ.
STEP
1.
In the GEQ field or the EFFECT field rack, press the rack container in which you mounted the 31BandGEQ.
2.
Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the 31BandGEQ on.
3.
Press one of the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field to select the group of bands you will control.
4.
Use the faders in the Channel Strip section to adjust the selected band.
5.
When you’ve finished making settings, turn off the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field.
NOTE
• When a fader in the Channel Strip section is set to the center (flat) position, the corresponding
[ON] key indicator will turn off. This indicates that the corresponding band is not being modified.
If you raise or lower the fader even the slightest amount, the [ON] key will light, indicating that this band has been modified. If you press a lit [ON] key to make it go dark, the corresponding band will immediately return to the flat state.
If you press the [ON] key once again, the value that was modified is shown. However, please note that if the [ON] key for this band is off and if you press the [ON] key for the fader of a different frequency band, the adjusted gain value will be canceled and will return to ±0dB.
• If you switch the display to a different screen or rack, the fader assignments in the Channel Strip section will forcibly be defeated. However if you once again display the same rack, the group of bands you had previously been controlling will automatically be assigned to the faders.
• When you close the GEQ window, the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field automatically turn off.
135
V5.8 Reference Manual
GEQ EDIT window (31BandGEQ)
1
2
4
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
4 Tool buttons
Copy the currently-displayed 31BandGEQ settings to the GEQ of another rack, or initialize the settings. For details on how to use the tool buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s Manual.
NOTE
• Only 31BandGEQ settings that use fifteen bands or less can be copied to a Flex15GEQ.
• GEQ settings can be stored and recalled at any time using the dedicated library.
Using the Flex15GEQ
You will use the Channel Strip section’s faders and [ON] keys to control the Flex15GEQ.
A rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted will show information for two GEQ units (A and B) in the VIRTUAL RACK window.
3
1 EQ graph
Indicates the approximate response of the current 31BandGEQ.
2 Faders
Indicate the amount of boost and cut for each band of the 31BandGEQ. The actual values are shown in the numerical boxes below.
The area of a fader you touched will turn pink as shown below.
3 FADER ASSIGN field
Use the faders in the Channel Strip section to select the group of bands that will be controlled. The buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field correspond to the following groups of bands (QL1 only).
20-630
125-4k
630-20k
16 bands 20 Hz–630 Hz
16 bands 125 Hz–4 kHz
16 bands 630 Hz–20 kHz
When you press one of these buttons, the faders for the bands selected on screen will turn white, and the numbers of the corresponding faders in the Channel Strip section will be displayed. Now you can use the faders in the Channel Strip section to control the band.
136
NOTE
If you mount a Flex15GEQ, two monaural 31BandGEQ units will be placed in a single rack.
However, only up to fifteen bands can be adjusted for each unit.
STEP
1.
Press the rack container in which you mounted Flex15GEQ.
2.
Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the Flex15GEQ on.
3.
Press one of the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field to select the group of bands you will control.
4.
Use the faders in the Channel Strip section to adjust the selected band.
5.
When you’ve finished making settings, turn off the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field.
NOTE
• When a fader in the Channel Strip section is set to the center (flat) position, the corresponding
[ON] key indicator will turn off. This indicates that the corresponding band is not being modified.
If you raise or lower the fader even the slightest amount, the [ON] key will light, indicating that this band has been modified.
If you press a lit [ON] key to make it go dark, the corresponding band will immediately return to the flat state. If you press the [ON] key once again, the value that was modified is shown.
However, please note that if the [ON] key for this band is off and if you press the [ON] key for the fader of a different frequency band, the adjusted gain value will be canceled and will return to
±0dB.
• If you switch the display to a different screen, the fader assignments in the Channel Strip section will forcibly be defeated. However if you once again display the same rack, the group of bands you had previously been controlling will automatically be assigned to the faders.
• When you close the GEQ window, the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field automatically turn off.
V5.8 Reference Manual
GEQ EDIT window (Flex 15GEQ)
This window is the same as that for the 31BandGEQ, except that the AVAILABLE BANDS parameter box indicates the real-time number of additional bands (maximum 15) that can be controlled in the current GEQ.
For a rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted, the rack switch tabs will be split as xA and xB (x is the rack number).
Parametric EQ operations
In addition to the standard 4-band EQ, QL series consoles also feature an 8-band parametric
EQ (PEQ) that can be rack mounted. You can mount this PEQ in GEQ racks 1-8 and patch it to the insert-out/in of an input channel (GEQ 1-8 rack only), a MIX/MATRIX channel, or a
STEREO/MONO channel. You can also mount it in EFFECT racks 1-8 (FX 1-8) and patch it to the insert-out/in of an input channel, MIX/MATRIX channel or STEREO/MONO channel.
The gain of each band can be adjusted using the Centralogic section’s faders and [ON] keys.
The following type of PEQ is provided.
8BandPEQ
This is a monaural 8-band PEQ. There are also an independent HPF, LPF, and 3 notch filters.
Two 8BandPEQ units (shown as “A” and “B” respectively) can be mounted in a rack, and therefore you can use two channels of input and output for each rack.
G
F
1
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Inserting a PEQ in a channel
This section explains how to insert a PEQ into the selected channel for use.
STEP
1.
Refer to steps 1-8 in “ Virtual rack operations ” ( page 130
) to mount a PEQ in a rack and set its input source and output destination.
2.
In the GEQ field rack or the EFFECT field rack, press the rack container in which you mounted the PEQ.
3.
If you’re using a stereo source, press the RACK LINK button to link the two PEQ units.
4.
Press the PEQ ON/OFF button to turn the PEQ on.
NOTE
• You can view the input and output levels of the PEQ in the rack in the GEQ or EFFECT field.
• For details on PEQ operations, refer section “
PEQ EDIT window ” ( page 137 ).
PEQ EDIT window
D E 2 4 3 5 6 7 8
9
0
A
B
137
C
V5.8 Reference Manual
1 PEQ graph
Displays the parameter values for the PEQ and filter.
2 INPUT button
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the input source of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT button in the
GEQ field.
3 OUTPUT button
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the output destination of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT button in the GEQ field.
4 LIBRARY button
Press this button to open the PEQ Library window.
5 DEFAULT button
Press this button to restore the default parameter setting.
6 COPY button
All EQ parameter settings will be copied in buffer memory.
7 PASTE button
Press this button to paste the copied settings from buffer memory to the current EQ. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
8 COMPARE button
Press this button to swap between the current EQ settings and the data stored in buffer memory. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
9 RACK LINK button
Press this button to open the RACK LINK window, in which you can link adjacent PEQ units.
In the case of an 8BandPEQ, PEQ (A) and PEQ (B) within the same rack will be linked.
• GEQ x y button ( “x” and “y” are the rack number, or the rack number and alphabetical character A or B)
The parameters of “ x” will be copied to “ y,” and then linked.
• GEQ y x button
The parameters of “ y” will be copied to “ x,” and then linked.
138
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
• RESET BOTH button
The parameters of both will be initialized, and then linked.
• CANCEL button
Cancels the link and closes the window.
NOTE
The RACK LINK button is shown only if linking is possible. When you link RACK units, a symbol will appear in the GEQ field to indicate the linked status.
0 PEQ ON/OFF button
Switches the currently selected PEQ on/off.
A PEQ FLAT button
Press this button to reset the GAIN parameters of all PEQ bands to 0 dB.
All ON buttons for HPF, LPF, and notch filters are turned off.
All other parameter values are maintained and are not reset.
B PEQ IN/OUT level meters
Indicate the peak level of signals before and after the PEQ.
C Rack select tabs
Switch among GEQ 1-8 or EFFECT 1-8. For a rack in which an 8BandPEQ is mounted, the tabs will be split as xA and xB (x is the rack number).
NOTE
For details on how to use the buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s
Manual.
D RTA button
Turn this button on to overlay a frequency response graph on the EQ.
E
HOLD button
Press this button to hold the peak of the graph that displays RTA.
F EQ type select button
Switches the EQ type to PRECISE, AGGRESSIVE, SMOOTH, or LEGACY.
The following EQ types can be selected.
PRECISE
AGGRESSIVE
SMOOTH
LEGACY
This EQ type features “precision” and “controllability.” It can be used to precisely adjust the desired points, to flexibly respond to a variety of music production needs. The Low/High shelving filters have “Q” parameters that allow knee adjustments.
This EQ type features “effective musical” characteristics. It allows you to create an aggressive tone, making it a very powerful tool for artistic expression.
This EQ type focuses on a “smooth sound quality.” It allows you to create natural sounds without significant modifications to the atmosphere of the original sound.
This is the standard EQ type found in classic Yamaha digital mixers, such as the PM1D and the PM5D. On the left side of the EQ graph, you can switch between TYPE I (an algorithm used in previous Yamaha digital mixers) and
TYPE II (an algorithm that reduces interference between bands).
V5.8 Reference Manual
G OFFSET gain knob
If a frequency is at a low level, its analysis results might not appear clearly in a graph.
The addition of offset gain allows better visibility in graphs for such results. You can adjust this gain from 0dB to +30dB.
NOTE
The value for this parameter is applied identically to the RTA METER window, HPF/EQ window,
GEQ window, and PEQ window.
PEQ EDIT window (8PEQ)
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
3 EQ parameter setting knobs
Indicates the Q, FREQUENCY, and GAIN parameters for the BAND1 - BAND8 bands. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
PEQ EDIT window (HPF/LPF NOTCH)
3
4
3
4
1 1
1
2
3 1 3
1 BYPASS button
You can bypass each band.
When the BYPASS button is on, the Q, FREQUENCY, and GAIN knobs for that band turn gray.
2 HPF/LPF NOTCH button
Press this button to switch to the screen for operating HPF/LPF/notch filters.
2
5 4 6 5 4 6 5 4 6
1 Attenuation select button
There are four types of HPF and LPF. This button switches the attenuation per octave between -24 dB/oct, -18dB/oct, -12 dB/oct, and -6dB/oct.
2 8PEQ button
Press this button to switch to the screen for operating the 8-band PEQ.
3
HPF/LPF frequency knob
This knob is used to adjust the HPF/LPF frequency.
4 ON button
There is an ON button for the HPF, LPF, and each of the three notch filters.
139
V5.8 Reference Manual
5 Notch Filter Q knob
Adjusts the Q of the notch filter.
6 Notch Filter frequency knob
Adjusts the frequency of the notch filter.
140
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
About AUTOMIXER
Automixer is included as a standard feature on the QL series. Automixer searches for enabled mics and automatically optimizes gain distribution, for uses such as speeches without scripts.
This allows uniform system gain to be maintained among multiple mics, freeing the engineer from making constant fader adjustments.
Automixer operating principle
With the Dugan speech system used in Automixer, you can automatically adjust the gain for multiple mics used for speeches.
When 1 person speaks on multiple mics When 2 people speak on multiple mics
Mic input audio (dB)
Mic input audio (dB)
Gain (dB) in
Automix
Gain (dB) in
Automix
When 1 person is speaking, the gain on the mic being used is immediately increased and the gain on all other mics is reduced. The same operation occurs even if another person is speaking.
If 2 people are speaking at the same time, gain is automatically distributed so that the total gain is consistent across both mics, and the gain on the remaining mic is reduced.
The Dugan speech system functions differently from a limiter or auto level controller. When multiple people are speaking, the engineer can adjust each level using the faders as normal.
Even if nobody is speaking, the system searches for mic audio and automatically distributes gain. Therefore, faders can leave in their raised positions.
V5.8 Reference Manual
Inserting Automixer in channels post-fader
This section explains how to mount Automixer in a virtual rack, and insert Automixer input and output into channels (excluding ST IN channels) post-fader (POST ON). For details on
Automixer operations, refer to the following section “Using Automixer.”
STEP
1.
Refer to steps 1–8 in “ Virtual rack operations ” on page 130
to mount Automixer in rack 1 and set its input source and output destination.
2.
Refer to “ Inserting an external device into a channel ” on page 20 to insert
Automixer in post-fader (POST ON field).
Using Automixer
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Channel control field
Each channel is always in man, auto, or mute mode. The indicator for the enabled channel mode will light. To select a mode, either press the button for that mode or press the PRESET button in the master field.
1
2 3
4
6
5
8
Master field
7
Channel control field
Channel display
The auto mix gain meter for each channel and man (yellow), auto (green), and mute (red) settings are shown for channels 1–8 and channels 9–16.
If you select the channel 1–8 or 9–16 region, the display channel for the channel control field will switch to 1–8 or 9–16.
(For 8ch Automixer, only channels 1–8 are shown.)
141
1
Level indicator
Lights green when the audio is at an optimum level for Automix.
NOTE
• If the level indicator flashes, increase the input gain.
• If the level indicator lights up red, reduce the input gain.
2
Meter indicator
There are three display modes. Pressing the meters button in the master field will switch modes.
gain input output
Displays the gain for Automixer.
Displays the input level.
Displays the output level.
Green
Yellow
Blue
NOTE
Meters should normally be set in gain mode.
3 weight
Adjusts the correlative sensitivity between input channels. When there is no input, adjust the weight setting so that all auto mix gain meters are at about the same level.
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to change the channel weight settings by adjusting the weight slider.
Automixer calculates the ratio of input level for specific channels for all input mixes in the group. The following example explains the weight control mechanism.
V5.8 Reference Manual
When increasing the weight setting in one channel
• The value displayed in the auto mix gain meter for that channel increases, while the values for other channels are reduced.
• Channels with high weight setting values receive a higher system gain than other channels.
When reducing the weight setting in one channel
• The value displayed in the auto mix gain meter for that channel reduces, while the values for other channels are increased.
• When speaking into multiple mics at the same time, it is difficult to distinguish between different mics.
If you can hear noise near one mic (example: noise from a computer ventilation fan or an air conditioner), you can suppress the noise by reducing the weight setting for that channel.
4 group
Each channel can be assigned to three groups (a/b/c).
This group function is convenient for the following uses.
• Using multiple rooms: Assign the mics in each room to their own groups, and use a different Automixer for each.
• Stereo pan: Assign mics panned to left, right and center to groups a, b, and c, to maintain a stable stereo field.
5 override
If you turn on the OVERRIDE button in the master field, the channel will switch to man mode or mute mode according to the settings for that channel’s override button.
• When the channel’s override button is on, the mode for that channel will switch to man when the master OVERRIDE button is turned on.
• When the channel’s override is off, the mode for that channel will switch to mute when the master OVERRIDE button is turned on.
• When the master OVERRIDE button is turned off, the channel will return to its previous mode.
The override function is convenient when the moderator of a panel discussion wants to control the system.
Follow the instructions below to change the settings.
1.
Turn on the override button on the moderator’s channel.
2.
Turn off the override button on all other channels.
3.
Turn on the OVERRIDE button in the master field as needed.
6 Channel number
Displays the channel number and channel name of the channel to be inserted.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
7 man/auto/mute
Toggles between man/auto/mute.
man: Passes the audio through without changing the gain. This mode is used for singing with a mic.
auto: Turns on Automixer. This mode is used for conversations.
mute: Mutes channels.
8 preset
Selects the channel mode (man/auto/mute) when the PRESET button in the master field is pressed. The preset button lights when a preset is programmed for a channel.
Master field
1
2 3
1 OVERRIDE/PRESET/MUTE
Makes settings for each group (a/b/c) selected in the channel control field. Shows only the selected group.
• OVERRIDE
When you press this button, channels where the channel override button is on will fade in to 0 dB (unity gain). All channels with the override button turned off will be muted.
• PRESET
When you press this button, each channel will switch to the mode indicated by the mode button (man/auto/mute) next to the lit preset indicator.
• MUTE
When you press this button, all channels will fade out immediately (0.5 seconds).
2 meters
Switches the meter indicator in the channel control field. Toggles between gain, input, and output each time you press the button.
NOTE
Meters should normally be set in gain mode.
3 reset
Initializes the Automixer settings.
142
V5.8 Reference Manual
Editing the internal effects
The internal effects of the QL series console can be mounted in EFFECT racks 1–8, and patched to an output channel’s output or input channel’s input, or inserted into a channel. For each effect mounted in a rack, you can choose one of 54 types of effect.
With the default settings, the signals from MIX channels 13–16 are input to racks 5–8, and from the racks are then output to ST IN 1–4 (L/R). There are no assignments to racks 1–4.
NOTE
Some effect types can be mounted only in racks 1, 3, 5 or 7.
To use an internal effect via send and return, assign the output of a MIX channel to the input of the effect, and assign the output of the effect to an input channel. In this case, the corresponding output channel is used as a master channel for the effect send, and the input channel is used as an effect return channel.
Rack 1
EFFECT
Rack 2
EFFECT
Output of the output channel
Input of the input channel
Rack 7
EFFECT
Rack 8
EFFECT
Alternatively, you can assign the input and output of the internal effect to the insert-out/in of a desired channel (except for a ST IN channel), so that the effect is inserted into that channel.
Insert-out of a desired channel*
EFFECT
Insert-in of a desired channel*
* Excluding a ST IN channel
The internal effects fall into two categories; “STEREO type” (2-in/2-out) effects that process the L/R channel input signals independently, and “MIX type” (1-in/2-out) effects that mix the two channels before processing them.
If signals are assigned to both the L and R inputs of an effect, the way in which the L/R channels are processed will depend on whether a Stereo effect type or a Mix effect type is selected, as follows.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
STEREO type effects
INPUT L
INPUT R
EFFECT L
EFFECT R
L RETURN
R RETURN
MIX type effects
INPUT L
INPUT R
EFFECT
L RETURN
R RETURN
If a signal is assigned to only one input of a two-input effect, it will be processed as mono-in/ stereo-out regardless of whether a Stereo effect type or Mix effect type is selected. However, please note that this will not apply to COMP276, COMP276S, COMP260, COMP260S,
EQUALIZER601, and OPENDECK.
INPUT L or R
EFFECT
L RETURN
R RETURN
Using an internal effect via send and return
This section explains how to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus and a ST IN channel as an effect return channel, so that the effect can be used in a send and return configuration.
NOTE
• If you want to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus, select “VARI” as the bus type. This will allow you to adjust the send level separately for each input channel.
• If you want to use the input to an effect in stereo, it is convenient to assign the send-destination
MIX bus to stereo. (For details on bus assignments, refer to “ Basic settings for MIX buses and
” on
STEP
1.
Follow steps 1–3 described in “ Virtual rack operations ” on page 130
, to mount an effect in a rack.
2.
Press the INPUT PATCH L button in the VIRTUAL RACK window, and select a MIX channel as the input source for the rack (
).
3.
Press the OUTPUT PATCH L button in the VIRTUAL RACK window, and select the L input of a ST IN channel as the output destination for the rack (
4.
Adjust the send level from each channel in the SEND field in the SELECTED
CHANNEL VIEW screen.
5.
Adjust the master level of the effect send of the MIX channel you selected as the input source for the rack.
6.
Adjust the effect return level of the ST IN channel you selected as the output destination for the rack.
143
V5.8 Reference Manual
NOTE
• If you’re using a stereo source, assign the L/R signals of the stereo MIX channels to the L/R inputs of the rack.
• If you’re using the output of the effect in stereo, assign the R input of the ST IN channel selected in step 3 to the R output of the rack.
• You can select more than one output destination for the effect.
” on
.
Adjusting the effect send level of a input channel
In the SEND field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, press and select the TO MIX
SEND LEVEL knob for the MIX bus set as the input source for the rack, and use the [TOUCH
AND TURN] knob to adjust the send level of the signal sent from each channel to that MIX bus.
NOTE
• When adjusting the effect send level, make sure that the send level from the ST IN channel you selected as the output destination for the rack to the corresponding MIX bus is set to –∞ dB. If you raise this send level, the output of the effect will be returned to the input of the same effect, possibly causing oscillation.
• If you press the knob once again, the MIX SEND window (8ch) for the send-destination MIX bus will appear. This window contains on/off switches for the signals sent from each channel to the corresponding bus, and lets you select the send point (PRE or POST) (
).
Adjusting the master level of the effect send
Operate the fader for the MIX channel you specified as the input source for the rack.
Set the level as high as possible without allowing the post-effect signal to reach the overload point.
NOTE
The input and output levels of the effect are shown by the input/output meters in the upper right of the EFFECT EDIT window.
Adjusting the effect return level
To adjust the effect return level, operate the fader for the ST IN channel you specified as the output destination for the rack.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Inserting an internal effect into a channel
This section explains how to insert an effect into a channel by assigning the input/output of the internal effect to the input/output of the desired channel (except for a ST IN channel). For details on editing the effect parameters, refer to “
Editing the internal effect parameters
” on
.
STEP
1.
Follow steps 1–3 described in “ Virtual rack operations ” on page 130
, to mount an effect in a rack.
2.
Press the INPUT PATCH L button in the VIRTUAL RACK window, and select the insert-
out for one of the channels as the input source for the rack ( page 130 ).
3.
Press the OUTPUT PATCH L button in the VIRTUAL RACK window, and select the insert-1in or insert-2in of the same channel as the output destination for the rack
4.
Use the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] key to select the channel into which you inserted the effect.
5.
Press the popup button in the INSERT field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
6.
In the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window, turn on the INSERT ON/OFF button for the channel into which you inserted the effect.
7.
Display the EFFECT EDIT window again, and select the effect type and edit the effect parameters.
8.
Using the fader of the channel you selected as the rack’s output destination in step
3, adjust the level as appropriate.
NOTE
• If you are inserting an effect into a channel that handles a stereo source, assign the R channel insert-out/insert-in to the R input and output of the effect in the same way as step 3.
• For more information about how to operate the INSERT/DIRECT OUT window, refer to “
Inserting an external device into a channel ” on page 20 .
• The levels before and after the effect are shown by the input and output meters in the upper right of the EFFECT EDIT window.
• Adjust the effect send master level and the effect parameters so that the signal does not reach the overload point at the input or output stage of the effect.
144
V5.8 Reference Manual
Editing the internal effect parameters
This section explains how to change the effect type and edit the parameters. For a rack in which an effect is mounted, the following information is shown in the VIRTUAL RACK window.
1 2
1
Effect title/type
Displays the effect title, the name of the type that is used, and a graphic. The number of input and output channels (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is also shown.
2
Input/output meters
Indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect.
STEP
1.
Press the rack container in which the effect you want to edit is mounted.
2.
To change the effect type, press the effect type field in the EFFECT EDIT window, and select the effect type in the EFFECT TYPE window.
3.
Press a knob in the effect parameter field in the EFFECT EDIT window to select it, and turn the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to edit the effect parameters.
4.
Edit the settings in the special parameter field as necessary.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
EFFECT EDIT window
Allows you to adjust the effect parameters.
NOTE
• For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the QL Data List (End of Manual).
• Pressing a top panel [SEL] key while operating the effect parameter will switch to the popup window of GEQ, effect, or premium rack that is inserted in that channel.
3 4 2 5
0
6
7
1
8
9
A
1 INPUT L/R buttons
2
OUTPUT L/R buttons
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window.
3 Effect type field
Displays the effect title, the name of the type that is used, and a graphic. The number of input and output channels (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is also shown.
Press this field to open the EFFECT TYPE window, in which you can select the effect type.
145
V5.8 Reference Manual
NOTE
• You can also change the effect type by recalling a library setting.
• Effect types “HQ.PITCH” and “FREEZE” can be used only in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7. Also, even if you copy these two effect types, you will not be able to paste them to rack 2, 4, 6, or 8.
4 EFFECT CUE button
Cue-monitors the output of the currently-displayed effect. This Cue function is valid only while this screen is displayed. The cue will be canceled automatically when you switch to a different screen.
NOTE
If the Cue mode is set to MIX CUE, all channels for which the CUE key is turned on will be monitored. However, only the output signal of the effect will be monitored if you turn on the
EFFECT CUE button. (The [CUE] keys that had been turned on until then will be temporarily defeated.)
The cue monitoring does not support CUE B.
5 Special parameter field
Indicates special parameters that are specific to some effect types.
TEMPO
This field appears if a tempo-type or modulation-type effect is selected.
• MIDI CLK button
If you turn this button on, the BPM parameter of that effect will be set to match the tempo of the MIDI timing clock being input from the MIDI port.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
PLAY/REC
This field appears if FREEZE is selected as the effect type.
• PLAY button/REC button
Enable you to record (sample) and play back when using the freeze effect. For detailed operations, refer to “
SOLO
This field appears if M.BAND DYNA. or M.BAND COMP. is selected as the effect type.
• HIGH/MID/LOW buttons
Allow only the selected frequency band to pass (multiple selections are allowed).
• Gain reduction meters
Indicate the amount of gain reduction for each band.
Gain reduction meter
This field appears if Comp276/276S or Comp260/260S is selected as the effect type.
• Gain reduction meters
Indicate the amount of gain reduction applied by the compressor.
Type
This field is displayed when Equalizer601 is selected as the effect type.
• DRIVE button/CLEAN button
Select one of two equalizer types that feature different effects.
DRIVE emulates changes in frequency response of analog circuits, creating a driven sound that enhances analog characteristics by adding some distortion.
CLEAN emulates changes in frequency response that are typical of analog circuits, creating a clear non-distorted sound that is inherently digital.
• FLAT button
This button resets the gain of all bands to 0dB.
6 BYPASS button
Temporarily bypasses the effect.
7
Input/output meters
Indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect.
146
V5.8 Reference Manual
8 Effect parameter field
This area indicates parameters for the currently-selected effect type. When you press a knob in this field, you will be able to use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to control the corresponding horizontal row of knobs.
You can also make fine adjustments by rotating the knob while pressing and holding it down.
9 MIX BAL. knob
Adjusts the balance between the original sound and effect sound included in the output signal from the effect. If you press this knob to select it, you will be able to adjust it using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. If you are using the effect via send and return, set this to 100% (effect sound only).
0 Tool buttons
Copy the currently-displayed effect settings to the effect of another rack, or initialize the settings. For details on how to use the tool buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s Manual.
NOTE
Effect settings can be stored and recalled at any time using the effect library.
A Rack select tabs
Enable you to switch between EFFECT 1–8.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Using the Tap Tempo function
“Tap tempo” is a function that lets you specify the delay time of a delay effect or the modulation speed of a modulation effect by striking a key at the desired interval. The Tap Tempo function can be used for delay-type and modulation-type effects in which the BPM parameter is included, and specify the delay time or modulation speed. To use the Tap function, you must assign Tap Tempo to a USER DEFINED key, and then operate that USER DEFINED key.
NOTE
For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the QL Data List (End of Manual).
Assigning the Tap Tempo function to a USER DEFINED key
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
Press the USER SETUP button in the upper left of the SETUP screen.
3.
Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab in the USER SETUP window.
4.
On the USER DEFINED KEYS page, press the button for the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign the Tap Tempo function.
5.
Select “TAP TEMPO” in the FUNCTION column, select “CURRENT PAGE” in the
PARAMETER 1 column in the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window, and press the OK button.
147
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Using the Tap Tempo function
The average interval (BPM) at which you press the USER DEFINED key will be calculated, and that value will be applied to the BPM parameter.
The average interval will be input to the parameter.
(the average of a, b, and c) a b c
SETUP screen USER SETUP window
USER DEFINED KEYS page USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window
NOTE
• If you specify “CURRENT PAGE” in the PARAMETER 1 column in the USER DEFINED KEY
SETUP window, the Tap Tempo function can be used for the currently-displayed effect (rack).
• If you specify “RACK x” (x=1–8) in the PARAMETER 1 column in the USER DEFINED KEY
SETUP window, you can use the Tap Tempo function only for a specific effect (rack).
• For more information on USER DEFINED keys, refer to “
USER DEFINED keys ” on page 221 .
First tap Second tap Third tap Fourth tap
NOTE
• If the average value is outside the range of 20–300 BPM, it will be ignored.
• If you turn on the MIDI CLK button in the special parameter field, the BPM parameter value will change in relation to the tempo of the MIDI timing clock received from the MIDI port.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button.
2.
Press the EFFECT tab in the VIRTUAL RACK window.
3.
Press the rack container in which the effect you want to control is mounted.
4.
Press the effect type field in the EFFECT EDIT window.
5.
In the EFFECT TYPE window, select an effect type that includes a BPM parameter.
6.
Set the SYNC parameter ON in the effect parameter field.
7.
At the desired tempo, repeatedly press the USER DEFINED key to which you assigned the Tap Tempo function, to set the BPM parameter.
148
V5.8 Reference Manual
Tap Tempo window
NOTE
• If the EFFECT EDIT popup window used to set TAP TEMPO is open, this popup window is not displayed.
• With QL V3.0 and later, the delay value (msec) is also shown in the popup window.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Effects and tempo synchronization
Some effects of the QL series can be synchronized with the tempo. There are two such types of effect; delay-type effects and modulation-type effects. For delay-type effects, the delay time will change according to the tempo. For modulation-type effects, the frequency of the modulation signal will change according to the tempo.
Parameters related to tempo synchronization
The following five parameters are related to tempo synchronization.
1) SYNC 2) NOTE 3) TEMPO 4) DELAY 5) FREQ.
SYNC: ......................... This is the on/off switch for tempo synchronization.
NOTE and TEMPO: .... These are the basic parameters for tempo synchronization.
DELAY and FREQ.: ..... DELAY is the delay time, and FREQ. is the frequency of the modulation signal. These directly affect the way in which the effect sound will change. DELAY is relevant only for delay-type effects, and FREQ. is relevant only for modulation-type effects.
How the parameters are related
Tempo synchronization calculates the DELAY (or FREQ.) value
*a
from the TEMPO and
NOTE.
Turn SYNC ON
Change NOTE → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set
In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.
DELAY (or FREQ.) = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)
Change TEMPO → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set
In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.
DELAY = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO) sec
FREQ. = (TEMPO/60) / (NOTE x 4) Hz
Example 1:
When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, TEMPO=120, you change NOTE from 8th note to quarter note
DELAY = new NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)
= (1/4) x 4 x (60/120)
= 0.5 (sec)
= 500 ms
Thus, the DELAY will change from 250 ms to 500 ms.
149
V5.8 Reference Manual
Example 2:
When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, NOTE=8th note, you change TEMPO from 120 to
121
DELAY = NOTE x 4 x (60/new TEMPO)
= (1/8) x 4 x (60/121)
= 0.2479 (sec)
= 247.9 (ms)
Thus, the TEMPO will change from 250 ms to 247.9 ms.
*a Rounded values are used for the calculation results.
Special characteristics of the TEMPO parameter
The TEMPO parameter has the following characteristics that are unlike other parameters.
• It is a common value shared by all effects. (However, this is relevant only if you turn the MIDI button and the SYNC parameter on, while a MIDI CLOCK is being input to the MIDI IN connector.)
• You cannot store it to or recall it from the Effects Library. (You can store it to and recall it from a Scene.)
This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily be the same when an effect is recalled as when that effect was stored. Here is an example.
Store the effect: TEMPO=120 → Change TEMPO to 60: TEMPO=60 → Recall the effect:
TEMPO=60
Normally when you change the TEMPO, the DELAY (or FREQ.) will be re-set accordingly.
However if the DELAY (or FREQ.) were changed, the effect would sound differently when recalled than when it was stored. To prevent the effect from changing in this way between store and recall, the QL series does not update the DELAY (or FREQ.) value when an effect is recalled, even if the TEMPO is no longer the same as when that effect was stored.
* The NOTE parameter is calculated based on the following values.
= 1/48 = 1/24 = 1/16 = 1/12 = 3/32 = 1/8 = 1/6
= 3/16 = 1/4 = 3/8 = 1/2 = 3/4 = 1/1 = 2/1
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Using the Freeze effect
This section explains how to use the “FREEZE” effect type, which provides the functionality of a simple sampler. When this effect type is selected, you can perform operations on screen to record (sample) and play back a sound.
NOTE
Effect types “FREEZE” and “HQ.PITCH” can be used only in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button.
2.
Press the EFFECT tab in the VIRTUAL RACK window.
3.
Press the effect container in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7.
4.
Press the effect type field in the EFFECT EDIT window to open the EFFECT TYPE window, and select “FREEZE.”
5.
To begin recording (sampling), press the REC button and then press the PLAY button.
6.
To play back the recorded sample, press the PLAY button.
NOTE
• The bar in the EFFECT EDIT window reflects the current recording progress. When a fixed time has elapsed, the buttons will automatically turn off.
• You can adjust the parameters in the EFFECT EDIT window to make detailed settings for recording time, the way in which recording will begin, and the way in which the sample will play back. For details on the parameters, refer to the QL Data List (End of Manual).
• The sampled content will be erased if you record another sample, change the effect, or turn off the power to the QL unit.
EFFECT EDIT window (when FREEZE is selected)
If the “FREEZE” effect type is selected, a PLAY button, REC button, and progress bar will appear in the special parameter field.
150
1 3 2
1
PLAY button
2 REC button
3 Progress bar
NOTE
As an alternative to switching the effect type, you can also recall the “FREEZE” effect type from the effect library.
V5.8 Reference Manual
Using the Premium Rack
The QL series console features processors that faithfully emulate meticulously-selected vintage analog processors, and a newly-developed Premium Rack, as well as graphic EQs and built-in effects. The Premium Rack employs VCM technology, which models analog circuitry on a component level to faithfully reproduce and fine-tune amazing analog sounds.
The Premium Rack offers eight types of processors.
Name
Portico 5033
Portico 5043
U76
Opt–2A
EQ–1A
Models RND’s analog 5-band EQ.
Outline
Models RND’s analog compressor/limiter.
Models a typical vintage compressor/limiter.
Models a classic vacuum tube (optical type) compressor.
Models a classic vacuum tube passive-type vintage EQ.
Dynamic EQ
Newly-developed EQ that features a dynamically changing gain and enables you to control the cut/boost amount in relation to the input level.
Buss Comp 369 Models a 1970s compressor/limiter with discrete circuitry.
MBC4 Four-band compressor with intuitive controls
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Using the Premium Rack
The procedure to set up the I/O patches for the rack are the same as those for the effect rack
For the premium rack, only racks 1–2 can be used via send/return. Racks 3–8 are only for
patching as inserts. (Refer to “ Virtual rack operations ” on page 130
.)
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button.
2.
Press the PREMIUM tab in the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK window.
3.
To mount a Premium Rack in the rack, press the rack mount button for that rack in the PREMIUM RACK field.
4.
Select the processor to mount and the mounting method in the MODULE SELECT field in the PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER window, and press the OK button.
5.
Press the INPUT PATCH L button to open the CH SELECT window, and select the input source.
6.
Press the OUTPUT PATCH L button to open the CH SELECT window, and select the insert-in of the same channel as the output destination.
7.
Use the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] key to select the channel into which you inserted the effect.
8.
Press the popup button in the INSERT field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
9.
In the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window, turn on the INSERT ON/OFF button for the channel into which you inserted the processor.
10.
Adjust the processor parameters.
11.
Using the fader of the channel you selected as the rack’s output destination in step
6, adjust the level as appropriate.
151
VIRTUAL RACK window
(PREMIUM RACK field)
PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER window
V5.8 Reference Manual
NOTE
• If you are inserting a processor into a channel that handles a stereo source, assign the R channel insert-out and insert-in to the R input and output of the processor in the same way as steps 5 and
6.
• For details on editing the parameters, refer to the next section “Editing the Premium Rack parameters.”
• Adjust the digital gain and the processor parameters so that the signal does not reach the overload point at the input or output stage of the processor.
Mounting a processor
There are two ways to mount each processor:
• DUAL .....................The processor is used on two mono channels.
• STEREO ................The processor is used on one stereo channel.
The DUAL button and STEREO button indicate how many rack space units are occupied by the Premium Rack processor.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Editing the Premium Rack parameters
Each Premium Rack window includes the following items:
1 2 3
The U76 occupies two rack spaces. Other processors occupy one rack space. If you mount a two-space Premium Rack processor in the rack, you will be unable to mount any more processors below those rack spaces. Also, you cannot mount a two-space processor in an even-numbered rack.
1 ASSIST button
Press this button to indicate the numbers that control each parameter.
2 LIBRARY button
Press this button to display the Library window for Premium Rack (for each module type).
3
DEFAULT button
Restores the default parameter setting.
NOTE
• If the ASSIST button is on, you will be able to easily identify the parameters that are currently available for editing, and the parameters that will be available for editing after you select them.
• You can adjust the parameter in finer steps by turning a [TOUCH AND TURN] knob while pressing and holding it down.
• Pressing a top panel [SEL] key while operating the premium rack parameter will switch to the popup window of GEQ, effect, or premium rack that is inserted in that channel.
152
V5.8 Reference Manual
Portico 5033
Portico 5033 is a processor that emulates a 5-band analog EQ developed by Rupert Neve
Designs (RND). 5033EQ features a unique tone control response. It inherited the history of the “1073,” which was praised as one of the greatest devices developed by Mr. Rupert Neve.
Yamaha’s VCM technology has modeled the EQ to the last detail, including the input/output transformer that was designed by Rupert Neve himself. As a result, this processor model produces musically high-quality sound even when bypassed. Its response features unique effects. For example, if the Lo setting is cut, the low range becomes tight, and if the Hi setting is raised, the desired range will be boosted without hurting your ears.
8
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
7 LF/HF IN button
Turn LF and HF EQ on or off simultaneously.
8 Graph
Indicates the graphical EQ response.
Portico 5043
Portico 5043, like Portico 5033, is a processor that emulates RND’s analog compressor. The actual 5043 compressor is equipped with the same input/output transformer as that of the
5033 EQ, delivering a natural, analog-like tonality and effect. It enables you to obtain a range of results from hard compression to natural sound, and is suitable for a broad range of audio sources ranging from drums to vocals. The most notable feature of this model is that you can switch the gain reduction type. You can choose either an FF (Feed-Forward) circuit type
(which is the current mainstream), or an FB (Feed-Back) circuit which was typically used in vintage compressors. This allows you to create sounds with various characteristics as appropriate for your applications.
1 2 3 4
3
5
1
2 7
4 6
1 ALL BYPASS button
Switches EQ bypass on or off. Even when EQ bypass is on, the signal will pass through the input/output transformer and amp circuits.
2
TRIM knob
Adjusts the input gain of the processor.
3 LF/LMF/MF/HMF/HF Frequency knobs
Adjust the frequency for each band.
4
LF/LMF/MF/HMF/HF Gain knobs
Adjust the amount of boost or cut for each band.
5 LMF/MF/HMF Q knobs
Adjust the Q (steepness) of each band. The higher the Q value, the narrower the range in which you can control the gain for the band.
6 LMF/MF/HMF IN button
Turn LMF/MF/HMF EQ on or off respectively.
153
5 6 7 8 9
1
IN button
Turns the compressor’s bypass on or off. When the compressor is bypassed, the button indicator will turn off. However, even if the compressor is bypassed, the signal will pass through the input/output transformer and amp circuits.
2
INPUT meter
Indicates the input signal level.
One meter appears in DUAL mode, and two meters appear in STEREO mode.
3 FB button
Switches the gain reduction method between FF (Feed-Forward) circuit and FB (Feed-
Back) circuit. The button will light when FB circuit is selected.
The FF circuit is used in most contemporary compressors. This type is useful when you want to apply consistent compression while maintaining a consistent tonal color.
V5.8 Reference Manual
The FB circuit is used in vintage compressors. This type is suitable when you want to apply a smooth compression while adding a tonal character that is characteristic of such devices.
4
GAIN REDUCTION meter
Indicates the amount of gain reduction.
5 THRESHOLD knob
Adjusts the threshold at which compression starts to be applied.
6
RATIO knob
Adjusts the compression ratio. Fully rotate the knob clockwise to switch to the limiter.
7 ATTACK knob
Adjusts the compressor’s attack time.
8
RELEASE knob
Adjusts the compressor’s release time.
9 GAIN knob
Adjusts the output gain.
Portico 5045
This is a processor that accurately models the Portico 5045 Primary Source Enhancer made by Rupert Neve Designs. Operation is extremely easy, allowing you to suppress background noise that enters the mic while increasing clarity, enhancing the primary source and also improving the feedback margin. It is suitable not only for a hand-held mic but also for a lavalier mic or headset mic, and can be used in a variety of situations including event PA, concerts, or broadcast. This processor is also equipped with the audio transformer and discrete amp circuit that are the signature of the Portico series, so that simply passing the signal through it will increase the luster and depth of the sound.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
2 RMS/PEAK button
Selects the operation mode for the level detector. You can select RMS mode or PEAK mode.
3 TIME CONSTANT knob
Switches the attack and release time. The settings are as follows.
RMS Mode
A: 50 ms
B: 100 ms
C: 200 ms
D: 750 ms
E 1.5 s
F: 3 s
PEAK Mode
Attack: fixed at 20 ms
Release: A: 20 ms
B: 200 ms
C: 1 s
D: 2 s
E: 5 s
F: 30 s
4
THRESHOLD knob
Adjusts the level at which enhancement begins. Signals below the THRESHOLD are attenuated.
5 PROCESS ACTIVE indicator
This indicator is lit when the input signal exceeds the THRESHOLD. Adjust the
THRESHOLD so that this indicator is lit when the primary audio source is being input, and unlit during periods of silence or between phrases.
6 DEPTH knob
Adjusts the amount of attenuation for signals below the THRESHOLD.
1 3 2 4
1 PROCESS ENGAGE button
Turns the enhancement circuit on/off.
5 6
154
V5.8 Reference Manual
U76
U76 is a processor that emulates a popular vintage compressor used in a wide range of situations. This processor does not provide the threshold parameter that is found on conventional compressors. Instead, the intensity of compression is determined by the balance between the input gain and the output gain. The “All mode” setting for the RATIO parameter allows you to create a heavily-compressed sound that is typical of this model. It produces an aggressive tonal character with a rich addition of overtones.
1 2
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
• OFF ...............Turns off the meter display.
6 OUTPUT knob
Adjusts the output level.
If you have adjusted the amount of gain reduction by changing the INPUT knob, the level of audible volume will also change. In this case, use the OUTPUT knob to adjust the volume level.
Opt-2A
Opt-2A is a processor that emulates a popular vintage model of tube optical compressors. It features smooth compression produced using optical components such as a CdS cell and an
EL panel to control the level. It also features beautiful high-range overtones created by the warm distortion typical of tube circuits, resulting in elegant and sophisticated sounds.
3 4 5 6
1
INPUT knob
Adjusts the input level. As the input level gets higher, more compression is applied.
2 ATTACK knob
Adjusts the compressor’s attack time. Fully rotate the knob clockwise to set the fastest attack time.
3 RELEASE knob
Adjusts the compressor’s release time. Fully rotate the knob clockwise to set the fastest release time.
4
RATIO switch buttons
Use these five buttons to set the compression ratio.
A button with a higher number will raise the compression ratio more. Pressing the ALL button selects All mode, in which the RATIO will become high, and sharp compression with a faster release time will be applied, creating substantially-distorted aggressive sound.
5 METER switch buttons
Switch the meter display.
• GR .................Indicates the amount of gain reduction applied by the compressor.
• +4/+8 .............Each meter uses –18 dB as the reference level of the output signal, and indicates “0VU” for the value of the reference level added by +4 dB or
+8 dB.
155
1 2 3 4
1
GAIN knob
Adjusts the output level.
2 PEAK REDUCTION knob
Adjusts the compression amount of the signal.
3
RATIO knob
Adjusts the compression ratio.
4 METER SELECT knob
Switches the meter display.
GAIN REDUCTION indicates the amount of gain reduction applied by the compressor.
With – 18 dB as the reference level of the output signal, the OUTPUT +10 and OUTPUT
+4 settings respectively will cause the value +10 dB or +4 dB from this reference level to be shown as “0VU” on the meter.
V5.8 Reference Manual
EQ-1A
EQ-1A is a processor that emulates a famous passive-type vintage EQ. It features a unique style of operation, allowing you to individually boost and attenuate (cut) each of two frequency ranges (high and low). The frequency response is utterly unlike that of a conventional EQ, and is a uniquely distinctive characteristic of this model. The input/output circuits and vacuum tubes produce a tonal character that is highly musical and well-balanced.
3 4 5 7 8 9
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
7 (HIGH) BOOST knob
Sets the amount of boost applied to the frequency band specified by the HIGH
FREQUENCY knob.
8 (HIGH) ATTEN knob
Sets the amount of attenuation applied to the frequency band specified by the ATTEN
SEL knob.
9 (HIGH) ATTEN SEL knob
Switches the frequency region attenuated by the ATTEN knob.
Dynamic EQ
Dynamic EQ is a newly-developed equalizer that does not emulate any specific model of equalizer. The sidechain has a filter that extracts the same frequency band as the EQ. This allows you to apply EQ in the same way as you might apply a compressor or expander to a specific frequency region, causing the EQ gain to vary dynamically only when a specific frequency region of the input signal becomes too high or too low. For example you could use this on a vocal sound as a de-esser, so that EQ is applied to a specific frequency band only when sibilance or high-frequency consonants reach an unpleasant level, thus preserving a natural sound that does not impair the original tonal character. Two full-band Dynamic EQs are provided, enabling you to process a wide range of audio sources.
1 2 6
1
IN switch
Turns the processor on or off.
When the switch is off, the signal will bypass the filter section, but pass through the input/output transformer and amp circuits.
2
LOW FREQUENCY knob
Sets the frequency of the low range filter.
3 (LOW) BOOST knob
Sets the amount of boost applied to the frequency band specified by the LOW
FREQUENCY knob.
4
(LOW) ATTEN knob
Sets the amount of attenuation applied to the frequency band specified by the LOW
FREQUENCY knob.
5
BAND WIDTH knob
Sets the width of the frequency band controlled by the high range filter.
As you rotate the knob toward the right (Broad), the band will become wider and the peak level will decrease. This affects only the response of the boost.
6
HIGH FREQUENCY knob
Sets the frequency of the high range filter. This affects only the response of the boost.
1
3
4
6
5
9
0
2 8 A
1
BAND ON/OFF button
Turns each band on or off.
7B
C
156
V5.8 Reference Manual
2 SIDECHAIN CUE button
Turn this button on to monitor the sidechain signal sent to the CUE bus. At this time, the graph indicates the response of the sidechain filters.
3 SIDECHAIN LISTEN button
Turn this button on to output the sidechain signal (linked to the dynamics) to the bus
(such as a STEREO bus or MIX/MATRIX bus) to which the insert channel signal is sent.
At this time, the graph indicates the response of the sidechain filters.
4 FILTER TYPE buttons
Switch the type of the main bus equalizers and sidechain filters. Main bus EQ and sidechain filter will link as follows:
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
B THRESHOLD meter
Indicates the sidechain signal level in relation to the threshold level.
C Graph area
Displays the equalizer response.
In most cases, this area displays the reference EQ graph that indicates the frequency and intensity, and the dynamic EQ graph that indicates the dynamically-changing EQ responses.
FILTER TYPE
Main EQ
Sidechain filter
(Low Shelf)
Low Shelf
LPF
(Bell)
Bell
BPF
(Hi Shelf)
Hi Shelf
HPF
5 FREQUENCY knob
Sets the frequency band that will be controlled by the equalizer and sidechain filter.
6
Q knob
Sets the Q value (steepness) of the equalizer and sidechain filter.
As you rotate this knob clockwise, the frequency range to which the equalizer or sidechain filter is applied will become wider.
7
THRESHOLD knob
Specifies the threshold at which the processor will begin taking effect.
8 RATIO knob
Sets the boost/cut ratio relative to the input signal.
Rotating the knob clockwise will set the ratio for boost, and counter-clockwise for cut.
Fully rotating the knob in either direction will create the maximum effect.
9 ATTACK/RELEASE buttons
Enable you to select one of the three settings as the attack/release time for compression or boost.
Select FAST for a faster attack and faster release. Select SLOW for a faster attack and slower release. Select AUTO to automatically adjust the attack/release time depending on the frequency ranges.
0
MODE buttons
Specify whether the processor is triggered when the sidechain signal level exceeds the threshold value (ABOVE), or when the level does not reach the threshold value (BELOW).
A EQ GAIN meter
Indicates the dynamically-changing EQ gain.
157
Dynamic EQ graph
Reference EQ graph
If SIDECHAIN CUE or SIDECHAIN LISTEN is on, this area displays the sidechain filter response.
Sidechain filter graph
V5.8 Reference Manual
Buss Comp 369
Buss Comp 369 emulates a standard bus compressor that has been used in recording studios and broadcasting stations since the 1980s. It produces a smooth and natural compression that does not interfere with the expression in the source signal, in contrast with the aggressive compression of the U76. Buss Comp 369 includes both a compressor and a limiter. You can use both functions individually or in combination, according to your needs. Further, the rich overtones generated by the audio transformers on the input/output circuits and the discrete
Class A amplifier add depth and unity to the sound quality.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
1 INPUT ADJUST
Used to adjust the input gain. However, the output gain is linked to change in the opposite direction, to prevent changes in pass-through volume (the volume when
COMP IN and LIMIT IN are off). For example, if INPUT ADJUST is +5dB, the input gain is +5dB and the output gain is -5dB.
See below for more information about how to use INPUT ADJUST.
• If the level of the input signal sent to effects is too low to reach the threshold, increase the input gain.
• Adjust the sound quality by changing the input level sent to the input circuitry (audio transformer and Class A amplifier).
INPUT ADJUST structure
Buss Comp 369
Linked in reverse
INPUT GAIN
INPUT
CIRCUIT
COMPRESSOR/LIMITER SECTION
COMPRESSOR LIMITER
OUTPUT
CIRCUIT
OUTPUT GAIN
IN IN
8
STEREO mounting
1 3 4
> A B
5 6
C
7
9
DUAL mounting
> A B C
INPUT ADJUST COMP THRESHOLD LIMIT THRESHOLD dBFS dBFS
Since there are substantial changes in threshold, the changing display values are linked. However, the internal conditions of the COMPRESSOR/
LIMITER SECTION do not actually change.
158
2
LINK (STEREO mounting)
Stereo link on/off
3 COMP IN
Compressor on/off
4
COMP THRESHOLD
Compressor threshold. However, the changing value is linked to INPUT ADJUST.
5 COMP RECOVERY
Compressor release time. The release times for a1 (auto 1) and a2 (auto 2) change automatically. a1: Changes automatically between 100 ms and 2 sec. a2: Changes automatically between 50 ms and 5 sec.
V5.8 Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
6 COMP GAIN
Compressor make-up gain. Applied before the limiter.
7 COMP RATIO
Compressor ratio
8 METER SELECT (STEREO mounting)
Selects the signal source for the meter. You can select from IN (input level), GR (gain reduction), and OUT (output level). When the source is switched, the design of the meter also switches as follows: VU/GR/VU.
8
When “ METER” is IN
8
When “ METER” is OUT
9
VU SELECT (DUAL mounting)
Selects the signal source for the VU meter. You can select from input level or output level.
0 LIMIT IN
Limiter on/off
A
LIMIT ATTACK
Limiter attack time. FAST: 2ms, SLOW: 4ms
B LIMIT THRESHOLD
Limiter threshold. However, the changing value is linked to INPUT ADJUST.
C
LIMIT RECOVERY
Limiter release time. The release times for a1 (auto 1) and a2 (auto 2) change automatically. a1: Changes automatically between 100 ms and 2 sec. a2: Changes automatically between 50 ms and 5 sec.
8
When “ METER” is GR
159
V5.8 Reference Manual
MBC4
This high-quality four-band compressor utilizes VCM technology and features a GUI that offers operability and visibility. All of the advantages of the musical behavior of analog compressors have been built into the gain reduction circuitry of the MBC4. This allows smooth control of dynamics while keeping the sound image. You can also use the graphical display to visually manipulate the sound image.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
9
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
6 CROSSOVER RANGE
This horizontal bar for the band color indicates the range for the CROSSOVER parameter for each band.
7 CROSSOVER BAND WIDTH
This horizontal bar for the band color changes according to the CROSSOVER parameter for each band.
8 INPUT meter
Indicates the level of the input signal.
One meter appears in DUAL, while two meters appear in STEREO.
9
OUTPUT meter
Indicates the level of the output signal.
One meter appears in DUAL, while two meters appear in STEREO.
1
GAIN LINE
This horizontal red line indicates the GAIN parameter for each band.
2 MAXIMUM GR GUIDELINE
This horizontal orange line is a guideline for maximum gain reduction. This is only a guideline, and not a strict limitation for maximum gain reduction.
3
GR ZONE
This red area changes according to the amount of gain reduction for each band.
4 CROSSOVER LINE
These vertical lines indicate the CROSSOVER parameters for each band.
5
CROSSOVER ZONE
These areas, in the color of the band, change according to the CROSSOVER parameter for each band.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
>
A
B
C
D
1 GAIN
Adjust the output gain for each band.
2 THRESH
Adjusts the threshold at which compression starts to be applied for each band. This value is also indicated by a red marker in the 0 INPUT meter.
3
RATIO
Adjusts the compression ratio for each band.
160
V5.8 Reference Manual
4 ATTACK
Adjusts the compressor’s attack time for each band.
5 RELEASE
Adjusts the compressor’s release time for each band.
6 LINK knob
Links and adjusts the four bands for the selected parameter. However, if a parameter in any frequency region reaches its maximum or minimum value, the link operation is disabled. Parameters that can be linked and adjusted are displayed in band colors as shown below.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
B IN button
Turns each band on or off. When this button is off, the band color for the selected area changes to gray as shown below.
Also, when this button is off, the COMPRESSOR field for the selected band turns gray.
7
CROSSOVER
Adjusts the crossover frequency when splitting the frequency range into multiple bands.
8 CUE button
Cue-monitors the corresponding band output for each band. When the CUE button is on, the button changes to the color shown below.
If the IN button is off, the uncompressed sound is cue-monitored. The CUE buttons for multiple bands can be turned on at the same time.
9 MASTER GAIN knob
Adjusts the gain for the final output signal.
0 INPUT meter
Indicates the input level for the audio signals sent to each band.
A KNEE knob
Adjusts the compressor’s knee.
You can adjust each parameter even when this button is off.
C FLAVOUR button
Switches the type of compressor between accurate VCA operation and natural OPTO operation.
D HARMONICS button
Switches on/off the analog circuitry that emulates musical overtones.
161
V5.8 Reference Manual
Using the graphic EQ, parametric EQ, effect, and
Premium Rack libraries
GEQ/PEQ library
Use the “GEQ library” or “PEQ library” to store and recall GEQ and PEQ settings. All GEQ and PEQ units used in the QL series console can use this GEQ library or PEQ library.
Although are two types, 31BandGEQ and Flex15GEQ in the GEQ library, you are free to recall items between differing types. However, only 31BandGEQ settings that use less than fifteen bands can be recalled to a Flex15GEQ.
200 items can be recalled from the library. Number 000 is a read-only preset, and the remaining library numbers can be freely read or written.
To recall an item from the GEQ library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the
GEQ EDIT window.
Similarly, to recall an item from the PEQ library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the PEQ EDIT window.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Premium Rack library
For the Premium Rack, there are seven library items for each module type. You’ll use the library of the module type to store and recall Premium Rack settings. The libraries are numbered 000–100, and 000 is read-only data for initialization. All library items other than
#000 can be freely read and written.
To recall an item from the Premium Rack library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the window for the corresponding Premium Rack.
NOTE
• Store and recall operations are performed on individual GEQ units. For one rack, you can store and recall two Flex15GEQ or 8BandPEQ units independently as A and B.
• To access the GEQ EDIT window or the PEQ EDIT window, press the rack container in the GEQ field.
Effect library
Use the “Effect library” to store and recall effect settings. 199 items can be recalled from the effect library. Numbers 001–027 are read-only presets. The remaining library numbers can be freely read or written.
To recall an item from the effect library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the
EFFECT EDIT window.
NOTE
If you recall an effect whose effect type is COMP276, COMP276S, COMP260, COMP260S,
EQUALIZER610, OPENDECK, M.BAND DYNA., or M.BAND COMP, the other effects may be momentarily muted in some cases.
162
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
I/O devices and external head amps
This chapter explains how to use an I/O device or an external head amp that is connected to the QL series console. Before you proceed, use DANTE SETUP to specify the I/O devices
that will be mounted. For details, refer to “ Mounting an I/O device on the Dante audio network
” on
Using an I/O device
QL series consoles enable you to remotely control channel parameters of an I/O device (such as an R series product) connected to the Dante connector.
For details on connecting the QL series console to an I/O device, refer to the “Connecting to
I/O devices” section in the separate Owner’s Manual.
I/O device patching
Here’s how an I/O device connected to the Dante connector can be patched to the Dante audio network.
STEP
1.
Connecting QL series consoles and I/O devices.
For details, refer to the “Connecting to I/O devices” and “Quick Guide” sections in the separate Owner’s Manual.
2.
In the function access area, press the I/O DEVICE button.
3.
Press the DANTE PATCH tab in the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen.
4.
Press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button in the I/O DEVICE screen (DANTE PATCH page).
5.
Press the AUTO SETUP button.
If you want to edit individual patches, press the port select button.
6.
Press the device in the I/O DEVICE screen (DANTE PATCH page).
7.
Press the port select button in the OUTPUT PATCH window.
8.
In the PORT SELECT screen, select the output port.
I/O DEVICE screen (DANTE PATCH page)
1
2
3
4
1 I/O device list
This shows the ID number and model name of the I/O devices.
Press here to access the OUTPUT PATCH window, where you can specify patching from the console’s output ports to the I/O devices. If a previously set-up device does not currently exist on the DANTE audio network, a yellow “VIRTUAL” indicator is shown at the lower left of that device. If devices on the network belong to different DEVICE TYPEs but share the same ID, a red “CONFLICT” indicator will appear to the left, below the device. If multiple devices share the same ID, a yellow “DUPLICATE” indicator will appear to the right, below the device.
2 DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window, in which you can make settings for the audio network.
3 DANTE INPUT PATCH button
Press this button to open the DANTE INPUT PATCH window, in which you can select the
64 channels (32 channels for the QL1) that will be input from the I/O device to the console.
4 OUTPUT PORT SETUP button
Press this button to access the PATCH VIEW 1 tab of the OUTPUT PORT window, where you can choose the 64 channels (32 channels for the QL1) that will be output from the console’s output ports to I/O devices.
163
V5.8 Reference Manual
DANTE INPUT PATCH window
Displayed when you press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button in the I/O DEVICE screen
(DANTE PATCH page). Specify the 64(QL5) or 32(QL1) channels that will be input from the
I/O devices to the console.
1 2
3
I/O devices and external head amps
3 Port select buttons
Press to display the PORT SELECT window.
“Dante Device ID number (hexadecimal) and channel number
(decimal)” are shown in the upper row on the button.
The first eight characters of the channel label (Dante Audio Channel
Label) for each port are shown in the lower row on the button.
When a patch establishes an audio connection via AES67, “AES67” is displayed on the port selection buttons, etc.
If no patch has been assigned, the upper row will indicate “---” and the lower row will indicate nothing.
NOTE
• If you’ve connected a device other than an I/O device supported by the QL series, the upper line of the button will show the first four letters of the Device Label, a dash “—”, and the channel number (decimal).
• If a QL series console is mounted, the display for the upper row of buttons will be “QL#X” (where
X is the ID number of the mounted QL unit).
• If no Dante Audio Channel Label has been specified, a value equal to the channel number will be displayed in the lower row.
• You can set the Dante Audio Channel Label using Audinate “Dante Controller” software. For the latest information, refer to the Yamaha pro audio website.
https://www.yamaha.com/proaudio/
• The Audinate “Dante Controller” software is required to use the QL console in AES67 mode.
Routing via AES67 is possible only by using Dante Controller.
• Channels with patches that use AES67 offline will synchronize with the patch settings that are saved on the target device when connected with the device.
1 LIBRARY button
Enables you to store or recall the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings to or from the library.
You can store ten sets of settings in the library.
NOTE
• If you recall data whose I/O device registration state differs from the current state, patching to devices not registered in the I/O device list will be kept in its current state, and will not be recalled.
(The settings are recalled for an R series console or an external QL series console.)
• Similarly, if the UNIT ID is different than when the data was stored, the settings will not be recalled; the current state will be maintained.
2
AUTO SETUP button
The current I/O device connection status will be ascertained, and input patching to the console will be performed automatically according to the order in which they are registered in the I/O device list.
When you press this button, a confirmation popup dialog will appear, asking you to confirm the execution of auto patching. Press the OK button to execute auto patching.
Otherwise, press CANCEL to return to the previous screen.
164
V5.8 Reference Manual
PORT SELECT window
Displayed when you press the port select button in the DANTE INPUT PATCH window or
OUTPUT PATCH window. When you change a patch, select the I/O port.
I/O devices and external head amps
OUTPUT PATCH window
Displayed when you press the device in the I/O DEVICE screen (DANTE PATCH page). Set the output patch.
1
2
1 3
1 Category select list
Enables you to select the I/O device containing the input port that you want to assign.
2
Port select buttons
Select the input port.
3 CLOSE button
Completes the settings and closes the window.
1
Port select buttons
Press one of the buttons to open the PORT SELECT popup window.
DANTE SETUP window
The Dante devices can be mounted on the DEVICE MOUNT page in the DANTE SETUP window.
165
The indicator ( ) appears in the remote control supported device.
The NXAMPmk2 supports remote control with the Dante card (NXDT104mk2).
V5.8 Reference Manual
Remotely controlling an R series unit
This section explains how to remotely control an R series unit that’s connected to the Dante connector.
STEP
1.
In the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen, press the I/O tab to display the I/O
DEVICE screen (I/O page).
2.
Press the rack in which the I/O device that has head amp functionality is mounted.
3.
Open the I/O DEVICE HA screen to remotely control the head amp of the I/O device.
4.
To remotely control a head amp from an input channel, press a knob in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to display the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
5.
Press the GAIN/PATCH field of the channel you want to adjust. The GAIN/PATCH window will appear.
6.
Control the head amp of the I/O device in the GAIN/PATCH window.
7.
When you have finished making settings, press the “x” symbol to close the window.
8.
Press the rack in which the I/O device on the OUTPUT side is mounted.
9.
Set the output port on the OUTPUT PATCH window, as necessary.
Refer to step 7 in “
I/O device patching ”on page 163
.
I/O DEVICE screen (I/O page)
1 2
3
6
4
5
I/O devices and external head amps
For more information about VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE displayed below this button, refer to 1
When the CONSOLE ID select button is set to OFF in the DANTE SETUP screen, the NOT
CTRL indicator appears below the Display switch button of each device.
The NOT CTRL indicator also appears on the icons of the DANTE PATCH screen.
2 ID/Model name display
This shows the ID number, model name, and version of the I/O device.
If the WITH RECALL button is turned ON in the REMOTE HA SELECT screen, “ w/RECALL” is displayed. If the +48V ACTIVE switch for the mounted device is turned ON, “ +48V
ACTIVE” is displayed.
3 DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window, in which you can make settings for the audio network.
4 SYSTEM/SYNC indicators
Error, warning, and information messages are displayed. Refer to the list ( page 261
) for detailed information about messages.
Now displays error and information icons to quickly check the status of the system and synchronization.
Error
Information
When touching these icons, the details of errors and information are displayed at the bottom of the display.
When an error occurs in SYSTEM or SYNC, the Error icon will appear at the top of right side on the Display switch button.
7
1 Display switch buttons
Press one of these buttons to view the corresponding I/O device. If you press and hold down this button, all LEDs of the corresponding I/O device will blink.
166
V5.8 Reference Manual
5 REMOTE ONLY button
This button is displayed for I/O devices that can be operated on the device itself.
Set this button to ON to disable panel operation of the I/O device unit, making only remote controls available. The operation (selecting ON or OFF) of the REMOTE ONLY button is available only from a console the WITH RECALL button set to ON in the
REMOTE HA SELECT screen.
6 REMOTE CONTROL STATUS indicator
Appears in all remote control supported devices and displays the settings of the remote control.
7
OUTPUT PATCH button
Appears when selecting a device (for I/O DEVICE) having a large number of channels.
Touch to open the OUTPUT PATCH window.
9
8
A
HA display
This shows the HA settings of the I/O device. Press this area to open the I/O DEVICE HA window, in which you can make detailed head amp settings.
0
If you press the [SEL] key of an input channel, the corresponding port will light. (It does not light for external QL series consoles.)
8
Analog GAIN knob
Indicates the analog gain setting. This screen is only for display; the value cannot be edited.
9
+48V indicator
Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on/off status for each port.
0 OVER indicator
Warns you when the input signal is clipping.
A
HPF indicator
Indicates the high-pass filter on or off status for each port.
I/O devices and external head amps
INPUT display
This shows the input settings of I/O devices not assigned to REMOTE HA ASSIGN.
If you press the [SEL] key of an input channel, the corresponding port will light. (It does not light for external QL series consoles.)
OUTPUT display
This shows the output settings of the I/O device. Press here to access the OUTPUT PATCH window, where you can make output port settings for the I/O device.
If you press the [SEL] key of an output channel, the corresponding port will light. (It does not light for external QL series consoles.)
RMio64-D display
Displays the RMio64-D panel. You can press the buttons to change settings.
1 2 3 4 5
9
167
6 7 8
1 MADI SRC ON indicator
MADI SRC ON button
Switches the SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) on and off.
V5.8 Reference Manual
2 MADI SRC WCLK IN indicator
MADI SRC WCLK IN button
Use this button to select whether to use (indicator on) or not use (indicator off) the word clock input from the MADI WCLK IN FOR SRC jack on the rear panel of the RMio64-D as a standard clock for SRC.
3
MADI INPUT RATE Fs 44.1kHz indicator
MADI INPUT RATE Fs 48kHz indicator
Automatically detect and indicate whether the MADI input signal is 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.
Both indicators remain off if there is no valid MADI input signal.
4
MADI INPUT RATE 1Fs indicator
MADI INPUT RATE 2Fs indicator
MADI INPUT RATE 4Fs indicator
MADI INPUT RATE 1Fs/2Fs/4Fs button
Select either 1Fs (1x), 2Fs (2x), or 4Fs (4x), based on the MADI input frequency. For example, if the MADI input signal is 192 kHz (4x 48 kHz), confirm that the MADI INPUT
RATE Fs 48kHz indicator is on and then select “ 4Fs”.
NOTE
When “2Fs” is selected, the unit automatically detects the frame frequency (48 kHz/96 kHz) of the MADI input signal.
5 MADI STATUS INPUT status
MADI STATUS OUTPUT status
Display information regarding the MADI input and output signals (frame frequency/ number of channels).
6 WORD CLOCK WCLK IN indicator
WORD CLOCK MADI indicator
WORD CLOCK DANTE indicator
WORD CLOCK WCLK IN/MADI/DANTE buttons
Used to select the word clock source.
WCLK IN
MADI
DANTE
Uses the word clock signal being input from the WORD CLOCK IN connector on the rear panel of RMio64-D. The indicators flash when there is no valid word clock input.
Uses the word clock of the MADI input signal. The indicators flash when there is no valid word clock input.
Uses the word clock of the Dante network.
7 WORD CLOCK Fs indicator
Indicates the word clock frequency at which the unit is operating. Flashes when not synchronized.
8 EXTERNAL CONTROL indicator
This indicator comes on when there is a valid parameter that can be operated only externally by remote control.
Refer to “ Remote Control” in the RMio64-D Owner’s Manual for details about parameters that can be operated by remote control.
I/O devices and external head amps
9 OUTPUT PATCH button
Press this button to access the OUTPUT PATCH window, where you can make output port settings for RMio64-D.
RSio64-D display
1 2 3 4 5 6 C
168
7 8 9 0 A B
1 CARD NAME
This indicates the names of the cards installed in slots 1 to 4. If nothing is installed, “----” will appear.
2
IN/OUT PORT
This indicates the number of input and output ports for the cards installed in slots 1 to
4. If no card is installed, “--” will appear.
3
SLOT 1 - 4 LOCK indicators
This indicates the word clock status for slots 1 to 4. If the word clock is operating normally, this indicator will be green.
Off
Green (On)
LOCK
There is no card in the slot. Or, an unsupported card is in the slot.
Indicates that a clock synchronized with the clock source selected with the
[WORD CLOCK] select key is being input from the card. If an external device is connected to the corresponding slot, input/output is occurring properly between that device and the RSio64-D. If the sampling frequency is close, this status may be displayed even if not synchronized.
V5.8 Reference Manual
Green
(Flashing)
SYNC
ERROR
Red (On)
UNLOCK
Red
(Flashing)
WRONG
WORD
CLOCK
A valid clock is being input from the card, but is not synchronized with the clock source selected with the [WORD CLOCK] select key. If an external device is connected to the corresponding slot, input/output cannot occur correctly between that device and the RSio64-D. Turn SRC ON for correct input/output.
A valid clock is not being input from the card. If an external device is connected to the corresponding slot, input/output cannot occur correctly between that device and the RSio64-D.
The frequency of the clock source selected with the [WORD CLOCK] select key is outside of the operating frequency range for the card inserted in the slot. Either set the frequency of the clock source within the operating range for the card, or turn [SRC] ON. For an analog card, if you turn [SRC] ON, the frequency is set to the 48kHz built into the RSio64-D.
4 SLOT 1 - 4 SRC indicators
Indicate the Sampling Rate Converter (SRC) status for slots 1 to 4.
Off
Green (On)
Red (On)
SRC is off.
SRC is on, and the clock selected with the SRC WCLK DIP switches on the
RSio64-D is being input correctly.
SRC is on, but an appropriate clock is not being input. The clock selected with the SRC WCLK DIP switches on the RSio64-D is either not being input or is not within the operating range. Either turn SRC off, or change the DIP switch settings.
NOTE
Use the SRC WCLK DIP switches on the RSio64-D to set the SRC clock sent to the Mini-YGDAI card inserted in the slot.
5 SLOT 1 to 4 SRC buttons
Used to turn SRC on/off at both IN and OUT for each slot.
6 WCLK indicator
If the card’s internal sampling rate converter function is enabled when an MY8-AE96S mini-YGDAI card is inserted into the RSio64-D, “CARD” is displayed.
If the card’s internal sampling rate converter function is disabled, “SLOT” is displayed.
I/O devices and external head amps
7 WORD CLOCK select button
Used to select the word clock source for the RSio64-D.
• WORD CLOCK WCLK IN indicator
• WORD CLOCK SLOT1 1/2 indicator
• WORD CLOCK DANTE indicator
Indicates the word clock source status for the RSio64-D.
WCLK IN
SLOT1 1/2
DANTE
On when using the word clock signal being input from the WORD
CLOCK IN connector on the rear panel of the RSio64-D. Flashes there is no valid word clock input.
*1
if
On when using the word clock for channels 1/2 of slot 1 for the RSio64-
D. Flashes
*1
if there is no valid word clock input. When using MY8-
AEB
*2
, the word clock for channels 7/8 is used.
On when using the word clock for the Dante network
*3
. (If there is no valid Dante signal input, the internal Dante module will generate a clock.)
*1 W hen flashing, Dante word clock
*3
input/output is used.
*2 If you are using MY8-AEB, set the AE RSVD switch for the card to RSVD.
*3 If you make changes to the frequency of the Dante word clock, use Dante Controller.
8
CURRENT PATTERN button
If you press this button, the currently selected routing pattern on the RSio64-D is displayed. If you switch the routing pattern on the RSio64-D, it will be applied in 3 seconds.
169
V5.8 Reference Manual
9 USER PATTERN button
Press this button to open the window for setting the audio routing user pattern in the
RSio64-D. Patch to the desired output ports of the slots and Dante.
NOTE
Patching from one slot to another is also available (including patching to the same slot). However, you cannot patch from Dante to Dante.
0 OUTPUT PATCH button
Press this button to open the OUTPUT PATCH window, in which you can set the 64
Dante channels that will be output from the console to the RSio64-D.
A
POWER INT indicator
Indicates the status of the AC IN power supply for the RSio64-D. If the power switch is off, no power is supplied to AC IN and the indicator remains off.
B POWER EXT indicator
Indicates the status of the EXT DC INPUT power supply for the RSio64-D. If the power supply is on, this indicator will be on. This indicator is not affected by the status of the power switch.
C Control status indicator
Indicates the control status of the device.
Searching for device to be controlled
Found device to be controlled, but connection refused
Connecting to device
Synchronizing with device
Device can be controlled
170
I/O devices and external head amps
Third-party equipment’s HA control function
It is possible to control supported third-party equipment’s head amps (HA) from the console.
You can control HA by registering supported devices in the DANTE SETUP window.
NOTE
While in PREVIEW mode, changes made to HA parameters from the console are not applied to the device.
You can turn “WITH RECALL” on and off in the REMOTE HA ASSIGN window.
You can store/recall scene libraries and save/load files.
You can register up to 8 devices, including R series units. You can also register a device that has the same UNIT ID as a device that is already registered, including R series units. You can adjust HA parameters in advance, even when a connection is not established with the device to be controlled.
You can control the following parameters.
1
2
3
1
HA phantom power (+48V) on/off
2 HA gain
3 Head amp HPF on/off
V5.8 Reference Manual
NOTE
The indicator on the right side of the rack indicates the control status of the device.
Searching for device to be controlled
Found device to be controlled, but connection refused
Connecting to device
Synchronizing with device
Device can be controlled
You can perform the following operations from input channels patched to the target device:
• Store/recall input channel library
• Channel jobs (channel link, etc.)
• HA controls at user level (only when operating HA from an input channel)
• AG-DG LINK
NOTE
You cannot perform this operation on devices that do not support Gain Compensation.
171
I/O devices and external head amps
I/O DEVICE HA window
Displayed when you press the rack in which the I/O device on the head amp side is mounted.
You can remotely control the head amp of the I/O device from the QL series console by using the on-screen knobs and buttons or the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob on the top panel.
7
1
2
3
4
8
5
6
1
+48V ACTIVE
Indicates the on/off status of the I/O device’s phantom power. (Switching this on or off is performed on the I/O device itself.)
2
+48V button
These switch phantom power on/off for each channel.
3 GAIN knob
Indicates the gain of the head amp on the I/O device. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. The level meter located at the immediate right of the knob indicates the input level for the corresponding port.
NOTE
For devices with a wider setting range than the QL series, since some values cannot be set from the QL series. Likewise, if the value set on the connected device side is outside the QL series setting range, it will be displayed as an approximate value or limit value.
4 GC button
Switches on or off the Gain Compensation function that maintains a consistent signal level on the audio network.
5 FREQUENCY knob/HPF button
These controllers switch on or off the high-pass filter built into the head amp of the I/O device, and adjust its cutoff frequency. If you press and select the FREQUENCY knob, you can make adjustments using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
NOTE
For devices that differ in how the setting value changes from the QL series, the cutoff frequency will be set as an approximate value.
V5.8 Reference Manual
6 Displayed port switch tabs
These tabs switch the port that is displayed in the I/O DEVICE HA window.
7 GC ALL ON button/GC ALL OFF button
Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously.
8 GC indicator
Indicates the fixed gain value output to the audio network if the Gain Compensation function is turned on.
Remotely controlling from the input channels
To remotely control the I/O device’s head amp from an input channel of the QL series console, operate the GAIN/PATCH window for the channel for which you want to control.
I/O devices and external head amps
Remotely controlling an amp
This section explains how to remotely control an amp unit that’s connected to the Dante connector.
STEP
1.
Press the AMP tab in the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen.
2.
Press the I/O device displayed on the I/O DEVICE screen (AMP page).
3.
Set the output port on the OUTPUT PATCH window, as necessary.
Refer to step 7 in “
I/O device patching ” on page 163 .
I/O DEVICE screen (AMP page)
1 2
3
Remote control settings
• MTX/MRX series
The following settings are necessary to control the MTX/MRX series remotely..
STEP
1.
Install the MTX-MRX Editor on the computer.
2.
Connect the MTX-MRX series and Editor according to the MTX-MRX Editor user guide.
3.
Set remote (RS-232C) BET RATE: 38400 in Chapter 7 Remote Control dialog of the
MTX-MRX Editor User Guide.
4.
Match the subnet of the QL series on the NETWORK screen (FOR DEVICE CONTROL page) with the subnet of MTX-MRX series.
5.
Place the ANALOG IN component using the MRX Designer, since the MRX Series components can be freely placed therein.
• Stagetec NEXUS(XDIP)
Network configuration is required to control NEXUS(XDIP) remote. For details, please contact the Stagetec Company, or refer to the website of the Stagetec Company.
Also, in order to validate the remote control setting contents from the QL series, NEXUS must be used to properly set the internal routing of XDIP.
172
1 Display switch buttons
Press one of these buttons to view the corresponding I/O device.
For more information about VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE displayed below this button, refer to 1
, “
.”
2 ID/Model name display
This shows the ID number, model name, and version of the I/O device.
3 DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window, in which you can make settings for the audio network.
V5.8 Reference Manual
For NEXO NXAMPmk2
I/O devices and external head amps
I/O DEVICE EDIT screen
This screen is displayed when you select the desired I/O device in the I/O DEVICE screen
(AMP page). You can remotely control the amplifier or the speakers.
For NEXO NXAMPmk2
2 5 3 4
2
1
4
3
6
5
7
8
1
Channel name
Displays the channel name (the speaker preset name for the NXAMP).
2 Output level meter
Displays the level of Voltage (amplifier output) and the level of Protect (gain reduction).
3
LIMIT status indicator
Lights when the limiter for amplifier protection is applied.
4 PROTECT status indicator
Lights when the limiter for speaker protection is applied.
5
VOLUME setting value
Displays the volume.
6 MUTE indicator
Indicates the currently set mute status.
7
Control status indicator
Indicates the control status of the device.
8 Device status indicator
Indicates the status of the device.
1 6
7
8
:
9
A
C
B
1 STATUS indicator
Indicates the status of the device.
OVERALL
ALERT
AMP
PS
FAN
Status
Overall status of the device
Alert
Operating status of each amplifier channel
Operating status of power supply unit
Operating status of each FAN unit
Indicator display
Orange: Temporary malfunction
Red: Malfunction that cannot be resolved
* ALERT indicator display is green and red only. When an alert occurs, the indicator turns red and the alert contents are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
2
SCENE
Displays the recalled scene number and title.
173
V5.8 Reference Manual
3 CABINET
Displays the name of NEXO Setup selected in the NXAMP.
4 VERSION
Displays the firmware version of the device.
5 INPUT METER
Displays both the input analog input levels and digital input levels.
6 STANDBY button
Switches the standby mode on or off.
7 OVERMUTE button
Switches the over mute (mute all channels) on or off.
8 Output level meter
Displays the output level of the channel.
9 VOLUME knob
Sets the channel volume.
0 LIMIT indicator
Lights while the limiter for amplifier or power supply protection is applied.
A PROTECT indicator
Lights while the limiter for speaker protection is applied.
B MUTE button
Switches the channel mute on or off.
C Channel name
Displays the channel name (the speaker preset name for the NXAMP).
I/O devices and external head amps
For Yamaha DZR-D series, DXS XLF-D series
2 5 8
174
1
3
A
C
D
E
4 6 7 9 : B
1 PRESET
Displays the set preset number and title.
2 VERSION
Displays the firmware version of the device.
3 STATUS indicator
Indicates the status of the device.
OVERALL
ALERT
AMP
PS
Status
Overall status of the device
Alert
Operating status of each amplifier channel
Operating status of each FAN unit
Indicator display
Orange: Temporary malfunction
Red: Malfunction that cannot be resolved
* ALERT indicator display is green and red only. When an alert occurs, the indicator turns red and the alert contents are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
4 INPUT meter
Displays both the input analog input levels and digital input levels.
5 HPF ON button (DZR-D series only)
Switches the HPF on or off. The LPF is hidden and always on.
6 HPF/LPF FREQUENCY knob
Sets the HPF frequency for DZR-D series or the LPF frequency for DXS XLF-D series.
7 EQ ON button
Switches the EQ on or off.
V5.8 Reference Manual
8 DELAY ON button
Switches the delay on or off.
9 DELAY knob
Sets the delay time.
0 DELAY TIME
Displays the delay time by time (TIME) and distance (meter, feet).
A Output level meter
Displays the output level of the speakers.
B MAIN LEVEL knob
Sets the output level.
C LIMIT indicator
Lights while the limiter for amplifier or power supply protection is applied.
D MUTE button
Switches the mute on or off.
E Channel name
Displays the channel name (the LABEL for the DZR).
I/O devices and external head amps
Remotely controlling WIRELESS unit
This section explains how to remotely control a WIRELESS unit that’s connected to the Dante connector.
NOTE
For supported devices and compatible versions, refer to Yamaha Pro Audio website.
https://www.yamaha.com/proaudio/
STEP
1.
Press the WIRELESS tab in the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen.
2.
Press the I/O device displayed in the I/O DEVICE screen (WIRELESS page).
I/O DEVICE screen (WIRELESS page)
1 2
3
175
1 Display switch buttons
Press one of these buttons to view the corresponding I/O device.
If you press and hold down this button, all LEDs of the corresponding I/O device will blink.
For more information about VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE displayed below this button, refer to 1
, “
.”
V5.8 Reference Manual
1
2
3
2 ID/Model name display
This shows the ID number, model name, and version of the I/O device.
3 DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window, in which you can make settings for the audio network.
Wireless device display
A
4
5
6
7
8
9
>
NOTE
Displayed contents and channels will be changed depending on the device.
1 Connection status indicator
Indicates the connection status with the wireless device.
The icon will be changed depending on the devices.
2 Channel name (transmitter)
Indicates the channel name that is set on the transmitter.
3
TX.GAIN/TX.ATT
Indicates the gain value for the transmitter. This window is only for display; the value cannot be edited. The knob name is changed depending on the connected device.
4 Channel name (receiver)
Indicates the channel name that is set on the receiver.
5 Frequency
Indicates the frequency that is currently set for the RF signal.
I/O devices and external head amps
6 RX.LEVEL/RX.GAIN
Indicates the gain for the receiver. This window is only for display; the value cannot be edited.
7 MUTE indicator
Indicates the mute status (on/off) of the audio signal for the receiver.
8
Signal quality meter
Displays the quality of the received RF signal. The vertical axis represents quality and the horizontal axis represents time, and the display of connection status is updated every second. If you move away from the transmitter, or the quality of the RF signal decreases due to the influence of disturbing radio waves, the bar graph becomes lower. It displays in purple for Shure devices, and in white for the other developer’s device.
9 RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter
Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal. An active antenna indicator is shown on the right side. It indicates which antenna is enabled.
In the Diversity mode, both A and B are shown. In the Quadversity mode, the one with the strongest level among A to D is shown.
NOTE
For details about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength of the RF signal, refer to the manual from each developer.
0 Battery indicator
Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power.
NOTE
For details about the relationship between number of bars and maximum operation time, refer to the manual from each developer.
A Control status indicator
Indicates the control status of the device.
Searching for device to be controlled
Found device to be controlled, but connection refused
Connecting to device
Synchronizing with device
Device can be controlled
NOTE
When control on the receiver side is possible, the parameter values for the receiver are sent to the console.
176
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O DEVICE EDIT screen
This screen is displayed when you select the desired wireless device in the I/O DEVICE screen (WIRELESS page). Here you can set the channel name and HA. You cannot set when the device is offline. Note that when the device is online, the settings on the device are applied.
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
A
C
NOTE
Displayed contents and channels will be changed depending on the device.
1
Connection status indicator
Indicates the connection status with the wireless device.
The icon will be changed depending on the devices.
2 Channel name button (transmitter)
Press this button to display the NAME screen for setting channel names on the transmitter side. The number of characters that can be set varies depending on the device.
3 TX.GAIN knob/TX.ATT knob
Sets the gain value for the transmitter. To adjust the value, touch the screen, then press the knob to select it, and use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knobs. The knob will not display when the wireless device is not support this control.
177
I/O devices and external head amps
4 TX.GAIN
Displays the gain value for the transmitter.
5 Channel name (receiver)
Press this button to display the NAME screen for setting channel names on the receiver side. The number of characters that can be set varies depending on the device.
6
Frequency
Indicates the frequency that is currently set for the RF signal.
7 RX.LEVEL knob/RX.GAIN knob
Sets the gain value for the receiver. To adjust the value, touch the screen, then press the knob to select it, and use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knobs. The level meter located at the immediate right of the knob indicates the input level. The knob will not display when the wireless device is not support this control.
8 MUTE button
Mutes the audio signal for the receiver.
9 Signal quality meter
Displays the quality of the received RF signal. The vertical axis represents quality and the horizontal axis represents time, and the display of connection status is updated every second. If you move away from the transmitter, or the quality of the RF signal decreases due to the influence of disturbing radio waves, the bar graph becomes lower. It displays in purple for Shure devices, and in white for the other developer’s device.
0 RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter
Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal. An active antenna indicator is shown on the right side. It indicates which antenna is enabled.
In the Diversity mode, both A and B are shown. In the Quadversity mode, the one with the strongest level among A to D is shown.
NOTE
For details about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength of the RF signal, refer to the manual from each developer.
A Battery indicator
Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power.
NOTE
For details about the relationship between number of bars and maximum operation time, refer to the manual from each developer.
B Mode indicator
Indicates the mode status of the device such as Diversity mode or Quadversity mode.
When not activated, it shows “Diversity mode: off” or “Quadversity mode: off” respectively.
V5.8 Reference Manual
C PORT ASSIGN tab
Select these tabs to switch between the windows that specify the ports where the actual input signals are assigned.
I/O devices and external head amps
Example: Connecting the output of a Shure AXT400 to OMNI 1 on a QL console, and assigning the signal to input channel 1.
Press the PORT ASSIGN button to open the PORT SELECT window. Select the port to which the output from the AXT400 is connected (OMNI 1).
178
V5.8 Reference Manual
Access the GAIN/PATCH window.
I/O devices and external head amps
This assigns the output signal from the AXT400 to the input channel, and at the same time allows you to control and monitor the level of the AXT400 from the input channel.
Press the INPUT PORT button, and on the PORT SELECT window select the port to which the output signal from the AXT400 is connected (OMNI 1).
Precautions
• If the target device is unmounted, the parameters on the console return to their default values. If a new device is mounted and patched, that device’s parameters are applied to the console.
• All port assignments for a rack are defeated only if the status of the rack is NO ASSIGN.
• Regarding the control of each developer’s device, control parameters are not stored in scenes and saved in console files.
• For devices that can set both Dante Input Patch and Port Assign, if Dante Input Patch has already been set, the Port Assign setting will be ignored.
179
V5.8 Reference Manual
Using an external head amp
If an I/O card (such as an MY16-ES64 card) supports the remote protocol of an external head amp in the QL’s slot, you will be able to remotely control from the QL console some parameters of the external head amp (Yamaha SB168-ES or AD8HR), such as phantom power (+48V) on/off status, gain, and HPF.
For details on the I/O card settings, refer to the Owner’s Manual for the I/O card.
Connecting the QL series console to an AD8HR
To remotely control the AD8HR from the QL series console, install an MY16-ES64
EtherSound card in Slot 1 on the QL unit, then use an Ethernet cable to connect the QL unit to the NAI48-ES. Then, connect the HA REMOTE connector on the NAI48-ES to the HA
REMOTE 1 connector on the AD8HR using an RS422 D-sub 9-pin cable. This connection enables you to remotely control the AD8HR from the QL series console. To transmit audio signals (input to the AD8HR) to the QL series console, connect the DIGITAL OUT A (or B) connector on the AD8HR to the AES/EBU connector on the NAI48-ES using a D-sub 25-pin
AES/EBU cable. Signals will be sent or received between the NAI48-ES and the QL series console via the MY16-ES64 card.
Alternatively, you can use a “daisy chain” connection to remotely control multiple AD8HR units simultaneously. To do this, connect the AD8HR’s HA REMOTE 2 connector to the second
AD8HR’s HA REMOTE 1 connector. If you use the NAI48-ES, you can connect up to four
AD8HR units. Each slot of the QL series console provides up to 16 channels of input, so if you want the audio signals from the AD8HR to be input to the QL series console, you’ll need to install two MY16-EX cards in the console and connect the MY16-ES64 via an Ethernet cable.
QL5
Audio signal
Remote signal
I/O devices and external head amps
MY16-EX MY16- ES64
NAI48-ES
DIGITAL
OUT A connector
HA REMOTE connector
HA REMOTE 1 connector
DIGITAL OUT A connector
AD8HR 1
HA REMOTE 2 connector
HA REMOTE 1 connector
DIGITAL OUT A connector
AD8HR 2
HA REMOTE 2 connector
HA REMOTE 1 connector
AD8HR 3
HA REMOTE 2 connector
Up to four units
180
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
Connecting the QL series console to an SB168-ES
To remotely control the SB168-ES from the QL series console, install an MY16-ES64
EtherSound card in Slot 1 on the QL unit, then use an Ethernet cable to connect the QL unit to the SB168-ES. This connection enables you to remotely control the SB168-ES from the QL series console.
Alternatively, you can use a daisy chain or ring connection and install one MY16-EX expansion card in the slot on the QL unit to remotely control up to two SB168-ES units simultaneously.
NOTE
Remote control data will be received and transmitted only at Slot 1 of the QL series console.
Daisy chain network
QL5
Audio signal
Remote signal
Ring connection
QL5
MY16-ES64
OUT
MY16-EX
MY16-ES64 MY16-EX
IN
SB168-ES
OUT
IN
SB168-ES
OUT
OUT
IN
SB168-ES
OUT
IN
SB168-ES
Audio signal
Remote signal
NOTE
Please refer to the SB168-ES Owner’s Manual for information on setting up the MY16-ES64/
MY16-EX cards and EtherSound network.
181
V5.8 Reference Manual
Remotely controlling an external head amp
An external head amp (“external HA”) connected via MY16-ES64 or NAI48-ES can be remotely controlled from the QL series console. For details on how to connect a QL series console with an external head amp, refer to “
Using an external head amp ” on page 180
and the external head amp’s operating manual.
STEP
1.
Connect the QL series console to an external HA.
2.
In the function access area, press the RACK button.
3.
Press the EXTERNAL HA tab in the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen.
4.
Press the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT button for the corresponding rack in the I/O
DEVICE screen (EXTERNAL HA page).
5.
Use the PORT SELECT buttons in the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT window to select the input ports to which the audio output of the external HA is connected.
6.
Press the CLOSE button to close the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT window.
7.
In the I/O DEVICE screen (EXTERNAL HA page), press the rack in which the external
HA you want to control is mounted.
8.
Remotely control the external head amp in the EXTERNAL HA window.
I/O DEVICE screen (EXTERNAL HA page)
5 6
1
I/O devices and external head amps
VIRTUAL RACK screen
(EXTERNAL HA page)
182
2 3 4
1
EXTERNAL HA field
Shows the state of the connected external HA.
2 ID/Model name/+48V ACTIVE
This displays information for the external HA mounted in the rack. The ID number is automatically assigned in order of the connected devices from 1 to 4. This field also enables you to view the on/off status of the phantom power.
3 Virtual racks
These are up to four racks in which remotely controllable external HA units can be mounted. If an external HA is mounted, this field will indicate the HA settings (GAIN setting, and on/off status of the phantom power and HPF). Press a rack to open the
EXTERNAL HA window for that rack.
4 EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT button
Press this button to display the HA PORT SELECT window, in which you can set the input port for the external head amp mounted in the rack.
NOTE
If an external HA is connected to one of the slots on the QL series console, you must specify an appropriate input port manually. If this is set incorrectly, the external HA will not be detected correctly when you patch input ports to input channels.
V5.8 Reference Manual
5 VIEW switch buttons
Switch the virtual rack display between SB168-ES and AD8HR. Select the view that’s appropriate for the connected device.
6 COMM PORT switch buttons
Specify whether the external HA connected to the slot will be controlled remotely. Select
“SLOT1” if you want to remotely control the external HA.
EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT window
Select the input port for the external head amp. Display this window by pressing the
EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT button in the I/O DEVICE screen (EXTERNAL HA page).
1
1
PORT SELECT buttons
Specify the input ports to which the external HA is connected.
I/O devices and external head amps
EXTERNAL HA window
Remotely control the external head amp. Display this window by pressing the virtual rack in the I/O DEVICE screen (EXTERNAL HA page).
1
2
3
4
5
1 +48V ACTIVE
If an external HA is connected, the phantom power on/off status is shown here.
(The on/off setting is made on the external HA unit itself.)
2
+48V button
These switch phantom power on/off for each channel.
3 GAIN knob
These indicate the gain of the external HA. If you press and select the GAIN knob, you can make adjustments to gain using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. The level meter located at the immediate right of the knob indicates the input level for the corresponding port.
4
FREQUENCY knob/HPF button
These controllers switch on or off the high-pass filter built into the external HA, and adjust its cutoff frequency. If you press and select the FREQUENCY knob, you can make adjustments using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
5
Rack select tabs
These tabs switch the rack that is displayed in the EXTERNAL HA window.
NOTE
• If you connect an additional AD8HR, the setting for this AD8HR will be used.
These knobs and buttons are displayed in the EXTERNAL HA window even if an AD8HR is not connected, allowing you to create and store a scene even while the AD8HR is not connected.
• Error messages related to the SB168-ES will not be displayed. In addition, you will be unable to set the EtherSound parameters. Use AVS-ESMonitor for these functions.
183
V5.8 Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
Remotely controlling an external HA from the input channels on a QL series console
You will be able to use the external HA in the same way as the head amp on an I/O device or
STEP
1.
Use the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] key to access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen that includes the channel for the head amp that you want to control.
2.
Press the GAIN/PATCH field of the channel whose external HA you want to adjust.
3.
Press the PATCH button in the GAIN/PATCH window, and select the input port assigned to the external HA.
4.
Remotely control the external head amp in the GAIN/PATCH window.
INTERNAL HA window
2
3
4
SELECTED
CHANNEL VIEW screen
GAIN/PATCH window
Controlling an internal head amp
Control the internal head amps (“internal HA”) in QL series consoles. It is not necessary to change the input patch.
STEP
1.
Press the INTERNAL HA tab in the upper part of the I/O DEVICE window.
2.
Set the output port on the INTERNAL HA window, as necessary.
1
5
1 +48V ACTIVE
Indicates the phantom power on or off status.
2
+48V button
These switch phantom power on/off for each channel.
3 A. GAIN knob
These indicate the gain of the internal HA. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. The level meter located at the immediate right of the knob indicates the input level for the corresponding port.
4 GC button
Switches on or off the Gain Compensation function that maintains a consistent signal level on the audio network.
5 Displayed port switch tabs
These tabs switch the port that is displayed in the INTERNAL HA window
I/O DEVICE screen (INTERNAL HA page)
184
V5.8 Reference Manual
MIDI
This chapter explains how to transmit MIDI messages from an external device to the QL series console to control the QL console’s parameters, and how to send out MIDI messages from the QL console as you operate the unit.
The following illustration shows an example of connecting the MIDI IN/OUT connectors to transmit and receive MIDI messages.
NOTE
As the port used for transmission and reception of MIDI messages, you can select either the rear panel MIDI IN/OUT connectors or an I/O card installed in slot 1. All of the functionality described in this section will be available on the port you select.
MIDI
MIDI I N
QL5
MIDI OUT MIDI I N MIDI OUT
External device
MIDI functionality on the QL series console
The QL series console can use MIDI to perform the following operations.
Program Change transmission and reception
When you execute a specific event (scene/effect library recall) on the QL series console, a
Program Change message (a number that is assigned to the event) can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a Program
Change message is received from an external device.
Control Change transmission and reception
When you execute a specific event (fader, knob, or key operation) on the QL series console, the corresponding Control Change message can be transmitted to an external device.
Conversely, events can be executed when Control Change messages are received from an external device. This allows you to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, and play them back later.
Parameter Change (SysEx) transmission and reception
When specific events (fader, knob, or key operations, changes in system settings or user settings) are executed, “Parameter Change” SysEx (system exclusive) messages can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, events can be executed when Parameter
Changes are received from an external device.
Using this capability, QL operations can be recorded and played back on a MIDI sequencer or other external device. In addition, changes in system and user settings can be received and executed by another QL console.
185
Basic MIDI settings
You can select the type of MIDI messages the QL series console will transmit and receive, the
MIDI port that will be used, and the MIDI channel.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
Press the MIDI/GPI button in the center of the SETUP screen.
3.
Press the MIDI SETUP tab in the MIDI/GPI screen.
4.
Press the port select button for transmission (Tx) or reception (Rx) in the MIDI
SETUP page.
5.
In the MIDI SETUP window for port selection, select the port type and port number that will transmit or receive MIDI messages, and press the OK button.
6.
Press the channel select button in the MIDI SETUP page.
7.
In the MIDI SETUP window for channel selection, select the channel that will transmit or receive MIDI messages, and press the OK button.
8.
In the MIDI SETUP page, turn transmission/reception on or off for each MIDI message.
SETUP screen MIDI/GPI screen
(MIDI SETUP page)
NOTE
• For details on using Program Change messages, refer to “
Using program changes to recall scenes and library items ” on page 188 .
” on
.
V5.8 Reference Manual
2
4
6
7
MIDI/GPI screen (MIDI SETUP page)
You can select the type of MIDI messages that will be transmitted and received, and choose the port that will be used.
1
3
5
1
PORT/CH field
Enables you to select the port and MIDI channel that will be used to transmit and receive
MIDI messages.
• Tx PORT/Tx CH ......... Press these buttons to open windows in which you can respectively select a port and MIDI channel to transmit MIDI messages.
• Rx PORT/Rx CH ........ Press these buttons to open windows in which you can respectively select a port and MIDI channel to receive MIDI messages.
NOTE
When transmitting or receiving Parameter Changes, the channel number you specify here is used as the device number (a number that identifies the transmitting or receiving unit).
2 PROGRAM CHANGE field
Enables you to switch MIDI Program Change message transmission and reception on or off.
• Tx ............................... Switches program change transmission on/off.
• Rx ............................... Switches program change reception on/off.
• ECHO ......................... Switches on or off echo output of Program Change messages.
(If this function is on, Program Change messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without modification.)
186
3 PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field
Enables you to select the Program Change transmit/receive mode.
• SINGLE ...................... If this button is on, Program Changes will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel (Single mode).
• MULTI ........................ If this button is on, program changes will be transmitted/ received on multiple MIDI channels (Multi mode).
• OMNI .......................... If this button is on, Program Changes on all MIDI channels will be received in Single mode. Multi mode transmission/reception and Single mode transmission are disabled.
• BANK ......................... If this button is on, Bank Select messages can be transmitted and received in Single mode. (Bank Select messages switch the group of Program Change messages to be used.)
4 CONTROL CHANGE field
Enables you to switch MIDI Control Change message transmission and reception on or off.
• Tx ............................... Switches control change transmission on/off.
• Rx .............................. Switches control change reception on/off.
• ECHO ......................... Switches on or off echo output of Control Change messages.
(If this function is on, Control Change messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without modification.)
5 CONTROL CHANGE MODE field
This field enables you to select the Control Change transmission/reception mode.
• NRPN button ............. If this button is on, the QL mix parameters will be transmitted/ received as NRPN messages on one MIDI channel (NRPN mode).
• TABLE button ........... If this button is on, the QL mix parameters will be transmitted/ received as Control Change messages on one MIDI channel
(TABLE mode).
6 PARAMETER CHANGE field
Enables you to turn transmission/reception of SysEx (system exclusive) messages on or off. (These are special messages used to control the parameter of the QL console.)
• Tx ............................... Switches parameter change transmission on/off.
• Rx .............................. Switches parameter change reception on/off.
• ECHO ......................... Switches on or off echo output of Parameter Change messages. (If this function is on, Parameter Change messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without modification.)
7
OTHER COMMMAND field
Switches on or off echo output of other MIDI messages. (If this function is on, other
MIDI messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without modification.)
MIDI
V5.8 Reference Manual
MIDI SETUP window (for port selection)
Here you can select the port that will be used to transmit and receive MIDI messages. This window appears when you press the port select button for transmission (Tx) or reception (Rx) in the PORT/CH field.
1 2
MIDI SETUP window (for channel selection)
This parameter row enables you to specify MIDI Channels for MIDI message transmission and reception. This window appears when you press the channel select button in the PORT/
CH field.
1
MIDI
3
1 TERMINAL field
Enables you to select the port that will transmit or receive MIDI messages.
You can choose from the following items.
NONE
MIDI
SLOT1
No port will be used.
MIDI IN (Rx) and OUT (Tx) connectors on the rear panel
A card that supports serial transmission and is installed in Slot 1 on the rear panel
2 PORT NO. field
If you select SLOT 1 in the TERMINAL field, choose port number 1–8 in this field. (The number of available ports will vary depending on the card that is installed.)
The currently-available card is valid only for port 1.
3 OK button
Confirms the settings and closes the window.
2
1
CH field
Enables you to select CH1–CH16 as the channel that will transmit or receive MIDI messages.
2 OK button
Confirms the settings and closes the window.
187
V5.8 Reference Manual
Using program changes to recall scenes and library items
The QL series console lets you assign a specific event (scene recall or effect library recall) to each Program Change number, so that when this event is executed on the QL console, a
Program Change message of the corresponding number will be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a Program Change message is received from an external device.
STEP
1.
Connect the QL series console to an external device.
2.
As described in “ Basic MIDI settings ” on page 185
, select the ports and MIDI channels that will be used to transmit/receive program changes.
3.
Press the PROGRAM CHANGE tab in the MIDI/GPI screen.
4.
In the PROGRAM CHANGE page, switch Program Change transmission/reception on or off, select transmission/reception mode, and set echo output.
5.
To change the event assignment for each program number, press the desired event in the list and select an event type and the recall target.
MIDI/GPI screen (PROGRAM CHANGE page)
In the PROGRAM CHANGE page, you can specify how Program Changes will be transmitted and received, and choose the event (scene recall or effect library recall) that will be assigned to each program number.
MIDI
1
3
2
MIDI/GPI screen
(PROGRAM CHANGE page)
NOTE
Assignments to program numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system, rather than for individual scenes.
4
5
6
1 PROGRAM CHANGE field
Switches Program Change transmission and reception on or off. This setting is linked with the PROGRAM CHANGE section of the MIDI SETUP page.
• Tx ...........................If this is on, the corresponding Program Change messages will be transmitted when events on the list are executed.
• Rx ..........................If this is on, the corresponding events will be executed when
Program Change messages are received.
• ECHO .....................If this button is on, Program Change messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without change.
2 PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field
Enables you to select the Program Change transmit/receive mode. This setting is linked with the PROGRAM CHANGE MODE section of the MIDI SETUP page.
188
V5.8 Reference Manual
• Multi mode (when the MULTI button is on):
Program changes of all MIDI channels will be transmitted and received. (The transmit/ receive channel specified in the MIDI SETUP page will be ignored.) When a Program
Change is received, the event assigned to the corresponding MIDI channel and program number in the list will be executed.
When you execute a specific event on a QL series console, the Program Change of the corresponding program number will be transmitted on the MIDI channel shown in the list. (If an event is assigned to more than one program number on multiple MIDI channels/multiple program numbers, only the lowest-numbered program number on each MIDI channel will be transmitted.)
• Single mode (when the SINGLE button is on):
Only Program Changes of the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) channels specified in the
MIDI SETUP page will be transmitted and received. When a program change on the Rx channel is received, the event assigned to that program number of the corresponding channel in the list will be executed.
When you execute a specific event on a QL series console, the Program Change of the corresponding program number will be transmitted on the Tx channel shown in the list.
(If an event is assigned to more than one program number on the same channel, the lowest-numbered program number will be transmitted.)
• When the OMNI button is on in SINGLE mode
Program changes of all MIDI channels will be received. However, regardless of the MIDI channel that is received, the event assigned to the corresponding program number of the Rx channel will be executed. Turning on the OMNI button will not change the operation for Program Change transmission.
• When the BANK button is on in SINGLE mode
The CH indication in the list will change to BANK (bank number), and Bank Select
(Control Change #0, #32) and Program Change messages can be transmitted and received. This can be convenient if you want to control more than 128 events on a single
MIDI channel.
When Bank Select and then Program Change messages (in that order) are received on the Rx channel, the event assigned to that bank number and program number in the list will be executed.
When you execute a specific event on the QL series console, bank select + program change messages for the bank number and program number assigned to that event will be transmitted on the Tx channel. (If the same event is assigned more than once in the list, the lowest-numbered bank number and program number will be transmitted.)
NOTE
• The settings of the OMNI and BANK buttons are ignored in Multi mode.
• If the BANK button is on and only a Program Change on an applicable MIDI channel is received, the last-selected bank number will be used.
• If the BANK button is on, the OMNI button can also be turned on at the same time. In this case,
Bank Select and Program Change messages of all MIDI channels will be received.
3 List
Shows the event (scene recall or library recall) assigned to each MIDI channel and MIDI
Program Change number. The list shows the following items.
189
• CH/BANK ...............If “CH” is shown, this column indicates the MIDI channel (1–16) on which Program Changes are transmitted/received. If Program
Change transmission and reception is in Single mode and the
BANK button is on, this will be labeled “BANK,” and the numerical value in this column will correspond to the bank number.
• NO.
.........................Indicates the program number 1–128.
• PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT
.........................Indicates the type/number/title of the event assigned to each channel (bank number) or program number. Press an individual event display area to access the MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE window, in which you can select the event that you want to assign.
4
Scroll knob
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to scroll the list up or down.
5 CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to erase all events from the list.
6
INITIALIZE ALL button
Press this button to restore all event assignments on the list to their default state.
MIDI
MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE window
You can specify the event assigned to each program number. Display this window by pressing the list in the PROGRAM CHANGE page in the MIDI/GPI screen.
1 2 3
4
V5.8 Reference Manual
MIDI
1 TYPE field
Enables you to select the type of event.
The following table lists the events you can select.
NO ASSIGN
SCENE
EFFECT
PREMIUM RACK
No assignment
Scene memory recall operations
Effect library recall operations
Recall operations for the corresponding Premium
Rack library
2 DESTINATION field
Enables you to select the rack for which you want to recall a library item. If EFFECT or
PREMIUM RACK is selected in the TYPE field, the rack number will be shown. If SCENE is selected, this will indicate “- - -”, and no choice is available for this field.
3 LIBRARY NUMBER/LIBRARY TITLE field
Enables you to select the scene or library item to recall.
If SCENE or EFFECT is selected in the TYPE field, the LIBRARY TITLE is shown. If PREMIUM
RACK is selected, the LIBRARY NUMBER is shown.
4 OK button
Confirms the settings and closes the window.
Using control changes to control parameters
You can use MIDI Control Change messages to control specified events (fader/knob operations, [ON] key on/off operations etc.) on the QL series console. This capability can be used to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, and play back this data later.
You can use Control Changes to control events in either of the following two ways.
Using Control Changes
This method uses typical Control Changes (control numbers 1–31, 33–95, 102–119). You can freely assign an event to each control number.
Using NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number)
This method uses a special type of Control Change messages called NRPN.
NRPN uses Control Change numbers 99 and 98 to specify the MSB (Most Significant Byte) and LSB (Least Significant Byte) of the parameter number, and subsequently-transmitted
Control Change messages of Control Change number 6 (or 6 and 38) to specify the value of that parameter.
The event assigned to each combination of MSB and LSB is pre-defined, and cannot be changed.
NOTE
For details on the events assigned to NRPN messages, refer to the QL Data List (End of Manual).
190
STEP
1.
Connect the QL series console to an external device.
2.
As described in “ Basic MIDI settings ” on page 185
, select the ports and MIDI channels that will be used to transmit/receive control changes.
3.
Press the CONTROL CHANGE tab in the MIDI/GPI screen.
4.
Switch Control Change transmission/reception on or off, select transmission/ reception mode, and set echo output.
5.
To change the event assignment for each control number, press the desired event in the list and select an event type and the recall target.
MIDI/GPI screen
(CONTROL CHANGE page)
NOTE
Assignments to control numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system, rather than for individual scenes.
V5.8 Reference Manual
MIDI/GPI screen (CONTROL CHANGE page)
You can specify how Control Changes will be transmitted and received, and specify the event
(fader/knob operation, [ON] key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to each control number.
1 2
3
6
4
5
1 CONTROL CHANGE field
Enables you to switch Control Change transmission/reception on or off, and specify whether Control Changes will be echoed out. This setting is linked with the CONTROL
CHANGE field on the MIDI SETUP page.
• Tx button ............................... Switches control change transmission on/off.
• Rx button ............................... Switches control change reception on/off.
• ECHO button ......................... Selects whether incoming control changes will be echoed out from the MIDI transmit port.
2 CONTROL CHANGE MODE field
This field enables you to select the Control Change transmission/reception mode. This setting is linked with the CONTROL CHANGE MODE field on the MIDI SETUP page.
• NRPN mode (when the NRPN button is on):
Various mix parameters on the QL series console will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel as NRPN messages. If you select this mode, the assignments in the list will be ignored.
• TABLE mode (when the TABLE button is on):
Various mix parameters on the QL series console will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel as Control Change messages, according to the assignments in the list.
NOTE
The channel on which Control Changes are transmitted and received is specified by the PORT/
CH field on the MIDI SETUP page (
).
3 List
Shows the event (fader/knob operation, [ON] key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to each control number.
• NO.
.........................This indicates the control number. You can use control numbers
1–31, 33–95, and 102–119.
• CONTROL CHANGE EVENT
.........................Indicates and enables you to select the type of event assigned to each control number. When you press an event, the MIDI
CONTROL CHANGE window will appear, allowing you to change the control number assignment.
4 CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to clear all event assignments on the list.
5 INITIALIZE ALL button
Press this button to restore all event assignments on the list to their default state.
6 Scroll knob
Scrolls the contents of the list. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to operate this.
MIDI
191
V5.8 Reference Manual
MIDI CONTROL CHANGE window
Display this window by pressing any event in the CONTROL CHANGE page. In this window, you can specify the event assigned to each control number.
1 2
3
1 MODE field
Enables you to select the type of event.
2 PARAMETER 1/2 field
In conjunction with the MODE field, this field specifies the type of event.
3 OK button
Confirms the settings and closes the window.
NOTE
• The list shown is the same for all models of the QL series. For the QL1, the display will indicate
“Cannot Assign!” if you specify a parameter that does not exist on that model.
• If NRPN mode is selected as the control change transmission/reception mode, the settings in this window are ignored.
• For details on the events that can be assigned to Control Changes, refer to the QL Data List (End of Manual).
Using parameter changes to control parameters
On the QL series console, you can use a type of system exclusive messages called
“Parameter Changes” to control specific events (fader/knob operations, [ON] key on/off operations, system and user settings, etc.) as an alternative to using Control Changes or
NRPN messages.
For details on the Parameter Changes that can be transmitted and received, refer to “MIDI
Data Format” in the QL Data List (End of Manual).
STEP
1.
Connect the QL series console to an external device.
2.
As described in “ Basic MIDI settings ” on page 185
, select the ports and MIDI channels (device number) that will be used to transmit/receive parameter changes.
3.
Use the Tx button and Rx button of the PARAMETER CHANGE field in the MIDI
SETUP page to turn on parameter change transmission/reception.
NOTE
• Parameter changes include a “device number” that specifies the transmitting or receiving device.
The transmit (Tx) channel and receive (Rx) channel specified on the MIDI SETUP page are used as the device number.
• Please be aware that if the device number included in the transmitted Parameter Change does not match the device number of the receiving QL console, the message will be ignored.
• Do not turn Parameter Change and Control Change transmission/reception on at the same time.
Otherwise, a large amount of data will flood the MIDI port and may cause overflows or other problems.
MIDI
192
V5.8 Reference Manual
Recorder
This chapter explains the functionality and operation of the recorder.
About the USB memory recorder
The QL series console features a USB memory recorder function that lets you easily record internal audio signals to a USB flash drive, or play back audio files recorded on a USB flash drive.
As the file format for recording, the QL series console supports MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3).
For playback, it supports MP3 as well as WMA (Windows Media Audio) and AAC (MPEG-4
AAC) files. However, DRM (Digital Rights Management) is not supported.
By using the USB memory recorder, the output from the STEREO bus or a MIX bus can be recorded to a USB flash drive, or background music or sound effects saved on the USB flash drive can be played back via an assigned input channel.
Signal flow for the USB memory recorder
MIX1-16
MATRIX1-8
STEREO L/R
MONO
INPUT1-64*
DIRECT OUT
RECORDER
INPUT
L
R
USB memory recorder
L
PLAYBACK
OUT
R
INPUT1-64*
ST IN 1L1R-8L8R
* QL1: INPUT1-32
NOTE
• Recording and playback cannot be done simultaneously.
• The signal being recorded cannot be input to an INPUT channel.
Recorder
Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder
Follow the steps below to patch the desired channels to the input and output of the USB memory recorder. You can patch any desired output channel or the direct output of an INPUT channel to the recorder input, and you can patch the recorder output to any desired input channel.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button.
2.
Press the USB tab in the RECORDER screen.
3.
Press the RECORDER INPUT L or R button.
4.
Use the category list and the port select buttons in the CH SELECT window to select the channel that you want to patch to the USB memory recorder input.
5.
When you have finished assigning the channel, press the CLOSE button.
6.
Assign a channel to the other input in the same way.
7.
Press the PLAYBACK OUTPUT L or R button.
8.
Use the category list and the channel select buttons in the CH SELECT window to select the channel that you want to patch to the USB memory recorder output.
9.
When you have finished assigning the channel, press the CLOSE button.
10.
Assign a channel to the other output in the same way.
193
RECORDER screen
NOTE
• The USB memory recorder always records and plays back in stereo. If you want to record in monaural, with the same signal for left and right, you must assign both of the recorder inputs to the same channel.
• You can patch multiple channels to the recorder output.
• In steps 4 and 8, if you select a channel to which another port is already patched, a dialog box will ask you to confirm the patch change. Press the OK button in the dialog box.
• In the case of QL1, channels that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
V5.8 Reference Manual
RECORDER screen (when selecting the USB tab)
In this screen you can assign signals to the input and output of the USB memory recorder, and perform recording and playback operations.
Recorder
6 PLAYBACK OUTPUT GAIN knob
Sets the level of the signal output to the recorder.
7 PLAYBACK OUTPUT CUE button
Press this button to monitor the signal output from the recorder.
NOTE
You cannot turn on this button and the RECORDER INPUT CUE button simultaneously.
The cue monitoring does not support CUE B.
8 Meters
Indicate the level of the signals output to the recorder.
CH SELECT window
Display this window by pressing the RECORDER INPUT L or R button or the PLAYBACK
OUTPUT L or R button.
1 1
2
2
1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5
1 RECORDER INPUT L/R buttons
Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the signals patched to the recorder’s L/R input channels.
2
RECORDER INPUT GAIN knob
Sets the level of the signal input to the recorder.
3 RECORDER INPUT CUE button
When this button is turned on, you can monitor the signal input to the recorder.
NOTE
You cannot turn on this button and the PLAYBACK OUTPUT CUE button simultaneously.
The cue monitoring does not support CUE B.
4 Meters
Indicate the level of the signals input to the recorder.
5
PLAYBACK OUTPUT L/R buttons
Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the signals patched to the recorder’s L/R output channels for playback.
194
1 Category List
Enables you to select the type of channel.
2
Channel select button
Select the channels that will be patched to the USB memory recorder’s inputs and outputs. The channels that can be patched at input or output are different.
Channels that can be patched to the recorder’s inputs
• MIX 1–16 .................... MIX channels 1–16
• MTRX 1–8 .................. MATRIX channels 1–8
• ST L/R ........................ STEREO channel L/R
• ST L+C ....................... STEREO channel L mixed with the MONO(C) channel
• ST R+C ...................... STEREO channel R mixed with the MONO(C) channel
• MONO ........................ MONO channel
• CH1–64 (QL5), CH1–32 (QL1)
............................. Direct output of an INPUT channel 1–64 (QL5) or INPUT channel 1–32 (QL1)
• INPUT ........................ INPUT1–32 (QL1: INPUT1–16)
• SLOT1 IN ................... SLOT1(1)–SLOT1(16)
V5.8 Reference Manual
Recorder
• SLOT2 IN ................... SLOT2(1)–SLOT2(16)
• DANTE1–32 ............... DANTE1–DANTE32
• DANTE33–64 ............. DANTE33–DANTE64 (QL5 only)
Channels that can be patched to the recorder’s outputs
• CH1–64 (QL5), CH1–32 (QL1)
............................. INPUT channel 1–64 (QL5) or INPUT channel 1–32 (QL1)
• STIN 1L/1R-STIN 8L/8R
............................. ST IN channels 1–8L/R
Recording audio to a USB flash drive
You can record the signal of the desired output channels as an audio file (MP3) onto the USB flash drive inserted in the USB connector located to the right of the display.
STEP
1.
Refer to “ Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder ” on page 193
to assign channels to the input/output of the recorder.
2.
Connect a USB flash drive with sufficient free capacity to the USB connector.
3.
To monitor the signal being recorded, raise the fader for the channel(s) that are patched to the input of the recorder.
4.
Press the REC RATE button in the lower right of the RECORDER screen, then select the bit rate for the audio file that will be recorded.
5.
Press the REC ( ) button located at the bottom of the screen.
6.
To start recording, press the PLAY/PAUSE ( screen.
) button in the lower part of the
7.
To stop recording, press the STOP ( ) button.
8.
To audition the recorded content, proceed as follows.
8-1. Press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button to play back the recording.
8-2.
To stop playback, press the STOP ( ) button.
NOTE
• The FREE SIZE field indicates the amount of free capacity in the USB flash drive.
• The signal being recorded will not be output from the recorder output jacks (PLAYBACK OUT).
• The level meter on the RECORDER screen shows the signal level before and after the recorder.
If necessary, use the GAIN knob in the RECORDER INPUT field to adjust the input level to the recorder. Operating the GAIN knob will not affect the level of the signal being output to other ports from the corresponding output channel.
• In the default state, the recorded audio file will be saved in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder in the USB flash drive. However, you may also specify a folder of a level below the SONGS folder.
• The recorded file will be given a default title and file name. You can change this later.
RECORDER screen (when selecting the USB tab)
1
2
7 8 9 0 A 3 4 5 6
TRANSPORT field
This field enables you to control recording and playback of a song.
1 Current song
Indicates the currently-selected song’s track number, title and artist name. The following indicators will appear during playback or recording.
Playing Recording
2 Elapsed time display
Indicates the elapsed playback time of the current song during playback, and the elapsed recording time during recording.
3 Remaining time display
During playback, this indicates the remaining playback time of the current song.
4 Current song format
Indicates the file format information for the current song (the file being recorded).
195
V5.8 Reference Manual
5 REC RATE button
Switches the recording rate.
You can choose 96 kbps, 128 kbps, or 192 kbps. Higher bit rates will improve the audio quality, but will increase the size of the data.
NOTE
The word clock rate at which the QL series console is currently operating will automatically be selected as the sampling rate for the audio file.
6 Display switch buttons
Switches between displaying and hiding the RECORDER INPUT/PLAYBACK OUTPUT fields at the bottom of the song list.
7
REW button
Moves the playback point to the beginning of the current song and stops playback. If the playback point is already at the beginning, the point will move to the beginning of the preceding song that has been selected for playback.
If the playback point is not at the beginning of the current song, holding down this button for two seconds or longer will rewind the playback point.
If you operate this button during playback, playback will resume from the point at which the button was released.
8
STOP button
The recorder will change from play/record/recording-standby mode to stop mode.
9 PLAY button
Changes the recorder mode as follows.
Stop mode Playback mode, then starts playback from the beginning of the current song.
Playback mode Playback-pause mode
Playback pause mode Playback mode, then starts playback from the paused point.
Recording standby mode Recording mode
Recording mode Recording-pause mode
Recording-pause mode Recording mode, then starts recording from the paused point.
0 FF button
Moves the playback point to the beginning of the next song that is marked with a PLAY check symbol.
If you hold down this button for two seconds or longer, fast-forward will occur.
If you operate this button during playback, playback will resume from the point at which the button was released.
A REC button
Places the recorder in recording standby mode.
The pause indicator of the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button will light.
NOTE
You can also assign the function of each button to a USER DEFINED key ( page 221
).
196
Recorder
Directory structure of a USB flash drive
When you connect a USB flash drive to the USB connector, a YPE folder and a SONGS folder within that YPE folder will be created automatically in the root directory of the USB flash drive.
The files created by recording operations will be saved in the above SONGS folder, or in the currently-selected folder below that level.
YPE folder
Root directory
Songs folder
Song
(audio file)
V5.8 Reference Manual
Recorder
Playing back audio files from a USB flash drive
You can play back audio files that have been saved on your USB flash drive. In addition to files that were recorded on the QL series console, you can also play files that were copied from your computer to the USB flash drive.
The three types of file format that can be played are MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3), WMA
(Windows Media Audio), and AAC (MPEG-4 AAC). The playable sampling rates are 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz. The supported bit rate ranges from 64 kbps to 320 kbps.
NOTE
• If you want to play back an audio file, you must save it in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder, or in a folder you have created below the SONGS folder. Files located in other folders and files of unsupported formats will not be recognized.
• The QL series console can recognize a file name that is a maximum of 64 single-byte characters.
If the file name is longer than this, the desired file may not play correctly.
• A maximum of 300 songs can be managed in a single directory. A maximum of 64 subdirectories can be managed.
STEP
1.
Connect a USB flash drive that contains the audio files to the USB connector.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button.
3.
You can use the change directory icon in the RECORDER screen and the folder icon in the No. field to view a content list of the folder that includes the desired file.
4.
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob or press the on-screen file name to select the desired file.
5.
Press a button in the PLAY MODE field to select the playback mode.
6.
If you turned on the REPEAT button in step 5, press the PLAY checkmark for the song you want to play.
7.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button to play back the song.
8.
To stop playback, press the STOP ( ) button.
NOTE
• Even if the sampling rate at which the QL series console is operating differs from the sampling rate of the audio file being played, the SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) function will automatically convert the rate so that the file will be played back correctly.
• If the REPEAT button is on, playback will continue until you stop playback.
RECORDER screen
3 5 4
2
1
A
0
C
B
6 7 8 9
Title list
This list enables you to perform operations related to the songs and directories that are saved on the USB flash drive.
1 Selected song
The currently selected song will appear in a blue frame.
2 Status indicator
Displays a symbol to indicate whether the currently-selected file is playing or paused.
: Playing, : Paused
3 Track number
Indicates the file number in the title list.
197
V5.8 Reference Manual
4 Sub-directory
Indicates each song’s track number, the name of upper level directory, and whether a sub-directory exists (in the case that the directory has been selected).
• Upper level ............Press this to move up to the directory that is one level higher than the current one.
• Sub-directory ........Press this to move to that sub-directory.
NOTE
• If you switch folders, that folder will be selected as the recording destination.
• The folders that can be selected are restricted to the SONGS folder inside the YPE folder, and folders located below the SONGS folder.
5
PLAY check symbol
Enables you to select multiple files that will be played back consecutively.
6 SELECT knob
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select a song.
7
NOW PLAYING button
Press this button to always select the currently-playing song on the list.
8 MOVE UP/MOVE DOWN buttons
Change the order of the selected song in the list.
9
Display switch buttons
Switch the list between the SONG TITLE display and the FILE NAME display.
0 SAVE LIST button
Saves the order of the current title list and PLAY check symbol settings as a playlist.
A
RELOAD button
Loads the playlist that was saved most recently. Use this button to revert the current playlist you are editing back to the previous state.
PLAY MODE field
Sets the playback method of the currently selected song.
B SINGLE button
If this button is on, the recorder will stop after playback of the current song is complete.
If this button is off, the recorder will play the next song on the list after playback of the current song is complete.
Recorder
C REPEAT button
If this button is on, after playback of the current song is complete, the recorder will play the first song on the list that is marked with a PLAY check symbol (unless there are no subsequent songs that are marked with a PLAY check symbol).
If this button is off, the recorder will stop after playback of the current song is complete
(unless there are no subsequent songs that are marked with a PLAY check symbol). One of the following playback methods is selected according to the on/off settings of the
SINGLE button and the REPEAT button.
SINGLE button
REPEAT button
Mode
On
On
Off
Off
On
Off
On
Off
The currently-selected song will play repeatedly until you stop playback.
The currently-selected song will play once and then stop.
Songs with the PLAY checkmark selected are played in order, starting with the currently-selected song, and then they are played again from the first song in the title list. The currentlyselected song will play repeatedly until you stop playback.
Songs with the PLAY checkmark selected are played in order, starting with the currently-selected song. After the final song in the title list is played, playback stops.
Editing the title list
You can change the order of the audio files shown in the title list, and edit the titles or artist names.
STEP
1.
Connect a USB flash drive containing audio files to the USB connector.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button.
3.
Press the No. button and the change directory icon in the RECORDER screen to view a list of the contents of the folder that includes the desired file.
4.
If you want to edit a title in the title list, press the SONG TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT button. If you want to edit the artist name, press the ARTIST EDIT button.
5.
Edit the title or artist name, and press the OK button.
6.
If necessary, use the SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button, ARTIST SORT button, and MOVE UP/MOVE DOWN buttons on screen to change the order of the title list.
7.
When editing is complete, press the SAVE LIST button to save the changes.
NOTE
• If the title or artist name contains characters that cannot be displayed, these characters will be converted into for display.
• The title and the artist name can be edited only for MP3 format audio files.
198
V5.8 Reference Manual
RECORDER screen (when selecting the USB tab)
3 4
1
2
5
6
1 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT button
Enables you to edit the title of the song selected in the list.
2 ARTIST EDIT button
Enables you to edit the artist name of the song selected in the list.
NOTE
A maximum of 128 single-byte characters (64 double-byte characters) can be input for both the title and for the artist name. If the title cannot be shown completely, the text will scroll horizontally.
3 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button
Sorts the list in alphabetical order of the title.
4
ARTIST SORT button
Sorts the list in alphabetical order of the artist name.
5 SAVE LIST button
Saves the order of the current title list and PLAY check symbol settings as a playlist on the USB flash drive.
6 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME button
Enables you to select either song title or file name to be displayed in the SONG TITLE/
FILE NAME field.
Recorder
Recording or playing back using a computer DAW
If you plan to add DAW software, such as Steinberg Nuendo, to an audio network that includes a QL console, you must use Dante Virtual Soundcard (DVS) software. DVS works as an audio interface, making it possible to transmit signals between a DAW and an audio network (that includes a QL series console and I/O devices). In this way, you will be able to make multi-track recordings of live performances or use live recordings that were made a day earlier for a virtual sound check.
This section explains the steps required when adding DAW software to an audio network.
Required devices and software
• QL series
• A computer (Windows or Mac) equipped with an Ethernet port that supports a Giga-bit
Ethernet (GbE) network; DAW software
• A GbE-compatible network switch
• CAT5e cable
• Dante Virtual Soundcard driver software or Dante Accelerator card
• Dante Controller control software
NOTE
• You must have a license ID to use Dante Virtual Soundcard. A sheet with the DVS token needed to acquire the license ID is included in the QL unit package.
• The latest information about the Dante Virtual Soundcard and the Dante Controller is available at the following website: https://www.yamaha.com/proaudio/
199
V5.8 Reference Manual
Recorder
Word clock settings
In a Dante network, the leader device supplies accurate word clock to other devices on the network. If the leader device is removed from the network or breaks down, another device will automatically take over as the clock leader.
To make this setting, in the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button, then the WORD
CLOCK/SLOT button to access the WORD CLOCK/SLOT window.
Setting up Dante Virtual Soundcard
Install Dante Virtual Soundcard (DVS) and
Dante Controller in the computer that you want to use for audio recording.
Make the following settings before turning
DVS on.
• Connect the GbE-compatible network port of the computer to a GbE-compatible network switch.
• Configure the computer to obtain an IP address automatically
(this is the default setting).
• Set the audio format.
(Example: 48kHz, 24 bit)
• Set the Dante latency. (Use a high setting to ensure stability when using multiple channels.)
• In the Advanced settings, select the number of channels to be used for recording and playback (the default is 8 x 8).
Less than V3.7
V3.7
200
NOTE
Please refer to the Dante Virtual Soundcard User’s Guide for more information on ASIO settings
(Windows).
Dante Accelerator settings
After mounting a Dante Accelerator card on the computer, install the Dante Accelerator Driver and make the following settings. For information about how to install the driver, refer to the
Installation Guide included with the driver.
• Use a network cable to connect the Dante jack on the Dante Accelerator card to the Dante network, and then connect the computer’s network port to the same network.
• Configure the computer to obtain an IP address automatically (this is the default setting).
NOTE
For more information about selecting a computer for remote control from a QL series console, refer to “
When setup method selection button = SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS
” in “ Specifying DVS or Dante Accelerator ” on
.
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setting up Dante Controller
Connect the network port of the computer to a GbE-compatible network switch. Configure the computer to obtain an IP address automatically (this is the default setting).
The following settings can be made via Dante Controller.
• For multi-track recording, patch audio signals from the I/O device to DVS or the Dante
Accelerator card.
• For virtual sound check: Patch audio signals in such a way that they will be output from the computer to the Dante audio network, then routed to the channels on the QL console
The following example shows Dante Controller settings for when channels 1–16 of an I/O device are patched to DVS.
Recorder
Setting up DAW software
You must make driver settings in your DAW software. You must make driver settings in your
DAW software. In the device setting window, select “Dante Virtual Sound Card-ASIO” (“Dante” for Mac) or “Yamaha AIC128-D” as the sound card (or audio driver) used for input/output.
Some DAW software may require internal patching for the driver and the DAW software. For more information, refer to the DAW software manual.
Setting up Nuendo Live
When you start up Nuendo Live and create a new project, tracks corresponding to the number of channels specified in DVS will be created automatically, and the channel names and colors from the QL series console will automatically be assigned as each track name.
Audio recording and playback
After you have made driver settings in your DAW software, you can record and play back audio.
For multi-track recording, set the input ports for the tracks of the DAW software to the ports that receive audio signals from the I/O devices.
For a virtual sound check, you must route recorded audio signals to the input channels on the
QL console. To do so, patch the signals so that they will be output from the DAW software to
DANTE 1–64 on the QL console (DANTE 1–32 for the QL1). It may be convenient for you later if you store two sets of the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings in the library: one set for routing audio signals from the I/O devices, and another set for routing audio signals from DAW software. In this way, you will be able to switch between patch settings without starting Dante
Controller. In addition, you will be able to patch a specific channel (such as a vocal) to the
I/O device to monitor during a virtual sound check.
In this case, you’ll need to switch the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings of the QL series console depending on whether you’re performing multitrack recording or multitrack playback. If you’ve
saved these different sets of settings in the DANTE INPUT PATCH LIBRARY ( page 164 ),
you’ll be able to switch between them conveniently.
NOTE
Please refer to the Dante Controller manual for more information about operations and settings of the Dante Controller.
201
V5.8 Reference Manual
Recorder
Using the QL console with Nuendo Live
The QL series consoles can operate in an integrated manner with Steinberg’s Nuendo Live
DAW software.
The “Yamaha Console Extension” software which integrates the QL series and Nuendo Live can be installed in your computer, allowing you to operate Nuendo Live from the QL series console to easily perform multi-track recording operations.
This section explains how to operate Nuendo Live from the QL series console.
Preparing the project
Refer to “ Recording or playing back using a computer DAW ” on page 199 to make the
following settings.
• Settings for Dante Virtual Soundcard or Dante Accelerator
• Setting up Dante Controller
• Setting up Nuendo Live
Recording into a project
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button.
2.
Press the Nuendo Live tab in the upper right of the RECORDER screen.
3.
Press the EASY RECORDING button to start recording.
4.
When you finish recording, press the record lock button and then press the STOP button.
RECORDER screen
(when selecting the Nuendo
Live tab)
RECORDER screen (when selecting the Nuendo Live tab)
1
2
G
3
4
5
6
7 8 9 0 A B C D H E I F
1 Nuendo meter display field
This shows the channel levels of Nuendo Live.
2 PEAK CLEAR button
Clears the peak levels indicated by the peak hold function.
3 Marker list field
Lists the marker information recorded in the current Nuendo Live project.
The markers can be selected by pressing the on-screen list or by using the [TOUCH AND
TURN] knob.
4 Nuendo Live SETUP button
Specify the device that the console will use for communication when working with
Nuendo Live (
5
DANTE INPUT PATCH button
Press this to access the DANTE INPUT PATCH window (
6 Location information display
This displays information for the current location of the Nuendo Live project. You can press the button at the right to switch the time display format.
202
V5.8 Reference Manual
Transport field
Here you can operate the transport of Nuendo Live.
7 GO TO PROJECT START button
Returns the location to the start of the project.
8
GO TO PREVIOUS MARKER button
Returns the location to the previous marker.
9 GO TO NEXT MARKER button
Advances the location to the next marker.
0
GO TO PROJECT END button
Advances the location to the end of the project.
A CYCLE button
Turns repeat on/off for the project.
B
STOP button
Stops playback/recording of the project.
C PLAY button
Starts playback of the project.
D
RECORD button
Starts/stops recording of the project.
E EASY RECORDING button
Immediately starts recording on all tracks.
When you press this, the location will move to the last-recorded position, all tracks will be set to record mode, recording will begin, the record panel will be displayed, and the panel will be locked. The recording will be started retrospectively.
(Initial setting: 10 seconds)
F
Record lock button
Turns recording status lock on/off. This prevents recording from being accidentally stopped during recording.
G DVS information display
Shows the device label of the selected DVS.
H ADD MARKER button
Adds a marker to the project at the current location.
I RECALL LINK button
Specifies whether a marker will be created when you recall a scene. If this function is turned on, the button will be lit.
NOTE
Transport functions can also be controlled from USER DEFINED keys (
Recorder
Specifying DVS or Dante Accelerator
Before you proceed, use DANTE SETUP to specify the I/O devices that will be mounted. For details, refer to “
Mounting an I/O device on the Dante audio network ” on page 256
.
STEP
1.
In the Nuendo Live screen, press the NUENDO Live SETUP button.
2.
In the NUENDO LIVE SETUP window, press the setting method select button.
3.
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to make settings.
4.
When you have finished making settings, press the OK button to close the window.
NOTE
• You can specify either DVS or Dante Accelerator in the NUENDO LIVE SETUP window.
• However, do not select the same DVS or Dante Accelerator from multiple QL series consoles.
NUENDO LIVE SETUP window
In this window, specify the device that the console will use for communication when working with Nuendo Live.
1
203
V5.8 Reference Manual
1 Setup method select buttons
Choose one of the following methods by which to specify DVS or Dante Accelerator.
• NO ASSIGN ........................ Not assigned
• DVS ..................................... Select a DVS from the device list
• SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS .. When using Dante Accelerator, specify the IP address of the computer
When setup method selection button = DVS
To choose from a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network, press the DVS button to display the DEVICE LIST field.
Recorder
When setup method selection button = SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS
When using Dante Accelerator, specify the IP address of the computer in the SPECIFIED IP
ADDRESS field. Since the IP address of Dante Accelerator will differ from the IP address used by Yamaha Console Extension, you must specify the IP address manually.
1
2
1 DEVICE LIST
Shows a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network.
From the list, choose the DVS that you want to use with Nuendo Live.
2
DEVICE LIST select knob
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the DVS to switch to.
204
1
1
IP ADDRESS knobs
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to specify an IP address.
NOTE
• As the IP address, specify the IP address of the computer that is running Nuendo Live.
• Set the address of that computer in the range of 169.254.0.0–169.254.255.255, and set the subnet mask as 255.255.0.0.
• For the computer in which Dante Accelerator is installed, the Dante port of Dante Accelerator as well as the Ethernet port of the computer must both be connected to the same network.
Refer to the illustration below.
Comp u ter
Ethernet
SW
(Primary)
Dante Accelerator P
S
QL
Dante
P
S
SW
(Secondary)
V5.8 Reference Manual
Recorder
NOTE
• Depending on the firmware version, Dante Accelerator might not support redundant networking.
Refer to the following website to check whether your version of the Dante Accelerator firmware supports redundant networking.
https://www.yamaha.com/proaudio/
Playing a multi-track project
STEP
1.
Press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button in the RECORDER screen (Nuendo Live page).
2.
In the DANTE INPUT PATCH window, press the PORT SELECT button for the port to which you want to assign the signal from Nuendo Live.
3.
In the list at the left of the PORT SELECT window, select the DVS you’re using with
Nuendo Live, and select the port you want to assign it to.
4.
Press the + button located in the upper part of the window to switch the port, and assign a DVS port to it in the same way.
5.
When you have finished making settings, press the CLOSE button to exit the window.
6.
Press the “X” symbol in the upper right of the DANTE INPUT PATCH window to close it.
7.
In the Nuendo Live screen, press the START button.
8.
Operate the channels so that sound is output.
9.
To stop playback, press the STOP button.
RECORDER screen
(when selecting the Nuendo Live tab)
DANTE INPUT PATCH window
PORT SELECT window
NOTE
If you save the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings in a library, the settings of the QL series console
can be switched conveniently ( page 164
).
205
V5.8 Reference Manual
AFC IMAGE Control
AFC IMAGE settings
AFC IMAGE allows you to intuitively create a variety of effects without worrying about individual speaker settings, by arranging large numbers of objects and moving them freely.
NETWORK window (AFC IMAGE page)
5
1 2
4
6
3
AFC IMAGE Control
STEP
1.
Press the SETUP button on the menu bar to access the SETUP screen.
2.
Press the NETWORK button to display the NETWORK screen.
3.
Press the AFC IMAGE tab to display the “AFC IMAGE tab.
1
ENABLE button
When this is off, press it to start communication with the device. Press it when lit to end communication with the device.
2 SYNC STATUS indicator
Displays the communication status with the device.
3 REFRESH
Matches the channel name of the main unit with the object name of the device.
Select the copy direction and press the REFRESH button to start copying.
4
PREFERENCE SCENE RECALL
When this is turned on, you can recall AFC scenes from the console.
5 IP ADDRESS
Set the IP address of the device.
6
OBJECT ASSIGN
Sets the start channel and the number of objects for the channel.
206
V5.8 Reference Manual
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
When the AFC IMAGE is set, the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen appears as follows.
1
AFC IMAGE Control
AFC IMAGE CONTROL zoom up screen (1ch)
AFC IMAGE parameters can be viewed and edited for the corresponding multiple channels.
4
1 2
6
5
3
1
AFC switch button
Press to display the AFC IMAGE CONTROL zoom-up screen that displays / changes the
AFC IMAGE parameter.
1
AFC IMAGE graph
Displays parameters for AFC IMAGE.
2 Z meter
Displays the Z axis of the object.
3
SEND level
Displays the send level.
4 AFC CONTROL button
Switches the control on or off. When this button is turned off, the position cannot be operated from the console.
5 Parameter knobs
Displays the position (X, Y, Z), size and send level of AFC IMAGE. Use the TOUCH AND
TURN knob to operate the parameters.
6
SOLO
Switches the Solo function on or off. The SOLO CLEAR button disables all solo functions.
The SOLO and SOLO CLEAR buttons for which Show mode is turned on in AFC IMAGE will be hidden.
207
V5.8 Reference Manual
AFC IMAGE CONTROL zoom up screen
(CH 1-32, CH 33-64)
AFC IMAGE parameters can be viewed and edited for the corresponding multiple channels.
1
2
SCENE LIST screen: AFC IMAGE tab
The AFC IMAGE tab of the SCENE LIST screen contains the following items.
AFC IMAGE Control
1
3
4
1 Channel select buttons
For selecting the desired channel for operating. The current channel icon, channel number, channel name, and color appear on the button.
2 Immersive sound graph
Displays AFC IMAGE parameters.
3 Parameter knobs
Displays the position (X, Y, Z), size and send level of AFC IMAGE. Use the TOUCH AND
TURN knob to operate the parameters.
4 Tabs
For selecting the channels that you want to view on the screen.
1
AFC IMAGE button
Sets the scene number to be linked to the AFC IMAGE when the scene is recalled. You can turn this function ON or OFF with PREFERENCE SCENE RECALL on the AFC IMAGE tab of the NETWORK screen.
208
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
A
9
0
C
About the SETUP screen
The SETUP screen enables you to set various parameters that apply to the entire QL console.
To access the SETUP screen, press the SETUP button in the Function Access Area. The screen contains the following items.
1 3 2 54 6 7
I J K
CURRENT USER field
This field enables you to make various user-related settings.
1 USER SETUP button
Press this button to open the USER SETUP window, in which you can make various settings for each user.
2 CURRENT USER button
Press this button to open the LOG IN window, in which you can switch log-in users.
3
COMMENT EDIT button
Press this button to open the COMMENT EDIT window, in which you can enter comments that will be displayed in the comment area.
8
E
D
B
F
H
G
209
Setup
4 PASSWORD CHANGE button
Press this button to open the PASSWORD CHANGE window, in which you can change the password.
5 SAVE KEY button
Press this button to open the SAVE KEY window, in which you can overwrite (save) the user authentication key (
).
STORAGE field
This field enables you to create, save, or load a user authentication key.
6 CREATE USER KEY button
Press this button to open the CREATE USER KEY window, in which you can create a new user authentication key.
7 SAVE/LOAD button
Press this button to open the SAVE/LOAD window, in which you can save or load user authentication keys and console files.
SYSTEM SETUP field
This field enables you to make various settings that globally apply to the QL series console.
8 +48V ACTIVE button
Switches the console’s +48V ACTIVE phantom power on or off. When this button is off,
+48V phantom power for all the head amps turns off.
NOTE
If this button is off, phantom power will not be supplied even if the +48V button of each channel is on.
9 WORD CLOCK/SLOT button
Press this button to open the WORD CLOCK/SLOT window, in which you can make word clock settings and various settings for each slot.
0 CASCADE button
Press this button to open the CASCADE window, in which you can make patch settings for cascade connections.
A
OUTPUT PORT button
Press this button to open the OUTPUT PORT window, in which you can make output port settings.
B MIDI/GPI button
Press this button to open the MIDI/GPI window, in which you can make MIDI and GPIrelated settings.
C DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window. This window enables you to make various audio network settings (console ID setting; SECONDARY PORT functionality setting; audio bit rate; latency setting; and selections for devices controlled via the I/O
DEVICE screen).
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
BUS SETUP field
This field enables you to make bus-related settings.
D BUS SETUP button
Press this button to open the BUS SETUP window, in which you can make MIX bus/
MATRIX bus-related settings.
E SURROUND SETUP button
Press this button to call up the SURROUND SETUP screen. In this screen, you can switch the bus settings from Stereo mode to Surround mode. If set to Stereo mode, the bus settings for MIX1-6 will be grayed out. If you press the 5.1 SURROUND button to switch to Surround mode, you can then set the bus settings for MIX1-6.
For Surround mode
Assign channels to MIX 1 - 6 for surround output. You can press the APPLY button to open the CONFIRMATION dialog box. Press the OK button to set the bus to Surround mode.
NOTE
• When you switch from Stereo mode to Surround mode, the signals for MIX1/2, 3/4, and 5/6 change to MONO x2.
• When you switch from Surround mode to Stereo mode, the signals for MIX1/2, 3/4, and 5/6 remain as MONO x2.
• When you switch from Stereo mode to Surround mode, the STEREO and MONO(C) inserts are turned off.
For Stereo mode
210
V5.8 Reference Manual
If you set Surround mode, the BUS SETUP screen appears as shown below.
DATE/TIME button
Press this button to open the DATE/TIME window, in which you can set the date and time.
NETWORK button
Press this button to open the NETWORK window, in which you can set the network address.
Indicator field
This field displays various information about the console.
F BATTERY indicator
Indicates the status of the internal battery.
NOTE
The LOW or NO indication will appear if the battery runs down. In this case, immediately contact your Yamaha dealer or a Yamaha service center listed at the end of the operating manual
(separate document) to have the backup battery replaced.
G POWER SUPPLY indicator
Indicates the currently-running power supply.
• INT .........................Internal
H Version indicator
Indicates the version number of the CPU and DANTE module.
CONSOLE LOCK button
This button executes the Console Lock function. If the console password has been set, pressing this button will open the AUTHORIZATION window. Enter the correct password to execute Console Lock.
If the console password has not been set, pressing this button will execute Console Lock immediately.
CONTRAST/BRIGHTNESS field
This field enables you to set the LCD brightness and contrast.
I BANK A/BANK B buttons
Select a bank to which you want to save the brightness and contrast settings. You can save two different settings in bank A and B, and switch between them if desired.
J
CONTRAST NAME knob
Adjusts the contrast of the channel name display.
K BRIGHTNESS NAME knob
Adjusts the brightness of the channel name display.
BRIGHTNESS CH COLOR knob
Adjusts the brightness balance of the channel color and the channel name display.
BRIGHTNESS SCREEN knob
Adjusts the brightness of the display.
BRIGHTNESS PANEL knob
Adjusts the brightness of the panel LEDs.
BRIGHTNESS LAMP knob
Adjusts the brightness of the lamp connected to the LAMP connector.
Setup
211
V5.8 Reference Manual
User settings
User Level settings allow you to restrict the parameters that can be operated by each user, or to change the settings of USER DEFINED keys and preference settings for each user.
Settings for each user can be stored as a “user authentication key” inside the console or together on a USB flash drive, allowing users to be switched easily. This can be convenient in the following situations.
• Unintended or mistaken operation can be prevented.
• The range of functionality operable by an outside engineer (guest engineer) can be limited.
• In situations in which multiple operators alternate with each other, output settings etc. can be locked to prevent unintended operations.
• Preferences of each operator can easily be switched.
User types and user authentication keys
There are three types of user, as follows. To operate the QL series console, you must log-in as a user.
• Administrator .......... The administrator of the QL console can use all of its functionality. Only one set of Administrator settings is internally maintained in the console. The Administrator can create user authentication keys for other users. Even if the console was locked by another user, the administrator can use the administrator password to unlock it.
• Guest ............A Guest can use only the range of functionality permitted by the
Administrator. Only one set of Guest settings is maintained inside the console.
• User ..............A User can use only the range of functionality permitted by the
Administrator. User settings are saved internally or on a USB flash drive as user authentication keys. Multiple sets of user settings (up to ten in internal memory) can be saved, each with the desired user name.
A User who has Power User privileges can create or edit user authentication keys with a specified user level.
When a user logs in, the user settings for that user are applied. User settings include the following information.
• Password (except for Guest)
• User Level settings (except for Administrator)
• Preferences
• USER DEFINED keys
• USER DEFINED knobs
• CUSTOM FADER BANK
• MAIN fader
Setup
Privileges for each user are as follows.
Logged-in user
Administrator
User
Power user
Normal user
(User without
Power User privileges)
Editing user setup data, such as USER
DEFINED keys and
Preferences
Editing User Level settings
Available
(Can edit the settings for
Administrator and for Guest.)
Available
(Cannot edit the user level, since the administrator can always perform all operations. Can edit the settings for
Guest.)
Password setting
Editing comments
Available —
User authentication key
Create new
Available
Overwrite
-save
—
Available Available Available Available Available Available
Available
N/A
(Viewing only)
Available Available —
Available
(Excluding
User Level settings)
Guest Available
N/A
(Viewing only)
— Available — —
212
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setting the Administrator password
With the factory settings, the Administrator password is not set, meaning that anyone can log in with Administrator privileges and perform all operations. If you want to restrict the operations of other users, you must specify an Administrator password.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the PASSWORD CHANGE button.
3.
In the keyboard window, enter the password in the NEW PASSWORD field, then enter the same password in the RE-ENTER PASSWORD field for verification, and finally press the OK button.
Setup
STEP
1.
To create a user authentication key on a USB flash drive, connect a USB flash drive to the USB connector.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3.
In the SETUP screen, press the CREATE USER KEY button.
4.
In the CREATE USER KEY window, when you have specified the user name, comment, password, power user privileges on/off, and user rights, press the CREATE button.
5.
If you want to create a user authentication key in the console’s internal memory, press a button in the CREATE TO INTERNAL STORAGE field in the CREATE KEY window. If you want to create a user authentication key on your USB flash drive, press the button in the CREATE TO USB STORAGE field.
6.
Press the CREATE TO button.
7.
Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box.
SETUP screen Keyboard window
NOTE
• The password can be up to eight characters. If the two passwords that were entered match, the
Administrator password will be set.
• For details on entering a password, refer to “Assigning a name” in the separate Owner’s Manual.
Creating a user authentication key
You can create a user authentication key and save it on a USB flash drive or in the console’s internal memory. A user authentication key can be created only by an Administrator or Power
User. The user level is specified when the authentication key is created, but USER SETUP settings other than the user level (such as preferences and the USER DEFINED keys) will be carried over from the user who is currently logged-in.
NOTE
• You can store ten keys in the console’s internal memory.
• The file name of the user authentication key will be the current user name, and it will be created and saved in the root directory.
SETUP screen
CREATE KEY window
213
CREATE USER KEY window
V5.8 Reference Manual
CREATE USER KEY window
2
1
5
3 4
Logging-in
To operate the QL series console, you must log in as the Administrator, Guest, or a User.
User settings for the Administrator and Guest are saved in the console itself. However, to log in as a User you must either select a key that is saved in the console itself, or connect the
USB flash drive in which a user authentication key has been saved. If you use a user authentication key on a USB flash drive, you will continue as the logged-in user even if you remove the USB flash drive after logging-in.
NOTE
If the power is turned off and then on again, the console will generally start up in the log-in state in which the power was turned off. If a user password has been assigned, you will need to enter the password. However if you cancel the input, you will be forcibly logged-in as Guest.
Setup
Logging-in as Administrator
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the CURRENT USER button.
3.
In the LOGIN window, press the ADMINISTRATOR button.
4.
Enter the password and press the OK button.
1
USER NAME
Displays the user name. Press this area to access a keyboard window, in which you can enter a user name of up to eight characters.
2 COMMENT
Displays a comment about the user. Press this area to access a keyboard window, in which you can enter a comment of up to 32 characters.
3 PASSWORD
Enables you to specify a password. Press this area to access a keyboard window, in which you can enter a password of up to eight characters.
4
POWER USER
Specifies whether Power User privileges will be granted to this user.
5 ACCESS PERMISSION
These settings specify the range of operations that the user can perform. For details on
each item, refer to page 217 .
NOTE
In the case of the QL1, faders that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
SETUP screen LOGIN window
NOTE
• If no Administrator password has been set, you will simply be logged-in in step 3 when you press the LOGIN button. If a password has been set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password.
• If the password was incorrect, a message of “Wrong Password!” will appear near the bottom of the screen.
214
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
Logging-in as Guest
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the CURRENT USER button.
3.
In the LOGIN window, press the GUEST button, and then press the LOGIN button.
SETUP screen LOGIN window
Logging-in as a User
To log-in as a User, you will use a user authentication key saved in the console or on a USB flash drive. If using a USB flash drive, you may also log-in using a user authentication key created on a different QL series console.
With a user authentication key stored in the console
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the CURRENT USER button.
3.
In the LOAD FROM INTERNAL STORAGE field of the LOGIN window, choose the user authentication key with which you want to log in, and press the LOGIN button.
4.
Enter the password and press the OK button.
SETUP screen LOGIN window
NOTE
• If no password has been set, you will simply be logged-in in step 3 when you press the LOGIN button.
• If the password was incorrect, a message of “Wrong Password!” will appear near the bottom of the screen.
With a user authentication key stored in a USB flash drive
STEP
1.
Connect the USB flash drive to the USB connector.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3.
In the SETUP screen, press the CURRENT USER button.
4.
In the LOAD FROM USB STORAGE field of the LOGIN window, press the (LOAD .CLU
FILE) button.
5.
In the SAVE/LOAD window, choose the user authentication key with which you want to log in.
6.
Press the LOAD button.
7.
Enter the password and press the OK button.
215
LOGIN window SAVE/LOAD window
V5.8 Reference Manual
NOTE
• If no password has been set, you will simply be logged-in in step 6 when you press the LOAD button.
• If the password was incorrect, a message of “Wrong Password!” will appear near the bottom of the screen.
• If you have selected a user authentication key that was created on a different QL series console, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the Administrator password of the QL series console that you will be using. (If the Administrator passwords are identical, this window will not appear.) When you enter the correct Administrator password, another keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password for the selected user. If you re-save the user authentication key, you will not be asked for the Administrator password the next time. Refer to
“ Editing a user authentication key
” on
.
Changing the password
Follow the steps below to change the password of the logged-in user. The Guest account does not have a password.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the PASSWORD CHANGE button.
3.
In the keyboard window, enter the current password and press the OK button.
4.
Enter the new password in the NEW PASSWORD field, then enter the same password in the RE-ENTER PASSWORD field for verification, and finally press the OK button.
5.
Refer to “ Editing a user authentication key ” on page 216 to overwrite the user
authentication key.
NOTE
After you change the password, if you log out from the console without saving the user authentication key, the changed password will be discarded.
Editing a user authentication key
If you are logged-in as a user, you can edit your preference settings, USER DEFINED keys,
USER DEFINED knobs, custom fader banks, main fader, comments, and password, and save
(overwrite) them onto your user authentication key. If you are logged-in as a Power User, you can also change the user level.
Setup
STEP
1.
Log in as a user, and edit the Preference settings (
), USER DEFINED keys
( page 221 ), USER DEFINED knobs (
page 227 ), and CUSTOM FADER BANK
2.
Close the USER SETUP window.
3.
In the SETUP screen, press the SAVE KEY button.
4.
In the SAVE KEY window, choose the save-destination button, and then press the
SAVE TO button.
5.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm that you want to overwrite that user authentication key; press the OK button.
SETUP screen SAVE KEY window
NOTE
• If you are logged-in as a Power User, you can also change the user level.
• If you loaded a user authentication key from a USB flash drive, press the SAVE KEY button before removing the USB flash drive. If you do remove the USB flash drive before pressing this button, load the user authentication key again.
216
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
Changing the user level
You can view or change the user level.
• Administrator ................The Administrator does not have a user level setting, but can change the user level setting of the Guest account.
• Guest .............................The Guest can view the user level setting of the Guest account, but cannot change it.
• Normal user ..................A normal user can view the user level setting of his or her
User account, but cannot change it.
• Power User ....................A power user can view and change his or her User account.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.
3.
In the USER SETUP window, press the USER LEVEL tab. (If you are logged-in as the
Administrator, press the FOR GUEST button to switch to the USER LEVEL for Guest page.)
4.
Specify the user level by pressing the button for each item that will be permitted.
5.
When you have finished making settings, close the window and press the SETUP button in the Function Access Area.
SETUP screen USER SETUP window
USER SETUP window (USER LEVEL page)
8
1 2
217
3
4
6
7
5
1 CH OPERATION
Here you can specify (for each channel) the operations that will be permitted for input channels, output channels, and DCA groups. The settings will apply to the currentlyselected channel.
Settings for currently-selected channels will be displayed below the CH OPERATION section. Use the panel [SEL] keys or the Selected Channel field in the Function Access
Area to select the channel for which you want to make settings. The type of buttons shown will depend on the selected channel or group.
• INPUT channel ................... [HA], [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON]
• MIX/MATRIX channel ......... [WITH SEND], [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON]
• STEREO/MONO channel
...................................... [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON]
• DCA group ......................... [DCA MAIN], [DCA GROUP ASSIGN]
• HA ....................................... Restricts operation of the HA (Head Amp) patched to that channel.
• PROCESSING .................... Restricts operation of all signal processing parameters for that channel (excluding the fader, channel on/off, and send level).
• FADER/ON .......................... Restricts operation of that channel’s fader, channel on/ off, and send level.
V5.8 Reference Manual
• WITH SEND ........................ Restricts operation of that channel’s send parameters.
(From MIX, From MATRIX)
• DCA MAIN .......................... Restricts operation of that channel’s DCA group fader,
ON/OFF, and ICON/COLOR/NAME.
• DCA GROUP ASSIGN ........ Restricts changes of assignment to that DCA group.
• SET BY SEL ....................... If this button is on, you can press the panel [SEL] key of a channel to enable or disable the above-mentioned operating restrictions for that channel.
2 CURRENT SCENE
Specifies the operations that can be performed on the current scene memory.
• INPUT PATCH/INPUT NAME
..................... Restricts operations for input channel patching and names.
• OUTPUT PATCH/OUTPUT NAME
..................... Restricts operations for output channel patching and names.
• BUS SETUP ........................ Restricts operations for bus setup.
• GEQ RACK/EFFECT RACK/PREMIUM RACK
..................... Restricts operations for the racks. Press this area to open the RACK USER LEVEL window, in which you can set this restriction.
However, there will be no restriction on operating the
MIDI CLK button displayed for delay-type and modulation-type effects, or the PLAY/REC button displayed for the FREEZE effect.
• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN/MUTE GROUP CONTROL
..................... Restricts operations for mute group assignment and mute group control.
NOTE
In the case of the QL1, faders that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
3
SCENE LIST
Specifies the operations that can be performed on scene memories.
• STORE/SORT operations
• RECALL operations
4
LIBRARY LIST
Specifies the operations that can be performed on libraries.
• STORE/CLEAR operations
• RECALL operations
Setup
5 FILE LOAD
Specifies the settings that will be applied when a file is loaded from a USB flash drive.
The user authentication key contains settings such as the user level, preferences, and the
USER DEFINED key settings (USER SETUP settings). Other data is saved in an “ALL” file.
The “ALL” file also includes the USER SETUP settings of the Administrator and the Guest.
• USER SETUP (Preference and USER DEFINED keys settings)
• SYSTEM SETUP/MONITOR SETUP
• CURRENT SCENE
• SCENE LIST
• LIBRARY LIST
6 MONITOR SETUP
Specifies the monitor setup operations that can be performed.
• OSCILLATOR
• TALKBACK
• SOLO
7 SYSTEM SETUP
Specifies the system setup operations that can be performed.
• MIXER SETUP
• OUTPUT PORT
• MIDI/GPI
• DANTE SETUP
NOTE
• The content that is restricted with the DANTE SETUP button is as shown below.
• Changing the CONSOLE ID
• Changing the SECONDARY PORT setting
• Changing control of DANTE PATCH changes (THIS CONSOLE or DANTE
CONTROLLER)
• Changing BIT DEPTH
• Changing LATENCY
• Changing DEVICE MOUNT
• Changing REMOTE HA ASSIGN
• Changing the Dante Input Patch
• Changing the Dante Output Patch
• Changing the Dante Input Patch Library (Changing Store, Recall, Clear, Library Name)
• Changing the PREFER R ED LEADER
• If an operation is restricted, the message “This operation is not allowed.” is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
• With the factory settings, this is turned off (no restrictions).
8 SET ALL/CLEAR ALL button
Permits/clears all items.
218
V5.8 Reference Manual
Preferences
Follow the steps below to make various settings for the QL console operating environment, such as how windows appear, and whether [SEL] key on/off operations will be linked. These settings are changed for the user who is logged-in, but if you are logged-in as the
Administrator, you will also be able to change the Guest settings.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.
3.
In the USER SETUP window, press the PREFERENCE tab.
4.
Use the buttons on screen to make Preference settings.
5.
When you have finished making settings, close the window and press the SETUP button in the Function Access Area.
NOTE
If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access the PREFERENCE for Guest page and make preference settings for the Guest account.
USER SETUP window (PREFERENCE page)
1
2
3
4
5
219
Setup
1 STORE/RECALL field
Enables you to turn on or off options related to scene store/recall operations.
• STORE CONFIRMATION
• RECALL CONFIRMATION
If these ON buttons are lit, a confirmation message will appear when you perform a
Store or Recall operation respectively.
2 PATCH field
Enables you to turn on or off options related to patch operations.
• PATCH CONFIRMATION
If this ON button is lit, a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input patch or output patch.
• STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION
If this ON button is lit, a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input or output patch item that is already patched to a port.
3 LOCALE SETUP field
In the SAVE/LOAD screen or RECORDER screen, select a language to be displayed.
JA: Japanese, EN: English, DE: German, FR: French, ES: Spanish
(This does not affect the Help language.)
4 ERROR MESSAGE field
Specifies whether error messages will be displayed.
• DIGITAL I/O ERROR
If this is on, an error message will appear when a digital audio I/O error occurs.
• MIDI I/O ERROR
If this is on, an error message will appear when a MIDI transmit/receive error occurs.
• DANTE ALERT
If this is on, an alert message will appear at the bottom of the LCD when the Dante network is not connecting at gigabit speeds.
If this alert message is displayed, check the following items:
• Switch settings
• Is the console connected to a switch that does not function at a speed of 1000Mbps?
• Are you using a cable that does not support 1000BASE-T?
5 PANEL OPERATION field
Enables you to make settings for options related to panel operation.
• AUTO CHANNEL SELECT
Specifies whether the corresponding channel will be selected when you operate the
[ON] key or fader for the channel. You can set this parameter separately for INPUT (input channels) and OUTPUT (output channels).
• [CUE]
[SEL] LINK
Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with cue operations. If the LINK button is on, channels for which cue operations were performed will be selected.
V5.8 Reference Manual
• [FADER BANK]
[SEL] LINK
Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with fader bank selection. You can set this parameter separately for INPUT (input channels), OUTPUT (output channels), and
CUSTOM (Custom fader bank).
If the LINK button is on, and you select the corresponding fader bank, the channel in that bank that was selected most recently will be selected, and its [SEL] key will light.
• [SEND SEL]
[CUE] LINK
In SENDS ON FADER mode, set whether SEND destination switching and CUE switching are synchronized. When this is set to off, you can continue to cue a specific channel even if the SEND destination is switched.
• ON KEYS BEHAVIOR DURING MUTE
Sets the operation when pressing the [ON] key during MUTE.
In OVERRIDE mode, when pressing the [ON] key during MUTE, the MUTE is temporarily canceled and the sound comes out. In CH OFF mode, pressing the [ON] key switches the channel on/off during MUTE.
• IDENTIFY I/O DEVICE PORT BY [SEL]
Specifies whether to enable a function that allows you to identify the I/O device port connected to a channel by pressing the [SEL] key for that channel.
If this ON button is lit, pressing a [SEL] key on the panel will cause the signal indicator to flash for the port of the I/O device that is assigned to the corresponding channel by the INPUT PATCH/OUTPUT PATCH settings.
• POPUP APPEARS WHEN KNOB(S) PRESSED
Specifies whether pressing a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section of the panel while the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is displayed will cause a window (1ch) to appear.
If the ON button is lit, a window (1ch) will open (or close) whenever you press a knob.
NOTE
If you press the PAN knob, a window (8ch) will open.
• GAIN KNOB FUNCTION
Specifies what will happen when you operate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. When
ANALOG GAIN button is lit, you can adjust analog gain on the head amp. When
DIGITAL GAIN button is lit, you can adjust digital gain on the console.
• SCENE UP/DOWN
Specifies what the USER DEFINED key assigned to INC or DEC will do when pressed in the SCENE windows.
When the SCENE +1/–1 button is lit, pressing the USER DEFINED key assigned to INC
RECALL or DEC RECALL will increment or decrement the scene number.
When the LIST UP/DOWN button is lit, pressing the USER DEFINED key assigned to INC
RECALL or DEC RECALL will scroll the list upward or downward.
• LIST ORDER
Specifies the order in which scene memories and library items will appear on the list.
When the NORMAL button is lit, the list appears in ascending numerical order. When the REVERSE button is lit, the list appears in descending numerical order.
220
Setup
• NAME DISPLAY
Specifies the content of the name display in the Channel Strip section.
When the NAME ONLY button is lit, the channel name and the channel number appear.
When the GR METER button is lit, GR METER information and fader level are also displayed.
NOTE
• You can now view the gain reduction meter for DYNAMICS 1 and 2, as well as other information, on the channel name display.
• If a channel is off during SENDS ON FADER mode, the channel name display will be highlighted.
• The GR METER simply lets you confirm the changes in gain reduction.
GR METER display
Highlighted display
- The channel is off in SENDS ON FADER mode.
- The channel is assigned to a DCA group, and that DCA [ON] key is off.
- The channel is assigned to a mute group, and that mute group control is on.
V5.8 Reference Manual
USER DEFINED keys
This section explains how to assign the desired functions to the USER DEFINED keys in the
USER DEFINED KEYS section on the top panel, and to press these keys to execute the defined function.
If you are logged-in as a user, you can make USER DEFINED key settings for the user. If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also make the USER DEFINED key settings for the Guest account.
NOTE
For details on the assignable functions and their parameters, refer to “
Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED keys
” on
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.
3.
In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab.
4.
Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign a function.
5.
In the FUNCTION field of the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window, select the function you want to assign.
6.
If the selected function has parameters, press the PARAMETER 1 or 2 field to move the frame, then select parameters 1 and 2 in the same way.
7.
Press the OK button to close the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window.
8.
To execute an assigned function, press the corresponding USER DEFINED [1]–[12] key on the panel.
USER SETUP window
(USER DEFINED KEYS page)
USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window
NOTE
• If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access the USER DEFINED KEYS for Guest page and make USER DEFINED key settings for the Guest account.
Setup
• The twelve buttons in the USER DEFINED KEYS page correspond to USER DEFINED keys [1]–
[12] on the top panel. The name of the function or parameter assigned to each key appears to the right of the corresponding button. If nothing is assigned to the key, an indication of “---” will appear next to the button.
• The list shown in the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window is the same for all models of the QL series.
For the QL1, the display will indicate “Cannot Assign!” if you specify a parameter that does not exist on that model.
• If there are no parameters for the registered USER DEFINED key, nothing will occur when the key is operated.
221
Using the Alternate function
If you assign the Alternate function (ALTERNATE FUNCTION) to a USER DEFINED key, you will be able to switch parameters on or off by operating the knobs in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section while pressing and holding down the USER DEFINED key.
The console enters Alternate mode when you press and hold down the USER DEFINED key to which the Alternate function has been assigned (the key will light).
The Alternate function features two options: LATCH and UNLATCH.
• UNLATCH ..............Alternate mode is turned on only while you are pressing and holding down the USER DEFINED key.
• LATCH ...................Each press of the USER DEFINED key will turn Alternate mode on or off. You do not need to hold down the key.
NOTE
• If you select LATCH for the Alternate function, the console disables the Alternate function when you switch the display between the OVERVIEW screen and the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, or when you open a window.
• In Alternate mode, “ALT” will be displayed in the user name field of the Function Access Area.
In Alternate mode, the following knobs change their behavior.
• [GAIN] knob
Rotate the knob to adjust the digital gain value. If DIGITAL GAIN has been selected for
HA KNOB FUNCTION on the PREFERENCE page in the USER SETUP window, rotate this knob to adjust the analog gain value of the head amp.
• [HPF] knob
Press this knob to switch the high-pass filter on or off.
• [DYNAMICS 1] knob
Press this knob to switch DYNAMICS 1 on or off.
• [DYNAMICS 2] knob
Press this knob to switch DYNAMICS 2 on or off.
• [CUE] key
Each time this key is pressed, the channel’s CUE SETTING switches as follows: A B
A+B.
NOTE
In Alternate mode, all knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section other than those knobs mentioned above will be disabled.
V5.8 Reference Manual
Switching banks for USER DEFINED key settings
You can register the USER DEFINED key settings (12 keys for QL series consoles) to a maximum of four banks.
Use the four BANK SELECT buttons on the left to select a bank.
The selected bank name is displayed in the field in the bottom right side of the Function
Access Area.
You can press the CLEAR ALL button on the top right side to clear the content of the selected bank.
Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED keys
PARAMETER 2 FUNCTION
NO ASSIGN —
PARAMETER 1
LATCH
ALTERNATE
FUNCTION
UNLATCH
AUTOMIXER
— group a OVERRIDE ON — group a PRESET ON — group b OVERRIDE ON — group b PRESET ON — group c OVERRIDE ON — group c PRESET ON
BRIGHTNESS BANK CHANGE
CH ON
CH SELECT
SPECIFIC CH
INC
DEC
SPECIFIC CH
OUTPUT
CUE
CLEAR CUE
SPECIFIC CH
CUE MODE
CUE INTERRUPTION
FADER CUE RELEASE
—
B
—
—
—
—
*4)
—
A
B
*1)
—
A+B
*2)
A
—
Explanation
No assignment.
Toggle ALTERNATE FUNCTION each time it is pressed. It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
Switch to ALTERNATE FUNCTION only while pressed. It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
Apply a fade-in to the channels in group a where the override button is on, until the level drops to
0 dB (the unity gain). Mute all channels with the button turned off.
Switch the channels in group a to the mode indicated by the mode button (man/auto/mute) next to the lit preset indicator.
Apply a fade-in to the channels in group b where the override button is on, until the level drops to 0 dB (the unity gain). Mute all channels with the button turned off.
Switch the channels in group b to the mode indicated by the mode button (man/auto/mute) next to the lit preset indicator.
Apply a fade-in to the channels in group c where the override button is on, until the level drops to
0 dB (the unity gain). Mute all channels with the button turned off.
Switch the channels in group c to the mode indicated by the mode button (man/auto/mute) next to the lit preset indicator.
Toggle between the brightness settings stored in
A and B.
Switch the CH ON/OFF.
Increment or decrement the selected channel number.
Select a channel from list 1).
Switch CUE on/off.
This clears the CUE for CUE A.
This clears the CUE for CUE B.
This clears the CUE for CUE A and CUE B.
CUE the channel selected from list 2).
Switches the CUE MODE for CUE A. In Surround mode, it toggles between MIX, LAST, and 5.1
SOLO with each press. When set to MIX, the lamp is off. When set to LAST, the lamp is on.
When set to 5.1 SOLO, the lamp flashes.
Switches the CUE MODE for CUE B.
Switches the CUE INTERRUPTION function on or off
Switches the FADER CUE RELEASE function on or off.
Setup
222
V5.8 Reference Manual
FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2
INPUT CUE POINT
A
B
DCA CUE POINT
A
B
A
CUE
OUTPUT CUE POINT
B
A
B
CUE SETTING
A+B
DANTE
INPUT
PATCH LIB
EDITOR
CONTROL
DIRECT RECALL LIBRARY #000-#010
MAIN
SENDS ON FADER
OVERVIEW
CUSTOM FADER BANK
SELECTED CHANNEL
—
—
CH 1-16 {QL5/QL1}
CH17-32 {QL5/QL1}
CH33-48 {QL5}
CH49-64 {QL5}
ST IN
MIX1-16
MATRIX
STEREO/MONO
DCA
B1 1-16
B1 17-32
B2 1-16
B2 17-32
B3 1-16
B3 17-32
B4 1-16
B4 17-32
—
Explanation
Selects the cue point for the input channel for
CUE A or CUE B. It toggles between PFL
(immediately before fader), AFL (immediately after fader), and POST PAN (immediately after
PAN) with each press.
Selects the cue point for DCA for CUE A or CUE
B. It toggles between PRE PAN (immediately before PAN) and POST PAN (immediately after
PAN) with each press.
Selects the cue point for the output channel for
CUE A or CUE B. It toggles between PFL (before fader) and AFL (immediately after fader) with each press.
For CUE A or CUE B, press the [CUE] key while holding this key to switch the CUE SETTING for the selected channel to A or B, and to turn on the CUE.
Press the [CUE] key while holding this key to switch the CUE SETTING for the selected channel to A and B, and to turn on the CUE.
Directly recalls the desired number of the
DANTE INPUT PATCH library. However, it does not function during a scene recall.
Access the corresponding screen of QL Editor.
FUNCTION
EDITOR
CONTROL
PARAMETER 1
LIBRARY
PREMIUM RACK
LIBRARY
PATCH EDITOR
RACK EDITOR
METER
GROUP/LINK
SCENE
PARAMETER 2
DYNAMICS LIBRARY
INPUT EQ LIBRARY
OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY
EFFECT LIBRARY
GEQ LIBRARY
INPUT CH LIBRARY
OUTPUT CH LIBRARY
PEQ LIBRARY
Portico5033 LIBRARY
Portico5043 LIBRARY
Portico5045 LIBRARY
U76 LIBRARY
Opt-2A LIBRARY
EQ-1A LIBRARY
DynamicEQ LIBRARY
Buss Comp 369 LIBRARY
MBC4 LIBRARY
INPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
INPUT INSERT PATCH
OUTPUT INSERT PATCH
DIRECT OUT PATCH
PATCH LIST
RACK
GEQ 1–8
EFFECT 1–8
PREMIUM 1A
PREMIUM 1B
:
PREMIUM 8A
PREMIUM 8B
INPUT METER
OUTPUT METER
DCA GROUP
MUTE GROUP
CHANNEL LINK
OUTPUT CHANNEL LINK
SCENE MEMORY
RECALL SAFE
FADE TIME
FOCUS RECALL
Explanation
Access the corresponding screen of QL Editor.
Setup
223
V5.8 Reference Manual
FUNCTION
EFFECT
BYPASS
PARAMETER 1
EFFECT RACK 1–8
PREMIUM RACK 1A
PREMIUM RACK 1B
:
PREMIUM RACK 8A
PREMIUM RACK 8B
FADER BANK
SNAPSHOT
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PARAMETER 2
—
Explanation
GAIN KNOB
FUNCTION
LATCH
UNLATCH
—
—
GEQ FREQ
BANK
GPI OUT
INC
DEC
LATCH
UNLATCH
HELP
HOME
—
SELECTED CH VIEW
OVERVIEW
TOGGLE
PEAK HOLD ON
METER
SURROUND METER
MIDI
—
PORT1–PORT5
—
—
—
—
—
—
PROGRAM CHANGE
CONTROL CHANGE
NOTE ON
PGM 1–128
CC 1–31, 33–95,
102–119
NOTE ON C-2 (0)
:
NOTE ON G 8 (127)
Takes a snapshot of the bank settings (hold down the key for two seconds or longer), or displays the last bank for which a snapshot was taken (press and release the key within two seconds).
Toggle the function of the GAIN knob (ANALOG
GAIN/DIGITAL GAIN). Lit when DIGITAL GAIN is selected. It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
Assign the function of the GAIN knob (ANALOG
GAIN/DIGITAL) to DIGITAL GAIN only while held down.
* However if the GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is switched to DIGITAL GAIN in the PREFERENCE screen etc., this will remain lit until the next time it is pressed. It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
Adds or removes a frequency bank in the GEQ
EDIT screen.
Toggle the GPI OUT function. Lit when active.
Make GPI OUT active only while pressed.
Opens and closes the HELP window. Operating the controllers on the panel (excluding faders), or controllers on the screen, while holding down this key will display the related information.
Displays the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
Displays the OVERVIEW screen.
Each press of the key will alternately display the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen and the
OVERVIEW screen.
Turns the meter’s peak hold function on/off. Lit when on.
For Surround mode, toggle between the content to be shown in meters displayed in the
Function Access Area. The lamp is off for MIX 1-
6, and on for SURROUND MONITOR.
Transmit the corresponding MIDI message.
For NOTE ON, it goes OFF when the bank is switched.
FUNCTION PARAMETER 1
OUTPUT —
PARAMETER 2
SELECTED CH ASSIGN —
Explanation
Switch the monitor output on/off.
While holding down this key, press the SEL key of a MIX or MATRIX channel to switch the assignment on/off. During this time, the [SEL]
LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.
The assignment setting made while holding down this key will be stored. Pressing the key again will recall the stored setting. Settings can be stored in multiple keys to facilitate rapid assignment switching. It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
Enable the dimmer and attenuate the monitor signal.
Setup
MONITOR
DIMMER ON
SOURCE SELECT
SURROUND SOURCE
SELECT
SURROUND
DOWNMIX
—
STEREO L/R
MONO (C)
LCR
PB OUT
*5)
DEFINE
*6)
STEREO, MONO
SOLO
SURROUND SPEAKER
L, R, C, Ls, Rs, LFE
MUTE
GROUP
CONTROL
MUTE GROUP 1
:
MUTE GROUP 8
ALL MUTE
—
—
Recall the selected signal to the monitor.
Recall the selected signal to the surround monitor.
When this function is off (the lamp is off), the setting returns to 5.1 monitor.
When this function is on (the lamp is on), the SURROUND MONITOR screen opens.
When this function is off (the lamp is off), the SURROUND MONITOR screen closes.
This functionality is the same as the
SPEAKER MUTE function in the
SURROUND MONITOR screen. When the
SOLO button is on, it functions as a SOLO key.
Switch MUTE GROUP CONTROL on/off.
Turns all MUTE GROUP CONTROL settings on/ off together.
224
V5.8 Reference Manual
FUNCTION
NUENDO
LIVE
OSCILLATOR
PAGE
CHANGE
PARAMETER 1
TRANSPORT
PEAK CLEAR
ADD MARKER
OSCILLATOR ON
SELECTED CH ASSIGN
DIRECT ASSIGN
BOOKMARK
PARAMETER 2
GO TO PROJECT START
GO TO PREV MARKER
REWIND
FAST FORWARD
GO TO NEXT MARKER
GO TO PROJECT END
CYCLE
STOP
START
REC
EASY RECORDING
—
—
—
—
*1)
—
Explanation
Operate the transport functions of Nuendo Live.
Clear the peak indicators of the Nuendo Live screen.
This function executes ADD MARKER of
NUENDO Live.
Switch the OSC on/off.
While holding down this key, press a SEL key of a channel to switch the assignment on/off. During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF. It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
Assign the oscillator to the channel selected from list 1).
Memorize the currently-selected screen (hold down the key for two seconds or longer), or display the last-memorized screen (press and release the key within two seconds). Popup windows can also be memorized. In the case of a rack, the number of that rack is also memorized.
Memorize the above BOOKMARK with the addition of the SEL status.
BOOKMARK with “SEL” —
PREVIOUS PAGE
NEXT PAGE
CLOSE POPUP
—
—
PLAY/PAUSE, STOP,
FF/NEXT,
REW/PREVIOUS, REC
Display the previous/next page.
Close the displayed window.
Recorder transport functions.
RECORDER TRANSPORT
AUTO REC
REC & START
Shortcut function for STOP → REC → PLAY.
Recording will be initiated in a single action. If this is executed during recording, the file being recorded will first be closed, and then recording will continue with a new file.
Start recording immediately without entering record-ready mode.
FUNCTION PARAMETER 1
RECORDER DIRECT PLAY
PARAMETER 2
NO ASSIGN
(TITLE 1)
:
SCENE
INC RECALL
DEC RECALL
DIRECT RECALL
RECALL UNDO
STORE UNDO
INC
DEC
RECALL
STORE
SEND MODE MIX/MATRIX
—
—
SCENE #000–#300
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
SENDS ON
FADER
MIX1–MIX16
MTRX1–MTRX8
MIX ON FADER
MATRIX ON FADER
SENDS ON FADER
NORMAL/WITH CUE
SET BY SEL
+48V
Ø
INSERT ON
DIRECT OUT ON
PRE SEND
TO STEREO
TO MONO
TO LCR
GAIN COMPENSATION
AUTOMIXER AUTO/
MAN
—
SET DEFAULT
VALUE
— —
Setup
Explanation
The specified audio file will be played once from the beginning.
Audio files to be played should be saved in the
SONGS folder inside the YPE folder. Please note that a file cannot be specified if it is saved in the root directory or in any other folder. When you execute playback, the path in the TITLE LIST screen will move to \YPE\SONGS\.
Recall the scene of the next existing number.
Recall the scene of the previous existing number.
Directly recall the scene of the specified number.
Execute RECALL UNDO.
Execute STORE UNDO.
Select the scene of the next existing number.
Select the scene of the previous existing number.
Recall the currently-selected scene.
Store the current settings.
If INPUT or ST IN is selected, switch output bus channels (MIX, MATRIX) to be displayed in the
SEND field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
This function switches between the normal function on/off (NORMAL), and the function with cue on/off (WITH CUE). With the WITH CUE option, cue will be enabled if SENDS ON FADER mode is engaged or if you switch mode during
SENDS ON FADER mode. Also, with the WITH
CUE option, cue for all output channels will be canceled if SENDS ON FADER mode is disengaged.
Hold down this key and press SEL to switch it on/off.
During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if on or dark if off.
If [PRE SEND] is selected, “SEND ON FADER” mode is engaged while you are holding down the [SEL] key.
Press SEL to switch between auto/man if
[AUTOMIXER AUTO/MAN] is selected. It goes
OFF when the bank is switched.
While holding down this key, press SELECTED
CH or the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to reset it to the default value. It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
225
V5.8 Reference Manual
FUNCTION
SET
NOMINAL
VALUE
—
PARAMETER 1
—
SOLO
SURROUND
PAN
SOLO ON
L ON
R ON
C ON
LFE ON
Ls ON
Rs ON
PANNING L
PANNING R
PANNING Front Center
PANNING Ls
PANNING Rs
PANNING Back
PANNING Side L
PANNING Side R
PANNING Center
—
*5)
*5)
PARAMETER 2 Explanation
While holding down this key, press a [SEL] key to set the fader of that channel to nominal level.
You can also push a knob in the SEND field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to set the send level to nominal level.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
Switches solo mode on/off.
In Surround mode, this is used to set hard panning for the channel selected in list 5).
In Surround mode, this is used to set hard panning for the channel selected in list 5).
TALKBACK
PANNING TOGGLE
TALKBACK ON
SELECTED CH ASSIGN
DIRECT ASSIGN
*5)
LATCH
UNLATCH
—
*3)
In Surround mode, this is used to toggle the settings for hard panning for the channel selected in list 5).
With each press, the setting is toggled in the following order: Center L Front Center R
Side R Rs Back, Ls Side L (Center).
Switch TALKBACK on/off.
Turn TALKBACK on while pressed.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
While holding down this key, press a SEL key of an OUTPUT channel to switch the assignment on/off. During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.
The assignment setting made while holding down this key will be stored. Pressing the key again will recall the stored setting. Settings can be stored in multiple keys to facilitate rapid assignment switching.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
The operations performed when this key is pressed are as follows.
- Toggle assignment of channel selected in list 3)
ON and OFF.
At this time, the LED display is as shown below.
- If the channel is assigned, the LED will be on.
Otherwise, the LED will be off.
Setup
FUNCTION
TALKBACK
TAP TEMPO
USER
DEFINED
KEYS
PARAMETER 1
DIRECT ASSIGN WITH
ON
CURRENT PAGE
EFFECT RACK 1-8
BANK SELECT
*3)
—
PARAMETER 2
WITH POPUP
WITHOUT POPUP
BANK A
BANK B
BANK C
BANK D
PREVIOUS BANK
NEXT BANK
Explanation
The operations performed when this key is pressed are as follows.
- Assignments other than for the channel selected in list 3) are removed.
- If a channel is assigned and TALKBACK is ON at the same time, TALKBACK is turned OFF and the channel assignment is removed.
- Otherwise, TALKBACK will be ON and the channel assignment will be ON.
At this time, the LED display is as shown below.
- If the channel is assigned and TALKBACK is ON at the same time, the LED will be on.
- Otherwise, the LED will be off.
Use the tap tempo function in the displayed screen.
Use the tap tempo function for the specified effect. If WITH POPUP is selected, the Tap
Tempo screen is displayed. If WITHOUT POPUP is selected, the Tap Tempo screen is not displayed.
When selected, the lamp for the corresponding key comes on.
When selected, the lamp for the corresponding key comes on.
When selected, the lamp for the corresponding key comes on.
When selected, the lamp for the corresponding key comes on.
Switches to the previous bank. If the current bank is BANK A, it switches to BANK D.
Switches to the next bank. If the current bank is
BANK D, it switches to BANK A.
*1) QL5: CH1-CH64, QL1: CH1-CH32, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R, MIX1-MIX16, MTRX1-MTRX8, ST L, ST R, MONO
*2) QL5: CH1-CH64, QL1: CH1-CH32, ST IN 1-ST IN 8, MIX1-MIX16, MTRX1-MTRX8, STEREO, MONO(C)
*3) MIX1-MIX16, MTRX1-MTRX8, ST L, ST R, MONO
*4) QL5: CH1-CH64, QL1: CH1-CH32, ST IN 1-ST IN 8, MIX1-MIX16, MTRX1-MTRX8, STEREO, MONO(C),
DCA1-DCA16
*5) QL5: INPUT25/26-31/32, QL1: INPUT9/10-15/16
SELECTED CH, QL5: CH1-CH64, QL1: CH1-CH32, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R
*6) MIX1-6, EXT5.1 1, EXT5.1 2, EXT5.1 3, EXT ST 1, EXT ST 2, EXT ST 3, EXT ST 4, MIX1/2, MIX3/4, MIX5/6,
MIX7/8, MIX9/10, MIX11/12, MIX13/14, MIX15/16, MATRIX1/2, MATRIX3/4, MATRIX5/6, MATRIX7/8, STEREO,
MONO, PB OUT
226
V5.8 Reference Manual
USER DEFINED knobs
This section explains how to assign the desired functions to the USER DEFINED knobs in the lower part of the touch screen, and to press these knobs to execute the defined function.
If you are logged-in as a user, you can make USER DEFINED knob settings for the user. If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also make the USER DEFINED knob settings for the Guest account.
NOTE
For details on the assignable functions and their parameters, refer to “
Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED knobs ” on page 228
.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.
3.
In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KNOBS tab.
4.
Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED knob to which you want to assign a function.
5.
In the USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window, make sure that the FUNCTION field is enclosed by a frame, then select the function that you want to assign.
6.
If the selected function has parameters, press the PARAMETER 1 or 2 field to move the frame, then select parameters 1 and 2 in the same way.
7.
Press the OK button to close the USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window.
8.
To execute an assigned function, press the corresponding USER DEFINED [1]-[4] knob in the lower part of the touch screen, then operate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
NOTE
• If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access the SOFTWARE USER DEFINED KNOBS for Guest page and make USER DEFINED knob settings for the Guest account.
• The four buttons in the SOFTWARE USER DEFINED KNOBS page correspond to USER
DEFINED knobs [1]–[4] in the lower part of the touch screen. The name of the function or parameter assigned to each knob appears to the right of the corresponding button. If nothing is assigned to the knob, an indication of “---” will appear next to the button.
• The list shown in the USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window is the same for all models of the QL series.
For the QL1, the display will indicate “Cannot Assign!” if you specify a parameter that does not exist on that model.
• If there are no parameters for the registered USER DEFINED key, nothing will occur when the key is operated.
About TOUCH AND TURN
You can press a desired knob in the touch screen and then use the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob to immediately operate that on-screen knob.
At this time, a pink frame is shown around the knob in the touch screen, indicating that you can operate that knob.
Setup
USER SETUP window
(USER DEFINED KNOBS page)
USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window
227
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
Functions that can be assigned to
USER DEFINED knobs
Function
NO ASSIGN
AUTOMIXER
BRIGHTNESS
CUE
DIRECT OUT LEVEL
DYNAMICS 1
DYNAMICS 2
EFFECT
EQ
PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2
—
WEIGHT
LAMP
PANEL
SCREEN
CH COLOR
NAME
INPUT PFL TRIM
DCA TRIM
OUTPUT PFL TRIM
CUE LEVEL
LEVEL
THRESHOLD
RANGE
RATIO
ATTACK
HOLD
DECAY
RELEASE
OUTGAIN
KNEE
WIDTH
THRESHOLD
RATIO
FREQUENCY
ATTACK
RELEASE
OUTGAIN
KNEE
WIDTH
Displays the EFFECT RACK No. (1-8) for the target operation as well as the name of the mounted EFFECT TYPE or the name of the GEQ/PEQ TYPE *a).
ATT
LOW Q
LOW FREQUENCY
LOW GAIN
B
A
B
B
A
—
A
—
*1)
—
—
—
—
—
*14)
*2)
*4)
*2)
*4)
*2)
*13)
*4)
Displays the names of the 32 parameters for the EFFECT TYPE *b).
Displays “----” if a GEQ/PEQ is mounted.
*2)
228
EQ
EXTERNAL HA
HPF
I/O DEVICE
INPUT DELAY
INPUT GAIN
MONITOR
Function
MIDI CONTROL CHANGE
OSCILLATOR
OUTPUT LEVEL
OUTPUT PORT
PARAMETER 1
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQUENCY
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQUENCY
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQUENCY
HIGH GAIN
GAIN 1–GAIN 8
FREQUENCY
GAIN 1–GAIN 32
DELAY TIME
ANALOG GAIN
DIGITAL GAIN
CTRL 1–CTRL 31
CTRL 33–CTRL 95
CTRL 102–CTRL 119
DIMMER LEVEL
TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL
MONITOR DELAY
MONITOR FADER
LEVEL
FREQUENCY
LEVEL(EVEN)
FREQUENCY(EVEN)
HPF
LPF
WIDTH
INTERVAL
LEVEL
DELAY TIME
GAIN
*2)
*4)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
*6)
—
—
—
—
—
*10)
*4)
*11)
*3)
*12)
PARAMETER 2
V5.8 Reference Manual
PREMIUM RACK
RECORDER
SCENE
Function
TO MIX LEVEL
TO MATRIX LEVEL
TO MIX PAN
TO MATRIX PAN
TO ST/MONO
PARAMETER 1
Displays the PREMIUM RACK No. (1A-
8B) for the corresponding operation, as well as the name of the mounted
PROCESSOR*a).
INPUT GAIN
OUTPUT GAIN
SELECT
MIX1–MIX16
MATRIX1–MATRIX8
MIX1/2–MIX15/16
MATRIX1/2–MATRIX7/8
PAN/BAL
CSR
PARAMETER 2
Displays the names of the 64 parameters for the PROCESSOR *b).
—
—
—
*3)
*7)
*3)
*7)
*5)
*1) SELECTED CH, Automixer ch1-16
*2) SELECTED CH, QL5: CH1-CH64, QL1: CH1-CH32, ST IN 1-ST IN 8, MIX1-MIX16, MTRX1-MTRX8, STEREO,
MONO (C)
*3) SELECTED CH, QL5: CH1-CH64, QL1: CH1-CH32, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R
*4) SELECTED CH, QL5: CH1-CH64, QL1: CH1-CH32, ST IN 1-ST IN 8
*5) SELECTED CH, QL5: CH1-CH64, QL1: CH1-CH32, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R, MIX1-SIX16
*6) MIX1-MIX16, MTRX1-MTRX8, ST L, ST R, MONO
*7) SELECTED CH, QL5: CH1-CH64, QL1: CH1-CH32, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R, MIX1-MIX16, ST L, ST R, MONO (C)
*10) #1-#4
*11) REMOTE HA #1-#8
*12) QL5: DANTE1-64, QL1: DANTE1-32, QL5: OMNI 1-OMNI 16, QL1: OMNI 1-OMNI 8, SLOT1 1-SLOT1 16,
SLOT2 1-SLOT2 16, DIGITAL OUT L, DIGITAL OUT R
*13) SELECTED CH, MIX1-MIX16, MTRX1-MTRX8, STEREO, MONO (C)
*14) SELECTED CH, QL5: CH1-CH64, QL1: CH1-CH32
*a) If not mounted in the RACK, “----” is displayed.
*b) If there are no parameters, “----” is displayed.
Custom fader bank
Groups that organize channels routed to the top-panel faders are called “fader banks.”
There are input and output channel banks, as well as custom fader banks. Custom fader banks enable you to select various combinations of channels, regardless of channel types.
This section explains how to set up a custom fader bank.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.
3.
In the USER SETUP window, press the CUSTOM FADER tab.
4.
Use the Bank Select keys to recall the fader settings to the top panel for the channels you want to add to the custom fader bank.
5.
In the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MAIN FADER page, press the bank select button for the custom fader bank you want to set up.
6.
In the CHANNEL ASSIGN field, press the select button for the fader you want to set up.
7.
Press a [SEL] key on the top panel to assign a channel to the fader number selected in step 6.
8.
To assign channels to other faders, repeat steps 5 through 7.
Setup
USER SETUP window (CUSTOM
FADER BANK/MAIN FADER page)
NOTE
• If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MAIN FADER for Guest page, and make custom fader bank settings for the Guest account.
• You can also press the channel select buttons to assign channels to faders.
229
V5.8 Reference Manual
USER SETUP window
(CUSTOM FADER BANK/MAIN FADER page)
1
Custom fader bank settings for individual scenes
Custom fader bank settings can be stored/recalled for individual scenes. For details, refer to
“ Using the Focus Recall function
” on
.
C u stom fader bank settings
Setup
QL5 QL1
2
Recall Store Recall Store
QL5 console QL1 console
5
3
4
NOTE
• Custom fader bank settings differ between models, and are not compatible. For example, scenes stored by the QL5 cannot be recalled on the QL1.
• In addition, the user level affects storing/recalling of custom fader bank settings. For example, if you are logged-in as a user or Guest, you cannot recall settings stored by the Administrator.
1 Bank select buttons
Enable you to select a custom fader bank to which you want to assign a group of channels.
2
Block indicators
Display the graphics of the top panel block and faders that are the current target for editing.
The graphics vary depending on the console model.
QL5: A (MAIN only), B (16 faders x 2 channels, MAIN)
QL1: A (MAIN only), B (16 faders, MAIN)
For CUSTOM FADER BANK A1-4, only MAIN can be selected.
3 Fader select button
Selects the target fader. Press this button to select it, then press [SEL] keys on the top panel to add the corresponding channels to the selected fader bank.
4 Fader assign select button
Opens the Fader assign select window, in which you can change the channel assigned to the fader.
5
CLEAR ALL button
Clears all the current fader bank assignment. Pressing this button will open a confirmation dialog box. Press OK to clear the assignment. Otherwise, press CANCEL to return to the previous screen without changing the setting.
230
Precautions for when Loading Console Data
Custom fader bank settings are not only included in user settings, but in scene data as well.
The custom fader bank settings that are called up vary depending on the logged-in user, the type of the loaded data, and the version. Please note the following points:
• If you load console data of the ALL type as Administrator, the custom fader bank settings for the saved Administrator are called up.
If you load ALL data as Guest or another user, the custom fader bank settings for the saved current scene are called up.
• If you load ALL data that was saved in CL V1.70 or earlier, since scenes do not include custom fader bank settings, the custom fader bank settings for the current scene when the load was performed are applied to all scenes. Therefore, before loading ALL data, we recommend that you either change users to set the custom fader bank to the desired setting, or that you enable Recall Safe for the custom fader bank.
V5.8 Reference Manual
Console Lock
You can temporarily prohibit console operations in order to prevent unwanted operation. This setting disables operations of the panel, so that controllers cannot be operated by an accidental touch or by an unauthorized third party while the operator is taking a break.
If a password is set for the currently logged-in user, that password will be used for the Console
Lock function. When the Console Lock function is enabled, the CONSOLE LOCK screen will appear and all controllers will become inoperable.
Locking the console
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the CONSOLE LOCK button.
3.
If you are logged-in as a user for whom a password is set, enter the password for the user.
4.
Press the OK button to enable Console Lock function.
Setup
NOTE
• If you have forgotten the password, refer to “
Initializing the unit to factory default settings
” on
.
• The Guest cannot set a password.
• Even while the console is locked, you can operate the console from an external device via MIDI or QL Editor as usual.
SETUP screen
Unlocking the console
STEP
1.
Press the CONSOLE LOCK screen.
2.
If you are logged-in as a user for whom a password is set, enter the password for the user or for the Administrator, then press the OK button.
NOTE
If you are logged-in as a user for whom no password is set, the console will be unlocked when you touch the CONSOLE LOCK screen.
231
V5.8 Reference Manual
Specifying the CONSOLE LOCK screen image
If an image file has been saved on the USB flash drive, you can view that image on the
CONSOLE LOCK screen.
In the SAVE/LOAD window, specify the image file that you want to display, and then load it from the USB flash drive. For details about loading files from the USB flash drive, refer to
“ Loading a file from a USB flash drive
” on
NOTE
Supported image file format is BMP in 800 x 600 pixels and 16/24/32-bit, but they will be converted into 16-bit for display.
Saving and loading setup data to and from a USB flash drive
You can connect a commercially-available USB flash drive to the USB connector located to the right of the display, and save the internal settings and user authentication keys of the QL series console to the USB flash drive or load them from the USB flash drive.
NOTICE
An ACCESS indicator is shown in the Function Access Area while data is being accessed (saved, loaded, or deleted). During this time, do not disconnect the USB port or power-off the QL unit.
Doing so may damage the data in the flash drive.
NOTE
• Operation is guaranteed only for USB flash drives.
• The operation of USB flash drives with capacities of up to 32GB has been verified. (However, this does not necessarily guarantee the operation of all USB flash drives.) The FAT16 and FAT32 formats are supported. A USB flash drive with a capacity of 4GB or larger will be formatted in
FAT32, and a USB flash drive with a capacity of 2GB or smaller will be formatted in FAT16.
Basic operation
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the SAVE/LOAD button.
3.
Save/load/edit the data.
SETUP screen
SAVE/LOAD window
The list will show the files and sub-directories that have been saved.
5 1 2 3 4 6
7
8 9 0 C A B
1 COPY button
Copies a file into a memory buffer (a temporary holding area).
2 PASTE button
Pastes the file that has been copied into a buffer memory.
3 DELETE button
Deletes the selected file or directory.
NOTE
A directory cannot be deleted unless it is empty. The message “Directory Not Empty!” will appear.
Setup
232
V5.8 Reference Manual
4 MAKE DIR button
Creates a new directory.
5 PATH
Indicates the name of the current directory. Press the arrow button to move to the next higher level. If the current directory is the top level, the arrow button is dimmed.
6
VOLUME NAME/FREE SIZE
Indicates the volume name and the amount of free space on the USB flash drive. If the
USB flash drive is write-protected, a protect symbol will appear in the VOLUME NAME field.
7
File list
This area lists the files and sub-directories that are saved on the USB flash drive. The highlighted line indicates the file selected for operations.
The file list contains the following items. When you press an item name, it will turn orange, and the list will be sorted by that item. Each time you press the item name, the sorting order will alternate between ascending and descending order.
• FILE NAME .......... Indicates the file name or directory name, and shows an icon indicating its type.
• COMMENT ........... The comment added to the QL console setting file is displayed here. You can press this area to open a keyboard window, allowing you to enter a comment for the file.
• READ ONLY ........ A lock symbol in this column indicates that the corresponding file is protected. You can press this area to enable or disable the protect setting.
Protected files cannot be overwritten.
• TYPE .................... Indicates the file type.
ALL: File containing QL internal settings
KEY: User authentication key
XML: Help file
BMP: Bitmap image file
MP3: MP3 file
[DIR]: Directory
NOTE
• If the file format version is earlier than V1.70, “old” is displayed in the second line of this field. Data can be loaded even if “old” is displayed.
• If the console version is V2 or later, data from any version can be loaded.
• TIME STAMP ....... Indicates the date and time at which the file was modified most recently.
8 File selection knob
Selects a file on the file list. You can operate this knob using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
Setup
9 SAVE button
Saves all of the QL console internal settings together ( page 233 ).
0 LOAD button
Loads the selected QL setting file ( page 235 ).
A CREATE USER KEY button
Creates a user authentication key ( page 212 ).
B FORMAT button
Initializes the USB flash drive.
If an overcurrent condition occurred at the USB port, this button will become a USB
REMOUNT button. Press this button to remount a USB flash drive ( page 238 ).
C WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button
If this is off, the DANTE SETUP and I/O device settings as well as word clock settings will be omitted when a settings file is loaded.
NOTE
The DANTE SETUP settings SECONDARY PORT and CONSOLE ID will not be changed even if the WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button is on.
Saving the QL console’s internal data on a USB flash drive
All of the QL series console’s internal data can be saved on a USB flash drive as a setting file.
The saved file will have an extension of “.CLF.”
STEP
1.
In the SAVE/LOAD window, press the SAVE button.
2.
In the SAVE SELECT screen, select the data to be saved, the data type, and the save destination.
3.
In the SAVE SELECT screen, press the SAVE button.
4.
Enter a file name and comment.
5.
Press the SAVE button to execute the Save operation.
233
V5.8 Reference Manual
SAVE SELECT screen
1
2 3
4 5 6 7 4
1
TYPE field
Specifies the types of data to be saved. The view of the TYPE field will vary depending on the tab you select.
• ALL tab
This button selects all the items.
• SCENE tab
This button selects scene memories.
• INPUT/OUTPUT tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
IN CH LIB
Button
OUT CH LIB
IN EQ LIB
OUT EQ LIB
DYNA LIB
Input channel library
Output channel library
Input EQ library
Output EQ library
Dynamics library
Data content
234
• EFFECT/GEQ tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
Data content Button
EFFECT LIB
GEQ LIB
8 PEQ LIB
Effect library
GEQ library
8Band PEQ library
• PREMIUM tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
Data content Button
5033 LIB
5043 LIB
5045 LIB
U76 LIB
Opt-2A LIB
EQ-1A LIB
DynaEQ LIB
BussComp LIB
MBC4 LIB
Portico 5033 library
Portico 5043 library
Portico 5045 library
U76 library
Opt-2A library
EQ-1A library
DynamicEQ library
Buss Comp 369 library
MBC4 library
• SETUP tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
Button
MIXER SETUP
OUTPUT PORT
MONITOR
MIDI SETUP
MIDI PGM
MIDI CTL
Dante In Patch
Data content
Mixer setup
Output port
CUE/MONITOR/OSCILLATOR/TALKBACK
MIDI setup
MIDI program changes
MIDI control changes
Dante input patch library
NOTE
When the output port items are saved individually, channel assignments for the port will not be saved. To prevent this, save the scene that contains input/output patching for the channel assignment as well.
2 SOURCE field
Indicates the internal data of the QL series console.
3
DESTINATION field
Indicates the save destination.
4 Data selection knob
This knob selects the data shown in the field.
Setup
V5.8 Reference Manual
5 MULTI SELECT button
Press this button to make a selection containing multiple items of data.
6 SELECT ALL button
Press this button to select all items.
7 CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to clear all selections.
NOTE
• To select a different directory as a save destination, in the SAVE/LOAD window, press a directory icon or press the arrow button in the PATH field.
• If you are going to overwrite a file or save a file with the same name in the same folder, a dialog will ask you to confirm the overwrite.
• You can enter a comment of up to 32 characters.
• You may enter a file name of more than eight characters. However, the drive name, path name, and file name are limited to a total of 256 characters. If you exceed this limit, you may be unable to save the file, depending on the length of the file name. If this error indication appears at the bottom of the screen, shorten the file name and try saving the file again.
Loading a file from a USB flash drive
Follow the steps below to load a QL settings file (extension .CLF) from the USB flash drive into the QL series console.
You can use the same procedure to load the following files as well as settings files.
Extension
.CLF
.CLU
.XML
.TXT
.BMP
Type
ALL
KEY
XML
TEXT
BMP
Contents of file
QL console internal setting file
QL console user authentication key
XML file for displaying Help
Text file for displaying Help
Image file for display in the CONSOLE LOCK screen (256 or more colors, uncompressed bitmap format)
NOTICE
Some data may contain settings that will cause the console to output signals immediately after the data is loaded. Before you load, turn off the power of the equipment connected to the QL series console and/or lower the volume of such equipment so that there will not be a problem even if a signal is output from the QL console.
NOTE
• When the file has finished being loaded, the window that shows the progress of the loading operation and the type of data will close. If you cancel this procedure while it is in progress, data up to the cancellation point will still be loaded.
• Some setting data may not be loaded, depending on the USER LEVEL setting during the load operation.
STEP
1.
To select the file that you want to load, press the name of the desired file in the file list in the SAVE/LOAD window, or rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
2.
If you want the DANTE SETUP and I/O device-related settings saved in the QL settings file (file name extension .CLF) and the word clock settings to be applied to the QL console, press the WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button to turn it on.
3.
In the SAVE/LOAD window, press the LOAD button.
4.
In the LOAD SELECT screen, select the data to load, the data type, and the load destination.
5.
Press the LOAD button to load the selected file.
Setup
235
V5.8 Reference Manual
LOAD SELECT screen
1
2 3
4 5 6 7 4
1
TYPE field
Indicates the type of data to be loaded. The view will vary depending on the tab you select.
NOTE
The console version at the time when the data was saved is displayed on the top right side. If no data has been saved, “NO DATA” will be displayed. If data has been saved but the version cannot be determined, “later than V4.00” will be displayed.
• ALL tab
This button selects all the items.
• SCENE tab
This button selects scene memories.
• INPUT/OUTPUT tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
IN CH LIB
Button
OUT CH LIB
IN EQ LIB
OUT EQ LIB
DYNA LIB
Input channel library
Output channel library
Input EQ library
Output EQ library
Dynamics library
Data content
236
Setup
• EFFECT/GEQ tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
Data content Button
EFFECT LIB
GEQ LIB
8PEQ LIB
Effect library
GEQ library
8Band PEQ library
• PREMIUM tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
Data content Button
5033 LIB
5043 LIB
5045 LIB
U76 LIB
Opt-2A LIB
EQ-1A LIB
DynaEQ LIB
BussComp LIB
MBC4 LIB
Portico 5033 library
Portico 5043 library
Portico 5045 library
U76 library
Opt-2A library
EQ-1A library
DynamicEQ library
Buss Comp 369 library
MBC4 library
• SETUP tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
Button
MIXER SETUP
OUTPUT PORT
MONITOR
MIDI SETUP
MIDI PGM
MIDI CTL
Dante In Patch
Data content
Mixer setup
Output port
CUE/MONITOR/OSCILLATOR/TALKBACK
MIDI setup
MIDI program changes
MIDI control changes
Dante input patch library
NOTE
When the output port items are loaded individually, channel assignments for the port will not be applied. To prevent this, load and then recall the scene that contains input/output patching for the channel assignment.
V5.8 Reference Manual
• ADMIN tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
Type
ADMIN PREF
ADMIN UDEF
ADMIN FADER
GUEST PREF
GUEST UDEF
GUEST FADER
GUEST LEVEL
Data content
PREFERENCE (for the Administrator)
USER DEFINED KEYS/USER DEFINED KNOBS (for the
Administrator)
CUSTOM FADER BANK (for the Administrator)
PREFERENCE (for the Guest)
USER DEFINED KEYS/USER DEFINED KNOBS (for the Guest)
CUSTOM FADER BANK (for the Guest)
USER LEVEL (for the Guest)
2 SOURCE field
This area lists the data that is saved on the USB flash drive.
3
DESTINATION field
Indicates the load destination.
4 Data selection knob
This knob selects the data shown in the field.
5
MULTI SELECT button
Press this button to make a selection containing multiple items of data.
6 SELECT ALL button
Press this button to select all items.
7
CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to clear all selections.
Editing the files saved on the USB flash drive
Follow the steps below to perform editing operations such as sorting the files and directories on the USB flash drive, editing the file names or comments, copying, and pasting.
Sorting files
To sort the files, press one of the headings “FILE NAME,” “COMMENT,” “READ ONLY,”
“TYPE,” or “TIME STAMP” at the top of each column on the SAVE/LOAD window. The list will be sorted as follows, according to the column heading you press.
1 2 3 4 5
Setup
1
FILE NAME
Sort the list in numerical/alphabetical order of the file names.
2 COMMENT
Sort the list in numerical/alphabetical order of the comment.
3
READ ONLY
Sort the list by Write Protect on/off status.
4 TYPE
Sort the list by file type.
5
TIME STAMP
Sort the list by date and time of update.
NOTE
By pressing the same location again, you can change the direction (ascending order or descending order) in which the list is sorted.
Editing file names/comments
STEP
1.
In the SAVE/LOAD window, press the FILE NAME field or COMMENT field of each file.
2.
Enter a file name or comment in the keyboard window, and press the RENAME button or SET button.
NOTE
You cannot edit the file name or comment of a write-protected file.
237
V5.8 Reference Manual
Copying and pasting a file
Follow the steps below to copy a desired file into buffer memory, and then paste it with a different file name.
STEP
1.
Turn the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the copy-source file, and press the
COPY button in the SAVE/LOAD window.
2.
Press the directory icon or press the arrow button in the PATH field to move to the directory into which you want to paste the file.
3.
Press the PASTE button.
4.
Enter the file name, and press the PASTE button.
NOTE
You cannot use a file name that already exists when you paste a file.
Deleting a file
STEP
1.
Turn the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select a file to delete, then press the DELETE button in the SAVE/LOAD window.
2.
To execute the Delete operation, press the OK button.
NOTE
You cannot delete a protected file.
Creating a directory
STEP
1.
Press the directory icon or press the arrow button in the PATH field in the SAVE/
LOAD window to change the directory.
2.
Press the MAKE DIR button.
3.
Enter the name of the directory you want to create, then press the MAKE button.
NOTE
You cannot create a directory using a directory name that already exists.
Formatting a USB flash drive
Follow the steps below to format a USB flash drive.
A USB flash drive with a capacity of 4GB or larger will be formatted in FAT32, and a USB flash drive with a capacity of 2GB or smaller will be formatted in FAT16.
Setup
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the SAVE/LOAD button.
3.
In the SAVE/LOAD window, press the FORMAT button.
4.
Enter a volume name, and press the FORMAT button.
5.
To execute the Format operation, press the OK button.
SAVE/LOAD window
238
V5.8 Reference Manual
Recovering after overcurrent at the USB port
Even if the connection with the USB device was stopped because an overcurrent condition occurred at the USB port, it is possible to use the USB device again without turning the console power off and back on.
Word clock and slot settings
“Word clock” refers to the clock that provides the basis of timing for digital audio signal processing. To send and receive digital audio signals between devices, those devices must be synchronized to the same word clock. If digital audio signals are transferred in an unsynchronized state, the data may not be transmitted or received correctly, and noise may be present in the signal, even if the sampling rates are the same.
Specifically, you must first decide which device will transmit the reference word clock for the entire system (the word clock leader), and then set the remaining devices (the word clock followers) so that they synchronize to the word clock leader.
If you wish to use the QL series console as a word clock follower that is synchronized to the word clock supplied from an external device, you must specify the appropriate clock source
(the port through which the word clock is obtained).
This section explains how to select the clock source that the QL series console will use.
Setup
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SYSTEM SETUP field of the SETUP screen, press the WORD CLOCK/SLOT button.
3.
In the LEADER CLOCK SELECT field of the WORD CLOCK/SLOT window, select a clock source.
4.
Press the “x” symbol located in the upper right to close the window.
Recovery procedure
After removing the cause of the overcurrent at the USB port, press the location that shows
“USB REMOUNT” at the FORMAT button of the SAVE/LOAD window.
Remount function to USB flash drives
If USB flash drive is not mounted, the FORMAT button will become a USB REMOUNT button.
Press this button to mount a USB flash drive. Use this button if a USB flash drive is not recognized after it has been removed and reinserted.
SETUP screen WORD CLOCK/SLOT window
239
V5.8 Reference Manual
WORD CLOCK/SLOT window
1
2
3
5
4
7
6
8
LEADER CLOCK SELECT field
1 Leader clock frequency display
Indicates the frequency (44.1 kHz or 48 kHz) of the currently-selected leader clock. If the unit is not synching to the leader clock, “UNLOCK” will appear.
NOTE
• If sample rate pull-up/down has been specified in the Dante
Controller application, this area indicates the change in the sample rate as a percentage, such as -4.0%, -0.1%, +0.1%, and
+4.1667%.
• To change the leader clock when sample rate pull-up/down has been specified, disable the pull-up/down in the Dante Controller, change the leader clock, then specify pull-up/down again.
2 Leader clock select buttons
Use the buttons to select the clock source that you want to use as the word clock leader from the following options:
• INT 48 k
• INT 44.1 k
The QL console internal clock (sampling rate 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz) will be the clock source.
• WORD CLOCK IN
The word clock supplied from the WORD CLOCK IN jack on the rear panel of the console will be used as the clock source.
240
Setup
• DANTE 48k
• DANTE 44.1k
The word clock supplied from the Dante jack on the rear panel of the console will be used as the clock source.
NOTE
With QL V1.07 and later, if you initialize the console to factory settings, the default value for the word clock is set to DANTE 48k. This allows you to synchronize word clock even when using multiple CL and QL consoles at their default settings.
• SLOT 1–2
The word clock supplied via a digital I/O card installed in a console slot will be used as the clock source. Word clock can be selected in pairs for each slot.
3 Clock status Indicator
Indicates the console's status as a leader or a follower in the Dante audio network.
Leader
Follower
NOTE
When is displayed and the specified word clock is not synchronized with a device acting as a Dante leader, the audio might cut out.
4
Clock status display
Indicates the status of synchronization with the leader clock for each clock source. Each indicator is explained below:
• LOCKED (light blue)
Indicates that a clock synchronized with the selected clock source is being input. If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector or slot, input/output is occurring properly between that device and the QL series console. If the sampling frequency is close, this status may be displayed even if not synchronized.
• LOCKED, BUT NOT SYNC’ED (yellow)
A valid clock is being input, but is not synchronized with the selected clock source. If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector, input/output cannot occur correctly between that device and the QL series console.
• SRC ON (green)
This is a special status that applies only to SLOT1–2, indicating that the corresponding channel’s SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) is enabled. This means that even if the signal is not synchronized, normal input/output with the QL series console is occurring.
• UNLOCKED (red)
A valid clock is not being input. If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector, input/output cannot occur correctly between that device and the QL series console.
V5.8 Reference Manual
Using cascade connections
Using multiple QL series consoles, or a QL console and an external mixing console (such as a Yamaha PM5D) in a cascade connection enables buses to be shared among the devices.
This can be convenient if you want to use an external mixer to increase the number of inputs.
This section explains cascade connections and operation, using an example in which two QL units are connected in a cascade configuration.
About cascade connections
To cascade two QL series consoles, you must first install digital I/O cards in the appropriate slots, and connect the output ports of the sending unit (the cascade follower) to the input ports of the receiving unit (the cascade leader).
The following illustration shows an example in which two eight-channel digital I/O cards for each unit are installed in the cascade follower QL unit and in the cascade leader QL unit. The
DIGITAL OUT jacks of the sending unit are connected to the DIGITAL IN jacks of the receiving unit.
DIGITAL
OUT
Audio signals of unit A
DIGITAL
IN
Audio signals of
A + B
Setup
• UNKNOWN (black)
This indicates that the clock status cannot be detected because no external device is connected or because there is no valid clock input. You will be able to select this connector/slot, but successful synchronization cannot occur until a valid connection is established.
NOTE
• If the indicator for the selected clock does not turn light blue, make sure that the external device is correctly connected, and that the external device is set to transmit clock data.
• Noise may occur at the output jacks when the word clock setting is changed. To protect your speaker system, be sure to turn down the power amp volume before changing the word clock setting.
• If you attempt to select a channel (for which SRC is on) as the word clock source, a message will appear, warning you that the sampling rate converter will be disabled.
SLOT field
This field enables you to make various settings related to the MY slots on the rear panel of the console.
5 Card name
Indicates the type of card installed in the slot. If nothing is installed, “----” will appear.
6 SRC buttons
The SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) function can be switched on or off for a slot in which an MY card (MY8-AE96S) that features the SRC function is installed. If another type of card is installed, or if no card is installed, no SRC button will appear.
7 FREQUENCY display
Indicates the sampling frequency of input signals if the installed card can detect the substatus of input signals, such as an AES/EBU card. If another type of card is installed, or if no card is installed, “----” will appear.
8 EMPHASIS STATUS display
Indicates the emphasis information of input signals if the installed card can detect the substatus of input signals, such as an AES/EBU card. If another type of card is installed, or if no card is installed, “----” will appear.
QL A
(Cascade follower)
QL B
(Cascade leader)
Digital I/O card
In this example, up to twenty four buses chosen from MIX bus 1–16, MATRIX bus 1–8,
STEREO bus (L/R), MONO (C) bus, and CUE bus (L/R) can be shared, and the mixed signals transmitted from the cascade leader QL unit. (If you use two 16-channel digital I/O cards, all buses can be shared among the devices.) When the required settings are made for the cascade follower and for the cascade leader, the bus signals of the cascade follower will be sent via the slot to the buses of the cascade leader, and the combined signals of both buses will be output from the cascade leader. If the Cascade Link function is enabled, the specified operations or parameter changes performed on either QL series console will be followed by the other QL console.
You must specify bus assignments for each slot or channel on each QL unit. Separate procedures are outlined for the cascade follower and the cascade leader.
241
V5.8 Reference Manual
NOTE
• In Surround mode, you cannot use cascade output on MIX buses 1-6. In addition, if you have selected 5.1 SOLO in CUE mode, you cannot monitor CUE from the cascade follower at the cascade leader.
• If you are making a cascade connection between the QL unit and the PM5D, you can use the QL unit as the cascade follower by setting the PM5D’s CASCADE IN PORT SELECT to a slot.
However, only the audio signals will be cascaded, and the control signals cannot be linked.
• You can also use an AD/DA card or OMNI OUT jack to make cascade connections with an analog mixer.
• There is no limit to the number of units that can be cascade-connected, but the signal delay at the cascade follower will increase in accordance with the number of units from the cascade leader.
Operations on a cascade follower QL unit
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SYSTEM SETUP field of the SETUP screen, press the CASCADE button.
3.
In the CASCADE window, press the CASCADE OUT PATCH tab.
4.
In the CASCADE OUT PATCH page, press the OUT PATCH button for the bus to which you want to assign the port.
5.
Use the category select list and the port select buttons to select the slot and output ports that you want to assign, and then press the CLOSE button.
6.
In the CASCADE COMM PORT field, select the port that will transmit and receive control signals for cascade link.
7.
Use the CASCADE LINK MODE buttons to select the item that you want to link.
NOTE
• You cannot assign two or more buses to the same output port. If you select a port to which a signal route has already been assigned, the previous assignment will be canceled.
• Control signals for the cascade link and MIDI messages cannot share the same port. If you select a port that is already specified for transmission/reception of MIDI messages, a dialog box will ask whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings.
CASCADE window (CASCADE OUT PATCH page)
You can select the slot and output port that will output each bus.
2
3
1
4
1 Port select popup buttons (CASCADE OUT PATCH section)
Enable you to select the output port for cascade connections for each of MIX 1–16,
MATRIX 1–8, STEREO L/R, MONO, and CUE L/R buses. Press the button to open the
PORT SELECT window, in which you can select a port.
2 CASCADE LINK buttons
Used to select the operations to be linked when making cascade connections between
QL series consoles. Multiple selection is possible.
• DCA 1-8
The following parameters related to DCA 1 to 8 will be linked.
• DCA 1 - 8 level
• DCA 1 - 8 on/off
• DCA 1 - 8 cue
• DCA 1 - 8 DCA MUTE TARGET (DCA group mute targets)
NOTE
Even if the cue mode is LAST CUE, the cue for the target DCA will come on at the same time for consoles linked by cascade connections.
Setup
242
V5.8 Reference Manual
• DCA 9-16
The following parameters related to DCA 9 to 16 will be linked.
• DCA 9 - 16 level
• DCA 9 - 16 on/off
• DCA 9 - 16 cue
• DCA 9 - 16 DCA MUTE TARGET (DCA group mute targets)
NOTE
Even if the cue mode is LAST CUE, the cue for the target DCA will come on at the same time for consoles linked by cascade connections.
• MUTE GROUP
Links ON/OFF for mute group controls.
NOTE
The settings of Dimmer function are not linked. Make these settings individually on each console.
• SENDS ON FADER
Links SENDS ON FADER behavior.
• SENDS ON FADER mode
• The send destination bus
• CUE
The following cue-related parameters and events will be linked.
• Cue enable/disable
• Cue mode (MIX CUE or LAST CUE, 5.1 SOLO)
NOTE
Regarding 5.1 SOLO, no links are made if the console at the cascade destination is set to
Stereo mode.
• Cue point settings for input channels and output channels
• SOLO MUTE
NOTE
Solo operation is used for all cascaded consoles (LEADER and FOLLOWER).
• OTHERS
The following parameters will be linked.
• Scene recall operations
• Scene store operations
• Edit scene titles
• DIMMER (MONITOR window) operations
• Panel LED and display brightness (SETUP window) operations
3 CASCADE COMM PORT buttons
Specify the communication port used for transmitting and receiving link information when operations such as cue and scene store/recall are linked between cascadeconnected QL series consoles.
• NONE .....................No link operation
• MIDI .......................Use MIDI port
• SLOT1 ....................Use SLOT1
4 Tabs
Switches between pages (CASCADE IN PATCH, CASCADE IN ATT, and CASCADE OUT
PATCH).
Setup
PORT SELECT window
Press the OUT PATCH button to open this window.
1
2
1
Category select list
Selects the port (slot 1–2) that will be shown on the screen.
2 Port select buttons
Within the specified slot, these buttons select the ports that will be patched.
243
V5.8 Reference Manual
CASCADE window (CASCADE IN ATT page)
1
ATT knobs
Display the attenuator values (-96.0dB to 0.0dB) for cascade input signals. You can adjust these values using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
NOTE
You can use these knobs as SUB IN with adjustable input level. Doing so allows you to sum the signals from other consoles to a bus, without using up inputs and buses.
1
Operations on the cascade leader QL unit
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SYSTEM SETUP field of the SETUP screen, press the CASCADE button.
3.
In the CASCADE window, press the CASCADE IN PATCH tab.
4.
In the CASCADE IN PATCH page, press the IN PATCH button for the bus to which you want to assign the port.
5.
In the PORT SELECT screen, use the category select list and the port select buttons to select the slot and input ports that you want to assign, and then press the CLOSE button.
6.
As described in step 6 of “ Operations on a cascade follower QL unit ” on page 242 ,
in the CASCADE LINK PORT field, select the port that will transmit and receive control signals for cascade link.
7.
As described in step 7 of “ Operations on a cascade follower QL unit ” on page 242 ,
in the CASCADE COMM LINK field, select the same item as the cascade follower.
NOTE
• You can assign the same input port to two or more buses.
• Control signals for the cascade link and MIDI messages cannot share the same port. If you select a port that is already specified for transmission/reception of MIDI messages, a dialog box will ask whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings.
Setup
244
V5.8 Reference Manual
Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses
Follow the steps below to change the basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses, such as switching between stereo and monaural, and selecting the send point from which the signal of an input channel will be sent. The settings you make in the following procedure are saved as part of the scene.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the BUS SETUP button.
3.
Use the tabs in the BUS SETUP window to select the buses whose settings you want to edit.
4.
Use the SIGNAL TYPE switch buttons to specify whether each bus will function as
STEREO (main parameters will be linked for two adjacent odd-numbered/evennumbered buses) or MONOx2 (use as two monaural channels).
5.
Use the bus type/send point select buttons to select the bus type and the position from which the signal of the input channel will be sent.
6.
As desired, turn the buttons in the PAN LINK field on or off.
BUS SETUP window
You can make various settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses.
1 2 4 1
SETUP screen BUS SETUP window
3 4
5 5
MIX page MATRIX page
1
SIGNAL TYPE switch buttons
Select how signals are processed for every adjacent pair of buses. Select either STEREO
(stereo signal) or MONOx2 (monaural signal x 2).
2
Bus type/send point select buttons (MIX bus only)
For every adjacent pair of buses, you can select the bus type and (for vari-type) the send point. These buttons correspond to the following parameters.
Button
VARI [PRE EQ]
VARI [PRE FADER]
FIXED
VARI
VARI
FIXED
Bus type Pre-fader send point
Immediately before the EQ
Immediately before the fader
---
3 Send point select buttons (MATRIX bus only)
Select the pre-fader send point from the input channel. These buttons correspond to the following parameters.
Button
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
Pre-fader send point
Immediately before the EQ
Immediately before the fader
Setup
245
V5.8 Reference Manual
4 PAN LINK button
This button appears if SIGNAL TYPE is set to STEREO and the bus type is set to VARI. If the button is on, the pan setting of signals sent from input channels to the corresponding two buses will link with the STEREO bus pan setting.
5 Tabs
Enable you to switch between the MIX and MATRIX buses.
Switching the entire phantom power supply on/ off
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2.
In the center of the SETUP screen, press the +48V ACTIVE field’s ON button or OFF button.
If this button is off, phantom power will not be supplied even if the +48V button of an
OMNI jack input channel or TALKBACK IN is on.
Specifying the brightness of the touch screen,
LEDs, channel name displays, and lamps
Follow the steps below to specify the brightness of the touch screen, top panel LEDs, channel name displays, and lamps connected to the rear panel LAMP connectors. You can save two different brightness settings in bank A and B, and switch between them rapidly if desired.
Setup
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the field located in the right of the bottom row of the SETUP screen, press the
BANK A or BANK B button.
3.
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the brightness of each item.
NOTE
You can also assign this parameter to a USER DEFINED key, and press that key to switch between banks A and B.
SETUP screen (brightness setting field)
NOTE
SETUP screen
This +48V ACTIVE setting does not affect the inputs of external racks such as DANTE inputs
(I/O devices). Each rack has a +48V ACTIVE switch, and will operate according to its setting.
246
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 BANK A/B buttons
Switch between the brightness settings.
7
CONTRAST field
2 NAME
Adjusts the contrast of the characters of the channel name displays on the top panel.
BRIGHTNESS field
3 NAME
Adjusts the brightness of the channel name displays on the top panel.
This will also change the CH COLOR brightness and LED brightness in the lower part of the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. If you want to adjust the CH COLOR brightness after setting the name display brightness, use the CH COLOR knob.
4
CH COLOR
Adjusts the brightness of the channel colors on the top panel.
This lets you apply a relative adjustment to only the channel color brightness without changing the channel name display brightness.
V5.8 Reference Manual
5 SCREEN
Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen.
If the brightness is set to lower than level 2, the QL will start up next time with a brightness setting of 2 so that you will be able to see the screen.
6 PANEL
Adjusts the brightness of the top panel LEDs.
NOTE
If the AD8HR is connected, the brightness of the AD8HR’s LEDs will also change.
7 LAMP
Adjusts the brightness of the lamps connected to the rear panel LAMP jacks.
Setting the date and time of the internal clock
This section explains how to set the date and time of the QL console’s internal clock, and how to select the date and time display format. The date and time you specify here will affect the time stamp used when saving a scene.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
Press the DATE/TIME button at the lower part of the SETUP screen.
3.
In the FORMAT field of the DATE/TIME window, press the MODE buttons several times to select the desired format for date and time display.
4.
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to set the current date and time.
5.
When you have finished making settings, press the OK button.
DATE/TIME window
Press the DATE/TIME button in the SETUP screen to open this window.
3 FORMAT (Display format)
Specifies the format in which the date and time of the internal clock are displayed.
You can select from the following display formats.
• Date
MM/DD/YYYY (Month/Day/Year)
DD/MM/YYYY (Day/Month/Year)
YYYY/MM/DD (Year/Month/Day)
• Time
24-Hour (hours shown in the range of 0–23)
12-Hour (hours shown from 0am–11am, and 0pm–11pm)
Setting the network address
This section explains how to set the network address that will be required when you use the
NETWORK connector on the QL series console to connect it to a computer.
If you plan to connect the QL series console to your computer in a one-to-one connection, we recommend that you use the following default values.
IP Address: 192.168.0.128
Gateway address:
Subnet mask:
192.168.0.1
255.255.255.0
Make sure that the IP address and Gateway address do not match the addresses of any other device on the network.
NOTE
• Only the Administrator can change network settings.
• For details on settings related to connecting to a LAN, refer to the QL Editor Installation Guide.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
Press the NETWORK button at the lower part of the SETUP screen.
3.
Press and select the knobs in the NETWORK window to specify the address using the
[TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
4.
When you have finished making settings, press the OK button.
5.
Restart the QL series console.
Setup
1 2
1 DATE
Specifies the date of the internal clock.
2
TIME
Specifies the time of the internal clock.
3
247
V5.8 Reference Manual
NETWORK window (FOR MIXER CONTROL page)
Use this window to set the console’s IP address, in order to use the NETWORK connector on the rear panel to remote-control the console from QL Editor, StageMix, or the MonitorMix application.
Set the UNIT Name and PIN for the MonitorMix application here.
For the IP SETTING MODE select buttons, only STATIC IP button is enabled. The other buttons cannot be selected.
1
3
2
NETWORK window (FOR DEVICE CONTROL page)
Use this window to set the console’s IP address, in order to use the Dante PRIMARY connector on the rear panel to remote-control external devices. DHCP, AUTO IP, and fixed IP settings are supported.
Even on DHCP networks, it is possible to remotely control external devices such as Tio1608-
D and Shure’s ULDX4.
Setup
1
2
3 4
5
1 MAC ADDRESS
Indicates the MAC (Machine Access Control) address, which identifies a host in a network. This address is for display only, and cannot be edited.
2 UNIT NAME
Sets the name to be shown on the network.
3
PIN for MonitorMix
Sets the PIN (4-digit numeric password) to be entered when using the MonitorMix application to connect to a QL series console. MonitorMix is an iOS application that musicians can use on stage to adjust their own monitor balance.
You can register a PIN with all 4 digits blank. In that case, PIN authentication with
MonitorMix is not required. However, you cannot leave only 1, 2, or 3 of the PIN digits blank.
NOTE
The NETWORK connector on the QL series console transmits data via either 100BASE-TX
(transmission speed: maximum 100 Mbps) or 10BASE-T (transmission speed: max 10 Mbps).
248
6
7
1 CURRENT IP SETTING field
This field shows the current setting.
NOTE
If you use the IP SETTING MODE select buttons to select DHCP or AUTO IP, it may take some time for the IP address to be configured. During this time, the window will appear as shown below.
V5.8 Reference Manual
NEXT IP SETTING field
2 IP SETTING MODE select buttons
Use these buttons to select how to set the IP address the next time the console is turned on. Select DHCP, AUTO IP, or STATIC IP.
NOTE
If you select AUTO IP, the Dante network automatically sets the console’s IP address to
169.254.xxx.xxx.
If you select DHCP or AUTO IP, the window will appear as shown below and you will be unable to set the IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK, and GATEWAY ADDRESS.
Setting up the Dante audio network
You will use the QL series console to make Dante audio network settings for the console itself and the I/O devices connected to the Dante connector of the QL series console. This section explains how to make Dante audio network settings.
Setup
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2.
In the DANTE field at the center of the screen, press the DANTE SETUP button to open the DANTE SETUP window.
3.
Press the SETUP tab in the lower part of the DANTE SETUP window.
3 IP ADDRESS
Specifies an address that identifies an individual device on the Internet or LAN network.
4 SUBNET MASK
Within the IP address used in the network, this defines the bits that are used for the network address that distinguishes the network.
5
GATEWAY ADDRESS
Specifies an address that identifies a device (gateway) that converts data between different media or protocols to allow communication within the network.
6 APPLY button
Press this button after you have changed the IP address settings. When the ATTENTION window appears, press the OK button and then turn the console off and back on again.
SETUP screen DANTE SETUP window
7
Tabs
Use these tabs to select a group of items to view (FOR MIXER CONTROL or FOR DEVICE
CONTROL).
249
V5.8 Reference Manual
DANTE SETUP window (SETUP page)
2
4
8
9
1
3
5
6
7
1 STATUS indicators
Show the operating status of the QL series console and the Dante network.
Setup
2 CONSOLE ID select buttons
Set the IDs for the QL series consoles.
If five or more QL units are connected to a network, and you plan not to assign IDs to some of the units, press the OFF button of each of those units to turn off the ID.
When the CONSOLE ID select button is set to OFF in the DANTE SETUP screen, the NOT
CTRL indicator appears below the Display switch button of each device.
The NOT CTRL indicator also appears on the icons of the DANTE PATCH screen.
250
3 SECONDARY PORT select buttons
Specify how the Dante audio network is configured.
4
CANCEL button
When editing the CONSOLE ID or SECONDARY PORT settings, you can press this button to cancel the changes you made.
5
APPLY button
After changing the CONSOLE ID or SECONDARY PORT settings, press this button to apply the changes you made.
6 BIT select buttons
Enable you to set the audio bit depth to 24-bit or 32-bit.
• 24bit ................... Use this when transmitting and receiving data to or from an R series unit. When using a QL series system, you will normally use this setting.
V5.8 Reference Manual
Dante Device Lock
Dante Device Lock prevents changes to the Dante audio network settings of a Dante device by another computer on the same network. Dante Device Lock settings are configured in
Dante Controller.
When Dante Device Lock is enabled on a QL console, the following parameters cannot be changed.
• CONSOLE ID
• SECONDARY PORT
• BIT
• LATENCY (ms)
• PREFERRED LEADER
When Dante Device Lock is enabled on a QL console, the DANTE DEVICE LOCKED indicator lights up in red on the top left side of the DANTE SETUP window.
Setup
• 32bit ................... This is effective when transmitting and receiving 25-bit or larger data
(when using cascade or gain compensation), but the amount of data being transmitted will increase 20-30% compared to 24-bit.
7
LATENCY select buttons
Enable you to set the Dante audio network latency to 0.25 ms, 0.5 ms, 1.0 ms, 2.0 ms, or 5.0 ms.
The latency setting varies depending on the network connection method and size. For
details, refer to “ Setting the Dante audio network latency ” ( page 254 ).
8 DANTE PATCH BY select buttons
If the THIS CONSOLE button is selected, the DANTE INPUT PATCH and DANTE OUTPUT
PATCH settings can be edited from the QL series console.
If the DANTE CONTROLLER button is selected, it will not be possible to edit the Dante patch settings. You can operate these buttons regardless of the state of the DANTE
PATCH BY select buttons on other CL/QL series consoles on the network.
9 PREFERRED LEADER button
If this button is turned ON, the console’s status as a leader is given greater priority in the
Dante audio network.
If this button is turned OFF, the console’s status as a leader is given less priority in the
Dante audio network.
• If there is only one QL console for which this button is turned ON, that console will become the leader.
• If there are multiple QL consoles for which this button is turned ON, only one of them will become the leader.
• If this button is turned OFF for all QL consoles, one unit out of all Dante devices, including I/O devices, will become the leader.
NOTE
• Settings that are shared with the I/O device (BIT/LATENCY/W.CLOCK) will reflect the settings of the QL series console whose CONSOLE ID is set to #1.
• If the DANTE CONTROLLER button is selected in the DANTE PATCH BY section, and you attempt to edit the Dante patching or related settings, the message “This Operation is Not
Allowed” will appear at the bottom of the screen.
• DANTE patch information is applied to the device if the QL settings file (file name extension .CLF) is loaded under the following conditions. Otherwise, the information is not applied and the current state will be maintained.
• In the SAVE/LOAD window (
page 232 ), the WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button is
on.
• Either #1, #2, #3, or #4 CONSOLE ID select button is on.
• The THIS CONSOLE button of the DANTE PATCH BY select buttons is on.
• With QL V1.07 and later, when settings are initialized, including Dante audio network settings, or a firmware update is installed, the Preferred Leader setting is turned on. This setting is not changed when console settings are changed or when the console is restarted. It can be turned off using the Dante Controller, if necessary. If this default setting is used to change CL or QL word clock settings for anything other than Dante, that console is given priority as the clock leader for the Dante network to prevent clock synchronization errors. Further, you can use Dante Controller to clearly specify the leader by turning on only Preferred Leader for the device that will always be running (off for all other devices).
If you try to change any of these parameters, the following message will appear at the bottom of the window.
251
V5.8 Reference Manual
If a device connected to the console is online, and Dante Device Lock is enabled for that device, the LOCKED indicator will appear in each window as shown below.
Support for Dante Domain Manager
When a DDM server exists in the network, or when enrolling a domain, the DANTE DOMAIN
MANAGER field is shown at the top of the DANTE SETUP screen.
1 2 3
Setup
If Dante Device Lock is enabled for the console, the following specifications will apply.
• The leader clock select buttons in the WORD CLOCK/SLOT window cannot be changed.
• None of the parameters in the DANTE INPUT PATCH window can be changed. RECALL and AUTO SETUP in the DANTE INPUT PATCH LIBRARY window will be disabled.
• None of the parameters in the I/O DEVICE [OUTPUT PATCH] window can be changed.
• If a file is being loaded from USB memory to a device that has Dante Device Lock enabled, the settings will not be changed by the loaded file. A message is displayed on the screen.
• If the console’s internal memory is initialized to the factory settings, Dante Device Lock will remain enabled and cannot be changed. Locked parameters will also not be initialized.
• If the console’s Dante settings are initialized to the factory settings, Dante Device Lock will be disabled. Locked parameters will also be initialized. R efer to “
Initializing the Dante audio network settings ” ( page 274
).
• USB memory cannot be used to update the Dante module firmware. In addition, Dante
Firmware Update Manager will not update the firmware.
NOTE
• If Dante Device Lock is enabled for a remote device, all offline settings (such as Dante Patch) for the device will be disabled.
• Even if Dante Device Lock is enabled for an I/O device, remote control that is unrelated to Dante settings (such as HA control for R series) is possible.
1 STATE
Displays the status of domain participation.
• Domain: Domain is enrolled
• Disconnected: Domain is enrolled without connecting to the DDM server
• Unmanaged: Domain is not enrolled
2
LOCAL
Displays the access status of the Dante settings (including the DANTE PATCH settings) on the current operating unit.
• Read Write: Editing is available
• Read Only: Editing is disabled
252
V5.8 Reference Manual
3 REMOTE
Displays the access status of the Dante settings of the external Dante devices.
• Operator: Editing is available
• Guest: Reading is available, editing is disabled
• None: Reading and editing are disabled
The display changes depending on the REMOTE settings.
• I/O DEVICE screen
• DANTE PATCH screen, DANTE SETUP DEVICE MOUNT screen
Switching the CONSOLE ID and SECONDARY PORT
STEP
1.
In the DANTE SETUP window (SETUP page), select the CONSOLE ID and the
SECONDARY PORT.
2.
Press the APPLY button.
3.
In the window to confirm the change, press the OK button.
DANTE SETUP window (SETUP page)
The button you switched is shown in red.
When the Dante audio network settings have been applied, the button you selected will return to its original appearance.
Setup
253
NOTE
• If you change the SECONDARY PORT, you must also change the method of connection between the QL series console and the I/O devices. For example if the connections used for the
REDUNDANT setting are left as they are when you change the setting to DAISY CHAIN, it will become impossible to send and receive audio. Be sure to disconnect the cables before you change the setting.
• The CONSOLE ID and SECONDARY PORT settings will not be changed even if you initialize the
QL series console.
• When the CONSOLE ID is OFF or is set to 2, 3, or 4 for a QL series console, the console’s BIT/
LATENCY will not change even if the BIT/LATENCY is changed in the DANTE SETUP window for the QL series console within a network for which the CONSOLE ID is set to 1.
V5.8 Reference Manual
Setup
• When the CONSOLE ID is set to OFF, the DANTE PATCH BY field is fixed to “DANTE
CONTROLLER.” Also, patching cannot be changed in the DANTE INPUT PATCH window.
• When the CONSOLE ID is set to OFF, all the mounted devices will be “NOT CTRL”.
You can edit HA GAIN and other settings for R series units, but notification of the settings will not be sent to the device. This is the same as when the devices are not connected.
Setting the Dante audio network latency
An appropriate latency setting for signals sent and received via a Dante audio network varies depending on the network connection method and size. This section explains how to set an appropriate latency setting depending on the connection method of Dante-enabled devices that are connected to the QL series console.
Relationship between the switches and the number of hops
An appropriate latency setting on a Dante audio network varies depending on the number of hops in the network.
One hop is the step from one router (switch) to the next. You count the number of hops starting from the leader device to the most distant device (assuming that all devices are connected in series).
Switches mean network switches and routers, as well as the switches that are built into QL series consoles and I/O devices. Set the latency value based on the number of hops. The following table shows typical latency settings based on the number of hops.
Number of hops
Up to 3
Up to 5
Up to 10
Up to 20
21 or more (or if a problem occurs)
Latency (ms)
0.25
0.5
1.0
2.0
5.0
NOTE
• Depending on network conditions, you may want to raise the latency value even if the number of hops is small.
• If a problem occurs, select 5.0 ms so that you will be able to identify whether the latency setting is the cause of the problem.
• When a DDM server is connected, the latency can be set to 10.0ms, 20.0ms, or 40.0ms. Use
Dante Controller to set it. The QL console does not support these settings.
Connection examples and latency settings
Daisy chain connections
Simple 64-in/48-out
3
2
3
4
3
2
3
2
2
1
QL
3 hops = 0.25 ms
Daisy chain connections
FOH and monitor consoles are sharing 64-in/48-out.
1
QL
3 hops = 0.25 ms
1
4 hops = 0.5 ms
1
QL
3 hops = 0.25 ms
254
V5.8 Reference Manual
Redundant connections
Simple 64-in/48-out
4
3
1
4 hops = 0.5 ms
2
Redundant connections
FOH and monitor consoles are sharing 64-in/48-out.
3
4
1
4 hops = 0.5 ms
2
Daisy chain connections
256-ch HA remote (maximum size)
1
4
3
6
5
2
9
8
7
9 hops = 1.0 ms
3
4
2
1
4 hops = 0.5 ms
Setup
255
V5.8 Reference Manual
Redundant connections
Two consoles are sharing 256-ch HA remote (maximum size)
5
4
3
1
5 hops = 0.5 ms
2
Mounting an I/O device on the Dante audio network
Here’s how to select which of the multiple I/O devices on the Dante audio network will be mounted so that they can be used. Up to 24 units can be mounted for one QL series console.
With V4.1 or later, the Shure AXT400, QLXD4, and ULXD4 wireless systems, which do not feature Dante output, can now be controlled. These Shure devices can be connected to the same physical network as Dante, mounted, and controlled.
However, the actual audio signals are physically connected to an R series I/O rack mounted on the QL console or to OMNI IN. By associating the port where audio is input with the mounted Shure device, control and monitoring are possible from the input channel that is patched to the input port. For details about the explanation of how to control the Shure wireless systems, which do not feature Dante output, refer to
C
on
page 178 , “ PORT ASSIGN tab .”
STEP
1.
Press the DEVICE MOUNT tab in the lower part of the DANTE SETUP window.
2.
Press the I/O device select button.
3.
In the DEVICE SELECT window, press the setup method select button.
4.
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to make settings.
5.
When you have finished making settings, press the OK button to close the window.
Setup
DANTE SETUP window (DEVICE MOUNT page)
1 2
256
3
V5.8 Reference Manual
NOTE
QL console can recognize up to 24 Shure AXT400, QLXD4, and ULXD4 devices on the same
Dante audio network, including Shure ULXD4D and ULXD4Q Dante output devices that are set to YAMAHA ID mode. Note that if a greater number of devices is connected, some of the devices will not be recognized by the console based on the order in which their power is turned on, etc, regardless of the mount setting.
1 CLEAR ALL button
Clears all I/O devices in the list to an unmounted state.
2
REFRESH button
Updates the displayed list of I/O devices on the Dante audio network.
3 I/O device select buttons
Press one of the buttons to open the DEVICE SELECT window. The upper line of the button shows the device label. The lower line of the button shows the model name and the number of inputs and outputs. If no device has been mounted, the upper row will indicate “---” and the lower row will show nothing.
For more information on VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE shown below these buttons, refer to 1 on
page 163 , “ I/O device list .”
DANTE SETUP window
1
• DEVICE LIST ...................... Select and mount from the device list
• SUPPORTED DEVICE ....... Select and mount a supported device
• DVS ..................................... Enter a device label and mount (only for DVS)
• MANUAL ............................. Enter a device label and mount
When the setup method select button is DEVICE LIST
To mount by choosing from a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network, press the
DEVICE LIST button to display the DEVICE LIST field.
Setup
3
1
2
1
DEVICE LIST
Shows a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network.
From the list, choose the I/O device that you want to mount.
2 DEVICE LIST select knob
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the I/O device that you want to mount.
3 DEVICE IDENTIFY button
If a device has the DEVICE IDENTIFY function, the DEVICE IDENTIFY button is enabled.
Otherwise, this button will be grayed out and cannot be pressed.
1 Setup method select buttons
Choose one of the following methods for mounting the I/O device.
• NO ASSIGN ........................ Not mounted
257
V5.8 Reference Manual
When the setup method select button is SUPPORTED DEVICE
If you want to select and mount an I/O device that is supported by the QL series, press the
SUPPORTED DEVICE button to see the SUPPORTED DEVICE field. These settings can be made even when not connected to a Dante audio network.
1
2
3
4
1
DEVICE TYPE
This area shows a list of the I/O device types that are supported by the QL series.
From the list, choose the type of I/O device that you want to mount.
2
DEVICE TYPE select knob
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the type of I/O device that you want to mount.
3 I/O device indication
This area shows the selected I/O device.
The upper line shows the front panel of the I/O device.
The lower line shows the model name and the number of inputs and outputs. The
REMOTE icon appears in the remote control supported device.
For devices that do not future Dante output, “NO DANTE PORT” appears on the right side.
NOTE
If a device does not feature Dante output, offline mounting is not possible. Mount it when online
(make sure the DEVICE LIST button is on).
Setup
4 UNIT ID knob
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to specify the UNIT ID.
The indicator shows the UNIT ID.
NOTE
• If there is one I/O device, set the I/O device’s UNIT ID to “1.”
• If multiple devices are connected, assign the ID numbers so that there is no conflict between devices.
• For devices other than the R series, it is possible for devices of differing models to be assigned to the same ID as an R series unit or the same ID as a different model of device. However, since the I/O device input/output port screen shows the UNIT ID, this will make it difficult to distinguish between the units, so we recommend that whenever possible, you avoid allowing the ID numbers to overlap.
• If you have a device whose UNIT ID or device label cannot be changed from its panel or its edit screen etc. (such as the Dante-MY16-AUD card or Dante Accelerator), and you want to use that device as a SUPPORTED DEVICE, you must change its device label via Dante Controller.
• An I/O device will be recognized as a SUPPORTED DEVICE if you assign the device label as follows.
Y###-**********
# is a three-digit hexadecimal number containing the digits 0 – 9 and uppercase A – F (000 – FFF)
* indicates any desired character (alphabetical uppercase or lowercase, numerals, or - (hyphen) may be used)
• If you are controlling the QL series console from an R series unit, we recommend that you set the
R unit’s START UP MODE to “REFRESH.” Operation will be safer with the “REFRESH” setting, since mute will be cleared after synchronization has been completed with QL units whose system setting for REMOTE HA ASSIGN is set to “WITH RECALL.”
With the “RESUME” setting, mute will be cleared and the unit will start operating with the settings that were backed up by the R series unit itself, which could allow unexpected audio to be output.
• A single QL series console can control the HA of up to eight R series units.
If nine or more R series units are connected, you can either divide the HA control between multiple QL series consoles, or you can omit specifying REMOTE HA ASSIGN for the R series units whose HA does not need to be controlled, and use them with START UP MODE set to
“RESUME.”
258
V5.8 Reference Manual
When the setup method select button is DVS or MANUAL
If you want to enter the device label of an I/O device and mount it, press the DVS or MANUAL button to access the DVS/MANUAL field.
1
3
2
REMOTE HA settings
Here’s how to select which of the multiple HA devices on the Dante audio network will be mounted so that they can be used. Up to 8 units can be mounted for one QL series console.
A device having a large number of channels occupies two racks. For such device, you can only mount on odd numbered racks. Also, it is necessary to have two racks in a row. Up to four units can be mounted.
Setup
STEP
1.
Press the REMOTE HA ASSIGN tab in the lower part of the DANTE SETUP window.
2.
Press a HA device select button to access the REMOTE HA SELECT window.
3.
Select the HA device to mount and press the OK button.
If you have changed the setting by pressing the WITH RECALL button, a confirmation dialog box will appear. Press the OK button.
DANTE SETUP window (REMOTE HA page)
3 1 2
1
DEVICE LABEL
Displays the device label of the I/O device which you entered from the keyboard.
2 INPUT/OUTPUT knobs
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to specify the number of inputs and outputs on the
Dante audio network.
3
Device label entry keyboard
Use this keyboard to enter the device label of the I/O device.
NOTE
• If the I/O device is a DVS, mount it by pressing the DVS button.
• If DEVICE LABEL is left blank, the first DVS detected is automatically mounted.
• If the device label you entered is detected automatically, the INPUT/OUTPUT knob settings will be ignored, and the rated number of inputs and outputs will be specified.
259
1
CLEAR ALL button
Clears all HA devices in the list to an unmounted state.
2 REFRESH button
Updates the displayed list of HA devices on the Dante audio network.
V5.8 Reference Manual
3 HA device select buttons
Press one of these buttons to open the REMOTE HA SELECT window. The upper line of the button shows the device label. The lower line of the button shows the model name and the number of inputs and outputs. If no device has been mounted, the upper row will indicate “---” and the lower row will show nothing.
For more information on VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE shown below these buttons, refer to 1 on
page 163 , “ I/O device list .”
REMOTE HA SELECT window
Displaying the device status
You can use the touch screen to verify the status of a connected QL series or R-series unit
(except the Ro8-D) or the Dante status. In order to verify the status of an R-series unit from the console, it must be assigned to REMOTE HA in DANTE SETUP.
QL series
The SETUP field of the DANTE SETUP window shows indicators for the status of the QL series console and the Dante network.
Setup
1
2
3
1
DEVICE LIST
Shows a list of the HA devices on the Dante audio network.
2 WITH RECALL button
If this button is on, the settings saved in the QL series console will be applied to the HA device when the QL series console starts up and when a scene is recalled.
3 DEVICE LIST select knob
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the HA device that you want to mount.
NOTE
• Do not specify “WITH RECALL” if an HA device is shared by multiple QL series consoles and settings have already been made on a different QL series console.
• The HA device can also be operated from a QL series console that is not set to “WITH RECALL.”
• If an external QL series console has been mounted, you can set up and control the QL series console’s INPUT HA in this window. However, make sure that the UNIT ID of the QL series console does not match the UNIT IDs of any other HA device.
260
V5.8 Reference Manual
R-series
The I/O field of the I/O DEVICE screen shows indicators for the status of the R-series units and the Dante network.
For firmware that predates support for V1.60, the version indication will be yellow and the indicator will be unlit.
Setup
Error messages
The SYSTEM indicators will remain lit/blinking cyclically as follows until the problem has been resolved.
If service is necessary, please contact the Yamaha service center listed in the QL5/QL1
Owner’s Manual.
[SYSTEM] indicators Meaning Possible solution
Messages
Error, warning, and information messages are displayed.
Messages are also displayed in the Dante Controller Error Status field.
Each indicator lights or flashes as described below:
No call-out
Lit
Blinking
Flash x2
Flash x3
Unlit
The indicator remains lit steadily.
The indicator continues to flash.
The indicator flashes twice cyclically.
The indicator flashes three times cyclically.
Flash x2
Flash x3
Lit Flash x3
An internal error has occurred.
The MAC address setting has been corrupted and no communication can occur via
Dante.
The device has failed. Contact your Yamaha dealer for repair.
The internal memory has been corrupted.
If the problem persists after setting START UP MODE back to
RESUME and turning the power on again, consult your Yamaha dealer.
UNIT ID is not unique.
Set a unique UNIT ID number for the Dante network.
Lit
The DIP switches are not set correctly.
Check the DIP switch settings, and set them correctly.
Blinking
Dante flow number limit was exceeded.
Examine the Dante network routing.
Lit Blinking
261
V5.8 Reference Manual
[SYSTEM] indicators
Lit Lit
Meaning
The positions of the device setting DIP switches do not match the actual Dante settings.
Power supply problem has occurred on Rio3224-D2/
Rio1608-D2.
Possible solution
If the Device Lock setting was enabled from Dante Controller or if the device is set to READ ONLY in DDM mode, disable the setting.
Check the device setting DIP switch positions, and set them to accommodate the current situation.
Check whether power is supplied correctly to the AC IN connectors
A and B respectively.
Warning messages
The indicators will remain lit/blinking cyclically until the problem has been resolved.
If the green [SYNC] indicator is not lit, the device’s word clock is not defined.
[SYNC] indicators Meaning Possible solution
Set the word clock leader and the sampling frequency correctly on the QL5/QL1-native device or in
Dante Controller.
Blinking
The word clock is not set correctly.
Dante Network circuit is broken.
Make sure that the Ethernet cables are not removed or shortcircuited.
Flash x2
Dante Network is connected incorrectly. Other Dante devices cannot be found.
Make sure that the Ethernet cables are connected correctly.
Flash x3
Setup
If the green indicator is blinking, the unit is operating as the word clock leader.
If the green indicator lights, the unit is operating as a word clock follower and synching to the word clock.
[SYNC] indicators Meaning Possible solution
A non-GbE-compatible device is connected.
If audio is transmitted over the
Dante network, use a GbEcompatible device.
Lit or blinking
Lit
The SECONDARY connector has taken over communications during redundant network operation.
Check the circuit connected to the
PRIMARY connector.
Lit or blinking
Blinking
Lit or blinking
Flash x2
An abnormality has occurred on the circuit connected to the
SECONDARY connector during redundant network operation.
Check the circuit connected to the
SECONDARY connector.
262
V5.8 Reference Manual
Information messages
The indicators will remain lit /blinking cyclically to report the status.
If the orange [SYNC] indicator is not lit, the unit is operating correctly.
If the green [SYNC] indicator is not lit, the device’s word clock is not defined.
[SYNC] indicators
Lit
Meaning
Syncing the Dante network
Waiting to receive setting data
Possible solution
Please wait until started has completed or until the unit has finished synchronization. It may take up to 45 seconds for completion.
Use REMOTE HA ASSIGN in the system to sync with a console or
R Remote set to “WITH RECALL.”
For an R series console with the
START UP MODE set to
REFRESH, after startup both input and output are muted until the setting data is received.
For a single R series console, do not set “WITH RECALL” from multiple consoles.
The device is operating correctly as a word clock leader.
This indicates that the device is operating as a word clock leader.
Blinking
The device is operating correctly as a word clock follower.
This indicates that the device is operating as a word clock follower and synching to the word clock.
Lit
Using GPI (General Purpose Interface)
The rear panel GPI (General Purpose Interface) connector can be used as an input/output connector. This connector provides five GPI IN ports and five GPI OUT ports. For example you can use an external switch to control internal parameters of the QL series console or to switch scenes. Conversely, operations or scene changes performed on the QL series console can send control signals to an external device.
For details on how to send control signals to an external device when you switch scenes, refer
.
Setup
Using GPI IN
You can use the GPI IN ports of the GPI connector to control the parameters of the QL series console from an external device. For example, you could use an external switch to turn the
QL series console’s Talkback on/off, operate the Tap Tempo function, or switch scenes.
STEP
1.
Connect an external device to the QL series console’s GPI connector.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3.
In the SETUP screen, press the MIDI/GPI button.
4.
In the MIDI/GPI screen, press the GPI tab.
5.
Specify the switch attribute and POLARITY MODE for each port as appropriate for the specifications of the external device you’re using.
6.
To assign the function or parameter that you want to control, press the GPI IN
SETUP button.
7.
In each field of the GPI IN SETUP window, select the desired function and parameter, then press the OK button.
SETUP screen MIDI/GPI screen
263
V5.8 Reference Manual
NOTE
• With latched operation, the function will switch between active and inactive each time a trigger is input from the external switch. In this case, we recommend that you use a non-locking type of external switch.
• With unlatched operation, the function will be active only while the signal from the external switch is at the high level or low level. In this case, you may use either a non-locking or a locking type of external switch as appropriate for your needs.
• Settings in the GPI page of the MIDI/GPI screen are common to all scenes. They can be saved as SETUP data.
MIDI/GPI screen (GPI page)
4
1
2
3
3 POLARITY MODE select button
This button selects the polarity of the GPI IN port.
..................... (Low active) When operating an on/off-type parameter, it will become active when the switch is grounded.
..................... (High active) When operating an on/off-type parameter, it will become active when the switch is opened or when a high-level voltage is input.
4 GPI IN SETUP button
The button shows the name of the currently-selected function or parameter. Press this button to display the GPI IN SETUP window.
Setup
1 GPI IN status indicator
This indicates the status of the voltage being input to the GPI IN port.
2 Switch attribute select button
This button selects the switch attribute. Each time you press the button, its indication will alternate between LATCH and UNLATCH.
................. LATCH (a switch that alternately turns on/off each time it is pressed) is selected.
................. UNLATCH (a switch that is on only while pressed and is off when released) is selected.
NOTE
The items that can be selected in the GPI IN SETUP window are the same as for the USER
DEFINED keys (
).
Using GPI OUT
The GPI OUT ports of the GPI OUT connector allow you to control an external device by performing operations on the QL series console.
STEP
1.
Connect an external device to the QL series console’s GPI connector.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3.
In the SETUP screen, press the MIDI/GPI button.
4.
In the MIDI/GPI screen, press the GPI tab.
5.
Specify the POLARITY MODE for each port as appropriate for the specifications of the external device you’re using.
6.
To assign a function or parameter that you want to control, press the GPI OUT
SETUP button.
7.
In each field of the GPI OUT SETUP window, select the desired function and parameter, then press the OK button.
264
V5.8 Reference Manual
3 GPI OUT SETUP button
The button shows the name of the currently-selected function or parameter. Press this button to display the GPI OUT SETUP window.
Setup
SETUP screen
MIDI/GPI screen (GPI page)
4 3
MIDI/GPI screen
1
2
1 GPI OUT status indicator
This indicates the status of the voltage that is being output from each GPI OUT port.
2
POLARITY MODE select button
This button selects the polarity of the GPI OUT port.
..................... (Low active) Grounded when the GPI OUT port is active.
..................... (High active) Open when the GPI OUT port is active.
265
You can assign the following functions.
Function
NO ASSIGN
CUE ACTIVE
PARAMETER 1
-
CUE ON
-
-
PARAMETER 2
DANTE REDUNDANCY
IND.
PRIMARY
GPI IN ACTIVE
IND.
POWER ON
SPECIFIC PORT PORT 1 to PORT 5
-
USER DEF.
KEY ACTIVE
IND.
DCA ONLY
INPUT ONLY
-
-
OUTPUT ONLY -
SPECIFIC
NUMBER
SECONDARY
USER DEFINED
KEY 1 to USER
DEFINED KEY 16
Description
No assignment
Turn on the [CUE] key of the selected channel
Turn on the DCA [CUE] key
Turn on the [CUE] key of an input channel
Turn on the [CUE] key of an output channel
This function activates when the unit is operating on the primary
Dante audio network with a star connection (redundant network).
This function activates when the unit is operating on the secondary
Dante audio network with a star connection (redundant network).
The function assigned to GPI IN port 1 - 5 becomes active
The power of the QL series console is turned on
The function assigned to the
USER DEFINED key becomes active
4
TEST button
While this is on, the corresponding GPI OUT port will be active and will output a control signal.
V5.8 Reference Manual
Using FADER START
Make FADER START settings if you want a device connected to a GPI OUT port to operate in tandem with fader operations.
STEP
1.
Connect an external device to the QL series console’s GPI connector.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3.
In the SETUP screen, press the MIDI/GPI button.
4.
In the MIDI/GPI screen, press the FADER START tab.
5.
For each GPI OUT port, specify the channel that will cause the external device to operate, and the type of operation.
MIDI/GPI screen (FADER START page)
1
2
3
SETUP screen MIDI/GPI screen
4
8 5
1
CLEAR ALL button
Clears all selections.
6 7
OUTPUT DESTINATION field
2
GPI OUT1–GPI OUT5 buttons
Select the GPI OUT port for which you want to make settings.
3 Fader indicator
This indicates the selected fader. Use the [SEL] keys on the panel to select a fader.
NOTE
In the case of QL1, channels that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
Setup
266
V5.8 Reference Manual
THRESHOLD field
4 UPSTROKE/DOWNSTROKE knobs
These specify the level that will be the threshold for outputting a trigger signal. A trigger signal will be output when the fader exceeds the UPSTROKE level, or when the fader falls below the DOWNSTROKE level. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to operate these parameters.
NOTE
• The THRESHOLD values specified by the UPSTROKE/DOWNSTROKE knobs are common to all
GPI OUT ports. However, you can individually choose the channel (fader) for each GPI OUT port.
• Only the UPSTROKE value will be valid if MODE is set to FADER START, and only the
DOWNSTROKE value will be valid if MODE is set to FADER STOP. If MODE is set to FADER
TALLY, both the UPSTROKE and DOWNSTROKE values will be valid.
MODE field
Here you can select the mode of fader operation that will be the trigger for signal output from the GPI OUT port. You can choose from the following fader modes.
5 FADER START
A trigger signal 250 msec long will be output when the fader of the selected channel moves upward through the specified UPSTROKE level (–138.0 dB to 10.0 dB) from a point below it.
6 FADER STOP
A trigger signal 250 msec long will be output when the fader of the selected channel reaches the specified DOWNSTROKE level (–∞ dB to 9.95 dB).
7
FADER TALLY
A trigger signal will be output when the fader of the selected channel moves upward through the specified UPSTROKE level (–138.0 dB to 10.0 dB) from a point below it. This signal will be held until the fader reaches the specified DOWNSTROKE level (–∞ dB to
9.95 dB) or until that GPI OUT port receives a different trigger.
8 NO ASSIGN
Operating the fader of the selected channel will not cause a signal to be output.
Setup
The following illustration shows how the signal that is output from the GPI PORT will change in each fader mode when a fader is operated. In this example, UPSTROKE in the
THRESHOLD field is set to –60.00, and DOWNSTROKE is set to –∞. (This illustration shows the case in which is selected as the polarity of the GPI OUT port. If the polarity is , the polarity of the output signal will be reversed.)
FADER
START
FADER
STOP
250 msec
250 msec
FADER
TALLY
NOTE
At the high level, the output signal of the port will be open. If the receiving device requires high level, take it from the +5V power supply pin. However in this case, the amount of current is limited; for details, refer to “Control I/O specifications” on the QL Data List (End of Manual).
267
V5.8 Reference Manual
Help function
You can view Help files (file extension .xml) provided by Yamaha. For the latest information on help files, refer to the Yamaha Pro Audio website.
https://www.yamaha.com/proaudio/
In addition, using a commercially available text editor or the “Notepad” included with Microsoft
Windows, you can create a text file (file extension .txt) and display it on the console*.
* We accept no responsibility for any damage that may occur as a result of using Help files created by a third party other than Yamaha.
Loading a Help/text file from a USB flash drive
NOTE
A help file for only one language is stored in the console’s internal memory. Once you load the help file, it will be preserved in internal memory even if the power is turned off. The first time you press the HELP button to view the help file after turning the power on, it will take a while for the help file to be loaded from internal memory. Once the data has finished loading, subsequently pressing the HELP button will display the help file instantly.
STEP
1.
Save the Help file provided by Yamaha or a user-created text file on your USB flash drive.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3.
In the SETUP screen, press the SAVE/LOAD button.
4.
To select the Help/text file that you want to load, press one of the Help/text files in the file list in the SAVE/LOAD window, or turn the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
5.
Press the LOAD button.
6.
Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box to load the file.
Help function
NOTE
By default, the character code set of the text file will be detected as UTF-8. However, by adding a line consisting of [ISO-8859-1] or [Shift_JIS] at the beginning of the file, you can force recognition of the file using that character code set. You can specify the desired character code set when using your text editor to save the text file.
The Help function is able to display the following text files (character code sets /languages).
• Text files written in the ISO-8859-1 character code set (English, German, French, Spanish, etc.)
• Text files written in the Shift_JIS character code set (Japanese)
• Text files of the above languages written in the UTF-8 character code set
• The maximum size of the text file is 1024 Kbytes.
Viewing Help
STEP
1.
Load the Help file or text file from your USB flash drive.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the (Help) button.
3.
To close the HELP window, press the (Help) button of the Function Access
Area or the “x” symbol of the HELP window.
Operation in the HELP window
You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob or screen buttons to access the HELP window.
• Turning the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob
.............To scroll through the index area, use the left knob; to scroll through main area, use the right knob.
• Pressing a link (underlined text) in the text
.............Scrolls to the linked destination.
• Pressing a window link (a location with an ➞ symbol and underlined text)
.............Closes the HELP window and opens the corresponding window.
• Pressing the button
.............Scrolls to the chapter that precedes the currently-displayed location.
• Pressing the button
.............Returns to the preceding item in the history of links you pressed.
• Pressing the button
.............Advances to the next item in the history of links you pressed.
SAVE/LOAD window
268
V5.8 Reference Manual
Using USER DEFINED keys to recall Help directly
Assigning the Help function to USER DEFINED keys
STEP
1.
Load the Help file from your USB flash drive.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3.
Press the USER SETUP button in the upper left of the SETUP screen.
4.
In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab.
5.
In the USER DEFINED KEYS page, press the button corresponding to the USER
DEFINED key to which you want to assign the Help function.
6.
In the FUNCTION column, choose “HELP” and press the OK button.
7.
Press the “x” symbol to close the USER DEFINED KEYS page.
8.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to close the SETUP screen.
Help function
Directly recalling the Help for a specific panel controller
While holding down the USER DEFINED key to which you have assigned the Help function, press (or rotate) the panel controller for which you want to recall Help. If the explanation is available for the controller, the help for the corresponding item will appear.
To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned.
NOTE
• Panel controllers (other than the faders will not function as long as you continue holding down the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned.
• If there are multiple explanations for the same controller, you can repeat the steps above to successively display these explanations.
Directly recalling the Help for a specific controller in the LCD screen
While holding down the USER DEFINED key to which you have assigned the Help function, press the on-screen controller for which you want to recall Help. If the explanation is available for the controller, the help for the corresponding item will appear.
To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned.
NOTE
• The on-screen controllers will not function as long as you continue holding down the USER
DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned.
• If there are multiple explanations for the same controller, you can repeat the steps above to successively display these explanations.
SETUP screen USER SETUP window (USER
DEFINED KEYS page)
Recalling the HELP window using only a USER DEFINED key
Press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned. The HELP window will appear. To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned.
269
V5.8 Reference Manual
Other functions
This chapter explains various functions of QL series consoles that are not covered in other chapters.
Initializing the unit to factory default settings
If an error occurs in the QL console internal memory, or if you forget the password and cannot operate the unit, you can use the following procedure to initialize the internal memory.
There are two types of initialization of the internal memory as shown below.
INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES
The entire memory, including scene memories and libraries, will be returned to factory default settings.
INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES
The contents of memory - except for scene memories and libraries - will be returned to its factory default settings.
NOTICE
The entire memory will be deleted if you initialize the internal memory! Proceed with the operation only if you are very sure you want to delete the entire memory. However, the settings in DANTE
SETUP will not be initialized. To initialize these settings, refer to “
Initializing the Dante audio network settings
” (
STEP
1.
While holding down the [SEL] key for Fader B in the MAIN section on the panel, turn on the power to the QL unit.
2.
On the startup menu screen, select the initialization method.
3.
Press the INITIALIZE button in the dialog box to confirm initialization.
4.
Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box to start initialization.
5.
A message indicates that the initialization process is complete. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen.
Other functions
NOTE
• Do not press any buttons until initialization is complete.
• Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button.
Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen
(Calibration function)
Follow the steps below to correctly align the positions of the LCD display and the touch screen.
STEP
1.
While holding down the [SEL] key for Fader B in the MAIN section on the panel, turn on the power to the QL unit.
2.
On the startup menu screen, press the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION button.
3.
Press the START button in the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION MODE screen.
4.
Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box to start calibration.
5.
A cross-shaped cursor will appear in the screen (a total of three times). Press each location at which it appears.
6.
Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the QL unit in normal operating mode.
Startup menu screen TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION
MODE screen
NOTE
• If you are unable to start calibration by pressing the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION button, you can use the [B1]/[B2] keys in the Fader Bank section to select TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION, and then press the [B4] key to start.
• To set the detection points accurately, press the cross-shaped cursor from the position and posture in which you normally operate the unit.
• Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button.
Startup menu screen
270
V5.8 Reference Manual
Adjusting the faders (Calibration function)
Depending on the environment in which you use the QL series console, discrepancies may occur in the motion of the motor faders. You can use the Calibration function to correct these discrepancies.
NOTE
With this operation, the specified faders in the Channel Strip section and MAIN section will be semi-automatically calibrated. This window will also appear if a problem is detected in the fader settings while the QL is starting up.
STEP
1.
While holding down the [SEL] key for Fader B in the MAIN section on the panel, turn on the power to the QL unit.
2.
On the startup menu screen, press the FADER CALIBRATION button.
3.
Press a [SEL] key to select the faders that you want to calibrate.
4.
Press the START button in the FADER CALIBRATION MODE screen.
5.
Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box.
6.
Each of the specified faders will move to –∞ dB (all the way down). If the fader positions are not correct, move them manually to –
∞
dB (all the way down).
7.
After you adjust the fader position, press the NEXT button.
8.
Repeat steps 6–7 to adjust three fader positions at 20 dB, 0 dB, + 10 dB (all the way up).
When adjustment to the +10 dB position is complete, calibration starts.
9.
When calibration has been completed, press the APPLY button.
10.
Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the QL unit in normal operating mode.
Other functions
NOTE
• Faders for which a problem was detected at start-up will already be selected in step 3.
• If the RESTART button appears, calibration has failed. Press the RESTART button to execute calibration once again.
• Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button.
Fine-tuning the input and output gain (Calibration function)
If necessary, you can make fine adjustments to the input and output gain.
STEP
1.
While holding down the [SEL] key for Fader B in the MAIN section on the panel, turn on the power to the QL unit.
2.
In the MODE SELECT field on the startup menu screen, press the button for the item you want to adjust.
3.
Press an on-screen knob to select it, and then use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the value.
4.
Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the QL unit in normal operating mode.
Startup menu screen
271
Startup menu screen
NOTE
• If you press the RESET ALL button provided in each screen, all settings in the screen will be reset to 0 dB.
The factory settings are also 0 dB.
• Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button.
V5.8 Reference Manual
• INPUT PORT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the analog input gain)
Access the INPUT PORT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the specified analog input port in 0.1 dB steps.
Other functions
• SLOT OUTPUT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the slot output port gain)
Access the SLOT OUTPUT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the output ports of the specified slot in 0.01 dB steps.
• OUTPUT PORT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the output port gain)
Access the OUTPUT PORT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the specified analog output port in 0.01 dB steps.
272
V5.8 Reference Manual
Adjusting the LED color (Calibration function)
If necessary, you can adjust the LED colors. Adjust the LED colors one by one.
STEP
1.
While holding down the [SEL] key for Fader B in the MAIN section on the panel, turn on the power to the QL unit.
2.
On the startup menu screen, press the LED COLOR CALIBRATION button.
3.
Press a [SEL] key on the top panel to select the indicator for which you want to adjust the channel color.
If you want to adjust the indicator color of the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob, press the
TOUCH AND TURN button in the LED field.
4.
Press one of the color buttons in the COLOR field to select the desired color.
5.
While comparing the color of the selected channel’s indicator with the color of the other channel indicators (for which the [SEL] keys are turned off), adjust the color by using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to operate the RGB knobs in the RPG
ADJUSTMENT field.
6.
When you have finished adjusting the color, press the APPLY button located in the right of the screen to confirm the change.
7.
Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the QL unit in normal operating mode.
Other functions
Adjusting the brightness of the channel name display
If necessary, you can adjust the brightness of the channel name display.
STEP
1.
While holding down the [SEL] key for Fader B in the MAIN section on the panel, turn on the power to the QL unit.
2.
On the startup menu screen, press the LED COLOR CALIBRATION button.
3.
Press the [CUE] key or [ON] key of the channel whose brightness you want to adjust.
Pressing the [CUE] key will increase the brightness, and pressing the [ON] key will decrease the brightness.
4.
When you have finished adjusting the brightness, press the APPLY button located in the right of the screen to confirm the change.
5.
Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the QL unit in normal operating mode.
NOTE
Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the
EXIT button.
LED COLOR CALIBRATION MODE screen
LED field
NOTE
• In the case of QL1, channels that do not exist on the model will not be shown.
• You cannot adjust more than one channel simultaneously.
• The APPLY button appears only if you change the RGB values.
• To reset all LED color indicators to the factory default setting, press the
RESET ALL button.
• Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button.
273
V5.8 Reference Manual
Adjusting the contrast of the channel name display
If necessary, you can adjust the contrast of the channel name display.
STEP
1.
While holding down the [SEL] key for Fader B in the MAIN section on the panel, turn on the power to the QL unit.
2.
On the startup menu screen, press the LED COLOR CALIBRATION button.
3.
Turn the [GAIN] knob in the Selected Channel section.
Turning the knob toward the left will lighten the contrast of all channels; turning it toward the right will darken the contrast of all channels.
4.
If you want to adjust a channel whose contrast differs from that of the other channels, hold down the [SEL] key of the desired channel and press its [CUE] key or
[ON] key.
Pressing the [CUE] key will darken the contrast, and pressing the [ON] key will lighten the contrast.
5.
When you have finished adjusting the contrast, press the APPLY button located in the right of the screen to confirm the change.
6.
Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the QL unit in normal operating mode.
NOTE
• The APPLY button appears only if you change the setting.
• Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the
EXIT button.
Initializing the Dante audio network settings
It is possible for Dante-related settings to be initialized to their factory-set state when an error occurs on the Dante audio network.
NOTICE
When you initialize, all console settings including the Dante audio network settings that had been previously saved in memory will be lost.
Disconnect all connections from the Dante audio network before initializing.
STEP
1.
While holding down both [SEL] keys for Faders A and B in the MAIN section on the panel, turn on the power to the QL unit.
2.
A message indicates that initialization process is complete. Press the CLOSE button.
Other functions
Update procedure for NAME SUB CPU firmware
If the following window is displayed, the console has entered the mode for updating the NAME
SUB CPU firmware. For details about this operation, refer to the “QL5/QL1 Firmware Update
Guide”.
If you mistakenly use a file for CL to perform this update, the [TOUCH AND TURN] knobs will stop functioning. Use this function only if that happens.
Do not power-off the console while the update is proceeding.
To exit this mode, press the CANCEL button.
274
V5.8 Reference Manual
Update function to Dante firmware
If the following window is displayed, the console has entered the mode for updating the Dante module firmware. For details about this operation, refer to the “QL5/QL1 Firmware Update
Guide”.
Do not power-off the console while the update is proceeding.
To exit this mode, press the CANCEL button.
Other functions
275
V5.8 Reference Manual
Warning/Error Messages
Message
5.1SOLO : Only input cue is enabled.
xxx Parameters Copied.
xxx Parameters Initialized.
xxx Parameters Pasted.
xxx Parameters Swapped with Copy
Buffer.
ALTERNATE FUNCTION: Turned off!
Cannot Assign!
Cannot Bookmark This Popup.
Cannot Mount This Type of Device in
This Position.
Cannot Open This Page.
Cannot Paste to Different Parameter
Type!
Cannot Paste!
Cannot Recall!
Cannot Select This Channel.
Cannot Store!
Cannot Undo!
Channel Copied.
Channel Moved.
Channel Returned to Default Settings.
Console initialized due to memory mismatch.
Corrupted data fixed!
Couldn’t Access File.
Couldn’t Write File.
Current User Changed. [xxx]
DANTE audio resource overflow.
DANTE Connection Error!
DANTE is not working by GIGA bit.
DANTE is working at Secondary.
Meaning
If switched to Surround mode, only the input channel can be cuemonitored when CUE MODE is set to 5.1 SOLO. (Attempted to cuemonitor a different channel.)
Parameter xxx was copied to the copy buffer.
Parameter xxx was initialized.
Parameter xxx was pasted from the copy buffer.
Parameter xxx was exchanged with the contents of the copy buffer.
ALTERNATE FUNCTION was turned off.
In the USER DEFINED KEYS popup of the QL1, you attempted to edit an item that cannot be edited for that model.
This popup window cannot be bookmarked.
You attempted to mount a specific device at a position where it cannot be mounted.
This window cannot be opened.
Parameters of one type cannot be pasted to another different type.
Cannot paste the character string.
Failed to recall a scene memory or library.
You attempted to select a channel that cannot be operated due to your user level or some other reason.
Failed to store a scene memory or library.
You pressed the UNDO button when Undo was not available.
Channel settings have been copied.
Channel settings have been moved.
Channel settings have been returned to the default settings.
All data has been initialized because the data in internal backup memory has been lost, due to an update or some other reason. Please contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the Owner’s
Manual (separate document).
Data has been repaired.
File on the USB flash drive could not be accessed for some reason.
File could not be saved to the USB flash drive.
Current user was changed to [xxx].
Audio resources are not enough for the Dante audio network.
You have the wrong connection of PRIMARY and SECONDARY in the daisy chain network.
The Dante audio network is not functioning as Giga-bit Ethernet.
The Dante audio network is operating in the SECONDARY PORT.
276
Warning/Error Messages
Message
DANTE module Error!
DANTE switched to secondary port.
Different File Format! Some Data was not Loaded.
Directory Not Empty!
Editor: Data Framing Error!
Editor: Data Overrun!
Editor: Rx Buffer Full!
Editor: Tx Buffer Full!
EFFECT CUE: Turned Off.
Error occurred at Secondary Port.
External HA Connection Conflict!
Fader Bank Snapshot is Done.
File Access is Busy!
File Already Exists!
File Error [xx]!
File Protected!
Flash Memory Initializing Finished.
Help File Not Found!
Illegal Address!
Illegal DIP Switch Setting.
Illegal MAC Address! Cannot Use
Ethernet.
Illegal MAC Address!
Illegal Storage Format!
Invalid value
KEY IN CUE: Turned Off.
LIBRARY #xxx is Empty!
Loading Aborted.
Meaning
The Dante module has malfunctioned.
Only the SECONDARY PORT is used, even though a QL series console is being used via a redundant connection.
Data was loaded in a format that is not supported.
You attempted to delete a directory, but failed because there were files remaining in the directory.
Invalid signals are being exchanged with QL Editor.
Too much data is being received at the QL Editor input port.
Too much data is being transmitted from the QL Editor output port.
CUE was defeated because you switched from the EFFECT popup window or the premium rack popup window to a different screen.
The Ethernet cable of the SECONDARY connector has been removed during the REDUNDANT setting.
External HA data could not be recalled, because the state of connections to the external HA has changed since the scene was stored.
A snapshot was taken of the current bank settings.
The following operation has not been performed yet because the USB flash drive is being accessed.
The USB flash drive already contains a file/directory with the same name as the one you are attempting to save, rename, or create.
Internal file access error
Overwriting was not possible because the file on the USB flash drive is write-protected.
Memory initialization has been completed.
The help file has not been loaded.
The IP address or Gateway address setting is invalid.
The DIP switches of the R series are not set correctly.
Communication via the Network connector is not possible because the MAC address setting has been damaged for some reason.
Please contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the
Owner’s Manual (separate document).
The QL series started up with an illegal MAC Address.
The USB flash drive could not be accessed because its format is invalid or unsupported.
The MonitorMix application PIN that is set on the QL series console must be a 4-digit numeric password.
KEY IN CUE was defeated because you switched from the
DYNAMICS 1 popup window of an input channel to a different screen.
No data has been stored in library #xxx that you attempted to recall.
Loading from USB flash drive was aborted.
V5.8 Reference Manual
Message
Loading Finished.
Low Battery!
Maximum Number of Audio Files
Exceeded!
Memory Error.
MIDI: Data Framing Error!
MIDI: Data Overrun!
MIDI: Rx Buffer Full!
MIDI: Tx Buffer Full!
Monitor Assignment is Restricted to
Max. 8 Sources!
No Access From Recorder!
No Channel Selected.
No Copy Item Selected.
No Corresponding Help Items.
No ID3 Tag exists. You can not edit.
No Response from External HA.
No Response from I/O DEVICE.
Operating as the word clock leader.
Page Bookmarked.
Parameter out of range!
Password Changed.
PlayBack Failed: Recorder is Busy!
PLAYBACK OUT CUE: Turned Off.
Please use Dante Controller.
Please wait, Dante patch is proceeding now.
Power Supply Fan has Malfunctioned!
PREVIEW Mode : Cannot Use This
Function.
PREVIEW Mode : Disabled
PREVIEW Mode : Enabled
Processing Aborted.
Recorder Busy: Operation Aborted!
RECORDER: CODEC Error [0x%08X] !
Meaning
Finished loading from USB flash drive.
The backup battery voltage is low.
The number of songs that can be managed by the USB memory recorder has been exceeded.
The backup memory of the R series has been corrupted.
An inappropriate signal is being input to the MIDI input port.
Too much data is being received at the MIDI input port.
Too much data is being transmitted from the MIDI output port.
The Monitor Define function allows a maximum of eight sources to be selected, but you attempted to assign more than eight.
In the RECORDER screen, it is not possible to move to a level higher than \YPE\SONGS\.
A copy-source channel was not selected in the GLOBAL PASTE screen.
In the GLOBAL PASTE screen, you attempted to paste without having selected an item to paste.
The corresponding section was not found in the Help file.
The music file cannot be edited because it has no ID3 tag.
No response from an external AD8HR.
The I/O devices not responding.
The QL series is operating correctly as a word clock leader.
The current screen or popup has been bookmarked.
Some data could not be loaded because of a parameter mismatch.
The password has been changed.
Audio file link playback is not possible because recording is in progress.
CUE was canceled for PLAYBACK OUT because you switched from the
RECORDER screen to another screen.
DANTE PATCH settings from the console are not enabled.
You attempted to edit in the DANTE PATCH screen at a time when patching was not possible.
The cooling fan of the internal power supply has stopped. Please contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the Owner’s
Manual (separate document).
The operation was ignored because this function cannot be used during Preview.
Preview was disabled.
Preview was enabled.
Processing was interrupted.
Operation of the button was canceled because time is required for recorder processing.
A codec error occurred in the RECORDER screen.
277
Warning/Error Messages
Message
RECORDER IN CUE: Turned Off.
Re-Enter Password!
Meaning
CUE was canceled for RECORDER IN because you switched from the
RECORDER screen to another screen.
When specifying the user password, the password was not entered a second time.
REMOTE: Data Framing Error!
REMOTE: Data Overrun!
REMOTE: Rx Buffer Full!
REMOTE: Tx Buffer Full!
An inappropriate signal has been input to the Remote connector.
Too much data has been received at the Remote connector.
Too much data has been transmitted from the Remote connector.
Removed from the Channel Link group.
The channel was removed from the link group.
Saving Aborted.
Saving Finished.
Saving to the USB flash drive has been interrupted.
Finished saving to USB flash drive.
SCENE #xxx is Empty!
SCENE #xxx is Protected!
SCENE #xxx is Read Only!
Scene Playback Link Canceled!
SLOT x: Data Framing Error!
SLOT x: Data Overrun!
SLOT x: Rx Buffer Full!
SLOT x: Tx Buffer Full!
Some Song Files Are Unidentified.
Song File Not Found!
No data has been stored in the scene you attempted to recall, or the data has been damaged so that it cannot be recalled.
You attempted to overwrite (store) a protected scene.
You attempted to overwrite (store) a read-only scene.
The audio playback link for the scene was canceled.
Invalid signals are being input to the SLOT x input port.
Too much data is being received at the SLOT x input port.
Too much data is being transmitted from the SLOT x output port.
Some songs were not identified. Songs that have not been specified might be used for DIRECT PLAY or SCENE PLAY BACK LINK.
The file specified for SCENE LINK or DIRECT PLAY assigned to a USER
DEFINED key does not exist.
STAGEMIX: Data Framing Error!
STAGEMIX: Data Overrun!
STAGEMIX: Rx Buffer Full!
STAGEMIX: Tx Buffer Full!
STEREO Mode: Cannot Use This
Function.
STEREO MODE ON.
Invalid signals are being exchanged with StageMix.
Too much data is being received at the StageMix input port.
Too much data is being transmitted from the StageMix output port.
You cannot use this function in Stereo mode.
Storage Full!
The console has switched to Stereo mode.
The file could not be saved because there is insufficient space on the
USB flash drive.
The USB flash drive could not be recognized.
Access is not possible because the USB flash drive is not ready.
Storage Not Found!
Storage Not Ready!
SURROUND Mode: Cannot Use This
Function.
SURROUND MODE ON.
Sync Error! [xxx]
Tap Operation Ignored.
You cannot use this function in Surround mode.
The console has switched to Surround mode.
The QL series console is not synchronized to the [xxx] signal.
Tap operation was ignored because the TAP TEMPO button is not displayed in the screen.
V5.8 Reference Manual
Message
Target device is in WGM Mode.
Operation Denied.
This Operation is Not Allowed.
Meaning
Attempted to operate RMio64-D when the mounted RMio64-D is in
WGM mode (RMio64-D operating as a member of the NUAGE
Workgroup).
This operation has been ignored because the current user does not have permission.
This Operation is Not Allowed in This
View.
This function is not allowed in this screen.
This page does not exist in this model.
Too Large File! Loading Failed.
Too Many Bands Used! Cannot
Compare.
Too Many Bands Used! Cannot Paste to
Flex15GEQ.
Total Slot Power Capability Exceeded!
Unassigned Encoder.
Unit Fan has Malfunctioned
Unit ID Duplicated!
Unsupported File Format!
USB Currently Active for Recorder function!
USB Currently Active for SAVE or LOAD!
USB Memory Busy: Recorder Stopped!
USB Memory Full !
USB Memory Full! Recorder Stopped.
USB Memory is Protected!
USB Memory Unmounted! Recorder
Stopped.
USB over current Error! Disconnect USB device.
Version Changed. All Memories were
Initialized.
You attempted to open a bookmark or window that does not exist in the QL series.
Loading is not possible because the bitmap file is too large. The maximum supported file size is 307,256 Bytes.
Or loading is not possible because the bitmap file is too large. The maximum supported file size is 1024 kilobytes.
Copying 31BandGEQ and comparing it to Flex15GEQ has failed because more than 15 bands are included in the copy source.
Copying and pasting 31BandGEQ to Flex15GEQ has failed because more than 15 bands are included in the copy source.
Power consumption of the I/O cards installed in the slots has exceeded the rated value.
Your operation has been ignored because there is no parameter that corresponds to the knob you operated.
The fan of the R series has malfunctioned.
The currently entered UNIT ID is not unique on the Dante audio network.
The file you attempted to load from the USB flash drive is of an unsupported format.
Save or Load operations are unavailable because the USB memory recorder is recording or playing.
The recorder cannot operate, since mixer scene memory or library data is being saved to or loaded from the USB flash drive.
Recording/playback stopped because time is required for USB flash drive processing.
Can’t save the RECORDER playlist because there is insufficient free space on the USB flash drive.
Recorder processing was halted because the USB flash drive capacity ran out while the USB memory recorder was operating.
The USB flash drive’s Protect setting is turned on.
Recorder processing was halted because the USB flash drive was disconnected while the USB memory recorder was operating.
The USB device was disconnected because of excessive USB current.
USER DEFINED KEY BANK CHANGED [x].
The bank for the USER DEFINED KEY has switched to [x]. (x is A, B, C, or D.)
The contents of the current memory are initialized by the upgrade.
Version mismatch.
The current version of the R series is not compatible with the version of the CL series and the QL series.
278
Message
Word Clock Error! Recorder Stopped!
Wrong Audio File Format!
Wrong Password!
Wrong Word Clock!
You Cannot Create User Key.
Warning/Error Messages
Meaning
Recorder was halted because synchronization to the word clock was lost.
The format of the audio file is invalid.
The password you input was incorrect.
The QL series console cannot synchronize because the source selected by LEADER CLOCK SELECT in the WORD CLOCK screen is not appropriate.
The current user does not have permission to create a user authentication key.
V5.8 Reference Manual
Index
Numerics
8BandPEQ ..................................................
A
Audio file (links to a scene recall)................
AUTOMIXER ...............................................
B
BUS SETUP window ...................................
C
Calibration ...................................
,
Cascade connections ..................................
Channel color ........................................
,
Channel Job ..................................................
Channel library ........................................
Channel Link .................................................
Channel name displays ............................... 246
Console Lock...............................................
Control change
Control parameters..................................
Copying, moving, or initializing a channel .....
Cue...................................................... 103
,
Operating.................................................
Custom fader bank ......................................
D
Dante audio network .............................
,
Dante Device Lock ......................................
Dante Domain Manager ..............................
DAW ............................................................
DCA group.....................................................
Directly outputting..........................................
Dynamics.................................................
Libraries.....................................................
E
Effect ...........................................................
Libraries...................................................
Effects and tempo synchronization .............
EQ .................................................................
Libraries.....................................................
External head amp .............................. 163
,
F
Factory set ................................................... 270
Fade function .................................................
Focus Recall function.....................................
Function Tree...................................................
G
Gain ...............................................................
Analog gain ................................................
Gain Compensation .......................................
Global Paste function.....................................
GPI............................................................... 263
Graphic EQ ..........................................
Libraries ................................................... 162
H
HA ..................................................................
Head Amp ......................................................
Help function ................................................ 268
I
I/O device..................................................... 163
Initializing ..................................................... 270
Input channels................................................
Channel library ...........................................
Channel name and icon .............................
Sending to MIX/MATRIX bus .....................
Sending to STEREO/MONO bus ...............
Input Delay.....................................................
Input patch .....................................................
Inserting .........................................................
Internal clock................................................ 247
Internal effects ............................................. 143
Internal head amp ........................................ 184
L
Lamps .......................................................... 246
LED .............................................................. 246
LED color ..................................................... 273
Library ............................................ 66 ,
M
MATRIX buses....................................... 54 ,
METER screen............................................. 123
Meters .......................................................... 123
MIDI ............................................................. 185
279
MIX buses.................................................... 245
MIX channels
Sending to MATRIX buses ........................ 54
Sending to STEREO/MONO bus............... 52
MIX MINUS.................................................... 84
MIX/MATRIX buses ....................................... 38
Monitor function ...................................
Mute group .................................................... 69
N
Name displays ............................................. 246
Network address.......................................... 247
Nuendo Live ................................................ 202
O
Oscillator..............................................
Output channels ............................................ 50
Channel library........................................... 58
Channel name and icon ............................. 51
Output Delay.................................................. 56
Output patch .................................................. 18
P
Parameter changes ..................................... 192
Patching......................................................... 16
Pink frame (TOUCH AND TURN)................ 227
PORT TO PORT function .............................. 57
Preferences ................................................. 219
Premium Rack ............................................. 151
Libraries ................................................... 162
Operating ................................................. 151
Preview mode .............................................. 102
Program change .......................................... 188
R
Recall Safe function....................................... 72
REMOTE HA ............................................... 259
RTA ............................................................. 125
S
Scene
Editing........................................................ 90
SELECTED CHANNEL section .......................
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen .............
Setup ........................................................... 209
SETUP screen ............................................. 209
Signal quality meter....................... 29
,
Slot ..............................................................
Solo function................................................
STEREO/MONO buses........................... 34 ,
STEREO/MONO channels
Sending to MATRIX buses ........................ 54
Surround......................................................
SURROUND SETUP screen.......................
T
Talkback ......................................................
Title list ........................................................
TOUCH AND TURN ....................................
Touch screen...............................................
U
USB flash drive
Formatting ...............................................
Loading a file ...........................................
Loading Help/text file ...............................
Playing back audio files ...........................
Recording ................................................
Saving and loading setup data ................
USB memory recorder.................................
Assigning channels .................................
USER DEFINED keys .................................
Functions that can be assigned...............
Recalling Help .........................................
USER DEFINED knobs ...............................
Functions that can be assigned...............
User settings ...............................................
V
Virtual rack ..................................................
Operations ...............................................
W
Warning/Error Messages.............................
WIRELESS..................................................
Word clock...................................................
Index
V5.8 Reference Manual
Data List
Table of Contents
EQ Library List........................................................................
DYNAMICS Library List ..........................................................
Dynamics Parameters.............................................................
Effect Type List........................................................................
Effects Parameters..................................................................
Premium Rack Processor Parameters ..................................
Parameters That Can Be Assigned to Control Changes .......
NRPN Parameter Assignments ............................................
Mixing Parameter Operation Applicability .............................
MIDI Data Format .................................................................
Input/Output Characteristics .................................................
Electrical Characteristics ......................................................
Mixer Basic Parameters ........................................................
Pin Assignment.....................................................................
MIDI Implementation Chart...................................................
EN
EQ Library List
• Libraries created by the user also include type parameters and BYPASS parameters (ON/OFF) for each band.
• The type parameter for all read-only presets is “LEGACY
(TYPE1).”
# Title
01 Bass Drum 1
02 Bass Drum 2
03 Snare Drum 1
04 Snare Drum 2
05 Tom-tom 1
06 Cymbal
07 High Hat
08 Percussion
09 E. Bass 1
Parameter
LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +3.5 dB
F 100 Hz
Q 1.25
–3.5 dB
265 Hz
10.0
0.0 dB
0.90
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
+4.0 dB
1.06 kHz 5.30 kHz
—
LPF
G +8.0 dB
F 80.0 Hz
Q 1.4
–7.0 dB
400 Hz
4.5
+6.0 dB
2.50 kHz
2.2
ON
12.5 kHz
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –0.5 dB
F 132 Hz
Q 1.25
0.0 dB
1.00 kHz
4.5
+3.0 dB
3.15 kHz
0.11
+4.5 dB
5.00 kHz
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G +1.5 dB
F 180 Hz
Q —
–8.5 dB
335 Hz
10.0
+2.5 dB
2.36 kHz
0.70
+4.0 dB
4.00 kHz
0.10
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G +2.0 dB
F 212 Hz
Q 1.4
–7.5 dB
670 Hz
10.0
+2.0 dB
4.50 kHz
1.25
+1.0 dB
6.30 kHz
0.28
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –2.0 dB
F 106 Hz
Q —
0.0 dB
425 Hz
8.0
0.0 dB
1.06 kHz
0.90
+3.0 dB
13.2 kHz
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –4.0 dB
F 95.0 Hz
Q —
–2.5 dB
425 Hz
0.50
+1.0 dB
2.80 kHz
1.0
+0.5 dB
7.50 kHz
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –4.5 dB
F 100 Hz
Q —
0.0 dB
400 Hz
4.5
+2.0 dB
2.80 kHz
0.56
0.0 dB
17.0 kHz
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –7.5 dB
F 35.5 Hz
Q —
+4.5 dB
112 Hz
5.0
+2.5 dB
2.00 kHz
4.5
0.0 dB
4.00 kHz
—
# Title
10 E. Bass 2
11 Syn. Bass 1
12 Syn. Bass 2
13 Piano 1
14 Piano 2
15 E. G. Clean
16 E. G. Crunch 1
17 E. G. Crunch 2
18 E. G. Dist. 1
19 E. G. Dist. 2
20 A. G. Stroke 1
Parameter
LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +3.0 dB
F 112 Hz
Q 0.10
0.0 dB
112 Hz
5.0
+2.5 dB
2.24 kHz
6.3
+0.5 dB
4.00 kHz
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +3.5 dB +8.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB
F 85.0 Hz 950 Hz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz
Q 0.10
8.0
4.5
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +2.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.5 dB 0.0 dB
F
Q
125 Hz
1.6
180 Hz
8.0
1.12 kHz
2.2
12.5 kHz
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –6.0 dB
F 95.0 Hz
Q —
0.0 dB
950 Hz
8.0
+2.0 dB
3.15 kHz
0.90
+4.0 dB
7.50 kHz
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +3.5 dB –8.5 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB
F 224 Hz 600 Hz 3.15 kHz 5.30 kHz
Q 5.6
10.0
0.70
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +2.0 dB –5.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.5 dB
F
Q
265 Hz
0.18
400 Hz
10.0
1.32 kHz
6.3
4.50 kHz
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G +4.5 dB
F 140 Hz
Q 8.0
0.0 dB +4.0 dB +2.0 dB
1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.60 kHz
4.5
0.63
9.0
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +2.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB
F
Q
125 Hz
8.0
450 Hz
0.40
3.35 kHz
0.16
19.0 kHz
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +5.0 dB
F
Q
355 Hz
—
0.0 dB
950 Hz
9.0
+3.5 dB 0.0 dB
3.35 kHz 12.5 kHz
10.0
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +6.0 dB –8.5 dB +4.5 dB +4.0 dB
F 315 Hz 1.06 kHz 4.25 kHz 12.5 kHz
Q — 10.0
4.0
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –2.0 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +4.0 dB
F
Q
106 Hz
0.90
1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.30 kHz
4.5
3.5
—
2
# Title
21 A. G. Stroke 2
22 A. G. Arpeg. 1
23 A. G. Arpeg. 2
24 Brass Sec.
25 Male Vocal 1
26 Male Vocal 2
27 Female Vo. 1
28 Female Vo. 2
29 Chorus & Harmo
30 Total EQ 1
31 Total EQ 2
Parameter
LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –3.5 dB
F 300 Hz
Q —
–2.0 dB
750 Hz
9.0
0.0 dB
2.00 kHz
4.5
+2.0 dB
3.55 kHz
—
G
F
Q
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB
F 224 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 6.70 kHz
Q — 4.5
4.5
0.125
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
0.0 dB –5.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB
180 Hz
—
355 Hz
7.0
4.00 kHz
4.5
4.25 kHz
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G –2.0 dB
F 90.0 Hz
Q 2.8
–1.0 dB
850 Hz
2.0
+1.5 dB
2.12 kHz
0.70
+3.0 dB
4.50 kHz
7.0
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB
F 190 Hz 1.00 kHz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz
Q 0.11
4.5
0.56
0.11
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +2.0 dB –5.0 dB –2.5 dB +4.0 dB
F
Q
170 Hz
0.11
236 Hz
10.0
2.65 kHz
5.6
6.70 kHz
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G –1.0 dB
F 118 Hz
Q 0.18
+1.0 dB
400 Hz
0.45
+1.5 dB +2.0 dB
2.65 kHz 6.00 kHz
0.56
0.14
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –7.0 dB +1.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB
F
Q
112 Hz
—
335 Hz
0.16
2.00 kHz
0.20
6.70 kHz
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G –2.0 dB
F
Q
90.0 Hz
2.8
–1.0 dB
850 Hz
2.0
+1.5 dB +3.0 dB
2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz
0.70
7.0
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +6.5 dB
F 95.0 Hz 950 Hz 2.12 kHz 16.0 kHz
Q 7.0
2.2
5.6
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +4.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB +6.0 dB
F
Q
95.0 Hz
7.0
750 Hz
2.8
1.80 kHz 18.0 kHz
5.6
—
Data List
# Title
32 Total EQ 3
33 Bass Drum 3
34 Snare Drum 3
35 Tom-tom 2
36 Piano 3
37 Piano Low
38 Piano High
39 Fine-EQ Cass
40 Narrator
Parameter
LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +1.5 dB
F 67.0 Hz
Q —
+0.5 dB
850 Hz
0.28
+2.0 dB
1.90 kHz
0.70
+4.0 dB
15.0 kHz
—
G
F
Q
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G +3.5 dB –10.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB
F 118 Hz 315 Hz 4.25 kHz 20.0 kHz
Q 2.0
10.0
0.40
0.40
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB
224 Hz
—
560 Hz
4.5
4.25 kHz
2.8
4.00 kHz
0.10
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –9.0 dB
F 90.0 Hz
Q —
+1.5 dB
212 Hz
4.5
+2.0 dB
5.30 kHz
1.25
0.0 dB
17.0 kHz
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +4.5 dB –13.0 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB
F 100 Hz 475 Hz 2.36 kHz 10.0 kHz
Q 8.0
10.0
9.0
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –5.5 dB +1.5 dB +6.0 dB 0.0 dB
F
Q
190 Hz
10.0
400 Hz
6.3
6.70 kHz
2.2
12.5 kHz
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G –5.5 dB
F 190 Hz
Q 10.0
+1.5 dB
400 Hz
6.3
+5.0 dB +3.0 dB
6.70 kHz 5.60 kHz
2.2
0.10
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –1.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +3.0 dB
F
Q
75.0 Hz
—
1.00 kHz
4.5
4.00 kHz
1.8
12.5 kHz
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –4.0 dB
F
Q
106 Hz
4.0
–1.0 dB
710 Hz
7.0
+2.0 dB 0.0 dB
2.50 kHz 10.0 kHz
0.63
—
DYNAMICS Library List
# Title Type
1 Gate
2 Ducking
3 A. Dr. BD
4 A. Dr. SN
5 De-Esser
6 Comp
7 Expand
GATE
DUCKING
GATE
GATE
DE-ESSER
COMPRESSOR
EXPANDER
8 Compander (H) COMPANDER-H
9 Compander (S) COMPANDER-S
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
Decay (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
Decay (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
Decay (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
Decay (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Frequency (kHz)
Type
Q
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
3
0.0
2
250
–23
1.6
–8
2.5
30
–8
–23
1
0.63
238
–8
2.00
HPF
93
1.20 S
6.32 S
–11
–53
0
1.93
400
Value
–26
–56
0
2.56
331
–19
–22
0.0
6
250
–8
4
25
0.0
24
180
70
–10
3.5
1
1.7
1
3.5
2
#
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Title
A. Dr. BD
A. Dr. BD
A. Dr. SN
A. Dr. SN
A. Dr. SN
A. Dr. Tom
A. Dr. OverTop
E. B. Finger
Type
COMPRESSOR
COMPANDER-H
COMPRESSOR
EXPANDER
COMPANDER-S
EXPANDER
COMPANDER-S
COMPRESSOR
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
2
151
–8
1.7
11
0.0
10
128
–23
2
0
0.5
8
3.5
2
12
–11
3.5
1
–1.5
7
192
–17
2.5
Value
–24
3
9
5.5
2
58
38
–3.5
54
842
–12
2
15
4.5
2
470
–20
2
2
5.0
2
749
–24
2
Data List
#
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Title
E. B. Slap
Syn. Bass
Piano1
Piano2
E. Guitar
A. Guitar
Strings1
Strings2
Type
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
2
174
–8
3.5
7
2.5
4
261
17
1.0
hard
238
–18
3.5
7
6.0
–10
3.5
9
3.0
hard
250
–9
2.5
Value
–12
1.7
6
4.0
hard
133
33
1.5
2
749
–12
1.5
93
1.5
4
1.35 s
–10
2.5
5
1.5
2
238
–11
2
#
26
27
28
Title
Strings3
BrassSection
Syn. Pad
29 SamplingPerc
30
31
32
33
Sampling BD
Sampling SN
Hip Comp
Solo Vocal1
Type
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPANDER-S
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPANDER-S
COMPRESSOR
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
18
238
–14
2
2
3.5
4
35
58
2.0
1
238
–18
1.7
8
–2.5
–18
1.7
18
4.0
1
226
–13
2
Value
–17
1.5
76
2.5
2
186
15
0.0
15
163
–20
2.5
31
2.0
1
342
–18
4
8
8.0
hard
354
–23
20
4
#
34
35
36
37
38
39
Title
Solo Vocal2
Chorus
Click Erase
Announcer
Limiter1
Limiter2
40 Total Comp1
41 Total Comp2
Type
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
EXPANDER
COMPANDER-H
COMPANDER-S
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
* At fs=44.1 kHz
18
180
–9
3
20
–3.0
90
3.90 s
1
2.0
2
284
–14
2.5
1
–2.5
2
226
–33
2
–9
1.7
39
2.5
Value
–8
2.5
26
1.5
3
331
94
2.5
hard
447
–16
6
11
6.0
1
180
0
∞
0
0.0
hard
319
–18
3.5
Data List
Dynamics Parameters
Dynamics Parameters are the following types.
Type
GATE
DYNAMIC section 1
Input channels
DYNAMIC section 2
DUCKING
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPANDER-H
(Compander Hard)
COMPANDER-S
(Compander Soft)
EXPANDER DE-ESSER
Output channels
DYNAMIC section 1
COMPRESSOR
EXPANDER
COMPANDER-H
(Compander Hard)
COMPANDER-S
(Compander Soft)
GATE
A gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a specified amount (RANGE).
Parameter
THRESHOLD (dB)
RANGE (dB)
ATTACK (ms)
HOLD (ms)
DECAY (ms)
Range
–72 to 0 (73 points)
–∞, –69 to 0 (71 points)
0–120 (121 points)
44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec
48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec (160 points)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
Description
This determines the level at which the gate effect is applied.
This determines the amount of attenuation when the gate closes.
This determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the threshold level.
This determines how long the gate stays open once the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold.
This determines how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
• I/O Characteristics • Time Series Analysis
Input Signal
THRESHOLD
Output Signal
ATTACK
HOLD
DECAY
RANGE
THRESHOLD
RANGE
Input Level Time Time
DUCKING
Ducking is commonly used for voice-over applications in which the background music level is reduced automatically when an announcer speaks.
When the KEY IN source signal level exceeds the specified THRESHOLD, the output level is attenuated by a specified amount (RANGE).
Parameter
THRESHOLD (dB)
RANGE (dB)
ATTACK (ms)
HOLD (ms)
DECAY (ms)
Range
–54 to 0 (55 points)
–70 to 0 (71 points)
0–120 (121 points)
44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec
48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec (160 points)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
Description
This determines the level of trigger signal (KEY IN) required to activate ducking.
This determines the amount of attenuation when ducking is activated.
This determines how soon the signal is ducked once the ducker has been triggered.
This determines how long ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen below the
THRESHOLD level.
This determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
• I/O Characteristics • Time Series Analysis
Input Signal
THRESHOLD
Output Signal
ATTACK
HOLD
DECAY
RANGE
THRESHOLD
RANGE
Input Level Time Time
5 Data List
COMPRESSOR
The COMP processor attenuates signals above a specified THRESHOLD by a specified
RATIO.
The COMP processor can also be used as a limiter, which, with a RATIO of ∞:1, reduces the level to the threshold. This means that the limiter’s output level never actually exceeds the threshold.
Parameter Range
THRESHOLD (dB) –54 to 0 (55 points)
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,
2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points)
ATTACK (ms)
RELEASE (ms)
OUT GAIN (dB)
KNEE
0–120 (121 points)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
0.0 to +18.0 (181 points)
Hard, 1–5 (6 points)
Description
This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compressor.
This determines the amount of compression, that is, the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level.
This determines how soon the signal will be compressed once the compressor has been triggered.
This determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
This sets the compressor’s output signal level.
This determines how compression is applied at the threshold. For higher knee settings, compression is applied gradually as the signal exceeds the specified threshold, creating a more natural sound.
• I/O Characteristics
(KNEE= hard,
OUT GAIN= 0.0dB)
• Time Series Analysis
(RATIO= ∞:1)
THRESHOLD
Input Signal Output Signal
ATTACK RELEASE
RATIO
THRESHOLD
EXPANDER
An expander attenuates signals below a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO.
Parameter
RATIO
Range
THRESHOLD (dB) –54 to 0 (55 points)
Description
This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander.
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,
2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points)
This determines the amount of expansion.
ATTACK (ms)
RELEASE (ms)
OUT GAIN (dB)
KNEE
0–120 (121 points)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
0.0 to +18.0 (181 points)
Hard, 1–5 (6 points)
This determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level exceeds the threshold.
This determines how soon the signal is expanded once the signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by
6 dB.
This sets the expander’s output signal level.
This determines how expansion is applied at the threshold. For higher knee settings, expansion is applied gradually as the signal exceeds the specified threshold, creating a more natural sound.
• I/O Characteristics
(KNEE= hard,
OUT GAIN= 0.0dB)
• Time Series Analysis
(RATIO= ∞:1)
THRESHOLD
Input Signal Output Signal
ATTACK RELEASE
THRESHOLD
Input Level Time Time RATIO
Input Level Time Time
6 Data List
COMPANDER HARD (COMPANDER-H), COMPANDER SOFT
(COMPANDER-S)
The hard and soft companders combine the effects of the compressor, expander and limiter.
THRESHOLD
Input Level
WIDTH
0dB
The companders function differently at the following levels:
1
0 dB and higher ..................................Functions as a limiter.
2
Exceeding the threshold ....................Functions as a compressor.
3 Below the threshold and width .........Functions as an expander.
The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5:1, while the soft compander has an expansion ratio of 1.5:1. The expander is essentially turned off when the width is set to maximum. The compressor has a fixed knee setting of 2.
* The gain is automatically adjusted according to the ratio and threshold values, and can be increased by up to 18 dB.
* The OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for the overall level change caused by the compression and expansion processes.
Parameter
THRESHOLD (dB)
RATIO
Range
–54 to 0 (55 points)
Description
This determines the level at which compression is applied.
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,
2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1 (15 points)
This determines the amount of compression.
ATTACK (ms)
RELEASE (ms)
OUT GAIN (dB)
WIDTH (dB)
0–120 (121 points)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
–18.0 to 0.0 (181 points)
1–90 (90 points)
This determines how soon the signal is compressed or expanded once the compander has been triggered.
This determines how soon the compressor or expander returns to the normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below or exceeds the threshold respectively. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
This sets the compander’s output signal level.
This determines how far below the threshold expansion will be applied. The expander is activated when the level drops below the threshold and width.
DE-ESSER
This detects and compresses only the sibilants and other high-frequency consonants of the vocal.
Parameter
THRESHOLD
FREQUENCY
TYPE
Q
Range
–54 to 0 (55 points)
Description
Threshold level at which the de-esser effect is applied.
1kHz–12.5kHz (45 points) Cutoff frequency of the filter used to detect the high frequencies.
HPF, BPF Type of filter used to detect the frequency band.
10.0–0.10 (41 points) Q (steepness) of the filter when TYPE is BPF.
7
Effect Type List
Title
REV-X Hall
REV-X Room
REV-X Plate
Type
REV-X HALL
REV-X ROOM
REV-X PLATE
Description
New reverb algorithm that delivers dense and rich reverberation, smooth decay, and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the original sound.
Choose from three types depending on your location and needs; REV-X HALL,
REV-X ROOM, and REV-X PLATE.
Reverb Hall REVERB HALL Concert hall reverberation simulation with gate
Reverb Room REVERB ROOM Room reverberation simulation with gate
Reverb Stage REVERB STAGE
Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE
Reverb designed for vocals, with gate
Plate reverb simulation with gate
Stereo Reverb ST REVERB
Early Ref.
EARLY REF.
Gate Reverb GATE REVERB
Reverse Gate REVERSE GATE
Mono Delay
Stereo Delay
Mod.Delay
Delay LCR
MONO DELAY
STEREO DELAY
MOD.DELAY
DELAY LCR
Stereo reverb
Early reflections without the subsequent reverb
Gated early reflections
Gated reverse early reflections
Simple mono delay
Simple stereo delay
Simple repeat delay with modulation
3-tap (left, center, right) delay
Echo
Chorus
Flange
Symphonic
ECHO Stereo delay with crossed left/right feedback
CHORUS Chorus
FLANGE Flanger
SYMPHONIC
Proprietary Yamaha effect that produces a richer and more complex modulation than normal chorus
Phaser
Dyna.Flange
Dyna.Phaser
HQ. Pitch
Dual Pitch
Tremolo
Auto Pan
Rotary
Ring Mod.
Mod.Filter
Dyna.Filter
PHASER 16-stage stereo phase shifter
DYNA.FLANGE
Dynamically controlled flanger
DYNA.PHASER
HQ.PITCH
Dynamically controlled phase shifter
Mono pitch shifter, producing stable results
DUAL PITCH Stereo pitch shifter
TREMOLO Tremolo
AUTO PAN Auto-panner
RING MOD.
MOD.FILTER
Ring modulator
Modulated filter
Rev+Chorus
Rev → Chorus
Rev+Flange
Rev → Flange
REV+CHORUS
REV → CHORUS Reverb and chorus in series
REV+FLANGE
REV → FLANGE
Reverb and chorus in parallel
Reverb and flanger in parallel
Reverb and flanger in series
Rev+Sympho.
REV+SYMPHO.
Reverb and symphonic in parallel
Rev → Sympho.
REV → SYMPHO.
Rev → Pan REV → PAN
Reverb and symphonic in series
Reverb and auto-pan in series
Delay+Er.
DELAY+ER.
Delay and early reflections in parallel
Data List
Title
Delay
→
Er.
Delay+Rev
Delay
→
Rev
Dist
→
Delay
Multi Filter
Type
DELAY
→
ER.
DELAY+REV
DELAY
→
REV
DIST
→
DELAY
MULTI FILTER
Delay and early reflections in series
Delay and reverb in parallel
Delay and reverb in series
Distortion and delay in series
3-band parallel filter (24 dB/octave)
Freeze
Distortion DISTORTION Distortion
Amp Simulate AMP SIMULATE Guitar amp simulation
Description
Comp276
Comp276S
Comp260
Comp260S
COMP276
COMP276S
COMP260
COMP260S
This compressor emulates the characteristics of an analog compressor that has become a sought-after classic in recording studios.
This is a stereo model of COMP276.
This compressor emulates the characteristics of a compressor/limiter of the latter
1970s that has become a sought-after classic for live SR.
This is a stereo model of the COMP260.
Equalizer601
OpenDeck
EQUALIZER601
OPENDECK
This equalizer emulates the characteristics of an analog equalizer of the 1970s. It can be used to obtain a sense of drive.
This is a tape saturation effect that emulates the tape compression produced by two open-reel tape recorders: a recording deck and a reproduction deck.
M.Band Dyna.
M.BAND DYNA. Multi-band dynamics processor
M.Band Comp M.BAND COMP Multi-band compressor
Effects Parameters
REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, REV-X PLATE
Newly-developed two input, two output reverb algorithm. Delivers dense and rich reverberation, smooth decay, and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the original sound. Choose from three types depending on your location and needs; REV-X
HALL, REV-X ROOM, and REV-X PLATE.
Parameter
REV TIME
INI. DLY
Range
0.28–27.94 s
*1
0.0–120.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
LO. RATIO 0.1–1.4
LO.FREQ
22.0 Hz–18.0 kHz
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
Frequency point for LO.RATIO setting
DIFF.
0–10
ROOM SIZE 0–28
DECAY
HPF
0–53
Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread)
Size of room
Gate closing speed
THRU, 22.0 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
1.00 kHz–18.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
*1.
These values are for when the effect type is REV-X HALL and the ROOM SIZE=28. The range will differ depending on the effect type and ROOM SIZE setting.
REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE
One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb simulations, all with gates.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4
DIFF.
0–10
DENSITY
E/R DLY
0–100%
0.0–100.0 ms
Reverb time
Description
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread)
Reverb density
Delay between early reflections and reverb
E/R BAL.
0–100%
Balance of early reflections and reverb
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF
LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
GATE LVL OFF, –60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in
ATTACK
HOLD
0–120 ms
*1
Gate opening speed
Gate open time
DECAY *2 Gate closing speed
*1.
0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz)
*2. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
8 Data List
STEREO REVERB
Two input, two output stereo reverb.
Parameter
REV TIME
Range
0.3–99.0 s Reverb time
REV TYPE Hall, Room, Stage, Plate Reverb type
Description
INI. DLY 0.0–100.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4
DIFF.
DENSITY
E/R BAL.
HPF
LPF
0–10
0–100%
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
Reverb density
0–100%
Balance of early reflections and reverb
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
EARLY REF.
One input, two output early reflections.
Parameter Range
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
LIVENESS
INI. DLY
DIFF.
0–10
0.0–500.0 ms
0–10
Description
Type of early reflection simulation
Reflection spacing
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
Initial delay before reverb begins
Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread)
DENSITY
ER NUM.
0–100%
1–19
Reflection density
Number of early reflections
FB GAIN –99 to +99%
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
HPF
Feedback gain
High-frequency feedback ratio
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
9
GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE
One input, two output early reflections with gate, and early reflections with reverse gate.
Parameter
TYPE
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
Range
Type-A, Type-B
LIVENESS 0–10
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
DIFF.
0–10
Description
Type of early reflection simulation
Reflection spacing
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
Initial delay before reverb begins
Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread)
DENSITY 0–100%
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
ER NUM.
1–19
FB GAIN
HPF
LPF
Reflection density
High-frequency feedback ratio
Number of early reflections
–99 to +99% Feedback gain
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
MONO DELAY
One input, one output basic repeat delay.
Parameter
DELAY
FB. GAIN
Range
0.0–2730.0 ms
–99 to +99%
Description
Delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-frequency feedback ratio
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
SYNC
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
OFF/ON
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
*1.
setting)
(Maximum value depends on the tempo
STEREO DELAY
Two input, two output basic stereo delay.
Parameter
DELAY L
DELAY R
FB. G L
Range
0.0–1350.0 ms
0.0–1350.0 ms
–99 to +99%
Description
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
FB. G R –99 to +99%
Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
HPF
LPF
SYNC
NOTE L
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
OFF/ON
*1
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Data List
MOD. DELAY
One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation.
Parameter
DELAY
FB. GAIN
HI. RATIO
FREQ.
DEPTH
WAVE
HPF
LPF
SYNC
DLY.NOTE
MOD.NOTE
Range
0.0–2725.0 ms
–99 to +99%
0.1–1.0
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
Sine/Tri
Modulation depth
Modulation waveform
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Description
Delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio
Modulation speed
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
*1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
*2
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
*1.
*2.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
DELAY LCR
One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right).
Parameter
DELAY L
DELAY C
DELAY R
FB. DLY
LEVEL L
LEVEL C
LEVEL R
FB. GAIN
Range
0.0–2730.0 ms
0.0–2730.0 ms
0.0–2730.0 ms
0.0–2730.0 ms
–100 to +100%
–100 to +100%
–100 to +100%
–99 to +99%
Description
Left channel delay time
Center channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
Left channel delay level
Center channel delay level
Right channel delay level
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-frequency feedback ratio
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
SYNC
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
OFF/ON
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
NOTE C
NOTE R
NOTE FB
*1
*1
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine center channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
10
ECHO
Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop.
L
Parameter
DELAY L
DELAY R
FB.DLY L
FB.DLY R
FB. G L
FB. G R
→ R FBG
Range
0.0–1350.0 ms
0.0–1350.0 ms
0.0–1350.0 ms
0.0–1350.0 ms
–99 to +99%
–99 to +99%
–99 to +99%
Description
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Left channel feedback delay time
Right channel feedback delay time
Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
R → L FBG –99 to +99%
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
SYNC
NOTE L
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
OFF/ON
*1
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
NOTE R
NOTE FBL
NOTE FBR
*1
*1
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel feedback
DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel feedback
DELAY
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
CHORUS
Two input, two output chorus effect.
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
HSH F
HSH G
Parameter Range
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
AM DEPTH 0–100%
PM DEPTH 0–100%
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
WAVE
SYNC
Sine, Tri
OFF/ON
NOTE *1
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0–0.10
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
*1.
Description
Modulation speed
Amplitude modulation depth
Pitch modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
Data List
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
HSH F
HSH G
*1.
FLANGE
Two input, two output flange effect.
Parameter
FREQ.
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
DEPTH 0–100%
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
FB. GAIN –99 to +99%
Sine, Tri
OFF/ON
*1
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0–0.10
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Description
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
SYMPHONIC
Two input, two output symphonic effect.
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
HSH F
HSH G
Parameter
FREQ.
DEPTH
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
WAVE Sine, Tri
SYNC
NOTE
OFF/ON
*1
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0–0.10
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
*1.
Description
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
PHASER
Two input, two output 16-stage phaser.
OFFSET
PHASE
STAGE
SYNC
NOTE
LSH F
LSH G
HSH F
HSH G
Parameter
FREQ.
DEPTH
FB. GAIN
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Description
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset 0–100
0.00–354.38 degrees Left and right modulation phase balance
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages
OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
*1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
*1.
DYNA.FLANGE
Two input, two output dynamically controlled flanger.
Parameter
SOURCE
SENSE
DIR.
DECAY
OFFSET
Range
INPUT, MIDI
0–100
UP, DOWN
*1
0–100
FB.GAIN
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
HSH F
HSH G
–99 to +99%
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0–0.10
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Description
Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
Sensitivity
Upward or downward frequency change
Decay speed
Delay time offset
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
*1.
6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
11 Data List
DYNA.PHASER
Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser.
Parameter
SOURCE
SENSE
DIR.
DECAY
OFFSET
FB.GAIN
STAGE
LSH F
LSH G
HSH F
HSH G
0–100
*1
Range
INPUT, MIDI
UP, DOWN
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Description
Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
Sensitivity
Upward or downward frequency change
Decay speed
0–100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
*1.
6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
HQ.PITCH
One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter.
Parameter
PITCH
FINE
DELAY
Range
–12 to +12 semitones
–50 to +50 cents
0.0–1000.0 ms
FB. GAIN
MODE
SYNC
NOTE
–99 to +99%
1–10
OFF/ON
*1
Description
Pitch shift
Pitch shift fine
Delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Pitch shift precision
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
DUAL PITCH
Two input, two output pitch shifter.
Parameter
PITCH 1
FINE 1
Range
–24 to +24 semitones
–50 to +50 cents
LEVEL 1
PAN 1
DELAY 1
FB. G 1
MODE
PITCH 2
FINE 2
LEVEL 2
PAN 2
DELAY 2
FB. G 2
SYNC
NOTE 1
NOTE 2
*1.
–100 to +100%
L63 to R63
0.0–1000.0 ms
–99 to +99%
1–10
–24 to +24 semitones
–50 to +50 cents
–100 to +100%
L63 to R63
0.0–1000.0 ms
–99 to +99%
OFF/ON
*1
*1
Description
Channel #1 pitch shift
Channel #1 pitch shift fine
Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase)
Channel #1 pan
Channel #1 delay time
Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Pitch shift precision
Channel #2 pitch shift
Channel #2 pitch shift fine
Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase)
Channel #2 pan
Channel #2 delay time
Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #1 delay
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #2 delay
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
TREMOLO
Two input, two output tremolo effect.
Parameter
FREQ.
DEPTH
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
HSH F
HSH G
*1.
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
Sine, Tri, Square
OFF/ON
*1
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0–0.10
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Description
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
12 Data List
AUTOPAN
Two input, two output autopanner.
Parameter
FREQ.
DEPTH
DIR.
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
HSH F
HSH G
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
*1
Sine, Tri, Square
OFF/ON
*2
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0–0.10
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
*1.
L ↔ R, L → R, L ← R, Turn L, Turn R
*2.
Description
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Panning direction
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
ROTARY
One input, two output rotary speaker simulator.
Parameter
ROTATE
SPEED
SLOW
FAST
DRIVE
ACCEL
LOW
HIGH
Range
STOP, START
SLOW, FAST
0.05–10.00 Hz
0.05–10.00 Hz
0–100
0–10
0–100
0–100
Description
Rotation stop, start
Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters)
SLOW rotation speed
FAST rotation speed
Overdrive level
Acceleration at speed changes
Low-frequency filter
High-frequency filter
13
RING MOD.
Two input, two output ring modulator.
Parameter
SOURCE
Range
OSC, SELF
OSC FREQ 0.0–5000.0 Hz
FM FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
FM DEPTH 0–100%
SYNC OFF/ON
FM NOTE *1
Description
Modulation source: oscillator or input signal
Oscillator frequency
Oscillator frequency modulation speed
Oscillator frequency modulation depth
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FM FREQ
*1.
MOD.FILTER
Two input, two output modulation filter.
Parameter
FREQ.
DEPTH
PHASE
TYPE
OFFSET
RESO.
LEVEL
SYNC
NOTE
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
0.00–354.38 degrees
LPF, HPF, BPF
0–100
0–20
0–100
OFF/ON
*1
Description
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation phase difference
Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass
Filter frequency offset
Filter resonance
Output level
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
*1.
DYNA.FILTER
Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter.
Parameter Range
SOURCE
SENSE
DIR.
DECAY
TYPE
OFFSET
RESO.
LEVEL
INPUT, MIDI
0–100
UP, DOWN
*1
LPF, HPF, BPF
0–100
0–20
0–100
Description
Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
Sensitivity
Upward or downward frequency change
Filter frequency change decay speed
Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass
Filter frequency offset
Filter resonance
Output level
*1.
6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
Data List
REV+CHORUS
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
DIFF.
0–10
DENSITY 0–100%
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
Reverb density
REV/CHO
HPF
0–100%
Reverb and chorus balance
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all chorus)
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
FREQ.
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
0.05–40.00 Hz
AM DEPTH 0–100%
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Modulation speed
Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH 0–100%
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
WAVE Sine, Tri
SYNC
NOTE
OFF/ON
*1
Pitch modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
*1.
REV
→
CHORUS
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
DIFF.
DENSITY
0–10
0–100%
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
Reverb density
REV.BAL
0–100%
Reverb and chorused reverb balance
(0% = all chorused reverb, 100% = all reverb)
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF
LPF
FREQ.
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
AM DEPTH 0–100%
PM DEPTH 0–100%
Amplitude modulation depth
Pitch modulation depth
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
WAVE Sine, Tri
SYNC
NOTE
OFF/ON
*1
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
*1.
14
REV+FLANGE
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1
– 1.0
DIFF.
0 – 10
DENSITY 0–100%
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
Reverb density
REV/FLG 0–100%
Reverb and flange balance
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all flange)
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF
LPF
FREQ.
DEPTH
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
FB. GAIN
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
0–100%
–99 to +99%
Modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
Sine, Tri
OFF/ON
*1
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
*1.
REV
→
FLANGE
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in series.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1
– 1.0
DIFF.
DENSITY
0 – 10
0–100%
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
Reverb density
REV.BAL
0–100%
Reverb and flanged reverb balance
(0% = all flanged reverb, 100% = all reverb)
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF
LPF
FREQ.
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0–100%
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation depth
Modulation delay time
FB. GAIN
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
–99 to +99%
Sine, Tri
OFF/ON
*1
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
*1.
Data List
REV+SYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
DIFF.
0 – 10
DENSITY 0–100%
REV/SYM
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
Reverb density
0–100%
Reverb and symphonic balance
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all symphonic)
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF
LPF
FREQ.
DEPTH
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
0.0–500.0 ms
Sine, Tri
OFF/ON
*1
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
*1.
REV
→
SYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in series.
Parameter
DENSITY
REV.BAL
Range
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
DIFF.
0 – 10
0–100%
0–100%
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
Reverb density
Reverb and symphonic reverb balance
(0% = all symphonic reverb, 100% = all reverb)
HPF
LPF
FREQ.
DEPTH
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
WAVE Sine, Tri
SYNC
NOTE
OFF/ON
*1
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
*1.
15
REV
→
PAN
This is a 1-in/2-out series-connected reverb and auto-pan effect.
Parameter
REV TIME
DENSITY
REV.BAL
HPF
LPF
FREQ.
DEPTH
DIR.
0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1
– 1.0
DIFF.
0 – 10
0–100%
Range Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
Reverb density
0–100%
Reverb and panned reverb balance
(0% = all panned reverb, 100% = all reverb)
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
*1
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Panning direction
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
Sine, Tri, Square
OFF/ON
*2
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
*1.
L ↔ R, L → R, L ← R, Turn L, Turn R
*2.
DELAY+ER.
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel.
Parameter
DELAY L
DELAY R
FB. DLY
FB. GAIN
HI. RATIO
DLY/ER
Range
0.0
– 1000.0 ms
0.0
– 1000.0 ms
0.0
– 1000.0 ms
–99 to +99%
0.1–1.0
0–100%
Description
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio
Delay and early reflections balance
(0% = all delay, 100% = all early reflections)
HPF
LPF
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
LIVENESS
INI. DLY
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
0–10
0.0–500.0 ms
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Type of early reflection simulation
Reflection spacing
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
DIFF.
DENSITY
0–10
0–100%
Initial delay before reverb begins
Spread
Reflection density
ER NUM.
SYNC
NOTE L
1
OFF/ON
*1
– 19 Number of early reflections
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
NOTE R
NOTE FB
*1
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Data List
DELAY
→
ER.
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in series.
Parameter
DELAY L
DELAY R
FB. DLY
FB. GAIN
HI. RATIO
DLY.BAL
Range
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
–99 to +99%
0.1–1.0
0–100%
Description
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio
Delay and early reflected delay balance
(0% = all early reflected delay, 100% = all delay)
HPF
LPF
TYPE
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
LIVENESS 0–10
Reflection spacing
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI. DLY
DIFF.
DENSITY
ER NUM.
SYNC
NOTE L
0.0–500.0 ms
0–10
0–100%
1–19
OFF/ON
*1
Initial delay before reverb begins
Spread
Reflection density
Number of early reflections
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
NOTE R
NOTE FB
*1
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
DELAY+REV
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel.
Parameter
DELAY L
DELAY R
FB. DLY
FB. GAIN
Range
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
–99 to +99%
Description
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Delay high-frequency feedback ratio DELAY HI 0.1–1.0
DLY/REV 0–100%
Delay and reverb balance
(0% = all delay, 100% = all reverb)
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF
LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time
INI. DLY
REV HI
DIFF.
DENSITY
0.0–500.0 ms
0.1–1.0
0–10
0–100%
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
Reverb density
16
Parameter
SYNC
NOTE L
NOTE R
NOTE FB
*1.
OFF/ON
*1
Range
*1
*1
Description
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
DELAY
→
REV
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series.
Parameter
DELAY L
DELAY R
FB. DLY
FB. GAIN
Range
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
–99 to +99%
Description
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY HI
DLY.BAL
0.1–1.0
0–100%
Delay high-frequency feedback ratio
Delay and delayed reverb balance
(0% = all delayed reverb, 100% = all delay)
HPF
LPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
REV HI
DIFF.
DENSITY
SYNC
NOTE L
0.1–1.0
0–10
0–100%
OFF/ON
*1
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
Reverb density
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
NOTE R
NOTE FB
*1
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Data List
DIST
→
DELAY
One input, two output distortion and delay effects in series.
Description Parameter
DST TYPE
DRIVE
MASTER
TONE
N. GATE
SYNC
DLY.NOTE
MOD.NOTE
DELAY
Range
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
0–100
0–100
–10 to +10
0–20
OFF/ON
*1
*2
0.0–2725.0 ms
FB. GAIN
HI. RATIO
FREQ.
DEPTH
DLY.BAL
–99 to +99%
0.1–1.0
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
0–100%
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
Distortion drive
Master volume
Tone control
Noise reduction
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
Delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Distortion and delay balance
(0% = all distortion, 100% = all delayed distortion)
(Maximum value depends on the tempo *1.
*2.
setting)
MULTI FILTER
Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter (24 dB/octave).
Parameter
TYPE 1
FREQ. 1
LEVEL 1
RESO. 1
TYPE 2
FREQ. 2
LEVEL 2
RESO. 2
TYPE 3
FREQ. 3
LEVEL 3
RESO. 3
Range
LPF, HPF, BPF
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
0–100
0–20
LPF, HPF, BPF
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
0–100
0–20
LPF, HPF, BPF
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
0–100
0–20
Description
Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
Filter 1 frequency
Filter 1 level
Filter 1 resonance
Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
Filter 2 frequency
Filter 2 level
Filter 2 resonance
Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
Filter 3 frequency
Filter 3 level
Filter 3 resonance
FREEZE
One input, two output basic sampler.
Parameter
REC MODE
REC DLY
PLY MODE
TRG LVL
TRG MASK
MOMENT, CONTI.,
INPUT
Range
MANUAL, INPUT
–1000 to +1000 ms
–60 to 0 dB
0–1000 ms
Description
In MANUAL mode, recording is started by pressing the REC and PLAY buttons. In INPUT mode, Record-Ready mode is engaged by pressing the
REC button, and actual recording is triggered by the input signal.
Recording delay.
For plus values, recording starts after the trigger is received. For minus values, recording starts before the trigger is received.
In MOMENT mode, the sample plays only while the PLAY button is pressed. In CONT mode, playback continues once the PLAY button has been pressed. The number of times the sample plays is set using the LOOP
NUM parameter. In INPUT mode, playback is triggered by the input signal.
Input trigger level (i.e., the signal level required to trigger recording or playback)
Once playback has been triggered, subsequent triggers are ignored for the duration of the TRG MASK time.
Playback start point in milliseconds
Playback end point in milliseconds
Loop start point in milliseconds
START *1
END
LOOP
LOOP
NUM
PITCH
FINE
*1
*1
0–100
–12 to +12 semitones
–50 to +50 cents
MIDI TRG OFF, C1–C6, ALL
START
[SAMPLE]
0–131000
END
[SAMPLE]
LOOP
[SAMPLE]
0–131000
0–131000
Number of times the sample plays
Playback pitch shift
Playback pitch shift fine
The PLAY button can be triggered by using MIDI Note on/off messages.
Playback start point in samples
Playback end point in samples
Loop start point in samples
*1.
0.0
–5 941.0 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0 ms –5 458.3 ms (fs=48 kHz)
DISTORTION
One input, two output distortion effect.
Parameter
DST TYPE
DRIVE
MASTER
TONE
N. GATE
Range
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
0–100
0–100
–10 to +10
0–20
Distortion drive
Master volume
Tone control
Noise reduction
Description
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
17 Data List
AMP SIMULATE
One input, two output guitar amp simulator.
Parameter
AMP TYPE
DST TYPE
DRIVE
MASTER
BASS
MIDDLE
TREBLE
N. GATE
CAB DEP
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
*1
Range
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
0–100
0–100
0–100
0–100
0–100
0–20
0–100%
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0–0.10
Guitar amp simulation type
Description
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
Distortion drive
Master volume
Bass tone control
Middle tone control
High tone control
Noise reduction
Speaker cabinet simulation depth
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
*1.
STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT
COMP276
This effect emulates the characteristics of analog compressors that are widely used in recording studios. It produces a thick, strong frame sound suitable for drums and bass. You can control two monaural channels independently.
Parameter
INPUT 1
Range
–180 to 0 dB Adjusts the CH1 input level
OUTPUT 1 –180 to 0 dB
RATIO 1 2:1, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1
Adjusts the CH1 output gain
Ratio for CH1 compressor
ATTACK 1 0.022–50.4 ms
RELEASE1 10.88–544.22 ms
MAKE UP1
SIDEHPF1
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
Description
Attack time of CH1 compressor
Release time of CH1 compressor
Automatically corrects output gain reduction when CH1 compressor is applied
When the HPF in the side chain of the CH1 compressor is turned on, the compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing the low range.
INPUT 2 –180 to 0 dB
OUTPUT 2 –180 to 0 dB
RATIO 2 2:1, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1 Ratio of CH2 compressor
ATTACK 2 0.022–50.4 ms Attack time of CH2 compressor
RELEASE2 10.88–544.22 ms
Adjusts the CH2 input level
Adjusts the CH2 output gain
MAKE UP2 OFF, ON
Release time of CH2 compressor
Automatically corrects output gain reduction when the CH2 compressor is applied
SIDEHPF2 OFF, ON
When the HPF in the side chain of the CH2 compressor is turned on, the compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing the low range.
18
COMP276S
This effect emulates the characteristics of analog compressors that are widely used in recording studios. It produces a thick, strong frame sound suitable for drums and bass. You can link and control the L and R channel parameters.
Parameter
INPUT
OUTPUT
RATIO
ATTACK
RELEASE
MAKE UP
SIDE HPF
Range
–180 to 0 dB
–180 to 0 dB
2:1, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1 Ratio of the compressor
0.022–50.4 ms Attack time of the compressor
10.88–544.22 ms
Adjusts the input level
Adjusts the output gain
OFF, ON
Description
Release time of the compressor
Automatically corrects output gain reduction when the compressor is applied
OFF, ON
When the HPF in the side chain of the compressor is turned on, the compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing the low range.
COMP260
This effect emulates the characteristics of mid 70’s compressors/limiters that are the standard for live SR. You can control two monaural channels independently. You can also link several parameters via stereo links.
Parameter
THRE.1
KNEE1
Range
–60 to 0.0 dB
SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD
ATTACK1 0.01–80.0 ms
RELEASE1 6.2–999 ms
RATIO1 1.0–500, ∞
OUTPUT1 –20 to 40 dB
THRE.2
KNEE2
–60 to 0.0 dB
SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD
ATTACK2 0.01–80.0 ms
RELEASE2 6.2–999 ms
RATIO2 1.0–500, ∞
OUTPUT2 –20 to 40 dB
ST LINK OFF, ON
Description
Threshold of CH compressor
Knee of CH1 compressor
Attack time of CH1 compressor
Release time of CH1 compressor
Ratio for CH1 compressor
Adjusts the CH1 output gain
Threshold of CH2 compressor
Knee of CH2 compressor
Attack time of CH2 compressor
Release time of CH2 compressor
Ratio of CH2 compressor
Adjusts the CH2 output gain
Links CH1 and CH2 as a stereo pair. THRE., KNEE, ATTACK, RELEASE, and
RATIO parameters are linked; OUTPUT parameter is not linked
COMP260S
This effect emulates the characteristics of mid 70’s compressors/limiters that are the standard for live SR. You can link and control the L and R channel parameters.
Parameter
THRE.
KNEE
ATTACK
RELEASE
RATIO
OUTPUT
Range
–60 to 0.0 dB
SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD
0.01–80.0 ms
6.2–999 ms
1.0–500, ∞
–20 to 40 dB
Threshold of the compressor
Knee of the compressor
Attack time of the compressor
Release time of the compressor
Ratio of the compressor
Adjusts the output gain
Description
Data List
EQUALIZER601
This effect emulates the characteristics of 70’s analog equalizers. Re-creating the distortion of typical analog circuits will add drive to the sound.
Parameter
LO TYPE
LO F
LO G
MID1 Q
MID1 F
MID1 G
MID2 Q
MID2 F
MID2 G
INPUT
OUTPUT
MID3 Q
MID3 F
MID3 G
MID4 Q
MID4 F
MID4 G
HI TYPE
HI F
HI G
LO SW
MID1 SW
MID2 SW
MID3 SW
MID4 SW
HI SW
TYPE
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
Range
HPF-2/1, LSH-1/2
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
0.50–16.0
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
0.50–16.0
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
0.50–16.0
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
0.50–16.0
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
LPF-2/1, HSH-1/2
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
CLEAN, DRIVE
*1
Description
Type of EQ1
Cut-off frequency of EQ1
Gain of EQ1
Q of EQ2
Center frequency of EQ2
Gain of EQ2
Q of EQ3
Center frequency of EQ3
Gain of EQ3
Input gain
Output gain
Q of EQ4
Center frequency of EQ4
Gain of EQ4
Q of EQ5
Center frequency of EQ5
Gain of EQ5
Type of EQ6
Cut-off frequency of EQ6
Gain of EQ6
Switches EQ1 on/off
Switches EQ2 on/off
Switches EQ3 on/off
Switches EQ4 on/off
Switches EQ5 on/off
Switches EQ6 on/off
Selects the equalizer type.
The CLEAN equalizer provides non-distorted, clear, typical digital sound, emulating variations in frequency response in the analog circuits. The
DRIVE equalizer provides distorted, driven sound that enhances analog flavor, emulating changes in frequency response in the analog circuits.
*1.
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz (LPF-1, LPF-2), 1.0 kHz to 20.0 kHz (HSH-1, HSH-2)
19
OPENDECK
It emulates the tape compression created by two open reel tape recorders (a recording deck and a playback deck). You can change the sound quality by adjusting various elements, such as the deck type, tape quality, playback speed, etc.
Parameter
REC DEC
REC LVL
REC HI
REC BIAS
REPR DEC
REPR LVL
REPR HI
REPR LO
MAKE UP
TP SPEED
TP KIND
Range
Swss70, Swss78, Swss85,
Amer70
Selects the recording deck type
Description
–96.0 to +18.0 dB
Adjusts the input level of the recording deck. As you raise the level, tape compression is generated, which narrows the dynamic range and distorts the sound.
Adjusts the high range gain of the recording deck
Adjusts the bias of the recording deck
–6.0 to +6.0 dB
–1.00 to +1.00
Swss70, Swss78, Swss85,
Amer70
–96.0 to +18.0 dB
–6.0 to +6.0 dB
–6.0 to +6.0 dB
Off, On
15ips, 30ips
Old, New
Selects the playback deck type
Adjusts the output level of the playback deck
Adjusts the high range gain of the playback deck
Adjusts the low range gain of the playback deck
When you adjust the REC LVL, the REPR LVL reflects the change, maintaining the relative output level. You can change the amount of distortion without changing the output level.
Selects the tape speed
Selects the tape type
M.BAND DYNA.
Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band.
Parameter Range
L-M XOVER 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
M-H XOVER 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
SLOPE –6 dB, –12 dB
LOW GAIN –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
MID GAIN –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
HI. GAIN –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
TOTAL –72.0 dB to +12.0 dB
CEILING –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF
CMP.THRE
–24.0 dB to 0.0 dB
CMP.RAT
CMP.ATK
CMP.REL
1:1 to 20:1
0–120 ms
*1
CMP.KNEE
0–5
CMP.BYP
OFF/ON
EXP.THRE
EXP.RAT
–54.0 dB to –24.0 dB
1:1 to 5:1
*1 EXP.REL
EXP.BYP
LIM.THRE
OFF/ON
–12.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Description
Crossover frequency between the low and mid bands
Crossover frequency between the mid and high bands
Filter slope
Low band gain
Mid band gain
High band gain
Overall gain
Restricts the output so that it will not exceed the specified level
Threshold of the compressor
Ratio of the compressor
Attack time of the compressor
Release time of the compressor
Knee of the compressor
Bypasses the compressor
Threshold of the expander
Ratio of the expander
Release time of the expander
Bypasses the expander
Threshold of the limiter
Data List
Parameter
LIM.ATK
LIM.REL
LIM.KNEE
LIM.BYP
PRESENCE
0–120 ms
*1
0–5
OFF/ON
Range
–10 to +10
LOOKUP
MAKE UP
0.0–100.0 ms
OFF/ON
*1.
6.0 ms –4 6.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms –4 2.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
Description
Attack time of the limiter
Release time of the limiter
Knee of the limiter
Bypasses the limiter
Positive (+) values lower the threshold of the high band and raise the threshold of the low band. Negative (–) values do the opposite. If this is set to 0, the high, mid, and low bands will be affected in the same way.
Lookup delay
Automatically adjusts the output level
M.BAND COMP
Two input, two output 3-band compressor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band.
Parameter Range
L-M XOVER 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
M-H XOVER 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
SLOPE –6 dB, –12 dB
LOW GAIN –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
MID GAIN –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
HI. GAIN –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
TOTAL –72.0 dB to +12.0 dB
CEILING –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF
LOW THRE –54.0 dB to 0.0 dB
LOW RAT
LOW ATK
LOW REL
1:1 to 20:1
0–120 ms
*1
LOW KNEE 0–5
LOW BYP
MID THRE
OFF/ON
–54.0 dB to 0.0 dB
MID RAT
MID ATK
1:1 to 20:1
0–120 ms
MID REL *1
MID KNEE 0–5
MID BYP
HI. THRE
HI. RAT
HI. ATK
HI. RAT
HI. KNEE
HI. BYP
LOOKUP
MAKE UP
OFF/ON
–54.0 dB to 0.0 dB
1:1 to 20:1
0–120 ms
*1
0–5
OFF/ON
0.0–100.0 ms
OFF/ON
*1.
6.0 ms –4 6.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms –4 2.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
Description
Crossover frequency between the low and mid bands
Crossover frequency between the mid and high bands
Filter slope
Low band gain
Mid band gain
High band gain
Overall gain
Restricts the output so that it will not exceed the specified level
Threshold of the low band compressor
Ratio of the low band compressor
Attack time of the low band compressor
Release time of the low band compressor
Knee of the low band compressor
Bypasses the low band compressor
Threshold of the mid band compressor
Ratio of the mid band compressor
Attack time of the mid band compressor
Release time of the mid band compressor
Knee of the mid band compressor
Bypasses the mid band compressor
Threshold of the high band compressor
Ratio of the high band compressor
Attack time of the high band compressor
Release time of the high band compressor
Knee of the high band compressor
Bypasses the high band compressor
Lookup delay
Automatically adjusts the output level
20
Premium Rack Processor Parameters
Portico5033
This models an analog 5-band EQ made by the RND company.
Parameter
ALL BYPASS OFF, ON
Range
TRIM
LF FREQ
LF GAIN
LMF IN
LMF Q
LMF FREQ
LMF GAIN
MF IN
MF Q
–12.0 to 12.0 dB
30.00 to 300.0 Hz
–12.0 to 12.0 dB
OFF, ON
0.70 to 5.00
50.00 to 400.0 Hz
–12.0 to 12.0 dB
OFF, ON
0.70 to 5.00
MF FREQ
MF GAIN
HMF IN
330.0 to 2500 Hz
–12.0 to 12.0 dB
OFF, ON
HMF Q 0.70 to 5.00
HMF FREQ 1.80k to 16.0k Hz
HMF GAIN –12.0 to 12.0 dB
LF/HF IN
HF FREQ
HF GAIN
OFF, ON
2.50k to 25.0k Hz
–12.0 to 12.0 dB
Description
Turns bypass on/off for the EQ. Even in the bypassed state, the signal will pass through the input/output transformers and the amp circuit.
Input gain
Center frequency of the LF band
Gain of the LF band
Switches the LMF band on/off
Q of the LMF band
Center frequency of the LMF band
Gain of the LMF band
Switches the MF band on/off
Q of the MF band
Center frequency of the MF band
Gain of the MF band
Switches the HMF band on/off
Q of the HMF band
Center frequency of the HMF band
Gain of the HMF band
Switches the LF/HF bands on/off
Center frequency of the HF band
Gain of the HF band
Portico5043
This models an analog compressor/limiter made by the RND company.
Parameter
IN OFF, ON
Range
FB OFF, ON
THRESHOLD –50.0 to 0.0 dB
RATIO
ATTACK
RELEASE
GAIN
Description
Turns bypass on/off for the compressor. When bypassed, the button will be unlit. However even in the bypassed state, the signal will pass through the input/output transformers and the amp circuit.
Switches between feed-forward type and feed-back type
Threshold level
1.10 : 1 to 28.9 : 1, LIMIT Compression ratio
20 to 75 ms
100 ms to 2.50 sec
–6.0 to 20.0 dB
Attack time
Release time
Output level
Data List
Portico 5045
This models the Primary Source Enhancer made by Rupert Neve Designs.
Parameter Range
PROCESS ENGAGE
RMS/Peak
TIME CONSTANT
THRESHOLD
DEPTH
OFF, ON
RMS, Peak
A, B, C, D, E, F
-42.0 to -12.0 dB
0.0 to -20.0 dB
Description
Turns the enhancement circuit on/off. Even when this is off, the signal passes through the audio transformer and discrete amp circuit.
Operation mode of the level detector.
Attack and release time.
Threshold level.
Amount of attenuation for signals below the threshold level.
U76
This models a well-known vintage compressor/limiter used in a wide range of situations.
Parameter
INPUT
OUTPUT
ATTACK
RELEASE
RATIO
METER
Range
–96.0 to 0.0 dB
–96.0 to 0.0 dB
5.50 to 0.10 ms
1100.0 to 56.4 ms
ALL, 4, 8, 12, 20
OFF, +4, +8, GR
Description
Input level
Output level
Attack time of the compressor. Turning this all the way to the right produces the fastest attack.
Release time of the compressor. Turning this all the way to the right produces the fastest release.
Switches the compression ratio. Pressing ALL produces the strongest effect.
Switches the meter display
Opt-2A
This processor emulates a well-known vintage model of vacuum tube opto compressor.
Description Parameter
METER SELECT
Range
GAIN –56.0 dB to 40.0 dB
PEAK REDUCTION –48.0 dB to 48.0 dB
RATIO 2.00 to 10.00
OUTPUT+10,
GAIN REDUCTION,
OUTPUT+4
Output level
Amount of gain reduction
Compression ratio
Switches the meter display
EQ-1A
This processor emulates a vintage EQ that’s considered a classic example of a passive EQ.
Parameter
LOW FREQUENCY
(LOW) BOOST
Range
20, 30, 60, 100 Hz
0.0 to 10.0
Description
Frequency range of the low range filter
Boost amount of the low range filter
(LOW) ATTEN
HIGH FREQUENCY
(HIGH) BOOST
0.0 to 10.0
Attenuation amount of the low range filter
3k, 4k, 5k, 8k, 10k, 12k, 16k Hz Frequency range of the high range filter
0.0 to 10.0
Boost amount of the high range filter
(HIGH) BAND WIDTH 0.0 to 10.0
(HIGH) ATTEN SEL
(HIGH) ATTEN
5k, 10k, 20k Hz
0.0 to 10.0
Band width of the high range filter
Frequency range attenuated by the high range filter
IN OFF, ON
Attenuation amount of the high range filter
Turns the processor on/off. If this is off, the filter section will be bypassed, but the signal will pass through the input/output transformers and the amp circuit.
Dynamic EQ
This is a newly developed equalizer that dynamically changes the EQ gain in response to the input signal, controlling the amount of EQ cut or boost in a way similar to a compressor or expander.
Parameter
BAND ON/OFF
SIDECHAIN CUE
SIDECHAIN LISTEN
FILTER TYPE
FREQUENCY
Q
THRESHOLD
RATIO
MODE
ATTACK/RELEASE
OFF, ON
Range
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
Low Shelf, Bell, Hi Shelf
20.0 to 20.0k Hz
15.0 to 0.50
–80.0 to 10.0 dB
∞ : 1 to 1 : 1.50
BELOW, ABOVE
FAST, SLOW, AUTO
Description
Turns the corresponding band on/off
If this is on, the sidechain signal that controls the dynamics will be sent to the CUE bus for monitoring.
If this is on, the sidechain signal that is linked to the dynamics will be output to the bus (such as the STEREO bus or a MIX/
MATRIX bus) to which the inserted channel is being sent.
Switches the type of equalizer and sidechain filter
Frequency controlled by the equalizer and sidechain filter
Q of the equalizer and sidechain filter
Threshold value at which processing begins to apply
Sets the boost/cut ratio relative to the input signal
Specifies whether the processor will operate when the sidechain signal exceeds the threshold setting (ABOVE) or when it falls below the threshold setting (BELOW)
Attack time/release time for when compression or boost is applied
21 Data List
Buss Comp 369
Parameter
INPUT ADJUST
LINK
METER
VU
COMP IN
COMP RATIO
COMP GAIN
COMP RECOVERY
COMP THRESHOLD
LIMIT IN
LIMIT ATTACK
LIMIT RECOVERY
LIMIT THRESHOLD
Range
–15.0 to +15.0dB
ON, OFF
IN, GR, OUT
IN, OUT
ON, OFF
1.5:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 6:1
0.0 to +20.0dB
100ms, 400ms, 800ms
1500ms, a1, a2
–40 to –5 dBFS
ON, OFF
FAST, SLOW
50ms, 100ms, 200ms
800ms, a1, a2
–16 to –5 dBFS
Description
Input gain. However, the output gain is also linked so that there is no change in the pass-through volume. For example, if
INPUT ADJUST is +5dB, the input gain is +5dB and the output gain is –5dB.
Stereo link function (STEREO only)
Meter switch (STEREO only)
Meter switch (DUAL only)
Compressor on/off
Ratio of the compressor
Compressor gain
Compressor release. The release times for a1 (auto 1) and a2
(auto 2) change automatically. a1: Changes automatically between 100 ms and 2 sec. a2: Changes automatically between 50 ms and 5 sec.
Threshold of the compressor
Limiter on/off
Attack time of the limiter FAST: 2 ms, SLOW: 4 ms
Limiter release. The release times for a1 (auto 1) and a2 (auto
2) change automatically. a1: Changes automatically between
100 ms and 2 sec. a2: Changes automatically between 50 ms and 5 sec.
Threshold of the limiter
MBC4
Parameter
LOW CROSSOVER
MID CROSSOVER
HIGH CROSSOVER
Range
20 to 500Hz
80 to 10kHz
1k to 15kHz
Description
Crossover frequency between the low and low mid bands
Crossover frequency between the low mid and high mid bands
Crossover frequency between the low high mid and high bands
LOW GAIN
LOW THRESHOLD
LOW RATIO
LOW ATTACK
LOW RELEASE
LOW COMP IN
LOW CUE ON
-18.0dB to 12.0dB
-80.0dB to 0.0dB
1.0:1 to 20.0:1
0.1 to 120ms
5 to 1000ms
ON, OFF
ON, OFF
LOW MID GAIN
LOW MID
THRESHOLD
LOW MID RATIO
LOW MID ATTACK
LOW MID RELEASE
-18.0dB to 12.0dB
-80.0dB to 0.0dB
1.0:1 to 20.0:1
0.1ms to 120ms
5ms to 1000ms
Low band gain
Threshold of low band
Ratio of low band
Attack time of low band
Release time of low band
Switches the compressor of low band on/off
If this is on, the low band signal will be sent to the CUE bus for monitoring.
Low mid band gain
Threshold of low mid band
Ratio of low mid band
Attack time of low mid band
Release time of low mid band
22
Parameter
LOW MID COMP IN
LOW MID CUE ON
ON, OFF
Range
ON, OFF
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH MID
THRESHOLD
-18.0dB to 12.0dB
-80.0dB to 0.0dB
HIGH MID RATIO
HIGH MID ATTACK
1.0:1 to 20.0:1
0.1ms to 120ms
HIGH MID RELEASE 5ms to 1000ms
HIGH MID COMP IN ON, OFF
HIGH MID CUE ON ON, OFF
HIGH GAIN
HIGH THRESHOLD
HIGH RATIO
HIGH ATTACK
HIGH RELEASE
HIGH COMP IN
HIGH CUE ON
-18.0dB to 12.0dB
-80.0dB to 0.0dB
1.0:1 to 20.0:1
0.1ms to 120ms
5ms to 1000ms
ON, OFF
ON, OFF
MASTER GAIN
KNEE
FLAVOUR
HARMONICS
LINK GAIN
LINK THRESHOLD
LINK RATIO
LINK ATTACK
LINK RELEASE
-
-
-
-
-
-18.0dB to 12.0dB
HARD, 1, 2, 3, SOFT
VCA, OPTO
ON, OFF
Description
Switches the compressor of low mid band on/off
If this is on, the low mid band signal will be sent to the CUE bus for monitoring.
High mid band gain
Threshold of high mid band
Ratio of high mid band
Attack time of high mid band
Release time of high mid band
Switches the compressor of high mid band on/off
If this is on, the high mid band signal will be sent to the CUE bus for monitoring.
High band gain
Threshold of high band
Ratio of high band
Attack time of high band
Release time of high band
Switches the compressor of high band on/off
If this is on, the high band signal will be sent to the CUE bus for monitoring.
Master gain
Knee of compressor
Compressor type
Switches the harmonics on/off
Links and controls the gain of the four bands
Links and controls the threshold of the four bands
Links and controls the ratio of the four bands
Links and controls the attack time of the four bands
Links and controls the release time of the four bands
Data List
Automixer Parameters
Group
Parameter
Override
ChMode
ChModePreset
Range a, b, c
OFF/ON man, auto, mute man, auto, mute
Weight
MeterType
MasterOverride
MasterMute
Gain
–100 to 15 gain, input, output
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
0 to 127
InputLevel
OutputLevel
PostWeightingFilter
0 to 127
0 to 127
0 to 127
Description
Channel control field group
Turns on/off overriding of the channel control field
Channel control field mode (man/auto/mute)
Preset setting of the channel control field
Relative sensitivity among input channels in the channel control field
Meter type of the master field
Turns on/off overriding of the master field
Turns on/off the mute setting of the master field
Automixer gain displayed for each channel when the meter button of the master field is set to “gain”
Input level displayed for each channel when the meter button of the master field is set to “input”
Output level displayed for each channel when the meter button of the master field is set to “output”
Level indicator of the channel control field
23
Parameters That Can Be Assigned to Control Changes
Mode
NO ASSIGN
BALANCE
CH ON
—
OUTPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
Parameter 1 Parameter 2
—
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–STEREO R
CH 1–CH 64
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
CUE
OUTPUT
CUE MODE
SURROUND CUE MODE
FADER CUE RELEASE ON
INPUT CUE POINT
DCA CUE POINT
OUTPUT CUE POINT
DCA UNITY
OUTPUT LEVEL H
OUTPUT LEVEL L
ACTIVE CUE
CLEAR CUE
SPECIFIC CH
CH 1–CH 64
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
DCA 1–DCA16
DCA
DIRECT OUT
EFFECT
ON
FADER H
FADER L
ON
BYPASS
MIX BALANCE
PARAM 1 H – PARAM 32 L
INPUT
DCA 1–DCA 16
CH 1–CH 64
*1
RACK1–8
FADER H
FADER L
OUTPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
CH 1–CH 64
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
CH 1–CH 64
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
GEQ
ON A
ON B
GAIN 1A-GAIN 31A
GAIN 1B-GAIN 31B
GEQ RACK1–GEQ RACK8
EFFECT RACK1–EFFECT
RACK8
Data List
INPUT HPF
INSERT
Mode
INPUT ATT
INPUT DYNAMICS1
INPUT DYNAMICS2
INPUT EQ
Parameter 1
INPUT
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RANGE
HOLD H
HOLD L
DECAY/RELEASE H
DECAY/RELEASE L
RATIO
KNEE
GAIN H
GAIN L
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RELEASE H
RELEASE L
RATIO/TYPE
GAIN H
GAIN L/Q
KNEE/WIDTH
FILTER FREQ
ON
LOW Q
LOW FREQ
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQ
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQ
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQ
HIGH GAIN
LPF ON
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
ON
FREQ
INPUT
OUTPUT
Parameter 2
CH 1–CH 64
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
CH 1–CH 64
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
CH 1–CH 64
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
CH 1–CH 64
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
CH 1–CH 64
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
CH 1–CH 64
*1
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
24
LCR
Mode
MIX/MATRIX SEND
MIX TO MATRIX
MIX TO STEREO
Parameter 1
ON
CSR
MIX 1 ON–MIX 16 ON
MATRIX 1 ON–MATRIX 8 ON
MIX 1 POINT–MIX 16 POINT
MATRIX 1 POINT–MATRIX 8 POINT
MIX 1 H–MIX 16 H
MATRIX 1 H–MATRIX 8 H
MIX 1 L–MIX16 L
MATRIX 1 L–MATRIX 8 L
MIX 1/ 2 PAN–MIX 15/16 PAN
MATRIX 1/2 PAN–MATRIX 7/8 PAN
MATRIX 1 POINT–MATRIX 8 POINT
MATRIX 1 ON–MATRIX 8 ON
MATRIX 1 LEVEL H–MATRIX 8 LEVEL H
MATRIX 1 LEVEL L–MATRIX 8 LEVEL L
MATRIX 1/2 PAN–MATRIX 7/8 PAN
TO STEREO ON
TO MONO ON
PAN
OUTPUT
SOURCE SELECT
DEFINE ASSIGN
MONITOR
MUTE CONTROL
OUTPUT ATT
OUTPUT DYNAMICS1
DIMMER ON
PHONES LEVEL LINK
CUE INTERRUPTION
MONO MONITOR
MONITOR FADER H
MONITOR FADER L
DELAY AUTO BYPASS
DELAY ON
ON
OUTPUT
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RELEASE H
RELEASE L
RATIO
GAIN H
GAIN L
KNEE/WIDTH
Parameter 2
CH 1–CH 64
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
MIX 1–MIX 16
CH 1–CH 64
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
MIX 1–MIX 16
MIX 1–MIX 16
—
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX1–MATRIX8
STEREO, MONO
INPUT 25-26–INPUT 31-32
*2
PB OUT
—
CONTROL 1–CONTROL 8
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
Data List
PEQ
Mode
OUTPUT EQ
PAN/BALANCE
A/B LINK
ON
BAND1 BYPASS
BAND1 GAIN H
BAND1 GAIN L
BAND1 FREQ
BAND1 Q
BAND2 BYPASS
BAND2 GAIN H
BAND2 GAIN L
BAND2 FREQ
BAND2 Q
BAND3 BYPASS
BAND3 GAIN H
BAND3 GAIN L
BAND3 FREQ
BAND3 Q
BAND4 BYPASS
BAND4 GAIN H
BAND4 GAIN L
BAND4 FREQ
BAND4 Q
BAND5 BYPASS
BAND5 GAIN H
BAND5 GAIN L
BAND5 FREQ
BAND5 Q
BAND6 BYPASS
Parameter 1
ON
LOW Q
LOW FREQ
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQ
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQ
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQ
HIGH GAIN
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
LOW HPF ON
HIGH LPF ON
INPUT
Parameter 2
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
CH 1–CH 64
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
GEQ RACK 1A–8B
EFFECT RACK 1A–8B
25
PEQ
Mode
PHASE
PREMIUM EFFECT A
PREMIUM EFFECT B
BAND6 GAIN H
Parameter 1
BAND6 GAIN L
BAND6 FREQ
BAND6 Q
BAND7 BYPASS
BAND7 GAIN H
BAND7 GAIN L
BAND7 FREQ
BAND7 Q
BAND8 BYPASS
BAND8 GAIN H
BAND8 GAIN L
BAND8 FREQ
BAND8 Q
HPF ON
HPF FREQ
HPF SLOPE
LPF ON
LPF FREQ
LPF SLOPE
NOTCH A ON
NOTCH A FREQ H
NOTCH A FREQ L
NOTCH A Q
NOTCH B ON
NOTCH B FREQ H
NOTCH B FREQ L
NOTCH B Q
NOTCH C ON
NOTCH C FREQ H
NOTCH C FREQ L
NOTCH C Q
INPUT
BYPASS
PARAM 1 H–PARAM 64 L
BYPASS
PARAM 1 H–PARAM 64 L
RECALL SAFE ON
Parameter 2
GEQ RACK 1A–8B
EFFECT RACK 1A–8B
CH 1–CH 64
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
RACK1–8
RACK1–8
CH 1–CH 64
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
GEQ RACK 1A–8B
EFFECT RACK 1A–8B
PREMIUM RACK 1A–8B
DCA 1–DCA16
Data List
Mode
STEREO TO MATRIX
SURROUND MONITOR
SURROUND PAN
TO MONO
Parameter 1
MATRIX 1 POINT–MATRIX 8 POINT
MATRIX 1 ON–MATRIX 8 ON
MATRIX 1 LEVEL H–MATRIX 8 LEVEL H
MATRIX 1 LEVEL L–MATRIX 8 LEVEL L
MATRIX 1/2 PAN–MATRIX 7/8 PAN
SOURCE SELECT
2CH MONITOR ASSIGN
DOWNMIX
SURROUND SPEAKER SOLO
SURROUND SPEAKER L
SURROUND SPEAKER R
SURROUND SPEAKER C
SURROUND SPEAKER LFE
SURROUND SPEAKER Ls
SURROUND SPEAKER Rs
LR PAN
FR PAN
FR PAN REVERSE
DIV
L ON
R ON
C ON
LFE ON
Ls ON
Rs ON
LFE LEVEL H
LFE LEVEL L
ON
TO STEREO ON
*1.
QL1: CH1-CH32
*2. QL1: INPUT 9-10-INPUT 15-16
Parameter 2
STEREO L–MONO(C)
—
SELECTED CH
CH 1–CH 64
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
CH 1–CH 64
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
CH 1–CH 64
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
26 Data List
NRPN Parameter Assignments
FADER
Parameter
INPUT
MIX1-16, MATRIX,
STEREO LR
MIX9 SEND
MIX10 SEND
MIX11 SEND
INPUT to MIX9-16 LEVEL
MIX12 SEND
MIX13 SEND
MIX14 SEND
MIX15 SEND
INPUT to MATRIX1-4
LEVEL
MIX1-16, STEREO LR to
MATRIX LEVEL
ON
MIX16 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
INPUT
MIX1-16, MATRIX,
STEREO LR
INPUT to MIX9-16 ON
INPUT to MATRIX1-4 ON
MIX1-16, STEREO LR to
MATRIX ON
MIX1-8 to STEREO ON
PHASE
MIX9 SEND
MIX10 SEND
MIX11 SEND
MIX12 SEND
MIX13 SEND
MIX14 SEND
MIX15 SEND
MIX16 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MIX TO ST
INPUT
From (HEX) To (HEX)
0000 0057
0060 007D
007E
00DE
013E
019E
01FE
025E
02BE
031E
037E
03DE
043E
049E
04FE
0514
052A
0540
0556
056C
0582
0598
05B6
0616
0634
0694
06F4
0754
07B4
0814
0874
08D4
0934
0994
09F4
0A54
0AB4
0ACA
0AE0
0AF6
0B0C
0B22
0B38
0B4E
0B64
0B6C
00D5
0135
0195
01F5
0255
02B5
0315
0375
03D5
0435
0495
04F5
0513
0529
053F
0555
056B
0581
0597
05AD
060D
0633
068B
06EB
074B
07AB
080B
086B
08CB
092B
098B
09EB
0A4B
0AAB
0AC9
0ADF
0AF5
0B0B
0B21
0B37
0B4D
0B63
0B6B
0BC3
INSERT ON
INPUT to MIX9-16 PRE/
POST
Parameter
INPUT
MIX1-20, MATRIX,
STEREO LR
MIX9 SEND
MIX10 SEND
MIX11 SEND
MIX12 SEND
MIX13 SEND
INPUT to MATRIX1-4
PRE/POST
INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8
LEVEL
MIX14 SEND
MIX15 SEND
MIX16 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
INPUT57-64 to
MATRIX5-8 LEVEL
INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8
ON
INPUT57-64 to
MATRIX5-8 ON
INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8
PRE/POST
INPUT57-64 to
MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
From (HEX) To (HEX)
0BCC 0C13
0C2C 0C49
10FA
1102
110A
1112
111A
1122
112A
1132
113A
1142
114A
1152
115A
1162
116A
1172
117A
1182
118A
1192
119A
11A2
11AA
11B2
11BA
11C2
11CA
11D2
11DA
11E2
0C4A
0CAA
0D0A
0D6A
0DCA
0E2A
0E8A
0EEA
0F4A
0FAA
100A
106A
10CA
10D2
10DA
10E2
10EA
10F2
1101
1109
1111
1119
1121
1129
1131
1139
1141
1149
1151
1159
1161
1169
1171
1179
1181
1189
1191
1199
11A1
11A9
11B1
11B9
11C1
11C9
11D1
11D9
11E1
11E9
0CA1
0D01
0D61
0DC1
0E21
0E81
0EE1
0F41
0FA1
1001
1061
10C1
10D1
10D9
10E1
10E9
10F1
10F9
27
INPUT57-64 EQ
INPUT57-64 HPF
Parameter
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
FREQ
MIX1/2
INPUT57-64 to MIX1/2-
7/8 PAN
INPUT57-64 to
MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN
MIX3/4
MIX5/6
MIX7/8
MATRIX5/6
MATRIX7/8
ON INPUT57-64 to STEREO
INPUT57-64 RECALL
SAFE
INPUT57-64 to MONO
ON
INPUT49-64
DYNAMICS1
ON
RATIO
KNEE/WIDTH
GAIN
INPUT49-64
DYNAMICS2 reserved
FILTER FREQ
ON
LOW Q
LOW FREQ
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQ
LOW MID GAIN
EQ INPUT, MIX1-16,
MATRIX, STEREO LR
INPUT DYNAMICS1
INPUT DYNAMICS2
MIX1-16, MATRIX,
STEREO LR DYNAMICS1
PAN/BALANCE
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQ
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQ
HIGH GAIN
ATT
HPF ON
LPF ON
HPF TYPE
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RANGE
HOLD
DECAY/RELEASE
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RELEASE
RATIO
GAIN
KNEE/WIDTH
INPUT
1AE4
1B44
1BA4
1C04
1C64
1CC4
1D24
1DA2
1E20
1E9E
1F1C
1F9A
2018
2096
123A
1676
16F4
1772
17F0
186E
18EC
196A
19E8
1A66
1242
124A
125A
126A
127A
128A
1304
1382
1400
147E
14FC
157A
15F8
From (HEX) To (HEX)
11EA
11F2
11F1
11F9
11FA
1202
1201
1209
120A
1212
121A
1222
122A
1232
1211
1219
1221
1229
1231
1239
1241
16F3
1771
17EF
186D
18EB
1969
19C1
1A65
1AE3
1249
1259
1269
1279
1289
1299
1381
13FF
147D
14FB
1579
15F7
1675
1B3B
1B9B
1BFB
1C5B
1CBB
1D1B
1DA1
1E1F
1E9D
1F1B
1F99
2017
2095
20ED
Data List
Parameter
INPUT to MIX9/10-15/16
PAN
MIX9/10
MIX11/12
MIX13/14
MIX15/16
INPUT to MATRIX1/2,
3/4 PAN
MATRIX1/2
MATRIX3/4
MATRIX1/2
MIX1-20, STEREO LR to
MATRIX PAN
MIX1-8 to STEREO PAN
BALANCE
MATRIX3/4
MATRIX5/6
MATRIX7/8
MIX TO ST
MIX1-20, MATRIX,
STEREO LR
MIX, STEREO LR, MONO to MATRIX PRE/POST
MONO to MATRIX ON
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
BYPASS
MIX BALANCE
EFFECT RACK1-8
PARAM1
PARAM2
PARAM3
PARAM4
PARAM5
PARAM6
PARAM7
PARAM8
PARAM9
PARAM10
PARAM11
PARAM12
PARAM13
PARAM14
PARAM15
PARAM16
PARAM17
PARAM18
PARAM19
PARAM20
2714
271C
2724
272C
2734
273C
2744
274C
2754
275C
26C4
26CC
26D4
26DC
26E4
26EC
26F4
26FC
2704
270C
23B4
23D0
23EC
2408
2424
2440
245C
2478
2494
249A
24A0
24A6
24AC
24B2
24B8
24BE
26B4
26BC
From (HEX) To (HEX)
20F6
2156
214D
21AD
21B6
2216
220D
226D
2276
22D6
2336
234C
2362
2378
238E
22CD
232D
234B
2361
2377
238D
2395
2396 23B3
271B
2723
272B
2733
273B
2743
274B
2753
275B
2763
26CB
26D3
26DB
26E3
26EB
26F3
26FB
2703
270B
2713
23CE
23EA
2406
2422
243E
245A
2476
2492
2498
249E
24A4
24AA
24B0
24B6
24BC
24C2
26BB
26C3
EFFECT RACK1-8
GEQ RACK1A-3B
FADER
Parameter
PARAM21
PARAM22
PARAM23
PARAM24
PARAM25
PARAM26
PARAM27
PARAM28
PARAM29
PARAM30
PARAM31
PARAM32
ON
GAIN1
GAIN2
GAIN3
GAIN4
GAIN5
GAIN6
GAIN7
GAIN8
GAIN9
GAIN10
GAIN11
GAIN12
GAIN13
GAIN14
GAIN15
GAIN16
GAIN17
GAIN18
GAIN19
GAIN20
GAIN21
GAIN22
GAIN23
GAIN24
GAIN25
GAIN26
GAIN27
GAIN28
GAIN29
GAIN30
GAIN31
MIX21-24, MONO
2830
2836
283C
2842
2848
284E
2854
285A
2860
2866
2806
280C
2812
2818
281E
2824
282A
286C
2872
2878
287E
28E4
27B4
27BC
27C4
27CA
27D0
27D6
27DC
27E2
27E8
27EE
27F4
27FA
2800
From (HEX) To (HEX)
2764
276C
276B
2773
2774
277C
277B
2783
2784
278C
2794
279C
27A4
27AC
278B
2793
279B
27A3
27AB
27B3
27BB
27C3
27C9
27CF
27D5
27DB
27E1
27E7
27ED
27F3
27F9
27FF
2805
2835
283B
2841
2847
284D
2853
2859
285F
2865
286B
280B
2811
2817
281D
2823
2829
282F
2871
2877
287D
2883
28E8
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MIX1-8 LEVEL
Parameter
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MATRIX5-8 LEVEL
MONO to MATRIX LEVEL
MIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
ON
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MIX1-8 ON
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MONO
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MATRIX5-8 ON
MATRIX8 SEND
MIX9-16 to STEREO ON MIX TO ST
INSERT
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MONO
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MIX1-8 PRE/POST
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST
DCA13-16
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
ON
FADER
2B6A
2BAA
2BEA
2BF0
2BF6
2BFC
2C02
2C08
2C0E
2C14
2C2A
2C30
2C70
From (HEX) To (HEX)
28EA
292A
2929
2969
296A
29AA
29A9
29E9
29EA
2A2A
2A6A
2AAA
2AEA
2B2A
2A29
2A69
2AA9
2AE9
2B29
2B69
2BA9
2BE9
2BEE
2BF4
2BFA
2C00
2C06
2C0C
2C12
2C18
2C2E
2C6F
2CAF
2E70
2EB0
2EF0
2F36
2F46
2F4C
2F8C
2FCC
300C
304C
2CB0
2CF0
2D30
2D70
2DB0
2DF0
2E30
308C
30CC
310C
314C
318C
31CC
320C
324C
3252
2EAF
2EEF
2F2F
2F45
2F4A
2F8B
2FCB
300B
304B
308B
2CEF
2D2F
2D6F
2DAF
2DEF
2E2F
2E6F
30CB
310B
314B
318B
31CB
320B
324B
324F
3255
28 Data List
MONO EQ
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO
LR, MONO EQ
Parameter
ON
LOW Q
LOW FREQ
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQ
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQ
HIGH MID GAIN
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 EQ
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQ
HIGH GAIN
HPF ON
LPF ON
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
FADER
MONITOR
SURROUND MONITOR
SPEAKER MUTE
SOLO
SPEAKER MUTE L
SPEAKER MUTE R
SPEAKER MUTE C
SPEAKER MUTE LFE
SPEAKER MUTE Ls
SPEAKER MUTE Rs
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 HPF FREQ
ON
ATTACK
MONO DYNAMICS1
THRESHOLD
RELEASE
RATIO
GAIN
KNEE/WIDTH
MIX1/2
MIX3/4 INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MIX1/2-7/8 PAN MIX5/6
MIX7/8
MATRIX5/6 INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN
MONO to MATRIX1/2-7
/8 PAN
MATRIX7/8
MATRIX1/2
MATRIX3/4
MATRIX5/6
MATRIX7/8
MIX9-16 to STEREO PAN MIX TO ST
3621
369E
36A4
36AA
36EA
372A
376A
37AA
37EA
382A
3830
3836
383C
3842
3640
3680
3686
368C
3692
3698
3622
3623
3624
3625
3626
3627
329A
32A0
32A6
32AC
32B2
3440
3480
34C0
34E4
3620
From (HEX) To (HEX)
325E
3264
3262
3268
326A
3270
326E
3274
3276
327C
3282
3288
328E
3294
327A
3280
3286
328C
3292
3298
329E
32A4
32AA
32B0
32B6
347F
34BF
34E2
3506
3620
3621
36A2
36A8
36E9
3729
3769
37A9
37E9
3829
382E
3834
383A
3840
3851
3622
3623
3624
3625
3626
3627
367F
3684
368A
3690
3696
369C
GEQ RACK4A-6B
GAIN23
GAIN24
GAIN25
GAIN26
GAIN27
GAIN28
GAIN29
LCR INPUT1-64, STIN1-4,
MIX1-16
GAIN30
GAIN31
ON
CSR
DIRECT OUT INPUT1-64 ON
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 TO
STEREO
ON
DCA1-12
MUTE CONTROL
RECALL SAFE
ON
FADER
ON
ON
Parameter
ON
GAIN1
GAIN2
GAIN3
GAIN4
GAIN5
GAIN6
GAIN7
GAIN8
GAIN9
GAIN10
GAIN11
GAIN12
GAIN13
GAIN14
GAIN15
GAIN16
GAIN17
GAIN18
GAIN19
GAIN20
GAIN21
GAIN22
29
38DC
38E2
38E8
38EE
38F4
38FA
3900
3906
390C
3912
396A
39C2
388E
3894
389A
38A0
38A6
38AC
38B2
38B8
38BE
38C4
38CA
38D0
38D6
From (HEX) To (HEX)
3852
3858
3857
385D
385E
3864
3863
3869
386A
3870
3876
387C
3882
3888
386F
3875
387B
3881
3887
388D
3893
3899
389F
38A5
38AB
38B1
38B7
38BD
38C3
38C9
38CF
38D5
38DB
38E1
38E7
38ED
38F3
38F9
38FF
3905
390B
3911
3969
39C1
3A01
3A02 3A41
3A42
3A4E
3A5A
3A66
3A4D
3A59
3A61
3B05
HA
Parameter
EXTERNAL GAIN1
INPUT GAIN 1
EXTERNAL GAIN2
INPUT GAIN 2
EXTERNAL GAIN3
INPUT GAIN 3
EXTERNAL GAIN4
INPUT GAIN 4
EXTERNAL GAIN5
INPUT GAIN 5
EXTERNAL GAIN6
INPUT GAIN 6
EXTERNAL GAIN7
INPUT GAIN 7
EXTERNAL GAIN8
INPUT GAIN 8
EXTERNAL +48V 1
INPUT +48V 1
EXTERNAL +48V 2
INPUT +48V 2
EXTERNAL +48V 3
INPUT +48V 3
EXTERNAL +48V 4
INPUT +48V 4
EXTERNAL +48V 5
INPUT +48V 5
EXTERNAL +48V 6
INPUT +48V 6
EXTERNAL +48V 7
INPUT +48V 7
EXTERNAL +48V 8
INPUT +48V 8
EXTERNAL HPF1
INPUT HPF1
EXTERNAL HPF2
INPUT HPF2
EXTERNAL HPF3
INPUT HPF3
EXTERNAL HPF4
INPUT HPF4
EXTERNAL HPF5
INPUT HPF5
EXTERNAL HPF6
INPUT HPF6
EXTERNAL HPF7
INPUT HPF7
EXTERNAL HPF8
INPUT HPF8
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 TO
MONO
MIX1-16 TO MONO
ON
ON
3B56
3B5F
3B66
3B6F
3B76
3B7F
3B86
3B8F
3B96
3B9F
3BA6
3BAF
3BB6
From (HEX) To (HEX)
3B06
3B0F
3B0B
3B15
3B16
3B1F
3B1B
3B25
3B26
3B2F
3B36
3B3F
3B46
3B4F
3B2B
3B35
3B3B
3B45
3B4B
3B55
3B5B
3B65
3B6B
3B75
3B7B
3B85
3B8B
3B95
3B9B
3BA5
3BAB
3BB5
3BBB
3BF6
3BFF
3C06
3C0F
3C16
3C1F
3C26
3C2F
3C36
3C3F
3BBF
3BC6
3BCF
3BD6
3BDF
3BE6
3BEF
3C46
3C4F
3C56
3C5F
3C66
3C6F
3C76
3C7F
3BFB
3C05
3C0B
3C15
3C1B
3C25
3C2B
3C35
3C3B
3C45
3BC5
3BCB
3BD5
3BDB
3BE5
3BEB
3BF5
3C4B
3C55
3C5B
3C65
3C6B
3C75
3C7B
3C85
3C86 3CC5
3CC6 3CD5
Data List
SLOT OUT DELAY
Parameter
ON
TIME HIGH
TIME LOW
ON
OMNI OUT DELAY
DIGITAL OUT DELAY
TIME HIGH
TIME LOW
ON
TIME HIGH
TIME LOW
RATIO
INPUT1-48, STIN1-4
DYNAMICS1
INPUT1-48, STIN1-4
DYNAMICS2
KNEE/WIDTH
GAIN reserved
FILTER FREQ
ON
GAIN1
GAIN2
GAIN3
GAIN4
GAIN5
GAIN6
GAIN7
GAIN8
GAIN9
GAIN10
GAIN11
GAIN12
GAIN13
GAIN14
GAIN15
GEQ RACK7A-8B
GAIN16
GAIN17
GAIN18
GAIN19
GAIN20
GAIN21
GAIN22
GAIN23
GAIN24
GAIN25
GAIN26
GAIN27
GAIN28
GAIN29
GAIN30
GAIN31
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO
LR, MONO EQ
ATT
3DD4
3E0C
3E44
3E7C
3EB4
3EB8
3EBC
3EC0
3EC4
3EC8
3ECC
3ED0
3ED4
From (HEX) To (HEX)
3CD6
3D06
3D05
3D35
3D36
3D66
3D65
3D6D
3D76
3D86
3D96
3D98
3D9A
3D9C
3D7D
3D8D
3D97
3D99
3D9B
3DD3
3E0B
3E43
3E7B
3EB3
3EB7
3EBB
3EBF
3EC3
3EC7
3ECB
3ECF
3ED3
3ED7
3EF4
3EF8
3EFC
3F00
3F04
3F08
3F0C
3F10
3F14
3F18
3ED8
3EDC
3EE0
3EE4
3EE8
3EEC
3EF0
3F1C
3F20
3F24
3F28
3F2C
3F30
3EF7
3EFB
3EFF
3F03
3F07
3F0B
3F0F
3F13
3F17
3F1B
3F1F
3F23
3F27
3F2B
3F2F
3F33
3EDB
3EDF
3EE3
3EE7
3EEB
3EEF
3EF3
3F34 3F56
30 Data List
Mixing Parameter Operation Applicability
This table indicates which settings affect the behavior of each input channel and output channel parameter.
It also indicates whether or not they can be linked as stereo, and whether or not they are relevant to the RECALL SAFE, GLOBAL PASTE, and USER LEVEL settings, and a channel library.
Input channels
Parameter
HA
Gain
Gain Compensation
+48V
Phase
AG-DG Link
Digital Gain
Name, Icon, Color
Input Patch
LR-MONO
SELECT
* ST IN channels only
Out Patch
Insert1,
Insert2
In Patch
+48V, Gain, Gain Compensation
On
Point
Direct Out
Out Patch
On, Level
Point
HPF
Att
EQ
Dynamics1
Dynamics2
Key-In Source
Key-In Filter
Others
Key-In Source
Others
On
To Mix
Level
Pan/Balance
Surround
Pre/Post
Pan
Divergence
LFE
Stereo
*1
O
*10
O
O
O
*10
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*11
O
CHANNEL LINK
HA
*10
HA
HA
DIGITAL GAIN
*10
INPUT INSERT
INPUT INSERT
DIRECT OUT
DIRECT OUT
INPUT HPF
INPUT EQ
INPUT EQ
INPUT DYNAMICS1
INPUT DYNAMICS1
INPUT DYNAMICS2
INPUT MIX ON
*2
INPUT MIX SEND
*2
INPUT MIX SEND
*2
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
*8
ALL Parameter Select button
O HA, GLOBAL HA
HA, GLOBAL HA
HA, GLOBAL HA
HA, GLOBAL HA
HA, GLOBAL HA
DIGITAL GAIN
INPUT NAME, GLOBAL INPUT NAME
INPUT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH
INPUT TO ST
INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH
INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH
INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA
INPUT INSERT
INPUT INSERT
INPUT DIRECT OUT, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH
INPUT DIRECT OUT
INPUT DIRECT OUT
INPUT HPF
INPUT EQ
INPUT EQ
INPUT DYNA1
INPUT DYNA1
INPUT DYNA1
INPUT DYNA2
INPUT DYNA2
INPUT MIX ON
*7
INPUT MIX SEND
*7
INPUT MIX SEND
*7
INPUT MIX SEND
*7
INPUT MIX SEND
INPUT MIX SEND
INPUT MIX SEND
USER LEVEL
HA
HA
HA
HA
HA
HA
INPUT NAME
INPUT PATCH
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PATCH
INPUT PATCH
HA
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PATCH
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT FADER/ON
*4
INPUT FADER/ON
*4
INPUT FADER/ON
*4
INPUT PROCESSING
*4
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
Channel
Library
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
31 Data List
Parameter Stereo
*1
On O
To Matrix
Level
Pan/Balance
O
O
*11
O Pre/Post
DELAY
To Stereo
To Mono
Pan/balance
Pan Mode
LCR
On
Fader
Mute Assign
DCA Assign
Fade Time, On ms
ON
On
CSR
Mode
Channel Link O
Cue O
Key In Cue
Mute Safe O
Recall Safe
Focus Recall
Global Paste
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*10
O
O
O
*6
O
*10
O
O
O
O
*11
CHANNEL LINK
INPUT MATRIX ON
*3
INPUT MATRIX SEND
*3
INPUT MATRIX SEND
INPUT DELAY
INPUT DELAY
TO STEREO
TO STEREO
TO STEREO
TO STEREO
TO STEREO
INPUT CH ON
INPUT FADER
*10
INPUT MUTE
INPUT DCA
*10
EACH PARAMETER
EACH PARAMETER
*3
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
*8
ALL Parameter Select button
INPUT MATRIX ON
*7
O
O
O
INPUT MATRIX SEND
*7
INPUT MATRIX SEND
*7
INPUT MATRIX SEND
*7
INPUT DELAY
INPUT DELAY
INPUT TO ST
INPUT TO MONO
INPUT TO ST
*5
*5
*5
*5
INPUT CH ON
INPUT FADER
INPUT MUTE ASSIGN
INPUT DCA ASSIGN
*9
GLOBAL CH LINK
USER LEVEL
INPUT FADER/ON
*4
INPUT FADER/ON
*4
INPUT FADER/ON
*4
INPUT PROCESSING
*4
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT FADER/ON
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT FADER/ON
INPUT FADER/ON
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
DCA GROUP ASSIGN
STORE
*1 These parameters can be linked between L and R of ST IN channels 1–8.
*2 Applies to parameters for which the MIX channel 1–16 individual Send Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled.
*3 Applies to parameters for which the MATRIX channel 1–8 individual Send Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled.
*4 These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON.
*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
*6 Applicable only to On/Off.
*7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.
*8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME.
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
*10 Operates differentially
*11 Balance only
*14 Applicable to parameters only when ALL is selected.
Channel
Library
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*6
O
O
O
O
O
32 Data List
MIX Channels
Name, Icon, Color
Output Patch
Out Patch
In Patch
Insert1,
Insert2
+48V, Gain, Gain Compensation
On
Point
Att
EQ
Dynamics1
Key-In Source
Others
To Matrix
On
Parameter
Level
Pan/Balance
Linked for a stereo pair
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*13
O
To Stereo
To Mono
Pan/Balance
Pre/Post
LCR
On
CSR
O
O
On
Mode O
O
Fader O
O
O
O
O
*11
On O
From Input
Mute Assign
DCA Assign
Fade Time, On
Channel Link
Cue
Mute Safe
Recall Safe
Focus Recall
Global Paste
Level
Pan/Balance
Pre/Post
O
O
*11
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*6
O
O
EQ
EQ
CHANNEL LINK
INSERT
INSERT
DYNAMICS
TO MATRIX ON
TO MATRIX SEND
TO MATRIX SEND
TO MATRIX SEND
TO STEREO
TO STEREO
TO STEREO
TO STEREO
TO STEREO
CH ON
FADER
MUTE
DCA
EACH PARAMETER
EACH PARAMETER
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
*8, *12
ALL Parameter Select button
O
O
O
O
MIX NAME, GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME
MIX OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
O
O
MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA
MIX INSERT
MIX INSERT
MIX EQ
MIX EQ
MIX DYNA1
MIX DYNA1
MIX MATRIX ON
*7
MIX MATRIX SEND
*7
O MIX MATRIX SEND
*7
MIX MATRIX SEND
*7
MIX TO ST
MIX MONO
MIX TO ST, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY)
*5
O
O
O
*5
*5
MIX CH ON
USER LEVEL
OUTPUT NAME
OUTPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX FADER/ON
MIX FADER/ON
MIX FADER/ON
*4
MIX PROCESSING
*4
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX FADER/ON
*4
*4
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX FADER/ON
WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MIX SEND
*4
WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MIX SEND
*4
WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MIX SEND
*4
WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MIX SEND
*4
MIX MUTE ASSIGN
MIX DCA ASSIGN
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
DCA GROUP ASSIGN
*9 STORE
GLOBAL CH LINK
Channel
Library
O
*4 These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON.
*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
*6 Applicable only to On/Off.
*7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.
*8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME.
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*6
33 Data List
*11 Balance only
*12 For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT.
*13 Linked only for stereo MATRIX
*14 Applicable to parameters only when ALL is selected.
MATRIX Channels
Parameter
Linked for a stereo pair
Name, Icon, Color
Output Patch
Insert1, Insert2
Att
EQ
Out Patch
In Patch
+48V, Gain, Gain Compensation
On
Point
Dynamics1
To Matrix
Key-In Source
Others
On
Level
Pan/Balance
Pre/Post
O
Balance
On
Fader O
O
O
O
O
O
O
On O
From Input
From Mix
From Stereo/Mono
Level
Pan/Balance
O
O
*11
O Pre/Post
Mute Assign
DCA Assign
Fade Time, On
Channel Link O
Cue O
O
O
O
*6
Mute Safe
Recall Safe
Focus Recall
Global Paste
O
O
O
O
MUTE
DCA
CHANNEL LINK
INSERT
INSERT
EQ
EQ
DYNAMICS
TO MATRIX ON
TO MATRIX SEND
TO MATRIX SEND
TO MATRIX SEND
CH ON
FADER
EACH PARAMETER
EACH PARAMETER
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
ALL
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
*8, *12
MATRIX INSERT
MATRIX INSERT
MATRIX EQ
MATRIX EQ
Parameter Select button
MATRIX NAME,GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME
MATRIX OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA
MATRIX DYNA1
MATRIX DYNA1
MATRIX BAL, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY)
MATRIX CH ON
USER LEVEL
OUTPUT NAME
OUTPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
MATRIX PROCESSING
MATRIX PROCESSING
MATRIX PROCESSING
MATRIX PROCESSING
MATRIX PROCESSING
MATRIX PROCESSING
MATRIX PROCESSING
MATRIX FADER/ON
MATRIX FADER/ON
WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MATRIX SEND
*4
WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MATRIX SEND
*4
WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MATRIX SEND
*4
WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MATRIX SEND
*4
MATRIX MUTE ASSIGN
MATRIX DCA ASSIGN
*9
GLOBAL CH LINK
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
DCA GROUP ASSIGN
STORE
*4 These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON.
*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
*6 Applicable only to On/Off.
*7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.
*8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME.
Channel
Library
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*6
34 Data List
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
*11 Balance only
*12 For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT.
*14 Applicable to parameters only when ALL is selected.
STEREO, MONO Channels
Parameter
Name, Icon, Color
Output Patch
Out Patch
In Patch
Insert1,
Insert2
+48V, Gain, Gain Compensation
On
Point
Att
EQ
Dynamics1
To Matrix
Key-In Source
Others
On
Level
Pan/Balance
Linked for a stereo pair
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*13
Pre/Post O
Balance
On
Fader
Mute Assign
DCA Assign
Fade Time, On
O
O
*6
Cue O
Mute Safe
Recall Safe, Focus Recall, Global Paste
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
ALL
O
O
O
O
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
*8, *12
USER LEVEL
Parameter Select button
STEREO, MONO NAME, GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME OUTPUT NAME
STEREO, MONO OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH
STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH
STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH
O
O
O
STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA
STEREO, MONO INSERT
STEREO, MONO INSERT
STEREO, MONO EQ
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
O
STEREO, MONO EQ
STEREO, MONO DYNA1
STEREO, MONO DYNA1
STEREO, MONO MATRIX ON
*7
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
*4
O
O
O
STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND
*7
STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND
*7
STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND
*7
STEREO, MONO BAL, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY)
STEREO, MONO CH ON
STEREO, MONO FADER
STEREO, MONO MUTE ASSIGN
STEREO, MONO DCA ASSIGN
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
*4
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
*4
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
*4
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
DCA GROUP ASSIGN
O *9 STORE
Channel
Library
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*6
*4 These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON.
*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
*6 Applicable only to On/Off.
*7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.
*8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME.
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
*12 For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT.
*14 Applicable to parameters only when ALL is selected.
35 Data List
DCA
Parameter
Name, Icon, Color
On
Fader
Fade Time, On
Input DCA Assign
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
ALL Parameter Select button
O
O
O
O
DCA NAME
DCA LEVEL/ON
DCA LEVEL/ON
*9
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
USER LEVEL
DCA MAIN
DCA MAIN
DCA MAIN
STORE
DCA GROUP ASSIGN
BUS SETUP
Parameters
Stereo/Mono, Bus Type, Pan
Link
SURROUND BUS
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
ALL Parameter Select button
MIX 1/2, …, MATRIX 7/8
USER LEVEL
BUS SETUP
Parameters
Stereo/Mono, Bus Type, Pan
Link
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
ALL Parameter Select button
SURROUND SETUP
USER LEVEL
BUS SETUP
MUTE
Parameter
Name
On
Dimmer
MUTE Assign
RECALL SAFE
ALL
O
USER LEVEL
MUTE GROUP CONTROL
MUTE GROUP CONTROL
MUTE GROUP CONTROL
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
36 Data List
MIDI Data Format
This section explains the format of the data that the QL series is able to understand, send, and receive.
1 CHANNEL MESSAGE
1.1 NOTE OFF (8n)
Reception
These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER COMMAND ECHO] is ON.
They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects.
STATUS
DATA
1000nnnn 8n Note off message
0nnnnnnn nn Note number
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (ignored)
1.2 NOTE ON (9n)
Reception
These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER COMMAND ECHO] is ON.
They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects.
STATUS
DATA
1001nnnn 9n Note on message
0nnnnnnn nn Note number
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (1-127:on, 0:off)
1.3 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn)
Two types of CONTROL CHANGE can be transmitted and received; [NRPN]
(Non-Registered Parameter Numbers) and freely-assigned [TABLE] (1CH x 110) messages. Select either [TABLE] or [NRPN].
Reception
These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [CONTROL CHANGE ECHO] is ON.
If [TABLE] is selected, these messages are received when [CONTROL CHANGE Rx] is ON and [Rx CH] matches, and will control parameters according to the settings of the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST]. For the parameters that can be
assigned, refer to “ Parameters That Can Be Assigned to Control Changes ”
).
If [NRPN] is selected, these messages are received when [CONTROL CHANGE Rx] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches; the four messages NRPN control number (62h,
63h) and DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are used to control the specified parameter.
Transmission
If [TABLE] is selected, and if [CONTROL CHANGE Tx] is ON when you operate a parameter that is assigned in the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST], these messages will be transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. For the parameters that can be assigned, refer to “
Parameters That Can Be Assigned to Control Changes ”
).
If [NRPN] is selected, and if [CONTROL CHANGE Tx] is ON when you operate a specified parameter, the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and
DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel.
For the parameters that can be assigned, refer to “
” (
).
CONTROL CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to QL Editor because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match.
(PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used.)
CONTROL CHANGE numbers 0 and 32 are for selecting banks.
STATUS
DATA
STATUS
DATA
1011nnnn Bn Control change
00 Control number (00)
0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127)
1011nnnn Bn Control change
20 Control number (32)
0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127)
If [TABLE] is selected
STATUS
DATA
1011nnnn Bn Control change
0nnnnnnn nn Control number (1-5, 7-31, 33-37, 38-95,
102-119) *
0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127)
* Numbers 0, 32, and 96–01 cannot be used.
* Control number 6, 38 can be used.
Equation for converting a Control Value to parameter data paramSteps = paramMax – paramMin + 1; add mod curValue
= paramWidth / paramSteps;
= paramWidth – add * paramSteps;
= paramSteps * add + mod / 2;
(1) If the assigned parameter has fewer than 128 steps paramWidth = 128; rxValue = Control value;
(2) If the assigned parameter has 128 or more but less than 16,384 steps paramWidth = 16384;
(2-1) When High and Low data is received rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + Control value(Low);
(2-2) When only Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(Low);
(2-3) When only High data is received rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + (curValue & 127);
(3) If the assigned parameter has 16,384 or more but less than 2,097,152 steps paramWidth = 2097152;
(3-1) When High, Middle, and Low data is received rxValue = Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control value(Low);
(3-2) When only Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 2097024) + Control value(Low);
(3-3) When only Middle data is received rxValue = (curValue & 2080895) + Control value(Middle) * 128;
(3-4) When only High data is received rxValue = (curValue & 16383) + Control value(High) * 16384;
(3-5) When only Middle and Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 2080768) + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control value(Low);
(3-6) When only High and Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Low);
(3-7) When only High and Middle data is received rxValue = (curValue & 127) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128; if ( rxValue > paramWidth) rxValue = paramWidth; param = ( rxValue – mod / 2) / add;
If [NRPN] is selected
STATUS
DATA
STATUS
DATA
STATUS
1011nnnn Bn Control change
01100010 62 NRPN LSB
0vvvvvvv vv Parameter number LSB
1011nnnn Bn Control change *
01100011 63 NRPN MSB
0vvvvvvv vv Parameter number MSB
1011nnnn Bn Control change *
00000110 06 Data entry MSB DATA
STATUS
0vvvvvvv vv Parameter data MSB
1011nnnn Bn Control change *
DATA 00100110 26 Data entry LSB
0vvvvvvv vv Parameter data LSB
* The STATUS byte of the second and subsequent messages need not be added during transmission.
Reception must occur correctly whether or not the status byte is omitted.
1.4 PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn)
Reception
If [PROGRAM CHANGE ECHO] is ON, bank select messages will also be echoed from MIDI OUT.
If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are received if [PROGRAM CHANGE Rx] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches. However if [OMNI] is ON, these messages are received regardless of the channel. When these messages are received, scene memory, effect library and premium rack library are recalled according to the settings of the [PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT LIST].
Transmission
If [PROGRAM CHANGE Tx] is ON, these messages are transmitted according to the [PROGRAM CHANGE Table] settings when scene memory, effect library and premium rack library are recalled.
If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel.
If the recalled scene memory, effect library and premium rack library have been assigned to more than one PROGRAM NUMBER, the lowest-numbered
PROGRAM NUMBER for each MIDI channel will be transmitted.
PROGRAM CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to QL Editor because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match.
(PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used.)
You can choose either MULTI MIDI CH or SINGLE CH.
If SINGLE is selected
You can choose the Rx CH, OMNI CH, and Tx CH.
You can choose whether a bank select message will be added.
A bank of up to 16 can be specified.
If MULTI is selected
The Rx and Tx channels will be the same.
The assignment table will use the settings for each MIDI channel. Bank select messages will not be added.
You can make settings for up to sixteen MIDI channels.
STATUS
DATA
1100nnnn Cn Program change
0nnnnnnn nn Program number (0-127)
37 Data List
2 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE
2.1 SONG SELECT (F3)
Reception
Select the track number shown in the TITLE LIST screen of the USB memory recorder.
STATUS 11110011 F3 Song select
Song number 0sssssss ss Song number (0-127)
2.2 TIMING CLOCK (F8)
Reception
This message is used to control effects. This message is transmitted twenty-four times per quarter note.
Echoing of this message depends on the OTHER item in the ECHO settings.
STATUS 11111000 F8 Timing clock
2.3 ACTIVE SENSING (FE)
Reception
Once this message has been received, MIDI communication will be initialized (e.g.,
Running Status will be cleared) if no message is received for an interval of 400 ms.
This message is not subject to echoing.
STATUS 11111110 FE Active sensing
2.4 SYSTEM RESET (FF)
Reception
When this message is received, MIDI communication will be initialized (e.g.,
Running Status will be cleared).
This message is not subject to echoing.
STATUS 11111111 FF System reset
3 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE
3.1 MMC
< MMC STOP >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and stops.
STATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message
ID No.
01111111 7F Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND
EOX
00000110 06 Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
00000001 01 Stop(MCS)
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
< MMC PLAY >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and starts playback.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01111111 7F Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND 00000110 06 Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
EOX
00000010 02 Play(MCS)
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
< MMC DEFERED PLAY >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and starts playback.
STATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message
ID No.
01111111 7F Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND
EOX
00000110 06 Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
00000011 03 Deferred Play(MCS)
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
< MMC RECORD STROBE >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message, and if stopped, starts recording.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01111111 7F Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND 00000110 06 Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
EOX
00000110 06 Record strobe
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
< MMC PAUSE >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message, and if playing, pauses.
STATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message
ID No.
01111111 7F Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND
EOX
00000110 06 Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
00001001 09 Pause(MCS)
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
3.2 BULK DUMP
This message is used to send or receive the contents of various memories stored within the unit.
The basic format is as follows.
Command
F0 43 0n 3E cc cc 19 mm ... mm dd dd ... ee F7 rx/tx
F0 43 2n 3E 19 mm ... mm dd dd F7 rx
Function rx/tx BULK DUMP DATA
BULK DUMP REQUEST
The QL series console uses the following data types for a bulk dump.
Module Name(mm)
SCENE LIB
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
8BandPEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Premium Effect
Portico5033 LIB
Portico5043 LIB
Portico5045 LIB
“SCENE___”
“INEQ____”
“OUTEQ___”
“DYNA____”
“INCHNNL_”
“OUTCHNNL”
“GEQ_____”
“8PEQ____”
“EFFECT__”
“PEFFECT_”
“P5033___”
“P5043___”
“P5045____”
Data Number(dd)
*1) *15) *16) *17)
*2) *7) *8)
*3) *9) *10) *11)
*4) *7) *8) *9) *10) *11) *22) *23)
*18) *7) *8)
*19) *9) *10) *11)
*5) *12)
*13)
*6) *14)
*20)
*21)
*21)
*21)
38
Module Name(mm)
U76 LIB
Opt-2A LIB
EQP-1A LIB
DynamicEQ LIB
Buss Comp 369 LIB
MBC4 LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
Mixer Setup
Outport Setup
Monitor Setup
MIDI Setup
Lib Number
Program Change Table
Control Change Table
Preference (Current)
Preference (Admin)
Preference (Guest)
User Defined Keys (Current)
User Defined Keys (Admin)
User Defined Keys (Guest)
Custom Fader Bank (Current)
Custom Fader Bank (Admin)
Custom Fader Bank (Guest)
User Level (Current)
User Level (Guest)
“U76_____”
“OPT-2A__”
“EQ-1A___”
“DYNAEQ__”
“BSCMP369”
“MBC4____”
“DANTEIN_”
“MIXERSET”
“OUT_PORT”
“MONITOR_”
“MIDI_SET”
“LIB_NUM_”
“PRGMCHG_”
“CTRLCHG_”
“PREF_CUR”
“PREF_ADM”
“PREF_GST”
“UDEF_CUR”
“UDEF_ADM”
“UDEF_GST”
“CFAD_CUR”
“CFAD_ADM”
“CFAD_GST”
“UKEY_CUR”
“UKEY_GST”
*1) 0–300 Scene Number (0 Request Only),
*2) 1–199 Input EQ Library Number (1–40 Request Only)
*3) 1–199 Output EQ Library Number (1–3 Request Only)
*4) 1–199 Dynamics Library Number (1–41 Request Only)
*5) 0–199 GEQ Library Number (0 Request Only)
*6) 1–199 Effect Library Number (1–27 Request Only)
*7) 512–583 Input 1-64,
*8) 584–599 STIN 1L-8R,
*9) 768–791 MIX 1-16,
*10) 1024–1031 MATRIX 1-8,
*11) 1280–1282 STEREO L-C,
*12) 512–530 GEQ 1–19, 531–538 EFFECT GEQ 1–8,
*13) 0-199 8BandPEQ Library Number (0 Request Only)
*14) 512–519 EFFECT 1–8,
*15) 512 Current Data,
*16) 768 Current Data with Recall Safe,
*17) 8192 Store Undo Data, 8193 Recall Undo Data, 8194 Clear Undo Data,
*18) 0–199 Input CH Library Number (0 Request Only),
*19) 0–199 Output CH Library Number (0 Request Only),
*20) 512–527 Premium Rack 1A, 1B, 2A, ... 8A, 8B
*21) 0–100 Each Premium Effect Library Number (0 Request Only)
*22) 1536–1607 Input 1–64 (for Dynamics2),
*23) 1608–1623 STIN 1L–8R (for Dunamics2),
*24) 0-10 Dante Input Patch Library Number (0 Request Only)
Data Number(dd)
*21)
*21)
*21)
*21)
*21)
*21)
*24)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder
Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder
Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Data is lost when you write to the preset library.
The unique header (Model ID) identifies whether the device is a QL series.
To calculate the check sum, add the bytes starting with the byte after BYTE
COUNT (LOW) and ending with the byte before CHECK SUM, take the binary complement, and set bit 7 to 0.
CHECK SUM = (-sum)&0x7F
Bulk Dumps can be received at any time, and can be transmitted at any time when a Bulk Dump Request is received.
A Bulk Dump is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel in response to a Bulk Dump
Request.
Data List
In the data portion, seven words of 8-bit data are converted into eight words of
7-bit data.
[Conversion from actual data to bulk data] d[0-6]: actual data b[0-7]: bulk data b[0] = 0; for( I=0; I<7; I++){ if( d[I]&0x80){ b[0] |= 1<<(6-I);
} b[I+1] = d[I]&0x7F;
}
[Recovery from bulk data to actual data] d[0-6]: actual data b[0-7]: bulk data for( I=0; I<7; I++){ b[0] <<= 1; d[I] = b[I+1]+(0x80&b[0]);
}
3.3 PARAMETER CHANGE
Reception
This message is echoed if [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is ON.
This message is received if [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is ON and [Rx CH] matches the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. When a PARAMETER CHANGE is received, the specified parameter will be controlled. When a PARAMETER
REQUEST is received, the current value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a PARAMETER CHANGE with its Device Number as the [Rx CH].
Transmission
If [PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is ON, and you edit a parameter for which
CONTROL CHANGE transmission has not been enabled, a PARAMETER CHANGE will be transmitted with the [Tx CH] as its device number.
In response to a PARAMETER REQUEST, a PARAMETER CHANGE will be transmitted with [Rx CH] as its device number.
Command
F0 43 1n 3E 19 ... F7
RARAMETER CHANGE
F0 43 3n 3E 19 ... F7
PARAMETER REQUEST rx/tx Function rx/tx QL series native parameter change rx/tx QL series native parameter request
4 PARAMETER CHANGE details
4.1 CURRENT SCENE, SETUP, BACKUP, USER SETUP
4.1.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
The corresponding parameter will be changed immediately the data is received.
Transmission
Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when [PARAMETER
CHANGE Tx] is on and the parameter is not registered on the [CONTROL
CHANGE EVENT LIST].
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
EOX
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
00111110 3E Digital mixer
00011001 19 QL Series
DATA Category 0ccccccc cc
DATA 0eeeeeee eh Element no High.
0eeeeeee el Element no Low.
0iiiiiii ih Index no High.
0iiiiiii il Index no Low.
0ccccccc ch Channel no High.
0ccccccc cl Channel no Low.
0ddddddd dd Data
: :
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
4.1.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
The corresponding parameter will be changed via PARAMETER CHANGE immediately the data is received.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
00111110 3E Digital mixer
00011001 19 QL Series
DATA Category 0ccccccc cc
DATA 0eeeeeee eh Element no High.
0eeeeeee el Element no Low.
0iiiiiii ih Index no High.
EOX
0iiiiiii il Index no Low.
0ccccccc ch Channel no High.
0ccccccc cl Channel no Low.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
39
4.1.3 Data category
Data Category
0x01 00000001
0x41 01000001
Name
Current Scene /Setup/Backup/
User Setup Data
Premium Rack Data
4.2 FUNCTION CALL – LIBRARY STORE, RECALL –
4.2.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
The corresponding parameter will be changed immediately the data is received.
Transmission
Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] (MIDI CH) in [Tx CH] when
[PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is on.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
00111110 3E Digital mixer GROUP ID
MODEL ID 00011001 19 QL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE)
01101001 "i" (ASCII CODE)
01100010 "b" (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
DATA
EOX
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0nnnnnnn nh Number High
0nnnnnnn nl Number Low
0ccccccc ch Channel High
0ccccccc cl Channel Low
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
4.2.2 Function Name
Function Name
Store
Recall
Unknown Factor Store
Unknown Factor Recall
Store Undo (only Score)
Recall Undo (only Scene)
“LibStr__”
“LibRcl__”
“LibUnStr”
“LibUnRcl”
“LibStrUd”
“LibRclUd”
Data List
4.2.3 Module Name
Module Name
Scene
Input EQ
Output EQ
Dynamics
Input CH
Output CH
GEQ
8BandPEQ
Effect
Portico5033
Portico5043
Portico5045
U76
Opt-2A
EQP-1A
“SCENE___”
“INEQ____”
“OUTEQ___”
“DYNA____”
“INCHNNL_”
“OUTCHNNL”
“GEQ_____”
“8PEQ____”
“EFFECT__”
“P5033___”
“P5043___”
“P5045____”
“U76_____”
“OPT-2A__”
“EQ-1A___”
Dynamic EQ
Buss Comp 369
“DYNAEQ__”
“BSCMP369”
MBC4 “MBC4____”
Dante Input Patch “DANTEIN_”
Function
“LibStr__”
“LibUnStr”
“LibRcl__”
SCENE
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
8BandPEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Premium Effect LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
SCENE
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
8BandPEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Premium Effect LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
SCENE
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
1-199
1-199
1-199
0-199
0-199
0-199
1-199
1-199
1-199
1-199
28-199
1-100
1-10
0-300
1-199
28-199
1-100
1-10
1-300
41-199
4-199
42-199
Number
1-300
41-199
4-199
42-199
1-199
1-199
1-199 tx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx tx tx tx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx
0
0
0
0
*6)
*7)
*9)
*5)
*5)
Channel*1)
*1)
*2) *3) *4)
*1) *2) *3) *4) *8)
*1)
*2) *3) *4)
*6)
0
0
0
*5)
0
0
0
0
*1)
*2) *3) *4)
*1) *2) *3) *4) *8)
*1)
*2) *3) *4)
*6)
Function
8BandPEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Premium Effect LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
“LibUnRcl” SCENE
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
8BandPEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Premium Effect LIB
“LibStrUd”
Dante Input Patch LIB
SCENE
“LibRclUd” SCENE
0-10
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Number
1-199
1-199
0-100
0
0
0
0
0
*6)
*7)
Channel*1)
*9)
*5)
*5)
*1)
*6)
*6)
*7)
*9)
*2) *3) *4)
*1) *2) *3) *4) *8)
*1)
*2) *3) *4)
*5)
0
0
*1) 0: CH1
72: ST IN 1L
*2) 256: MIX 1
*3) 512: MATRIX 1
– 63: CH64
– 79: ST IN 4R
– 271: MIX 16
– 519: MATRIX 8
*4) 1024: STEREO L – 1026: STEREO C
*5) 512: will be used if the recalling or storing data is only one.
*6) 0: GEQ1A, 1: GEQ1B, 2: GEQ2A, ... 36: GEQ19A, 37:GEQ19B
38: EFFECT GEQ1A, 39: EFFECT GEQ1B,
40: EFFECT GEQ2A, ... 52: EFFECT GEQ8A, 53: EFFECT GEQ8B
*7) 0: Effect1- 7: Effect8
*8) 1280: CH1
1352: ST IN 1L
–
–
1343: CH64
1367: ST IN 8R
*9) 0: Premium Rack 1A, 1: Premium Rack 1B,
2: Premium Rack 2A, ... 14: Premium Rack 8A, 15: Premium Rack 8B tx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx tx
4.3 FUNCTION CALL – LIBRARY EDIT –
4.3.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
The corresponding memory/library will be changed immediately the data is received.
Transmission
PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request.
If [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
00111110 3E Digital mixer GROUP ID
MODEL ID 00011001 19 QL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE)
01101001 "i" (ASCII CODE)
01100010 "b" (ASCII CODE)
40
MODULE NAME
DATA
EOX
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0sssssss sh number -source start High
0sssssss sl number -source start Low
0eeeeeee eh number -source end High
0eeeeeee el number -source end Low
0ddddddd dh number -destination start High
0ddddddd dl number -destination to start Low
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
4.3.2 Function Name
Function Name
Copy
Paste
Clear
Cut
Insert
Edit Undo
“LibCpy__”
“LibPst__”
“LibClr__”
“LibCut__”
“LibIns__”
“LibEdtUd”
4.3.3 Module Name
Module Name
SCENE LIB
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
8BandPEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Portico5033 LIB
Portico5043 LIB
Portico5045 LIB
U76 LIB
Opt-2A LIB
EQP-1A LIB
DynamicEQ LIB
Buss Comp 369 LIB
MBC4 LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
“SCENE___”
“INEQ____”
“OUTEQ___”
“DYNA____”
“INCHNNL_”
“OUTCHNNL”
“GEQ_____”
“8PEQ____”
“EFFECT__”
“P5033___”
“P5043___”
“P5045____”
“U76_____”
“OPT-2A__”
“EQ-1A___”
“DYNAEQ__”
“BSCMP369”
“MBC4____”
“DANTEIN_”
Function
Copy, Paste, Clear, Cut, Insert, EditUndo
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Data List
4.4 FUNCTION CALL – LIBRARY ATTRIBUTE –
4.4.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
The corresponding memory/library title will be changed immediately the data is received.
Transmission
PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request.
If [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
00111110 3E Digital mixer GROUP ID
MODEL ID 00011001 19 QL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE)
01101001 "i" (ASCII CODE)
01100010 "b" (ASCII CODE)
01000001 "A" (ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME
01110100 "t" (ASCII CODE)
01110010 "r" (ASCII CODE)
01100010 "b" (ASCII CODE)
01110100 "t" (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
DATA
EOX
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0nnnnnnn nh Scene/Library number High
0nnnnnnn nl Scene/Library number Low
0eeeeeee eh Element High
0eeeeeee el Element Low
0iiiiiii ih Index High
0iiiiiii il Index Low
0ccccccc ch Channel High
0ccccccc cl Channel Low
0000dddd dd Data28~31bit
0ddddddd dd Data21~27bit
0ddddddd dd Data14~20bit
0ddddddd dd Data7~13bit
0ddddddd dd Data0~6bit
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
4.4.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
Reception
The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number [Rx CH] immediately the data is received.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
00111110 3E Digital mixer GROUP ID
MODEL ID 00011001 19 QL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE)
01101001 "i" (ASCII CODE)
01100010 "b" (ASCII CODE)
01000001 "A" (ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME
01110100 "t" (ASCII CODE)
01110010 "r" (ASCII CODE)
01100010 "b" (ASCII CODE)
01110100 "t" (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
DATA
EOX
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0nnnnnnn nh Scene/Library number High
0nnnnnnn nl Scene/Library number Low
0eeeeeee eh Element High
0eeeeeee el Element Low
0iiiiiii ih Index High
0iiiiiii il Index Low
0ccccccc ch Channel High
0ccccccc cl Channel Low
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
4.4.3 Module Name
Module Name
SCENE LIB
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
8BandPEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Portico5033 LIB
Portico5043 LIB
Portico5045 LIB
U76 LIB
Opt-2A LIB
“SCENE___”
“INEQ____”
“OUTEQ___”
“DYNA____”
“INCHNNL_”
“OUTCHNNL”
“GEQ_____”
“8PEQ____”
“EFFECT__”
“P5033___”
“P5043___”
“P5045____”
“U76_____”
“OPT-2A__”
Number
0-300 (0:response only)
1-200 (1-40:response only)
1-200 (1-3:response only)
1-200 (1-41:response only)
0-200 (0:response only)
0-200 (0:response only)
0-200 (0:response only)
0-199 (0:response only)
1-200 (1-27:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
41
Module Name
EQP-1A LIB
DynamicEQ LIB
Buss Comp 369 LIB
MBC4 LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
“EQ-1A___”
“DYNAEQ__”
“BSCMP369”
“MBC4____”
“DANTEIN_”
Number
0-100 (0:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
0-10 (0:response only)
4.5 EXIST LIBRARY RANGE
4.5.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Transmission
When QL series receives Library Exist request command from outside, the answer will be sent back with the following Parameter change.
This packet shows smallest library number range that exists and not read only.
Top number is requested number or more.
- Example -
SCENE is stored 5,6,7,10,100 and 101
Request Number: 0
Data : Valid, Top Number : 5, End Number 7
Request Number: 8
Data : Valid, Top Number : 10, End Number 10
Request Number: 11
Data : Valid, Top Number : 100, End Number 101
Request Number: 102
Data : Invalid, Top Number : 0, End Number 0
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E Digital mixer
00011001 19 QL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME
01101001 "i" (ASCII CODE)
01100010 "b" (ASCII CODE)
01000101 "E" (ASCII CODE)
01111000 "x" (ASCII CODE)
01101001 "i" (ASCII CODE)
01110011 "s" (ASCII CODE)
01110100 "t" (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
DATA
EOX
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0sssssss ss Data Status ( 0:Invalid data,1:Valid Data )
0nnnnnnn nh Request Number High
0nnnnnnn nl Request Number Low
0ttttttt th Top Number High
0ttttttt tl Top Number Low
0eeeeeee eh End Number High
0eeeeeee el End Number Low
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
Data List
4.5.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
Reception
The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number [Rx CH] immediately the data is received.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E Digital mixer
00011001 19 QL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME
01101001 "i" (ASCII CODE)
01100010 "b" (ASCII CODE)
01000101 "E" (ASCII CODE)
01111000 "x" (ASCII CODE)
01101001 "i" (ASCII CODE)
01110011 "s" (ASCII CODE)
01110100 "t" (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
DATA
EOX
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0nnnnnnn nh Request Number High
0nnnnnnn nl Request Number Low
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
4.5.3 Module Name
Module Name
SCENE LIB
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
8BandPEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Portico5033 LIB
Portico5043 LIB
Portico5045 LIB
U76 LIB
Opt-2A LIB
EQP-1A LIB
DynamicEQ LIB
Buss Comp 369 LIB
MBC4 LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
“SCENE___”
“INEQ____”
“OUTEQ___”
“DYNA____”
“INCHNNL_”
“OUTCHNL”
“GEQ_____”
“8PEQ____”
“EFFECT__”
“P5033___”
“P5043___”
“P5045____”
“U76_____”
“OPT-2A__”
“EQ-1A___”
“DYNAEQ__”
“BSCMP369”
“MBC4____”
“DANTEIN_”
1-199
55-200
1–100
1–100
1-100
1–100
1–100
1–100
Number
1-300
41-200
4-200
42-200
1-200
1-200
1-200
1–100
1-100
1-100
1-10
4.6 FUNCTION CALL – COLLECTION STORE –
4.6.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Transmission
Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when [PARAMETER
CHANGE Tx] is on.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E Digital mixer
00011001 19 QL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 "C" (ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME
01101001 "o" (ASCII CODE)
01100010 "l" (ASCII CODE)
01010101 "U" (ASCII CODE)
01101110 "n" (ASCII CODE)
01010011 "S" (ASCII CODE)
01110100 "t" (ASCII CODE)
01110010 "r" (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
DATA
EOX
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0nnnnnnn nh Number High
0nnnnnnn nl Number Low
0ccccccc ch Channel High
0ccccccc cl Channel Low
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
4.6.2 Function Name
Function
“ColUnStr” Setup
User Defined Key
Program Change
Control Change
Number
0
0
0
0 tx/rx tx tx tx tx
4.6.3 Module Name
Module Name
Mixer Setting
Outport Setting
Monitor Setting
MIDI Setting
Lib Number
Program Change Table
Control Change Table
Preference (Current)
Preference (Admin)
Preference (Guest)
User Defined Keys (Current)
“MIXERSET”
“OUT_PORT”
“MONITOR_”
“MIDI_SET”
“LIB_NUM_”
“PRGMCHG_”
“CTRLCHG_”
“PREF_CUR”
“PREF_ADM”
“PREF_GST”
“UDEF_CUR”
Module Name
User Defined Keys (Admin)
User Defined Keys (Guest)
Custom Fader Bank (Current)
Custom Fader Bank (Admin)
Custom Fader Bank (Guest)
User Level (Current)
User Level (Guest)
“UDEF_ADM”
“UDEF_GST”
“CFAD_CUR”
“CFAD_ADM”
“CFAD_GST”
“UKEY_CUR”
“UKEY_GST”
4.7 FUNCTION CALL – MODULE –
4.7.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
The corresponding effect will function immediately the data is received
(depending on the effect type).
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
00111110 3E Digital mixer GROUP ID
MODEL ID 00011001 19 QL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001101 "M"
01101111 "o"
MODULE NAME
DATA
EOX
01100100 "d"
01000110 "F"
01111000 "x"
01010100 "T"
01110010 "r"
01100111 "g"
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0eeeeeee ee Effect number (0:RACK1 - 7:RACK8)
0ppppppp pp Release:0, Press:1
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
4.7.2 Module Name
Module Name
Freeze Play button
Freeze Record button
“FRZPLAY_”
“FRZREC__”
Number
0:RACK1, 2:RACK3, 4:RACK5, 6:RACK7
0:RACK1, 2:RACK3, 4:RACK5, 6:RACK7
This will not work when the Effect Type is different.
42 Data List
4.8 FUNCTION CALL – CHANNEL –
4.8.1 Pair ON/OFF Trigger Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E Digital mixer
00011001 19 QL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01000011 "C"
01101000 "h"
01101100 "l"
01010000 "P"
01101001 "i"
MODULE NAME
DATA
EOX
01110010 "r"
01000011 "C"
01110000 "p"
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE)
0sssssss sh Source Channel Number H *1)
0sssssss sl Source Channel Number L *1)
0ddddddd dh Destination Channel Number H *1)
0ddddddd dl Destination Channel Number L *1)
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
4.8.2 Module Name
Module Name
Pair On (with Copy)
Pair On (with Reset Both)
Pair Off
“PAIRONCP”
“PAIRONRS”
“PAIROFF_”
*1) 0 : CH1 – 63: CH64
256 : MIX 1 – 271: MIX 16
512 : MATRIX 1 – 519: MATRIX 8
4.9 LEVEL METER DATA
4.9.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
When transmission is enabled by receiving Request for Level Meter, the corresponding metering data will be sent in every 50 millisecond for 10 seconds.
If metering information is expected to be continuously sent, Request is needed to be sent in at least every 10 seconds.
Reception
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
Transmission
When transmission is enabled by receiving Request, the corresponding metering data will be sent in constant interval for a given period of time (The interval and time will vary depending on devices).
When rebooted or port setting is changed, the transmission will be disabled.
When [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E Digital mixer
00011001 19 QL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00100001 21 REMOTE LEVEL METER
DATA 0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS UL
EOX
0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS LU
0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS LL
0ddddddd dd Data1
: :
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
4.9.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
The corresponding metering data will be sent via [Rx CH] in constant interval for a given period of time (The interval and time will vary depending on devices).
When Address UL = 0x7F is received, all metering data transmission will be immediately stopped [disabled].
Transmission
When [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
00111110 3E Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00011001 19 QL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00100001 21 REMOTE LEVEL METER
DATA 0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS UL
0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS LU
EOX
0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS LL
0ccccccc ch Count H
0ccccccc cl Count L
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
43 Data List
Input/Output Characteristics
Analog input characteristics
Input
Connectors
INPUT 1-32
*6
Gain
+66dB
–6dB
Input
Impedance
Source
Impedance
Sensitivity
*1
7.5 kΩ
50-600 Ω
Mics &
600 Ω Lines
–82dBu
(61.6μV)
–10dBu
(245mV)
Input Level
Defined Level
–62dBu
(0.616mV)
+10dBu
(2.45V)
Maximum
Non-Clip Level
–42dBu
(6.16mV)
+30dBu
(24.5V)
Connector
XLR-3-31 type
(Balanced)
*2
*1. The sensitivity is the input level required for output at +4dBu (1.23V) or at the defined level when all the faders and level controllers are set to the maximum value.
*2. XLR-3-31 connectors are balanced jacks (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).
*3. 0dBu=0.775 Vms for all specifications.
*4. All the AD converters use 24-bit linear/128-times oversampling.
*5. The INPUT connectors have +48V DC (phantom power) jacks, each of which can be turned on/off individually from the console software.
*6. QL1: INPUT1-16
Analog output characteristics
Output
Connectors
OMNI OUT
1-16
*7
Output
Impedance
75 Ω
Load
Impedance
600 Ω Lines
8 Ω Phones
40 Ω Phones
Maximum
Output
Level SW
*5
+24dB
(default)
+18dB
–
–
Output Level
Defined Level
Maximum
Non-Clip
Level
+4dBu
(1.23V)
–2dBu
(616mV)
75mW
*6
+24dBu
(12.3V)
+18dBu
(6.16V)
150mW
65mW
*6 150mW
Connector
XLR-3-32 type
(Balanced)
*1
PHONES 15 Ω
Stereo Phone Jack
(TRS)
(Unbalanced)
*2
*1. XLR-3-32 connectors are balanced jacks (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).
*2. The PHONES connectors for stereo headphones are balanced jacks (Tip=LEFT,
Ring=RIGHT, Sleeve= GND).
*3. 0 dBu=0.775 Vms for all specifications.
*4. All the DA converters use 24-bit linear/128-times oversampling.
*5. The console has an internal switch for toggling the maximum output level.
*6. This is a value measured with the PHONES LEVEL knob set to 10 dB below the maximum position.
*7. QL1: OMNI OUT 1-8
Digital input/output characteristics
Connectors
Primary/
Secondary
Format
Dante
Data
Length
24bit or
32bit
Level
1000Base-T
*1. QL1: 32ch Input/32ch Output@48kHz
Audio
64ch Input/64ch Output
@48kHz
*1
Connector etherCON CAT5e
Digital output characteristics
Connectors Format
Data
Length
24 bit
Level Connector
DIGITAL OUT
*1 AES/EBU AES/EBU Professional Use RS422 XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)
*2
*1. Channel Status of DIGITAL OUT
Byte Bit Field Name Fixed/Variable Data Description
0
0
1
2-4
5
6-7
Block Format
Mode
Emphasis
Fs Lock
Sampling Frequency fixed variable
0x0
0x3
0x2
0x1
1
0
0x4
0 professional use audio off lock others
32 kHz
44.1 kHz
48 kHz
1
2
0-3
4-7
0-2
3-7
Channel Mode
Users Bit Management
Use of AUX
Source fixed fixed
0x1
0x0
0x1
0x00
3
4
0-7 Multi Channel
0-1 Digital Audio Reference Signal
2 -
3-6 Sampling Frequency fixed fixed
0x00
0x0
0
0x0 variable
7 Sampling Frequency Scan Flag fixed 0
*2. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced. (1= GND, 2= HOT, 3= COLD)
2ch mode
-
24 bits Audio Data
-
-
others
-
44 Data List
I/O SLOT (1-2) characteristics
A Mini-YGDAI card can be inserted into slots 1-2.
Only slot 1 supports serial interfaces.
Control I/O characteristics
Connectors
MIDI
WORD CLOCK
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
GPI (5IN/5OUT)
Format
MIDI
MIDI
–
–
–
Level
–
–
TTL/75 Ω terminated
TTL/75 Ω
–
Connector
DIN Connector 5P
DIN Connector 5P
BNC Connector
BNC Connector
D Sub Connector 15P
(Female)
*1
RJ-45 NETWORK
LAMP
(QL5: x2, QL1: x1)
USB HOST
IEEE802.3
–
10BASE-T/100Base-TX
0V-12V XLR-4-31 type
*2
USB 2.0
– USB A Connector (Female)
*1. Input pin: TTL level, w/ internal pull-up (47kΩ)
Output pin: Open drain output (Vmax=12V, maximum sink current/pin=75mA)
Power supply pin: Output voltage Vp=5V, Max. output current Imax=300mA
*2. 4 pin=+12V, 3 pin=GND, Lamp nominal power: 5W, Brightness (voltage) can be adjusted from the software.
Electrical Characteristics
All faders are nominal when measured. Output impedance of signal generator: 150 ohms
Frequency Response.
Input
INPUT 1-32
*1
Output
OMNI OUT 1-16
*2
PHONES
*1. QL1: INPUT 1-16
*2. QL1: OMNI OUT 1-8
RL
600 Ω
8 Ω
Fs= 48 kHz @20 Hz–20 kHz, referenced to the nominal output level @1 kHz
Conditions
GAIN: +66dB
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
–1.5
0.0 0.5
–3.0 0.0 0.5
dB
Total Harmonic Distortion. Fs= 48 kHz
Input
INPUT 1-32
*1
Internal OSC
Output
OMNI OUT 1-16
*2
OMNI OUT 1-16
*2
PHONES
RL
600 Ω
Conditions
+4 dBu @20 Hz–20 kHz, GAIN:
+66dB
+4 dBu @20 Hz–20 kHz, GAIN: –6dB
600 Ω Full Scale Output @1 kHz
8 Ω
Full Scale Output @1 kHz, PHONES
Level Control: Max.
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
*1. QL1: INPUT 1-16
*2. QL1: OMNI OUT 1-8
*3. Total Harmonic Distortion is measured with a 18 dB/octave filter @80 kHz
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.2
%
Hum & Noise.
Input
INPUT 1-32
*1
All INPUTs
—
—
Output
OMNI OUT 1-16
*2
OMNI OUT 1-16
*2
OMNI OUT 1-16
*2
PHONES
Fs= 48 kHz, EIN= Equivalent Input Noise
RL Conditions
Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: +66dB
Main fader at nominal level and one
Ch fader at nominal level.
600 Ω
600 Ω
Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: –6dB
Main fader at nominal level and one
Ch fader at nominal level.
Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: –6dB
Main fader at nominal level and all
INPUT 1-32
*1
in faders at nominal level.
600 Ω Residual Output Noise, ST Main Off
8 Ω
Residual Output Noise, PHONES
Level Control Min.
*1. QL1: INPUT 1-16
*2. QL1: OMNI OUT 1-8
*3. Hum & Noise are measured with A-weight filter.
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
–128
EIN
–62
–84 –80
QL5:
–64
QL1:
–67 dBu
–88
–88
45 Data List
Dynamic Range. Fs= 48 kHz
Input
INPUT 1-32
*1
—
Output
OMNI OUT 1-16
*2
OMNI OUT 1-16
*2
RL Conditions
600 Ω AD + DA, GAIN: –6dB
600 Ω DA Converter
*1. QL1: INPUT 1-16
*2. QL1: OMNI OUT 1-8
*3. Dynamic Range are measured with A-weight filter.
Sampling Frequency
Parameter
External Clock
Internal Clock
Frequency
Range
Jitter of PLL
Frequency
Accuracy
Jitter
Conditions
Fs= 44.1 kHz
Fs= 45.9375 kHz (44.1 kHz +4.1667%)
Fs= 44.1441 kHz (44.1 kHz +0.1%)
Fs= 44.0559 kHz (44.1 kHz –0.1%)
Fs= 42.336 kHz (44.1 kHz –4.0%)
Fs= 48 kHz
Fs= 50 kHz (48 kHz +4.1667%)
Fs= 48.048 kHz (48 kHz +0.1%)
Fs= 47.952 kHz (48 kHz –0.1%)
Fs= 46.080 kHz (48 kHz –4.0%)
DIGITAL IN Fs= 44.1 kHz
DIGITAL IN Fs= 48 kHz
Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz
Word Clock : Int 48 kHz
Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz
Word Clock : Int 48 kHz
Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz
Word Clock : Int 48 kHz
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
–200
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
108 dB
112 dB
+200 ppm
–50
44.1
48
10 ns kHz
+50
4.429
4.069
ppm ns
46 Data List
Mixer Basic Parameters
Libraries
Name
Scene Memory
Input CH Library
Output CH Library
Input EQ Library
Output EQ Library
Dynamics Library
Effect Library
GEQ Library
Premium Rack Library
Portico5033
Portico5043
Portico5045
U76
Opt-2A
EQ-1A
Dynamic EQ
Buss Comp 369
MBC4
Dante Input Patch Library
Number
Preset 1 + User 300
Preset 1 + User 199
Preset 1 + User 199
Preset 40 + User 159
Preset 3 + User 196
Preset 41 + User 158
Preset 27 + User 172
Preset 1 + User 199
Preset 1 + User 199
Preset 1 + User 10
200
11
Input Function
Function
Phase
Digital Gain
L, R-MONO
HPF
Attenuator
4 Band
Equalizer
Insert
Direct Out
Dynamics 1
Parameter
Normal/Reverse
–96 dB to +24 dB
L-MONO/R-MONO/LR-MONO/STEREO IN
Slope= –12dB/Oct, –6dB/Oct
Frequency= 20 Hz to 600 Hz
–96 dB to 0 dB
Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Gain= –18 dB to +18 dB
Q= 0.10 to 10.0
Low Shelving (Low Band)
High Shelving, LPF (High Band)
PRECISE, AGGRESSIVE, SMOOTH, LEGACY(Type I/Type II)
Insert Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Direct Out Point: Pre HPF/Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Type: Gate/Ducking/Comp/Expander
Threshold=Gate: –72 dB to 0 dB
Others: –54 dB to 0 dB
Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1
Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec
Hold= 48 kHz: 0.02 msec to 1.96 sec
44.1 kHz: 0.02 msec to 2.13 sec
Total
301
200
200
199
199
199
199
200
Function
Dynamics 1
Dynamics2
Fader
On
Pan/Balance
DCA Group
Mute Group
Mix Send
Matrix Send
LCR Pan
DELAY
Parameter
Decay= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec
44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec
Releace= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec
44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec
Range= Gate: –∞ dB to 0 dB
Ducking: –70 dB to 0 dB
Gain= 0.0 dB to +8dB
Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)
Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out13-16
Ch1-STIN8R (8ch block)
Key In Filter: HPF/LPF/BPF
Type: Comp/De-Esser/Compander H/Compander S
Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB
Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1
Compander: 1:1 to 20:1
Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec
Release= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec
44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec
Gain= –18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to +18 dB
Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)
Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out13-16
Ch1-STIN8R (8ch block)
Width= 1 dB to 90 dB
Frequency= 1.0 KHz to 12.5KHz
TYPE= HPF, BPF
Q= 0.10 to 10.0
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
On/Off
Position L63 to R63
Pan Mode: Pan/Balance
16 Groups
8 Groups
24 sends
Fix/Variable can be set each two mixes (Surround Pan can be set 1 to 6 mixes)
Mix Send Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB (Position L63 to
R63, R63 to F63 for Surround)
8 Sends
Matrix Send Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
CSR= 0% to 100%
0 ms to 1000 msec
Output Function
Function
Attenuator –96 dB to 0 dB
Parameter
47
Function
4 Band
Equalizer
Insert
Dynamics 1
Fader
On
Pan/Balance
DCA Group
Mute Group
Mix to Matrix
Stereo to Matrix
Oscillator
Parameter
Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Gain= –18 dB to +18 dB
Q= 0.10 to 10.0
Low Shelving (Low Band)
High Shelving, LPF (High Band)
PRECISE, AGGRESSIVE, SMOOTH, LEGACY(Type I/Type
II)
Insert Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Type: Comp/Expander/Compander H/Compander S
Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB
Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1
Compander: 1:1 to 20:1
Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec
Release= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec
44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec
Gain= –18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to +18 dB
Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)
Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out13-16/
MTRX1-8/STIN LR/MONO(C) (8ch block)
Width= 1 dB to 90 dB
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
On/Off
Position L63 to R63
16 Groups
8 Groups
Matrix Send Point: Pre Fader/Post On
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
Level= 0 to –96dB (1 dB step)
On/Off= Software control
Output Port
Function
Out Port Delay 0 msec to 1000 msec
Out Port Phase Normal/Reverse
Gain –96 to +24 dB
Parameter
Processor
Function
GEQ
PEQ
Effects
Premium Rack
Parameter
Parameter
31 bands x 8(16) or 15 bands x 16(32) or
16 ch Automixer x1 or 8 ch Automixer x1
(8 bands PEQ + 3 notchs + HPF, LPF) x 16(32) systems
Stereo In/Stereo Out multi effector x 8 systems
Stereo(Dual) In/Stereo(Dual) Out Premium Rack x
8 systems
Data List
Pin Assignment
8 3 2 1
15 11 10 9
GPI
5
6
3
4
7
8
Pin
1
2
Signal Name
GPO1
GPO3
GPO5
GND
+5V
GPI1
GPI3
GPI5
11
12
13
14
15
Pin
9
10
Signal Name
GPO2
GPO4
GND
GND
+5V
GPI2
GPI4
48 Data List
MIDI Implementation Chart
49 Data List
Yamaha Pro Audio global website https://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
Yamaha Downloads https://download.yamaha.com/
© 2014 Yamaha Corporation
Published 10/2022 IP-E0
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project